SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
FIELD SERVICE
The
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Printed in Japan
DD4040PE1-1050
2005.08 Ver.1.0
© 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
is available only for Inch area.
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1
IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-17
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-20
Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1
Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2
bizhub 200/250/350 Main Unit
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 7
Adjustment/Setting...................................................................................................... 111
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 221
Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 273
Duplex Unit/Switchback Unit
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting.......................................................................................................... 7
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 11
Standard Controller
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 5
FK-503
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5
Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 11
Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 161
DF-605
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5
Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 17
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 27
i
PC-102/PC-202
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 13
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 21
PC-402
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 17
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 25
JS-502
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting ......................................................................................................... 5
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5
Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 23
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 35
MT-501
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting ......................................................................................................... 7
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 11
SD-502
General ........................................................................................................................... 1
Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3
Adjustment/Setting ....................................................................................................... 19
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 27
ii
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand
them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,
WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “
DANGER”, “
WARNING”, and
“
CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited
meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury
WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury
CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium
trouble, and property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when servicing
the product.
:Prohibition when servicing
the product.
:Direction when servicing the
product.
General
precaution
Electric hazard
High
temperature
General
prohibition
Do not touch
with wet hand
Do not
disassemble
General
instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with
wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between
relay contacts)
• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.)
Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and
injury.
• Making any modification to the product unless instructed
by KMBT
• Using parts not specified by KMBT
S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet
used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)
to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the
supply.
Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and
kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug according to the following order:
• Black or Brown:
L (line)
• White or Light Blue:
N (neutral)
• Green/Yellow:
PE (earth)
Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
S-3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety
and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
1.
Power Supply
Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock.
• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same
configuration as the plug.
Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to
inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,
grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer
to contact qualified electrician for the installation.
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall
outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall
outlet.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet
securely.
Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,
overheating, and the risk of fire.
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
S-4
kw
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with
this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted
in the inlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or
pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check
whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace
with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each
end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord
may result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords
in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.
Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so
using a too long extension cord may result in fire.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken
up. Fire may result.
2.
Installation Requirements
Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such
as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Stability
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
Inspection before Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any
adjustment not described in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect
the power plugs from the product and options.
When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some
units are still powered even if the POWER switch is
turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burnt.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the external cover
detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damage.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona
unit.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or
fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for
deterioration and sign of leakage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.
• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)
incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has
been disconnected.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply
power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of
loss of eyesight.
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,
optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and
check whether the interlock functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may receive an
electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in
the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
S-9
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled
with care. A risk of fire exists.
• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before
any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully
evaporated.
A risk of fire exists.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take
care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately
wipe it off.
A risk of fire exists.
• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.
Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to
discomfort.
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[4] Used Batteries Precautions
ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
Finland, Sweden
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
S-12
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
[5] Laser Safety
• This is a digital machine certified as a class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of
danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this
manual.
5.1
Internal Laser Radiation
Semiconductor laser
Maximum average radiation power(*)
28.9 µW
Wavelength
770-795 nm
*:Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit
• This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The laser
diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.
• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit
should not be opened under any circumstances.
Laser Aperture of
the Print Head Unit
4040P0C504DA
S-13
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
the U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation)
• This machine is certified as a Class I Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory
for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for
Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of
the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device
does not produce hazardous laser radiation.
• The label shown to page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must
be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode
5 mW
Wavelength
770-795 nm
All Areas
CAUTION
• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
Semiconductor laser
Maximum power of the laser diode
5 mW
Wavelength
770-795 nm
Denmark
ADVARSEL
• Usynlig Laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.
Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene.
Halvlederlaser
S-14
Laserdiodens højeste styrke
5 mW
Bølgelængden
770-795 nm
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Finland, Sweden
VARO!
• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Älä katso säteeseen.
LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
VAROITUS!
• Laitteen Käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa
altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Puolijohdelaser
Laserdiodin suurin teho
5 mW
Aallonpituus
770-795 nm
VARNING!
• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan
användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
Halvledarlaser
Den maximala effekten för laserdioden
5 mW
Våglängden
770-795 nm
VARNING!
• Osynlig laserstrålning när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta
ej strålen.
Norway
ADVERSEL
• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning,
kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstråling som overskrider grensen for laser
klass 1.
Halvleder laser
Maksimal effekt till laserdiode
5 mW
Bølgelengde
770-795 nm
S-15
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
5.2
Laser Safety Label
• A laser safety labels is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
* Only for the U.S.A.
4040P0C506DA
5.3
Laser Caution Label
• A laser caution label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.
4040P0C503DA
5.4
Precautions For Handling The Laser Equipment
• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the
above specifications.
• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when
working around the printerhead and PC Drum, be sure first to turn the copier OFF.
• If the job requires that the copier be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser
protective goggles.
• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use
utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.
S-16
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should
be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
CAUTION
4040P0C500DA
S-17
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
High voltage
4040P0C501DA
S-18
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
High voltage
4040P0C505DA
CAUTION:
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to
touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has
come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our Service
Office.
S-19
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN
ACCIDENT
1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately
take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further
damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded
through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by every distributor.
S-20
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to
explain the main machine and its corresponding options.
Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of
the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship
between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of
each part.
Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance
steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be
applied to the following configuration.
<Theory of Operation section>
OUTLINE:
Explanation of system configuration,
product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path
COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit,
operating system, and control system
<Field service section>
GENERAL:
Explanation of system configuration, and product
specifications
MAINTENANCE:
Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, service tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,
and firmware version up method etc.
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING:
Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical
TROUBLESHOOTING:
Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and
APPENDIX:
Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing
adjustment etc.
their countermeasures etc.
chart, overall layout drawing are attached.
C-1
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
(1) IC board:
Standard printer
(2) bizhub 200/250/350:
(3) Microsoft Windows 95:
Windows 95
Main body
Microsoft Windows 98:
Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me:
Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0:
Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000:
Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP:
Windows XP
When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:
Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C-2
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
Main Unit
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
CONTENTS
bizhub 200/250/350 Main Unit
General
System configuration............................................................................................... 1
2.
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 3
3.
Built-in Controllers ................................................................................................... 5
General
1.
Maintenance
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 7
4.1.2
bizhub 250 .................................................................................................... 7
4.1.3
bizhub 200 .................................................................................................... 7
4.1.4
Option ........................................................................................................... 8
4.2
Maintenance items................................................................................................ 8
4.2.1
bizhub 350 .................................................................................................... 8
4.2.2
bizhub 250 .................................................................................................. 10
4.2.3
bizhub 200 .................................................................................................. 13
4.3
Maintenance parts .............................................................................................. 15
4.3.1
Replacement parts...................................................................................... 15
4.3.2
Cleaning parts............................................................................................. 16
4.4
Concept of parts life............................................................................................ 17
4.5
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ............................................... 18
4.5.1
Replacing the Bypass Tray Feed Roller ...................................................... 18
4.5.2
Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy .................................... 19
4.5.3
Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller ................................................................ 20
4.5.4
Replacing the Tray 1 Pick-up Roller ............................................................ 21
4.5.5
Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy .............................................. 23
4.5.6
Replacing the Tray 2 Feed Roller ................................................................ 25
4.5.7
Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller ............................................................ 26
4.5.8
Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller....................................................... 28
4.5.9
Replacing of the Registration Roller Bearings and
Registration Roller Gears 1, 2..................................................................... 30
4.5.10
Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover.......................................................... 31
4.5.11
Replacing of the Toner Filter (Developing Unit)........................................... 32
4.5.12
Replacing of the Toner Filter (Main Unit)..................................................... 33
i
Adjustment / Setting
bizhub 350 .................................................................................................... 7
Maintenance
Service schedule .................................................................................................. 7
4.1.1
Troubleshooting
4.1
Appendix
4.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4.5.13
Replacement of the Ozone Filter ................................................................ 33
4.5.14
Replacement of the Developer ................................................................... 34
4.6
4.6.1
Replacement of the Fusing Unit ................................................................. 37
4.6.2
Replacement of the Transfer Roller Unit ..................................................... 38
4.6.3
Replacement of the Photo Conductor Unit ................................................. 39
4.6.4
Replacement of the Developing Unit .......................................................... 40
5.
General
Replacing the unit............................................................................................... 37
Service tool ........................................................................................................... 41
5.1
CE Tool list ......................................................................................................... 41
5.2
Copy materials ................................................................................................... 41
5.2.1
5.2.2
Photo Conductor Unit ................................................................................. 41
5.2.3
Toner Bottle................................................................................................. 41
Maintenance
6.
Firmware upgrade................................................................................................. 42
6.1
Service environment ................................................................................... 42
6.1.2
Writing into the Compact flash.................................................................... 42
6.1.3
Checking ROM version ............................................................................... 42
Adjustment / Setting
MSC............................................................................................................ 42
6.2.2
Engine......................................................................................................... 44
Other ..................................................................................................................... 46
7.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items.......................................................... 46
7.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts) ............................................ 47
7.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly parts list ................................................................ 47
7.2.2
Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 48
7.3
Troubleshooting
Firmware rewriting.............................................................................................. 42
6.2.1
7.
Appendix
Preparations for Firmware rewriting ................................................................... 42
6.1.1
6.2
ii
Developer.................................................................................................... 41
Disassembly/Assembly procedure ..................................................................... 49
7.3.1
IR Upper Left Cover/Original Scanning Glass/Front Holding Bracket/
Original Glass ............................................................................................. 49
7.3.2
Lower Rear Cover/Lower Right Rear Cover/Tray Rear Cover..................... 49
7.3.3
Upper Rear Cover....................................................................................... 50
7.3.4
Rear Right Cover/Front Right Cover ........................................................... 50
7.3.5
IR Right Cover/Rear Cover ......................................................................... 51
7.3.6
Front Door................................................................................................... 51
7.3.7
Paper Output Cover/Lower Front Cover...................................................... 52
7.3.8
Upper Front Cover/Front Cover................................................................... 53
7.3.9
IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Cover ................................................... 54
7.3.10
Rear Manual Bypass Cover/Front Manual Bypass Cover/
Lower Right Cover ...................................................................................... 55
7.3.14
Mechanical Control Board Cover ................................................................ 57
7.3.15
FD Paper Size Board 1 ............................................................................... 58
7.3.16
FD Paper Size Board 2 ............................................................................... 59
7.3.17
Power Supply Unit....................................................................................... 60
7.3.18
High Voltage Unit ........................................................................................ 61
7.3.19
MFBS Board ............................................................................................... 62
7.3.20
Inverter Board ............................................................................................. 63
7.3.21
BCRS Board ............................................................................................... 64
7.3.22
CCD Unit..................................................................................................... 65
7.3.23
Operation Board.......................................................................................... 69
7.3.24
Manual Bypass Unit .................................................................................... 71
7.3.25
PH Unit........................................................................................................ 71
7.3.26
Toner Hopper Unit ....................................................................................... 74
7.3.27
Toner Replenishing Drive Unit..................................................................... 74
7.3.28
Duplex Unit.................................................................................................. 76
7.3.29
Switch Back Unit ......................................................................................... 76
7.3.30
Scanner Motor ............................................................................................ 77
7.3.31
Exposure Unit ............................................................................................. 78
7.3.32
Exposure Lamp ........................................................................................... 79
7.3.33
Scanner Drive Cables ................................................................................. 80
7.3.34
Main Motor .................................................................................................. 85
7.3.35
IU Motor ...................................................................................................... 85
7.3.36
Fusing Unit Cooling Fan Motor ................................................................... 86
7.3.37
Toner Suction Fan Motor ............................................................................. 86
7.3.38
Temperature/humidity Sensor ..................................................................... 87
7.3.39
ATDC Sensor .............................................................................................. 87
7.3.40
Thermistor................................................................................................... 89
7.3.41
Paper Exit Roll 1 ......................................................................................... 91
7.3.42
Paper Exit Roll 2 ......................................................................................... 91
7.3.43
Separation Claw.......................................................................................... 92
7.4
Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 94
7.4.1
Manual Bypass Feed Roller ........................................................................ 94
7.4.2
Manual Bypass Separation Roller............................................................... 94
7.4.3
Tray 1 Feed Roller ....................................................................................... 95
iii
General
Tray 2 .......................................................................................................... 57
Maintenance
Tray 1 .......................................................................................................... 56
7.3.13
Adjustment / Setting
7.3.12
Troubleshooting
Control Panel .............................................................................................. 56
Appendix
7.3.11
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance
General
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.4.4
Tray 1 Pick-up Roller................................................................................... 96
7.4.5
Tray 1 Separation Roller ............................................................................. 97
7.4.6
Tray 2 Feed Roller....................................................................................... 98
7.4.7
Tray 2 Pick-up Roller................................................................................... 98
7.4.8
Tray 2 Separation Roller ............................................................................. 99
7.4.9
Registration Roller .................................................................................... 100
7.4.10
Paper Dust Remover ................................................................................ 100
7.4.11
Transport Roller ........................................................................................ 100
7.4.12
Scanner Rails ........................................................................................... 101
7.4.13
Bushings ................................................................................................... 101
7.4.14
Mirrors....................................................................................................... 101
7.4.15
Lens .......................................................................................................... 102
7.4.16
Original Scanning Glass ........................................................................... 102
7.4.17
Original Glass ........................................................................................... 102
7.4.18
Charge Neutralizing Plate......................................................................... 103
7.4.19
Ds Collar ................................................................................................... 103
7.5
Mount Kit MK-709............................................................................................. 105
7.6
Option counter.................................................................................................. 106
7.6.1
Adjustment / Setting
7.7
Installation method for the Key Counter.................................................... 106
Original Size Detecting Sensors....................................................................... 108
7.7.1
Original Size Detecting Sensor Layout ..................................................... 108
7.7.2
Mounting of the Original Size Detecting Sensors (Option) ....................... 109
7.8
EEPROM .......................................................................................................... 110
7.8.1
Remounting of the EEPROM.................................................................... 110
Troubleshooting
Adjustment/Setting
8.
How to use the adjustment section ..................................................................... 111
9.
Utility/Counter Mode ........................................................................................... 112
9.1
Utility/Counter Mode function tree .................................................................... 112
9.2
Utility/Counter Mode function setting procedure .............................................. 116
9.2.1
Procedure ................................................................................................. 116
9.2.2
Exiting ....................................................................................................... 116
9.2.3
Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions ................................ 116
Appendix
9.3
iv
Settings in the User Setting.............................................................................. 117
9.3.1
User’s Choice 1/6...................................................................................... 117
9.3.2
User’s Choice 2/6...................................................................................... 118
9.3.3
User’s Choice 3/6...................................................................................... 119
9.3.4
User’s Choice 4/6...................................................................................... 120
User’s Choice 5/6...................................................................................... 121
9.3.6
User’s Choice 6/6...................................................................................... 123
9.3.7
Store Overlay ............................................................................................ 124
Settings in the User Management .................................................................... 125
9.4.1
Confirmation Beep .................................................................................... 125
9.4.2
Alarm Volume............................................................................................ 125
9.4.3
Job Complete Beep .................................................................................. 125
9.4.4
Panel Cleaning.......................................................................................... 125
9.4.5
Dehumidify ................................................................................................ 125
9.4.6
Toner Supply ............................................................................................. 126
Settings in the Admin. Management................................................................. 127
9.5.2
Admin. Set ................................................................................................ 127
9.5.3
Account/User Auth. ................................................................................... 128
9.5.4
Call Remote Center .................................................................................. 130
9.5.5
Network Setting......................................................................................... 130
9.5.6
LDAP Setting............................................................................................. 135
9.5.7
Frame Type Set ......................................................................................... 137
9.5.8
Prefix/Suffix Settings ................................................................................. 138
9.5.9
Printer Setting ........................................................................................... 139
9.5.10
Software SW ............................................................................................. 139
9.5.11
Ping........................................................................................................... 139
9.5.12
Delete Job................................................................................................. 139
9.5.13
SSL/TLS.................................................................................................... 139
9.6
Reports ............................................................................................................. 140
9.6.1
TX Report.................................................................................................. 140
9.6.2
RX Report ................................................................................................. 140
9.6.3
One-Touch List .......................................................................................... 140
9.6.4
Mail Program List ...................................................................................... 140
9.7
Settings in the Printer Setting ........................................................................... 141
9.7.1
MFP Set .................................................................................................... 141
9.7.2
Default Set ................................................................................................ 141
9.7.3
PDL Set..................................................................................................... 143
9.7.4
Test Print ................................................................................................... 144
9.8
Maintenance
Initial Setting ............................................................................................. 127
Adjustment / Setting
9.5.1
Check Detail ..................................................................................................... 144
10.
Adjustment item list ............................................................................................. 146
11.
Tech. Rep. Mode ................................................................................................. 148
11.1 Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure .................................................... 148
v
Troubleshooting
9.5
Appendix
9.4
General
9.3.5
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
11.2 Tech. Rep. Mode function tree.......................................................................... 149
General
11.3 Settings in the Tech. Rep. Choice .................................................................... 151
11.3.1
System Set ............................................................................................... 151
11.3.2
Printer ....................................................................................................... 153
11.3.3
Sheet-through-ADF................................................................................... 155
11.3.4
The amount of Center Erase .................................................................... 156
11.3.5
Orientation Change................................................................................... 156
11.3.6
Finisher ..................................................................................................... 156
11.3.7
Trail Erase (Dup) ....................................................................................... 156
Maintenance
11.4 Table of Temperatures for Adjusting the Fusing Temperature .......................... 157
11.4.1
Standard paper ......................................................................................... 157
11.4.2
Special Paper............................................................................................ 158
11.4.3
OHP .......................................................................................................... 158
11.4.4
Thin Paper ................................................................................................ 158
Adjustment / Setting
11.5 Settings in the System Input............................................................................. 159
11.5.1
LCT Paper Size......................................................................................... 159
11.5.2
Change Fixed Zoom ................................................................................. 159
11.5.3
Machine Configuration.............................................................................. 159
11.5.4
Technical Memo........................................................................................ 159
11.5.5
Hard Disk .................................................................................................. 159
11.5.6
Original Size Detecting Option.................................................................. 160
11.6 Settings in the Administrator # Initialize............................................................ 160
11.7 Settings in the Counter..................................................................................... 160
Troubleshooting
11.7.1
Checking the counter reading................................................................... 160
11.7.2
Clearing readings of all counters at once ................................................. 160
11.7.3
Clearing the reading of a specific counter ................................................ 160
11.7.4
Paper ........................................................................................................ 160
11.7.5
Jam Counter ............................................................................................. 161
11.7.6
Special Parts Counter............................................................................... 161
11.7.7
Service Call Counter................................................................................. 161
11.7.8
Application Counter .................................................................................. 162
11.7.9
Maintenance Counter ............................................................................... 162
Appendix
11.8 Settings in the Function.................................................................................... 162
vi
11.8.1
F1.............................................................................................................. 162
11.8.2
F2.............................................................................................................. 162
11.8.3
F7-1 .......................................................................................................... 162
11.8.4
F7-2 .......................................................................................................... 163
11.8.5
F8.............................................................................................................. 163
11.8.6
F12............................................................................................................ 163
11.8.7
Hard Disk Format ...................................................................................... 163
11.8.8
FD ............................................................................................................. 164
11.8.9
FC ............................................................................................................. 164
11.8.10 Org. Width Detect Adjust .......................................................................... 164
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11.8.11 FW Download............................................................................................ 164
11.9.1
Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check ...... 165
11.9.2
I/O Check Screens .................................................................................... 166
11.9.3
I/O Check List............................................................................................ 168
General
11.9 I/O Check.......................................................................................................... 165
11.10 Settings in the Operation Check ....................................................................... 176
11.10.1 ADF ........................................................................................................... 176
11.10.2 Exp. Lamp Check ...................................................................................... 176
11.11 CS Remote Care .............................................................................................. 177
11.11.1 Outlines ..................................................................................................... 177
11.11.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care ............................................................... 177
Maintenance
11.10.3 Scanner..................................................................................................... 176
11.11.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care ................................................ 180
11.11.5 Calling the Maintenance ........................................................................... 185
11.11.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator ................................................. 185
11.11.7 Checking the transmission log .................................................................. 185
11.11.8 Detail on settings ...................................................................................... 186
11.11.9 List of the CS Remote Care error code..................................................... 191
Adjustment / Setting
11.11.4 Setup confirmation .................................................................................... 185
11.11.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care ....................................................... 195
11.13 Level History ..................................................................................................... 196
12.
Counters.............................................................................................................. 197
12.1 Counters Function Setting Procedure............................................................... 197
12.1.1
Procedure ................................................................................................. 197
12.1.2
Exiting ....................................................................................................... 197
Troubleshooting
11.12 ROM Version .................................................................................................... 196
12.2 Counters Function Tree .................................................................................... 197
12.3.1
Total Counter............................................................................................. 198
12.3.2
Large Size Counter ................................................................................... 198
12.3.3
Copy Kit Counter....................................................................................... 198
12.3.4
Copy Kit..................................................................................................... 199
12.3.5
Plug-In Counter ......................................................................................... 199
vii
Appendix
12.3 Settings in the Counters ................................................................................... 198
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
13.
12.3.6
Key Counter .............................................................................................. 199
12.3.7
Vendor Mode ............................................................................................ 199
Service Security Mode........................................................................................ 200
13.1 Service Security Mode Function Setting Procedure......................................... 200
13.1.1
Procedure ................................................................................................. 200
13.1.2
Exiting ....................................................................................................... 200
13.2 Service Security Mode Function Tree............................................................... 200
13.3 Settings in the Service Security Mode ............................................................. 200
General
13.3.1
14.
Service Code Change .............................................................................. 200
Adjust Mode ........................................................................................................ 201
14.1 Adjust Mode Function Setting Procedure ......................................................... 201
14.1.1
Procedure ................................................................................................. 201
14.1.2
Exiting ....................................................................................................... 201
14.2 Adjust Mode Function Tree............................................................................... 201
Maintenance
14.3 Settings in the Adjust Mode.............................................................................. 202
15.
14.3.1
Printer ....................................................................................................... 202
14.3.2
Scanner .................................................................................................... 204
Initial Mode.......................................................................................................... 208
15.1 Initial Mode Function Setting Procedure .......................................................... 208
Adjustment / Setting
15.1.1
Exiting ....................................................................................................... 208
15.2 Initial Mode Function Tree ................................................................................ 209
15.3 Settings in the Initial Mode ............................................................................... 209
Troubleshooting
15.3.1
16.
Total Clear................................................................................................. 209
15.3.2
Touch Panel Adjustment ........................................................................... 210
15.3.3
Marketing Area ......................................................................................... 210
15.3.4
Image Data Clear...................................................................................... 210
15.3.5
Clear FAX Setting ..................................................................................... 211
15.3.6
Date/Time Setting ..................................................................................... 211
15.3.7
Trouble Reset............................................................................................ 211
Mechanical adjustment ....................................................................................... 212
16.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section ................................................ 212
16.1.1
Scanner Position Adjustment.................................................................... 212
Appendix
16.2 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section ........................................... 213
17.
16.2.1
Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit ............................................... 213
16.2.2
Manual Bypass Unit Installation Check..................................................... 214
16.2.3
Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Take-up Mechanical Clutch ................ 215
Functions of switches and parts on PWBs.......................................................... 217
17.1 Test Print Switch (S1) ....................................................................................... 217
17.1.1
viii
Procedure ................................................................................................. 217
17.2 Read white reference position adjustment........................................................ 218
17.2.1
Jumper switch setting................................................................................ 218
17.3 Sub Power Switch (SW49)................................................................................ 219
17.4 Warm Restart Switch........................................................................................ 219
17.4.1
Procedure ................................................................................................. 219
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Troubleshooting
Jam Display ......................................................................................................... 221
18.1 Misfeed Display................................................................................................. 221
18.1.1
Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure ....................................................... 221
General
18.
18.2 Sensor layout .................................................................................................... 222
18.2.1
System Mounted with PC-102/PC-202 ..................................................... 222
18.2.2
System Mounted with PC-402 .................................................................. 223
Initial Check Items..................................................................................... 224
18.3.2
Misfeed at Tray 1 take-up section.............................................................. 225
18.3.3
Misfeed at Image Transfer section ............................................................ 226
18.3.4
Misfeed at Fusing/Paper Exit section ........................................................ 227
18.3.5
Misfeed at Switch Back Unit/Duplex Unit transport section ...................... 228
18.3.6
Misfeed at Duplex Unit take-up section..................................................... 229
18.3.7
Misfeed at Tray 2 take-up/Vertical Transport section................................. 230
18.3.8
Misfeed at Manual Bypass take-up section............................................... 231
18.3.9
Misfeed at Tray 3 take-up/Vertical Transport section (PC-202) ................. 232
18.3.10 Misfeed at Tray 4 take-up/Vertical Transport section (PC-202) ................. 233
18.3.11 Misfeed at LCT take-up/Vertical Transport section (PC-402) .................... 234
19.1.1
Trouble code list ........................................................................................ 235
19.2 How to reset...................................................................................................... 238
19.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 239
19.3.1
C0202: Tray 1 Elevator Failure .................................................................. 239
19.3.2
C0204: Tray 2 Elevator Failure .................................................................. 239
19.3.3
C0206: Tray 3 Elevator Failure .................................................................. 239
19.3.4
C0208: Tray 4 Elevator Failure .................................................................. 239
19.3.5
C0211: Bypass Lifting Motion Failure ....................................................... 240
19.3.6
C0701: Manual Paper Size Detection Adjustment Failure ........................ 240
19.3.7
C1080: Exit Option Communication Failure .............................................. 240
19.3.8
C2211: IU Motor Failure............................................................................ 241
ix
Troubleshooting
Malfunction code ................................................................................................. 235
19.1 Trouble code ..................................................................................................... 235
Appendix
19.
Adjustment / Setting
18.3.1
Maintenance
18.3 Solution............................................................................................................. 224
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
19.3.9
C2351: Toner Suction Fan Motor Failure .................................................. 241
19.3.10 C2557: ATDC Sensor Failure.................................................................... 242
19.3.11 C255C: ATDC Adjustment Failure ............................................................ 242
19.3.12 C2654: EEPROM Failure.......................................................................... 242
19.3.13 C2702: Abnormal Image Transfer Voltage ................................................ 242
19.3.14 C3451: Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Main) ................................................... 243
19.3.15 C3452: Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Sub) .................................................... 243
General
19.3.16 C3751: High Fuser Temperature Failure (Main) ....................................... 243
19.3.17 C3752: High Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub)......................................... 243
19.3.18 C3851: Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Main) ........................................ 244
19.3.19 C3852: Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub).......................................... 244
19.3.20 C4001: Main Unit Communication Failure ................................................ 245
19.3.21 C4002: HSYNC Detection Failure............................................................. 245
Maintenance
19.3.22 C4101: Polygon Motor Failure .................................................................. 246
19.3.23 C4721: Main Unit G/A Communication Failure ......................................... 246
19.3.24 C5102: Main Motor Failure ....................................................................... 246
19.3.25 C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor Failure ..................................... 247
19.3.26 C5352: Cooling Fan Motor Failure ............................................................ 247
19.3.27 C5353: IU Cooling Fan Motor Failure ....................................................... 247
Adjustment / Setting
19.3.28 CA052: MIO Device Failure ...................................................................... 248
19.3.29 CC153: Flash ROM Failure....................................................................... 248
20.
Power supply trouble........................................................................................... 249
20.1 Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check).................................. 249
20.2 Only the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor turns.............................................. 249
20.3 The Start key (LED) on the control panel blinks green..................................... 250
21.
Image quality problem......................................................................................... 251
Troubleshooting
21.1 How to identify problematic part ....................................................................... 251
21.2 Initial Check Items ............................................................................................ 251
21.2.1
Initial Check Items 1 ................................................................................. 251
21.2.2
Initial Check Items 2 ................................................................................. 252
Appendix
21.3 Solution ............................................................................................................ 253
x
21.3.1
Scanner System: Blank copy or black copy .............................................. 253
21.3.2
Scanner System: Low image density or rough image .............................. 254
21.3.3
Scanner System: Foggy background ........................................................ 255
21.3.4
Scanner System: Black streaks or bands ................................................. 256
21.3.5
Scanner System: Black spots ................................................................... 257
21.3.6
Scanner System: White streaks or bands................................................. 258
21.3.7
Scanner System: Uneven pitch................................................................. 259
21.3.8
Printer System: Blank copy or black copy ................................................. 260
21.3.9
Printer System: Low image density or rough image ................................. 261
21.3.10 Printer System: Foggy background ........................................................... 262
21.3.11 Printer System: Black streaks or bands .................................................... 263
21.3.12 Printer System: Black spots ...................................................................... 264
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
21.3.13 Printer System: White streaks or bands.................................................... 265
21.3.14 Printer System: Void areas ....................................................................... 266
21.3.16 Printer System: Uneven image density ..................................................... 268
21.3.17 Printer System: Gradation reproduction failure ......................................... 269
General
21.3.15 Printer System: Smears on back of paper ................................................ 267
21.3.18 Printer System: Uneven pitch.................................................................... 270
22.
Abort codes ......................................................................................................... 271
Appendix
23.
Parts layout drawing ............................................................................................ 273
23.1 Main unit ........................................................................................................... 273
Maintenance
22.1 List of Abort Codes ........................................................................................... 271
23.2 Duplex Unit ....................................................................................................... 277
23.4 DF-605.............................................................................................................. 279
23.5 PC-102/PC-202 (Option) .................................................................................. 280
23.6 PC-402 (Option)................................................................................................ 281
23.7 JS-502 (Option) ................................................................................................ 282
23.8 FS-508 (Option) ................................................................................................ 283
23.9 PU-501 (Option)................................................................................................ 284
Adjustment / Setting
23.3 Switch Back Unit............................................................................................... 278
23.10 MT-501 (Option)................................................................................................ 285
Connector layout drawing.................................................................................... 287
25.
Timing chart ........................................................................................................ 289
25.1 Main unit ........................................................................................................... 289
25.2 DF-605.............................................................................................................. 290
25.2.1
1-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding) ..................................................... 290
25.2.2
2-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding) ..................................................... 291
25.2.3
Fax Fine mode (A4 two sheets feeding).................................................... 293
25.2.4
Fax real-time transmission mode (A4 two sheets feeding) ....................... 294
xi
Appendix
24.
Troubleshooting
23.11 SD-502 (Option)................................................................................................ 286
Appendix
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Blank Page
xii
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. System configuration
1.
bizhub 200/250/350
General
System configuration
1/2 System Front View
[2]
[17]
General
[3]
[1]
[16]
[4]
[15]
[14]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[9]
[10]
[8]
4040T1E501AA
[1]
Original Cover (OC-502)
[10]
Paper Feed Cabinet (PC-102)
[2]
Stamp Unit (SP-501)
[11]
Desk (DK-501)
[3]
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder
(DF-605)
[12]
Finisher (FS-508)
[4]
Data Controller (D-103)
[13]
Output Tray (OT-601)
[5]
Key Counter Kit 4
[14]
Saddle Sticher (SD-502)
[6]
Key Counter *1
[15]
Job Separator (JS-502)
[7]
Key Counter Mount Kit *2
[16]
Punch Unit (PU-501)
[8]
Paper Feed Cabinet (PC-402)
[17]
Mailbin Kit (MT-501)
[9]
Paper Feed Cabinet (PC-202)
*1:Key Counter Only
*2:Mount Pleate Only
1
1. System configuration
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
2/2 System Rear View
[9]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
[7]
General
[5]
DK-501
PC-202
PC-402
[6]
4040T1J504AA
[1]
Machine
[5]
[2]
Fax Kit (FK-503)
[6]
Dehumidifier Heater 1C
Scanner Unit (SU-501)*2
[3]
Fax Multi Line (ML-502)
[7]
Expanded Memory Unit
(EM-303/EM-304/EM-305)*2
[4]
Local Interface kit (EK-502)
[8]
Hard Disk (HD-504)
*1:The Expanded Memory Unit and Scanner Unit cannot be mounted at the same time.
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Product specifications
bizhub 200/250/350
2.
2. Product specifications
A. Type
Desktop/Console (dedicated cabinet or dedicated table)
Copying System
Electrostatic dry powdered image transfer to plain paper
PC Drum Type
OPC (organic photo conductor)
Scanning Density
Equivalent to 600 dpi
Exposure Lamp
cold-cathode tube
Print Density
Main scan: 600 dpi; sub-scan: 600 dpi
Platen
Stationary (mirror scan)
Original Scanning
Scanning in main scanning direction with a CCD
Registration
Rear left edge
Paper Feeding System
(Standard)
Three-way system
Multiple Bypass: 150 sheets
Tray1: 500 sheets
Tray2: 500 sheets
Exposure System
Electrostatic dry powdered image transfer to plain paper with a laser
Developing System
HMT developing system
Charging System
Comb electrode with scorotron system
Image Transfer System
Image transfer roller system
Paper Separating System
Separator fingers
Fusing System
Heat roller
General
Type
B. Functions
Types of Original
Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects
Max. Original Size
A3 or 11 × 17
Multiple Copies
1 to 999
Warming-up Time
14 sec. or less
(when the Auxiliary Power Switch is turned ON from a stabilized state, in which
the Main Power Switch is ON and Auxiliary Power Switch is OFF, with the rated
power source voltage and at a room temperature of 23°C)
Image Loss
Leading edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch), Trailing edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch),
Rear edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch), Front edge: 4 mm (1/4 inch)
4.8 sec. or less (bizhub 350)
First Copy Time
(Tray1, A4, full size)
5.3 sec. or less (bizhub 250)
5.3 sec. or less (bizhub 200)
System Speed
Copying Speed for
Multi-copy Cycle
(A4, 8-1/2 × 11)
Fixed Zoom Ratios
Variable Zoom Ratios
160 m/s (bizhub 350)
140 m/s (bizhub 250, bizhub 200)
35 copies/min (bizhub 350)
25 copies/min (bizhub 250)
20 copies/min (bizhub 200)
Full size
x1.000
Reduction
Metric Area: x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.930
Inch Area: x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785, x0.930
Enlargement
Metric Area: x1.154, x1.414, x2.000
Inch Area: x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000
×0.250 to ×4.000
in 0.001 increments
3
2. Product specifications
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
C. Types of Paper
Paper Source
Paper Source
Tray1
Tray2
Multiple Bypass
❍
❍
❍
Plain paper
(56 to 90 g/m2
/ 15 to 24 lb)
Translucent paper
-
-
-
OHP transparencies
-
-
❍
-
-
❍
Postcards
-
-
❍
Envelopes
-
-
❍
Labels
-
-
❍
Thin Paper (50 to 55 g/m2
/ 13-1/4 to 14-3/4 lb)
-
-
❍
General
Thick paper (91 to 210 g/m2
Copy
paper type / 24-1/4 to 55-3/4 lb)
Max. (width × length)
Copy
paper
dimensions Min. (width × length)
297 to 420 mm
11.5 x 16.5 inches
297 to 432 mm
11 × 17 inches
148 to 210 mm
5.75 x 8.25 inches
90 to 140 mm
3.5 x 5.5 inches
❍: Reliably fed - : Feeding prohibited
D. Maintenance
Machine Durability
1200,000 prints or 5 years, whichever is earlier (bizhub 350)
800,000 prints or 5 years, whichever is earlier (bizhub 250)
500,000 prints or 5 years, whichever is earlier (bizhub 200)
E. Machine Specifications
Power Requirements
Voltage
AC 120 V, 220 - 240 V
Frequency
50/60 Hz
Max Power Consump- 120 V: 1380 W ± 10 %
tion
200 V: 1300 - 1470 W ± 10 %
Dimensions
677 (W) x 710 (D) x 718 (H) mm
Space Requirements
687 (W) x 710 (D) mm *1
Mass
74 kg (including the Duplex Unit, Switchback Unit, and Imaging Unit)
*1: Space requirements represent the dimensions of the machine when the Multi Bypass
Tray is lowered.
F. Operating Environmen
4
Temperature
10 to 32 °C / 50 to 89.6° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour)
Humidity
15 to 85 % (with a fluctuation of 20 %/h)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Type
Built-in type controller
CPU
RM5231
Printer Driver
PCL5e Emulation
PCL6 (XL Ver. 2.1)Emulation
PostScript3 Emulation (3011.xx.xx)
Scan Driver
OS Compatibility
Interface
bizhub 200/250/350
Built-in Controllers
TWAIN driver
Server
Windows NT4.0 sp6 / 2000 / 2003
Client
Windows 98SE / Me
Windows 2000 / XP
Windows NT4.0 sp6
Linux (2nd-compliant)
Macintosh OS 9.2 or later / OS X 10.2 or later
General
3.
3. Built-in Controllers
Ethernet (10 Base-T/100 Base-TX)
USB 2.0/1.1
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
bizhub 200/250/350
3. Built-in Controllers
Blank Page
6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Periodical check
4.
4.1
4.1.1
bizhub 200/250/350
Maintenance
Periodical check
Service schedule
bizhub 350
Guarantee period (5-year or 1,200,000 prints)
100,000
●
●
●
●
150,000
●
●
●
●
Main 300,000
body 400,000
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
900,000
4.1.2
●
●
●
●
450,000
●
●
●
9
●
8
●
4
●
3
●
2
●
1
bizhub 250
Guarantee period (5-year or 800,000 prints)
Per cycle × print
number
80,000
8
×10,000-print
Number
15 16 24 30 32 40 45 48 56 60 64 72 75 80 of times
●
●
●
●
150,000
●
●
●
Main
300,000
body
320,000
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
10
5
●
2
●
2
●
450,000
4.1.3
●
●
1
bizhub 200
Guarantee period (5-year or 500,000 prints)
Per cycle × print
number
65,000
150,000
Main
260,000
body
300,000
450,000
×10,000-print
6.5
13
●
●
15
19.5
26
●
●
●
30
●
32.5
39
●
●
45
●
●
45.5
Number
of times
●
7
3
1
●
1
●
1
7
Maintenance
×10,000-print
Per cycle × print
Number
number
10 15 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 105 110 120 of times
4. Periodical check
bizhub 200/250/350
4.1.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Option
Guarantee period (5-year or 1,200,000 prints)
Num
×10,000-print
Per cycle
ber
× print
of
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
65
70
75
80
85
90
95
100
number
times
PC-102
PC-202 300,000
PC-402
DF-605
50,000
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
3
●
20
●
5
3
Maintenance items
4.2.1
Maintenance
●
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
200,000
FS-508
MT-501 300,000
SD-502
4.2
●
bizhub 350
A. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 50,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Paper take-up and
image conditions
2
Appearance
3
Pick-up Roller
4
5
6
DF-605
Number of
Lubri- DescripCheck Clean Replace
personnel
cation
tions
●
●
●
2
●
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller
1
●
●
Rollers and rolls
7
Scanning Guide
1
●
8
Reflective Sensor section
1
●
B. Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 100,000-print)
No
1
2
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
Appearance
3 Processing Photo Conductor Unit
4 section
Toner Filter (Developing Unit)
8
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
●
1
●
1
●
4. Periodical check
C. Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 150,000-print)
No
Class
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and image
conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
Transport
3
section
Paper Dust Remover
1
●
Image
4 Transfer
Section
Transfer Roller Unit
1
●
1
Overall
●
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
D. Periodical parts replacement 4 (per 200,000-print)
1
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- Descrip
Number of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and image
conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Pick-up Roller
2
●
4 DF-605
Feed Roller
1
●
5
Separation Roller
1
●
Maintenance
No
E. Periodical parts replacement 5 (per 300,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Number of
Lubri- DescripCheck Clean Replace
personnel
cation
tions
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
5
Feed Roller
1
●
6 Tray 1
Pick-up Roller
1
●
7
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
8
Feed Roller
1
●
9 Tray 2
Pick-up Roller
1
●
10
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
11 PC-102
12 PC-202
13 PC-402
Pick-up Roller
1
●
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller Assy
1
14 FS-508
Rollers and rolls
●
15 MT-501
Rollers and rolls
●
16 SD-502
Rollers and rolls
●
4
Bypass
●
9
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
F. Periodical parts replacement 6 (per 400,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
2
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
Appearance
3 Processing Developing Unit
4 section
Toner Filter (Main Unit)
●
1
●
1
●
G. Periodical parts replacement 7 (per 450,000-print)
No
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
Fusing
3
section
Fusing Unit
1
Maintenance
Class
Overall
●
●
1
H. Periodical parts replacement 8 (per 900,000-print)
No
Class
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
3 Transport
4 section
Registration Roller Bearing
●
Registration Roller Gear
●
1
Overall
4.2.2
●
bizhub 250
A. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 50,000-print)
No
1
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Appearance
3
Pick-up Roller
4
5
DF-605
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
2
6
10
Class
●
●
●
2
●
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller
1
●
●
Rollers and rolls
7
Scanning Guide
1
●
8
Reflective Sensor section
1
●
4. Periodical check
B. Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 80,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
2
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
Appearance
3 Processing Photo Conductor Unit
4 section
Toner Filter (Developing Unit)
●
1
●
1
●
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C. Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 150,000-print)
Class
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and image
conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
Transport
3
section
Paper Dust Remover
1
●
Image
4 Transfer
Section
Transfer Roller Unit
1
●
1
Overall
●
Maintenance
No
D. Periodical parts replacement 4 (per 200,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- Descrip
Number of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and image
conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Pick-up Roller
2
●
4 DF-605
Feed Roller
1
●
5
Separation Roller
1
●
11
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
E. Periodical parts replacement 5 (per 300,000-print)
No
1
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
5
Feed Roller
1
●
6 Tray 1
Pick-up Roller
1
●
7
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
8
Feed Roller
1
●
4
Maintenance
Class
Bypass
9 Tray 2
Pick-up Roller
1
●
10
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
11 PC-102
12 PC-202
13 PC-402
Pick-up Roller
1
●
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller Assy
1
14 FS-508
Rollers and rolls
●
15 MT-501
Rollers and rolls
●
16 SD-502
Rollers and rolls
●
●
F. Periodical parts replacement 6 (per 320,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
2
Parts to be replaced
Number of
Lubri- DescripCheck Clean Replace
personnel
cation
tions
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
Appearance
3 Processing Developing Unit
4 section
Toner Filter (Main Unit)
●
1
●
1
●
G. Periodical parts replacement 7 (per 450,000-print)
No
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
Fusing
3
section
Fusing Unit
1
12
Class
Overall
1
●
●
4.2.3
4. Periodical check
bizhub 200
A. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 50,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Pick-up Roller
2
●
4
Feed Roller
1
●
5
Separation Roller
1
●
6
DF-605
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
●
Rollers and rolls
7
Scanning Guide
1
●
8
Reflective Sensor section
1
●
No
1
Class
Overall
2
Parts to be replaced
Number of
Lubri- DescripCheck Clean Replace
personnel
cation
tions
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
Appearance
3 Processing Photo Conductor Unit
4 section
Toner Filter (Developing Unit)
●
1
●
1
●
C. Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 150,000-print)
No
Class
Parts to be replaced
Number of
Lubri- DescripCheck Clean Replace
personnel
cation
tions
Paper take-up and image
conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
Transport
3
section
Paper Dust Remover
1
●
Image
4 Transfer
Section
Transfer Roller Unit
1
●
1
Overall
●
D. Periodical parts replacement 4 (per 200,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- Descrip
Number of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and image
conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Pick-up Roller
2
●
4 DF-605
Feed Roller
1
●
5
Separation Roller
1
●
13
Maintenance
B. Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 65,000-print)
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
E. Periodical parts replacement 5 (per 260,000-print)
No
1
Class
Overall
2
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
Appearance
3 Processing Developing Unit
4 section
Toner Filter (Main Unit)
●
1
●
1
●
F. Periodical parts replacement 6 (per 300,000-print)
No
1
Overall
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
●
●
2
Appearance
3
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
5
Feed Roller
1
●
6 Tray 1
Pick-up Roller
1
●
7
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
8
Feed Roller
1
●
4
Maintenance
Class
Bypass
9 Tray 2
Pick-up Roller
1
●
10
Separation Roller Assy
1
●
11 PC-102
12 PC-202
13 PC-402
Pick-up Roller
1
●
Feed Roller
1
●
Separation Roller Assy
1
14 FS-508
Rollers and rolls
●
15 MT-501
Rollers and rolls
●
16 SD-502
Rollers and rolls
●
●
G. Periodical parts replacement 7 (per 450,000-print)
No
Parts to be replaced
Lubri- DescripNumber of
Check Clean Replace
cation
tions
personnel
Paper take-up and
image conditions
●
2
Appearance
●
Fusing
3
section
Fusing Unit
1
14
Class
Overall
1
●
●
4.3
4. Periodical check
Maintenance parts
• To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as
instructed.
• Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter.
• The conditions are: A4 or 8-1/2x11, standard mode, and no Sleep.
4.3.1
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacement parts
A. Main unit
Parts name
Actual
Qua
durable
ntity
cycle *1
Parts No.
Descriptions
Ref.Page
in this
manual
Feed Roller
1
300 K
4131-3001-XX
☞ 18
Separation Roller Assy
1
300 K
4034-0151-XX
☞ 19
3
Feed Roller
1
300 K
☞ 20
4 Tray 1
Pick-up Roller
1
300 K
5
Separation Roller Assy
1
300 K
4030-3005-XX Replace
4030-3005-XX those three
parts at the
4030-0151-XX same time.
6
Feed Roller
1
300 K
☞ 25
7 Tray 2
Pick-up Roller
1
300 K
8
Separation Roller Assy
1
300 K
4030-3005-XX Replace
4030-3005-XX those three
parts at the
4030-0151-XX same time.
1
2
Bypass
☞ 21
☞ 23
☞ 26
☞ 28
9
Registration Roller Bearing
4
900 K
1164-3549-XX
☞ 30
10 Transport
section
Registration Roller Gear 1
1
900 K
1164-3508-XX
☞ 30
Registration Roller Gear 2
1
900 K
1164-3515-XX
☞ 30
11
Paper Dust Remover
1
150 K
4040-0778-XX
☞ 31
120 V/127 V ☞ 37
4040-0765-XX
areas only.
12
13
Fusing
section
Transfer
section
14
15
16
Fusing Unit
Transfer Roller Unit
Photo
Conductor
Unit
17
18
Developer
19 Processing
20 section
21
1
Developing
Unit
450 K
1
150 K
4040-0766-XX
220 - 240 V
areas only.
4040-0767-XX
110 V areas
only.
☞ 38
4040-0760-XX
☞ 39
bizhub 350
1
100 K
bizhub 250
1
80 K
bizhub 200
1
65 K
bizhub 350
1
100 K
bizhub 250
1
80 K
bizhub 200
1
65 K
bizhub 350
1
400 K
4040-0752-XX
bizhub 250
1
320 K
4040-0752-XX *3
-
*2
☞ 34
-
22
bizhub 200
1
260 K
4040-0752-XX
23
bizhub 350
1
100 K
4040-5217-XX
bizhub 250
1
80 K
4040-5217-XX *2
bizhub 200
1
65 K
4040-5217-XX
24
25
Toner Filter
(Developing
Unit)
☞ 40
☞ 32
15
Maintenance
No Classification
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
No Classification
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
26
27
Processing
section
Actual
Qua
durable
ntity
cycle *1
Parts name
Toner Filter
(Main Unit)
28
Parts No.
Descriptions
Ref.Page
in this
manual
☞ 33
bizhub 350
1
400 K
4040-2093-XX
bizhub 250
1
320 K
4040-2093-XX *3
bizhub 200
1
260 K
4040-2093-XX
4011-2031-XX
☞ 33
*1: Actual durable cycle is the Special Parts Counter value.
*2: The Photo Conductor Unit and Toner Filter (Developing Unit) should be replaced with
new ones at the same time.
*3: The Developing Unit and Toner Filter (Main Unit) should be replaced with new ones at
the same time.
29
Ozone Filter
1
300 K
B. Option
Maintenance
No Classification
Parts name
Actual
Qua
durable
ntity
cycle *1
1 PC-102
2 PC-202
3 PC-402
Pick-up Roller
1
300 K
Feed Roller
1
300 K
Separation Roller Assy
1
300 K
4
Pick-up Roller
1
200 K
5 DF-605
Feed Roller
1
200 K
6
Separation Roller
1
200 K
7 SP-501
Spare TX Marker
Stamp 2
1
As
required
Parts No.
Descriptions
Ref.Page
in this
manual
4030-3005-XX Replace those
4030-3005-XX three parts at the
4030-0151-XX same time.
4344-5003-XX Replace those
*2
4582-3014-XX three parts at the
4582-3047-XX same time.
-
Ink running out
*1: Actual durable cycle is the Special Parts Counter value.
*2: See each Option Service Manual.
4.3.2
Cleaning parts
No Classification
Parts name
Actual durable cycle *1
1
Pick-up Roller
50 K
2
Feed Roller
50 K
Separation Roller
50 K
Misc. rollers and rolls
50 K
3
4
DF-605
Ref.Page
in this
manual
*2
5
Scanning Guide
50 K
6
Reflective Sensor section
50 K
7 FS-508
Rollers and rolls
300 K
8 MT-501
Rollers and rolls
300 K
*4
9 SD-502
Rollers and rolls
300 K
*5
*1: Actual durable cycle is the Special Parts Counter value.
*2: See DF-605 Service manual.
*3: See FS-508 Service manual.
*4: See MT-501 Service manual.
*5: See SD-502 Service manual.
16
Descriptions
*3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Concept of parts life
Life value
(Specification
value)
Description
bizhub 200/250/350
4.4
4. Periodical check
Lift stop
The distance through which the Photo Conductor has been rotated is converted to a corresponding number of printed pages produced
on A4 paper at 4P/J and the life condition is
detected when a predetermined value is
reached.
100*1
Developing Unit
Photo Conductor Unit × 4 times
400*1
Not stopped
*2
Fusing Unit
Count the number of times paper is fed out.
450*1
Not stopped
Photo Conductor Unit
Developer
100*1
Not stopped
*2
Maintenance
*1: On the bizhub 350
*2: The setting can be changed to “stopped” by using the soft switch of the Tech. Rep.
mode.
A. Conditions for Life Specifications Values
• The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when
given conditions (see the Table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the
machine operating conditions of each individual user.
Item
Job Type
Description
bizhub 350
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
4 page/Job
3 page/Job
2 page/Job
Paper Size
A4
Original Density
Average Copy Volume
(copies/month)
B/W ratio: 6 %
7,000
4,000
2,500
17
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
4.5.1
Replacing the Bypass Tray Feed Roller
1. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
2. Remove five screws [1] and the Manual Bypass Unit Lower Frame [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
Maintenance
4037F2C518DA
3. Remove two screws [3] and the Feed
Roller Cover [4].
[4]
[3]
4040F2C708DA
4. Snap off the C-clip [5] for the Feed
Roller, and remove the bearing. [6].
[5]
[6]
4040F2C506DA
[7]
[8]
4037F2C520DA
18
5. Snap off the C-clip [7], and remove
the Bypass Feed Roller [8].
6. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
7. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Bypass] and clear the counter.
NOTE
• Replace the Bypass Feed Roller
and the Bypass Separation Roller
Assy at the same time.
4.5.2
4. Periodical check
Replacing the Bypass Tray Separation Roller Assy
1. Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
2. Remove two screws [1], and remove
Bypass Paper Separation Roller fixing bracket Assy [2].
[2]
[1]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
4037F2C522DA
3. Snap off the C-clip [3], and remove
the spring [4] and the guide plate [5].
Remove the Bypass Paper Separation Roller Assy [6].
4. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
5. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Bypass] and clear the counter.
NOTE
• Replace the Bypass Feed Roller
and the Bypass Separation Roller
Assy at the same time.
19
Maintenance
4037F2C515DA
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.5.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacing the Tray 1 Feed Roller
1. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove Tray 1 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
2. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
Maintenance
[5]
[4]
4040F2C509DA
3. Remove the Connector [6].
4. Remove two screws [7] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C510DA
[11]
[10]
[9]
[9]
4040F2C512DA
20
5. Remove four screws [9] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy Cover [10] and
the Tray 1 Separator Roll Assy [11].
4. Periodical check
6. Remove the C-clip [12] and the bearing [13].
[12]
[13]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F2C513DA
[14]
7. Remove the C-clip [14], E-ring [15],
bearing [16] and spring [17] to
remove the Tray 1 Feed Roller Assy
[18].
[15]
[17]
[16]
4040F2C514DA
[19]
[20]
8. Remove the C-clip [19] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller [20].
9. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
10. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Tray 1] and clear the counter.
4040F2C515DA
4.5.4
Replacing the Tray 1 Pick-up Roller
1. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove Tray 1 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
2. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
[5]
[4]
4040F2C509DA
21
Maintenance
[18]
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
3. Remove the Connector [6].
4. Remove two screws [7] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C510DA
[10]
Maintenance
[11]
5. Remove four screws [9] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy Cover [10] and
the Tray 1 Separator Roll Assy [11].
[9]
[9]
4040F2C512DA
[12]
[13]
[13]
[14]
4040F2C517DA
[15]
[16]
4040F2C518DA
22
6. Remove two C-clips [12] and two
bearings [13]. Then, remove the
Pick-up Roller Assy [14].
7. Remove one C-clip [15] and the Tray
1 Pick-up Roller [16].
8. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
9. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Tray 1] and clear the counter.
4.5.5
4. Periodical check
Replacing the Tray 1 Separation Roller Assy
1. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove Tray 1 [3].
[2]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
2. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
[4]
Maintenance
[5]
4040F2C509DA
3. Remove the Connector [6].
4. Remove two screws [7] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C510DA
[11]
[10]
5. Remove four screws [9] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy Cover [10] and
the Tray 1 Separator Roll Assy [11].
[9]
[9]
4040F2C512DA
23
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
6. Remove two Screws [12] and the
Tray 1 Separation Roller installation
plate Assy [13].
[12]
[13]
4040F2C520DA
[15]
[14]
7. Remove two C-clips [14] and the
Tray 1 Separation Roller installation
plate [15].
[14]
Maintenance
4040F2C521DA
[17]
[16]
8. Remove the C-clip [16] and the Tray
1 Separation Roller Assy [17].
9. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
10. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Tray 1] and clear the counter.
4040F2C522DA
NOTE
• Install the Tray 1 Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy [18] while
pressing the holder up so that it
coheres to the metal bracket of the
copier.
[18]
4040F2C523DA
24
4.5.6
4. Periodical check
Replacing the Tray 2 Feed Roller
1.
2.
☞
3.
Slide out the Tray 2.
Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.
71
Remove the Lower Right Cover [1].
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
4040F2C524DA
4. Remove two screws [2] and the
Transport Roller Cover [3].
[3]
[2]
5. Remove two screws [2] and the Misfeed Clearing Cover [5].
[5]
[4]
4040F2C527DA
[6]
6. Unplug two connectors [6].
7. Remove three screws [7] and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[7]
[8]
[9]
[7]
[11]
4040F2C591DA
[9]
[10]
[9]
8. Remove four screws [9] and the Cclip [10]. Then, remove the Tray 2
Feed Roller Cover [11], the Tray 2
Separation Roller Assy [12], and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Clutch [13].
[12]
[13]
4040F2C528DA
25
Maintenance
4040F2C526DA
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[14]
[14]
9. Remove two C-clips [14] and the
bearing [15].
[15]
4040F2C529DA
[16]
10. Remove the C-clip [16], E-ring [17],
bearing [18] and spring [19] to
remove the Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy
[20].
[17]
[19]
[18]
Maintenance
[20]
4040F2C530DA
[21]
[22]
11. Remove the C-clip [21] and the Tray
2 Feed Roller [22].
12. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
13. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Tray 2] and clear the counter.
4040F2C531DA
4.5.7
Replacing the Tray 2 Pick-up Roller
1.
2.
☞
3.
Slide out the Tray 2.
Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.
71
Remove the Lower Right Cover [1].
[1]
4040F2C524DA
4. Remove two screws [2] and the
Transport Roller Cover [3].
[3]
[2]
4040F2C526DA
26
4. Periodical check
5. Remove two screws [2] and the Misfeed Clearing Cover [5].
[5]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[4]
4040F2C527DA
[6]
6. Unplug two connectors [6].
7. Remove three screws [7] and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[7]
[9]
[7]
4040F2C591DA
[11]
[9]
[10]
[9]
8. Remove four screws [9] and the Cclip [10]. Then, remove the Tray 2
Feed Roller Cover [11], the Tray 2
Separation Roller Assy [12], and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Clutch [13].
[12]
[13]
4040F2C528DA
[14]
9. Remove two C-clips [14] and two
bearings [15]. Then, remove the Tray
2 Pick-up Roller Assy [16].
[15]
[15]
[16]
4040F2C533DA
[17]
[18]
10. Remove the C-clip [17] and the Tray
2 Pick-up Roller [18].
11. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
12. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Tray 2] and clear the counter.
4040F2C534DA
27
Maintenance
[8]
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.5.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacing the Tray 2 Separation Roller
1.
2.
☞
3.
Slide out the Tray 2.
Remove the Multi Bypass Unit.
71
Remove the Lower Right Cover [1].
[1]
4040F2C524DA
4. Remove two screws [2] and the
Transport Roller Cover [3].
[3]
[2]
Maintenance
4040F2C526DA
5. Remove two screws [2] and the Misfeed Clearing Cover [5].
[5]
[4]
4040F2C527DA
[6]
6. Unplug two connectors [6].
7. Remove three screws [7] and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[7]
[8]
[9]
[7]
[11]
4040F2C591DA
[9]
[10]
[9]
[12]
[13]
28
4040F2C528DA
8. Remove four screws [9] and the Cclip [10]. Then, remove the Tray 2
Feed Roller Cover [11], the Tray 2
Separation Roller Assy [12], and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Clutch [13].
4. Periodical check
9. Remove two Screws [14] and the
Tray 2 Separation Roller installation
plate Assy [15].
[15]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[14]
4040F2C536DA
[17]
[16]
10. Remove two C-clips [16] and the
Tray 2 Separation Roller installation
plate [17].
[16]
[19]
[18]
11. Remove the C-clip [18] and the Tray
2 Separation Roller Assy [19].
12. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
13. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] →
[Counter] → [Special Parts Counter]
→ [Tray 2] and clear the counter.
4040F2C538DA
NOTE
• Install the Tray 2 Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy [20] while
pressing the holder up so that it
coheres to the metal bracket of the
copier.
[20]
4040F2C539DA
29
Maintenance
4040F2C537DA
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.5.9
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacing of the Registration Roller Bearings and Registration Roller
Gears 1, 2
1. Open the Right Door [1].
[1]
4040F2C540DA
2. Remove two E-rings [2], Registration
Roller Gears 1 [3] and Registration
Roller Gears 2 [4].
[4]
[2]
Maintenance
[3]
4040F2C544DA
3. Remove the screw [5] and the
ground plate [6].
[5]
[6]
4040F2C545DA
CAUTION
• When reinstalling the ground plate,
make sure that the ground plate [7]
is in contact with the side faces of
the bushings [8].
[8]
[7]
4040F2C546DA
[10]
[9]
30
4040F2C547DA
4. Remove the spring [9] and two Registration Roller Bearings [10].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the bearings,
make sure that the flanges of the
bearings are on the outside.
4. Periodical check
5. Remove the E-ring [11] and unplug
the connector [12]. Then, remove the
Registration Roller Clutch [13].
6. Remove the washer [14] and two
wave washers [15].
[12]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[13]
[15]
[11]
4040F2C548DA
[17]
[18]
4.5.10
[16]
7. Remove the spring [16], two E-rings
[17], and two Registration Roller
Bearings [18].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the bearings,
make sure that the flanges of the
bearings are on the outside.
4040F2C549DA
Cleaning of the Paper Dust Remover
1. Open the Right Door [1].
[1]
4040F2C540DA
2. Remove the Paper Dust Removal [2].
[2]
4040F2C541DA
31
Maintenance
[14]
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.5.11
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacing of the Toner Filter (Developing Unit)
[1]
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Remove the IU [1].
4040F2C555DA
3. Remove the Toner Filter Cover [2].
[2]
Maintenance
4040F2C655DA
4. Remove the Toner Filter (Developing Unit) [3].
NOTE
• Replace the Photo Conductor Unit
with a new one at the same time.
[3]
4040F2C654DA
32
4.5.12
4. Periodical check
Replacing of the Toner Filter (Main Unit)
1. Remove the screw [1] and the Toner
Filter Rear Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F2C558DA
[4]
Maintenance
[3]
2. Pull on the tape portion [3] and peel
off the Toner Filter (Main Unit) [4].
NOTE
• When mounting the filter, not the
correct mounting position that is
shown on the left.
• Replace the Developing Unit with a
new one at the same time.
4040F2C557DA
4.5.13
Replacement of the Ozone Filter
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
Remove the Ozone Filter [1].
[1]
4040F2C559DA
33
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.5.14
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacement of the Developer
1. Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Counter] → [Special Parts Counter] → [PC Life].
2. Press the Clear key to clear the counter value.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE
• Clear the PC Life counter before removing the IU.
• After clearing the PC Life counter, be sure to turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Open the Right Door.
5. Remove the IU [1].
[1]
4040F2C555DA
[2]
Maintenance
[3]
6. Remove four screws (silver) [2] and
disassemble the Photo Conductor
Unit [3] and the Developing Unit [4].
[4]
[2]
4040F2C556DA
7. Remove three screws [5] and the
Developer Scattering Prevention
Plate [6].
[6]
[5]
4040F2C579DA
[7]
4040F2C580DA
34
8. Remove the Toner Supply Port [7].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Periodical check
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Remove the developer [8].
[8]
4040F2C582DA
Removal of the Developer
• Dump the developer on the Sleeve
Roller by rotating the gear in the
direction of the arrow.
• If you rotate the gear in reverse,
mylar for cleaning the ATDC Sensor.
• Dump developer until almost no
developer sticks to the Sleeve
Roller.
10. Set the developer [9] while rotating
the gear in the direction of the arrow.
[9]
4040F2C583DA
11. Reinstall the Toner Supply Port [10].
[10]
4040F2C584DA
[12]
[11]
12. Using three screws [11], secure the
Developer Scattering Prevention
Plate [12].
4040F2C585DA
35
Maintenance
4040F2C581DA
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[14]
[13]
[13]
13. Install the four screws [13] to secure
the Photo Conductor Unit [14] and
Developing Unit [15].
14. Install the IU in the copier.
[15]
Maintenance
4040F2C586DA
15. Turn ON the main power switch.
16. Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Function] → [F8] and press the Start key.
NOTE
• After replacing the developer, be sure to execute F8 under Function of Tech. Rep.
Mode.
• When the main power switch is turned ON, execute F8 quickly.
36
4.6
4. Periodical check
Replacing the unit
4.6.1
Replacement of the Fusing Unit
CAUTION
• From the safety viewpoint, the Fusing Unit is replaced as a unit. No parts intended
for other models should be used for the Fusing Unit of this machine. Note, however, that the thermistor and several other parts mentioned in this machine may be
replaced as an individual part with a new one.
1.
2.
☞
3.
[2]
[1]
Open the Right Door.
Remove the Rear Right Cover.
50
Remove the screw [1] and the Front
Right Cover [2].
4040F2C560DA
Maintenance
4. Unplug two connectors [3] of the
Switch Back Unit.
[3]
4040F2C563DA
[4]
[5]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[6]
5.
6.
7.
8.
Loosen the screw [4] in front.
Remove the screw [5] in front.
Loosen the screw [6] in the back.
Remove the screw [7] in the back.
[7]
4040F2C564DA
9. Remove the Switch Back Unit [8].
[8]
4040F2C565DA
37
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
10. Remove the screw [9] and the Connector Cover [10].
[9]
[10]
4040F2C658DA
11. Remove two screws [11] and unplug
three connectors [12]. Then, remove
the Fusing Unit [13].
[12]
[13]
Maintenance
[12]
[11]
[12]
4040F2C566DA
4.6.2
Replacement of the Transfer Roller Unit
[1]
[1]
[2]
4040F2C554DA
38
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Pull down the knobs [1] forward and
remove the Transfer Roller [2].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacement of the Photo Conductor Unit
bizhub 200/250/350
4.6.3
4. Periodical check
1. Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Counter] → [Special Parts Counter] → [PC Life].
2. Press the Clear key to clear the counter value.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE
• Clear the PC Life counter before removing the IU.
• After clearing the PC Life counter, be sure to turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Open the Right Door.
5. Remove the IU [1].
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[2]
4040F2C556DA
6. Remove four screws (silver) [2] and
disassemble the Photo Conductor
Unit [3] and the Developing Unit [4].
7. Replace the Photo Conductor Unit
[3].
8. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
NOTE
• Replace the Toner Filter (Developing Unit) with a new one at the same
time.
39
Maintenance
4040F2C555DA
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Periodical check
4.6.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacement of the Developing Unit
1. Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Counter] → [Special Parts Counter] → [Developer].
2. Press the Clear key to clear the counter value.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE
• Clear the Developer counter before removing the IU.
• After clearing the Developer counter, be sure to turn OFF the main power switch.
4. Open the Right Door.
5. Remove the IU [1].
[1]
4040F2C555DA
[2]
Maintenance
[3]
[4]
[2]
6. Remove four screws (silver) [2] and
disassemble the Photo Conductor
Unit [3] and the Developing Unit [4].
7. Replace the Developing Unit [4].
8. Supply new developer to the new
Developing Unit.
☞ 34
4040F2C556DA
[6]
[5]
[5]
9. Install the four screws [5] to secure
the Photo Conductor Unit [6] and
Developing Unit [7].
10. Install the IU in the copier.
[7]
4040F2C587DA
11. Turn ON the main power switch.
12. Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Function] → [F8] and press the Start key.
NOTE
• After replacing the developer, be sure to execute F8 under Function of Tech. Rep.
Mode.
• When the main power switch is turned ON, execute F8 quickly.
40
5.
Service tool
5.1
CE Tool list
Tool name
5. Service tool
Shape
Thermistor Holding/Check
Jig
Personnel
Parts No.
1
4040-7901-01
Remarks
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F2C728DA
Copy materials
5.2.1
Developer
Parts name
Replacing period
bizhub 350
100,000 copies
bizhub 250
80,000 copies
bizhub 200
65,000 copies
5.2.2
Photo Conductor Unit
Parts name
Replacing period
bizhub 350
100,000 copies
bizhub 250
80,000 copies
bizhub 200
65,000 copies
5.2.3
Toner Bottle
Parts name
bizhub 350
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
Maintenance
5.2
Replacing period
5,000-copy Copy Kit
5,000 copies
15,000-copy Toner Kit
15,000 copies
5,000-copy Copy Kit
5,000 copies
10,000-copy Toner Kit
10,000 copies
41
bizhub 200/250/350
6. Firmware upgrade
6.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Firmware upgrade
6.1
Preparations for Firmware rewriting
6.1.1
Service environment
• Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash
• Compact flash (with 32 MB or more)
6.1.2
Writing into the Compact flash
• Copy the firmware files using the computer.
Maintenance
NOTE
• The copying operation should be performed on the files contained in the folder,
instead of the folder.
• Copy only those files to be upgraded to the compact flash.
• If wrong firmware is copied, no control panel display is given and thus no firmware
can be downloaded.
6.1.3
Checking ROM version
• Before attempting to upgrade the firmware, check the current ROM version.
☞ 196
6.2
Firmware rewriting
NOTE
• NEVER attempt to remove or insert the compact flash with the machine power
turned ON.
6.2.1
MSC
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Remove the Compact flash Cover
[1].
[1]
4040F2C596DA
3. Insert the compact flash card [2], in
which only the MSC upgrading files
have been written, into the slot.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
42
NOTE
• Make sure that this compact flash
card contains only the upgrading
firmware of the MSC, and not that of
the engine or Finisher.
6. Firmware upgrade
NOTE
• Be sure to turn ON the sub power switch first before turning ON the main power
switch.
4. Turn ON the main power switch.
4040F2C749DA
5. The firmware upgrading sequence
will start.
6. When the upgrading sequence is
completed, which is notified by the
message “FINISH” appearing on the
screen, turn OFF the main power
switch.
NOTE
• NEVER turn OFF the main power
switch until the message “FINISH”
appears on the screen.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance
7. Remove the Compact Flash [2] card
from the slot.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
8.
9.
☞
10.
11.
Turn ON the main power switch.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
148
Select [ROM Version].
Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
43
bizhub 200/250/350
6. Firmware upgrade
6.2.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Engine
NOTE
• Make sure that the MSC firmware has not been copied to the compact flash card.
• To upgrade both the engine firmware and Finisher firmware at the same time, they
must first be copied onto a single compact flash.
☞ For the Finisher firmware upgrading procedures, see FS-508 Service Manual.
• If the files copied to the compact flash card are those of either the engine or Finisher, or wrong, no screen display is given and thus no firmware can be downloaded.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Remove the Compact flash Cover
[1].
[1]
Maintenance
4040F2C596DA
3. Insert the compact flash card [2], to
which the engine upgrading files
have been copied, into the slot.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
4040F2E767DA
4. Open the Right Door.
NOTE
• Be sure to open the Right Door
before turning ON the main power
switch.
5. Turn ON the main power switch.
6. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the
screen.
☞ 148
7. Touch [Function].
8. Touch [FW Download].
4040F2E766DA
44
6. Firmware upgrade
9. Select [Engine] and touch [Enter].
NOTE
• Touch [Finisher] also if the Finisher
firmware is to be upgraded at the
same time.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F2E768DA
10. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
4040F2E770DA
11. The firmware upgrading sequence
will start.
NOTE
• The firmware upgrading sequence
will last for 5 to 6 min. During this
period, NEVER turn off the machine
power.
• If the Finisher firmware is also
upgraded, the entire sequence will
take about 10 to 11 min.
12. When the upgrading sequence is
completed, turn OFF the main power
switch.
4040F2E771DA
13. Remove the compact flash card [2]
from the slot. After some while thereafter, turn ON the main power switch.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
14.
☞
15.
16.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
148
Select [ROM Version].
Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
45
Maintenance
4040F2E769DA
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.
7.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
46
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
7.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
No
Section
Part name
Ref.Page
1
Original Scanning Glass
☞ 49
2
Original Glass
☞ 49
3
Front Holding Bracket
☞ 49
4
Control Panel
☞ 56
5
Upper Front Cover
☞ 53
6
Front Cover
☞ 53
7
Front Door
☞ 51
8
Lower Front Cover
☞ 52
9
Paper Output Cover
☞ 52
10
Left Cover
☞ 54
11
Rear Left Cover
☞ 54
12
Front Right Cover
☞ 50
13
Rear Right Cover
☞ 50
Lower Right Rear Cover
☞ 49
15
Lower Right Cover
☞ 55
16
Rear Cover
☞ 51
17
Upper Rear Cover
☞ 50
18
Lower Rear Cover
☞ 49
19
Tray 1
☞ 56
20
Tray 2
☞ 57
21
Tray Rear Cover
☞ 49
22
Front Manual Bypass Cover
☞ 55
23
Rear Manual Bypass Cover
☞ 55
24
IR Right Cover
☞ 51
25
IR Left Cover
☞ 54
26
IR Upper Left Cover
☞ 49
27
Mechanical Control Board Cover
☞ 57
28
MFBS Board
☞ 62
29
Inverter Board
☞ 63
30
BCRS Board
☞ 64
31
CCD Unit
☞ 65
FD Paper Size Board 1
☞ 58
33
FD Paper Size Board 2
☞ 59
34
High Voltage Unit
☞ 61
35
Power Supply Unit
☞ 60
36
Operation Board
☞ 69
14
32
Exterior parts
Board and etc.
Maintenance
7.2
7. Other
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
47
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
No
Part name
☞ 71
38
PH Unit
☞ 71
39
Toner Hopper Unit
☞ 74
Toner Replenishing Drive Unit
☞ 74
41
Duplex Unit
☞ 76
42
Switch Back Unit
☞ 76
43
Scanner Motor
☞ 77
44
Exposure Lamp
☞ 79
Exposure Unit
☞ 78
46
Scanner Drive Cables
☞ 80
47
Main Motor
☞ 85
48
IU Motor
☞ 85
49
Fusing Unit Cooling Fan Motor
☞ 86
Toner Suction Fan Motor
☞ 86
51
Temperature/humidity Sensor
☞ 87
52
ATDC Sensor
☞ 87
53
Thermistor
☞ 89
54
Paper Exit Roll 1
☞ 91
Paper Exit Roll 2
☞ 91
Separation Claw
☞ 92
45
50
55
Unit
IR
Others
Fusing Unit
56
7.2.2
Cleaning parts list
No
Section
1
Bypass
Part name
Ref.Page
Feed Roller
☞ 94
Separation Roller
☞ 94
3
Feed Roller
☞ 95
4 Tray1
Pick-up Roller
☞ 96
5
Separation Roller
☞ 97
6
Feed Roller
☞ 98
7 Tray 2
Pick-up Roller
☞ 98
8
Separation Roller
☞ 99
9
Registration Roller
☞ 100
10 Transport
Paper Dust Remover
☞ 100
11
Transport Roller
☞ 100
12
Scanner rails
☞ 101
13
Bushings
☞ 101
14
Mirrors
☞ 101
Lens
☞ 102
16
Original Scanning Glass
☞ 102
17
Original Glass
☞ 102
18
Charge Neutralizing Plate
☞ 103
Ds Collar
☞ 103
2
15
19
48
Ref.Page
Manual Bypass Unit
40
Maintenance
Section
37
IR
Others
7.3
7. Other
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
7.3.1
IR Upper Left Cover/Original Scanning Glass/Front Holding Bracket/Original Glass
[6]
[7]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
4040F2C677DA
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove two Screws [1], and remove the IR Upper Left Cover [2].
Remove the Original Scanning Glass [3].
Remove two Screws [4], and remove the Front Holding Bracket [5].
Remove two Screws [6], and remove the Original Glass [7].
7.3.2
Lower Rear Cover/Lower Right Rear Cover/Tray Rear Cover
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
4040F2C661DA
1. Remove four Screws [1], and remove the Lower Rear Cover [2].
2. Remove two Screws [3], and remove the Lower Right Rear Cover [4].
49
Maintenance
[4]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
3. Remove the four screws [5], one
wave washer [6], and the Tray Rear
Cover [7].
[7]
CAUTION
• Make sure that the wave washer is
installed at the correct position.
[6]
[5]
7.3.3
4040F2C660DA
Upper Rear Cover
[2]
[3]
1. Remove three screws [1] and, pushing down the actuator [2], remove the
Upper Rear Cover [3].
Maintenance
[1]
4040F2C662DA
7.3.4
Rear Right Cover/Front Right Cover
[4]
[2]
[3]
[1]
4040F2C663DA
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Remove two Screws [1], and remove the Rear Right Cover [2].
3. Remove the Screws [3], and remove the Front Right Cover [4].
50
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
IR Right Cover/Rear Cover
[1]
bizhub 200/250/350
7.3.5
7. Other
[2]
[2]
[2]
[2]
[3]
1.
2.
☞
3.
4.
Maintenance
4040F2C664DA
Open the Right Door.
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Right Cover [1].
Remove thirteen Screws [2], and remove the Rear Cover [3].
7.3.6
[3]
Front Door
[2]
1. Open the Front Door [1].
2. Remove the screw [2], C-clip [3], and
the Front Door [1].
[1]
4040F2C665DA
51
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.7
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Paper Output Cover/Lower Front Cover
[3]
[2]
[1]
[2]
Maintenance
4040F2C575DA
1. Open the Front Door [1].
2. Remove three screws [2] and the Paper Output Cover [3].
3. Slide out the Tray 1.
4. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
[4]
[5]
4040F2C666DA
[6]
[6]
[7]
4040F2C668DA
52
5. Remove the Front Door.
☞ 51
6. Remove six screws [6] and the
Lower Front Cover [7].
7.3.8
7. Other
Upper Front Cover/Front Cover
1.
2.
☞
3.
[1]
Open the Right Door.
Remove the Front Right Cover.
50
Remove the screw [1] and the Upper
Front Cover [2].
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[2]
4040F2C667DA
Remove the Toner Hopper Unit.
74
Remove the Paper Output Cover.
52
Remove the Front Door.
51
Remove the Lower Front Cover.
52
[4]
8. Remove five screws [3] and the Front
Cover [4].
[3]
[3]
4040F2C669DA
53
Maintenance
4.
☞
5.
☞
6.
☞
7.
☞
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.9
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
IR Left Cover/Rear Left Cover/Left Cover
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5]
Maintenance
[4]
1.
☞
2.
3.
4.
☞
5.
☞
6.
54
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Left Cover [1].
Remove two screws [2] and the Rear Left Cover [3].
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
Remove the Paper Output Cover.
52
Remove three screws [4] and the Left Cover [5].
4040F2C670DA
7.3.10
7. Other
Rear Manual Bypass Cover/Front Manual Bypass Cover/Lower Right Cover
[4]
[5]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[2]
[3]
[1]
[6]
1.
2.
3.
☞
4.
Maintenance
4040F2C671DA
Remove two screws [1] and the Rear Manual Bypass Cover [2].
Remove the screw [3] and the Front Manual Bypass Cover [4].
Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
71
Remove two tabs [5] and the Lower Right Door Cover [6].
55
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.3.11
Control Panel
1. Remove two screw covers [1].
[1]
4040F2C592DA
2. Remove the four screws [2] on the
sides of the Control Panel.
[2]
4040F2C593DA
Maintenance
[2]
[4]
3. Disconnect the connector [3] and
remove the Control Panel [4].
[3]
4040F2C594DA
7.3.12
Tray 1
1. Slide out the Tray 1 [3].
2. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove the Tray 1
[3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
56
7.3.13
7. Other
Tray 2
1. Slide out the Tray 2 [1].
2. Remove the screw [2] and, holding
the stopper [3], remove the Tray 2
[1].
[3]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[2]
[1]
4040F2C589DA
1.
☞
2.
☞
Mechanical Control Board Cover
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
[2]
3. Remove five screws [1] and the
Mechanical Control Board Cover [2].
[1]
4040F2C561DA
[3]
[4]
4040F2C562DA
4. Unplug the all connectors.
5. Remove five screws [3] and the
Mechanical Control Board [4].
NOTE
• When replacing the Mechanical
Control Board, be sure to replace
the EEPROM.
☞ 110
• When the Mechanical Control Board
has been replaced with a new one,
check the ROM version and
upgrade the firmware to the latest
version.
☞ 42
57
Maintenance
7.3.14
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.15
1.
☞
2.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FD Paper Size Board 1
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
[2]
3. Remove five screws [1] and the
Mechanical Control Board Cover [2].
[1]
4040F2C561DA
4. Remove the Tray 1.
☞ 56
Maintenance
5. Disconnect two connectors (PJ23,
PJ24) [3] from the Mechanical Control Board.
[3]
4040F2C656DA
6. Remove two screws [4] and the LiftUp Assy [5].
[4]
[5]
4040F2C573DA
[6]
[7]
58
4040F2C572DA
7. Remove four tabs [6] and the FD
Paper Size Board Assy [7].
7.3.16
1.
☞
2.
☞
7. Other
FD Paper Size Board 2
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
[2]
3. Remove five screws [1] and the
Mechanical Control Board Cover [2].
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
Remove the Tray Rear Cover.
49
Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
49
Remove the Tray 2.
57
7. Disconnect two connectors (PJ25,
PJ26) [3] from the Mechanical Control Board.
[3]
4040F2C657DA
8. Remove two screws [4] and the LiftUp Assy [5].
[5]
[4]
4040F2C571DA
[6]
[7]
9. Remove four tabs [6] and the FD
Paper Size Board Assy [7].
4040F2C572DA
59
Maintenance
4040F2C561DA
4.
☞
5.
☞
6.
☞
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.17
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
5.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Power Supply Unit
Remove the Paper Output Cover.
52
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
Remove the Rear Left Cover.
54
Remove the Left Cover.
54
6. Remove seven screws [1] and the
Power Supply Unit Cover [2].
[1]
Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[1]
4040F2C599DA
7. Remove two screws [2] and the
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor [4].
[4]
[3]
4040F2C601DA
[6]
[6]
[7]
[6]
[6]
[5]
[5]
4040F2C602DA
60
8. Unplug seven connectors [5] and
remove three screws [6] and the
Power Supply Unit Assy [7].
CAUTION
• At reinstallation, make sure that the
harness is not slack.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Open the Right Door.
Remove the Imaging Unit.
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
Remove the Toner Suction Fan Motor.
86
6. Remove the screw [1] and unhook
two tabs [2] on the rear side surface.
Then, remove the Toner Suction
Duct [3].
[3]
[1]
Maintenance
1.
2.
3.
☞
4.
☞
5.
☞
High Voltage Unit
bizhub 200/250/350
7.3.18
7. Other
[2]
4040F2C672DA
[4]
[6]
7. Unplug the connector [4] and remove
two screws [5] and the High Voltage
Unit Cover [6].
[5]
4040F2C609DA
[7]
[9]
[7]
[7]
8. Unplug four connectors [7] and
remove two screws [8] and the High
Voltage Unit [9].
[7]
[8]
4040F2C610DA
61
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.19
1.
☞
2.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MFBS Board
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Right Cover.
51
3. Unplug the connector (CN7) [1].
[2]
NOTE
• If the Fax Kit is mounted, disconnect the two connectors (CN7 [1],
CN6 [2]).
[1]
4040F2C693DA
4. Remove three screws [3] and the
MFBS Board Assy [4].
Maintenance
[3]
[4]
4040F2C694DA
[5]
[6]
[5]
5. Remove five screws [5] and the
MFBS Board mounting bracket [6].
NOTE
• Remove the Hard Disk if one is
mounted.
4040F2C751DA
[10]
[8]
[9]
[7]
4040F2C752DA
62
6. Remove the stopper, RAMS Board
[7], and MEMS Board [8].
7. Remove the MFBS Board [9].
NOTE
• Remove the MEM Board [10] if
mounted in the expansion slot.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
[3]
[1]
[2]
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the flat cable [2], screw [3],
and the Inverter Board [4].
[4]
4040F2C695DA
Maintenance
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
Inverter Board
bizhub 200/250/350
7.3.20
7. Other
63
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.21
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
BCRS Board
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
5. Remove four screws [1], flat cable
[2], and the BCRS Board cover [3].
[2]
Maintenance
[3]
[1]
4040F2C696DA
6. Unplug eight connectors [3].
[3]
[3]
4040F2C697DA
[5]
[4]
[6]
4040F2C698DA
64
7. Remove three screws [4], disconnect
the connector [5], and remove the
BCRS Board [6].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
A.
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
CCD Unit
bizhub 200/250/350
7.3.22
7. Other
Replacing Procedure
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
[1]
[2]
4. Remove six screws [1] and the CCD
Unit Cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[6]
[7]
4040F2C676DA
5. Move the Exposure Unit, remove the
wiring saddle [3], and disconnect the
connector [4].
6. Remove two screws [5] and two flat
springs [6]. Then, remove the CCD
Unit [7].
NOTE
When the CCD Unit has been replaced
with a new one, make the installation
adjustment that must be made when
the CCD Unit is replaced.
☞ 65
B. Installation Adjustment to be Made when CCD Unit is Replaced
NOTE
• Make this adjustment only when the CCD Unit has been replaced with a new one.
• Before attempting to make this adjustment, make sure that registration and erase
adjustments for the printer have been completed.
• Do not loosen or remove the screws shown below.
4030D601AA
65
Maintenance
4040F2C675DA
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
1. Screw the three adjusting screws [2]
into the CCD Unit [1] only to half the
thread length of each screw.
4030D591AA
Maintenance
2. From the bottom side of the CCD
Unit, adjust the dimension of the
screw thread protrusion to 1.5 mm
(at three places).
4030D592AA
3.
4.
5.
6.
Using two screws and a flat spring, install the CCD Unit in position.
Fit two cables to the CCD Unit.
Using six screws, install the CCD Unit cover.
Install the Original Glass, Front Holding Bracket and IR Upper Left Cover.
NOTE
• The CCD Unit is to be adjusted through the subsequent procedures and there is
no need to tighten the screws of the Original Glass, Front Holding Bracket, and IR
Upper Left Cover.
4030D587AA
4030D589AA
66
7. Turn ON the main power switch.
8. If the setting in Scanner Registration
or Scanner Zoom Adjust available
from the Adjust mode has been
changed, set the function to 0 (zero)
or 1.000 (zoom ratio).
9. Prepare a test chart as shown on the
left and make a copy of it.
10. Measure tilt and deviation in the FD
direction of the produced copy as
compared with reference to the reference line in the FD direction of the
test chart.
11. If there is any tilt or deviation in the
FD direction, follow the steps given
below to make an adjustment using
screws A and B.
Tilt and FD Deviation
7. Other
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Adjustment Procedure Using Screws A and B
• If tilt or deviation in the FD direction is as shown on the left
A: Using an Allen wrench (3 mm), turn screw A counterclockwise.
B: Using an Allen wrench (3 mm), turn screw B clockwise.
B
* 1/4 turn of the screw results in deviation of 1 mm.
A
4030D594AA
B
A
Maintenance
4030D595AA
• If tilt or deviation in the FD direction is as shown on the left
A: Using an Allen wrench (3 mm), turn screw A counterclockwise.
B: Using an Allen wrench (3 mm), turn screw B clockwise.
B
* 1/4 turn of the screw results in deviation of 1 mm.
A
4030D593AA
B
A
4030D596AA
E
4030D590AA
12. Measure deviation in the CD direction of the produced copy as compared with reference to the reference
line in the CD direction of the test
chart.
13. If there is any deviation in the CD
direction, loosen screws C and D
and follow these steps to make an
adjustment using adjustment plate E.
67
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
CD Deviation
Adjustment Procedure Using Adjustment Plate E
• If deviation in the CD direction is as shown on the left
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn adjustment plate E counterclockwise.
Adjustment
plate
4030D597AA
Flat-blade
screwdriver
2. Tighten screws C and D.
Maintenance
• If deviation in the CD direction is as shown on the left
1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, turn adjustment plate E clockwise.
Adjustment
plate
4030D598AA
Flat-blade
screwdriver
2. Tighten screws C and D.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
68
Remove the CCD Unit cover.
Apply lock paint to adjusting screws A, B, C, and D.
Reinstall the CCD Unit cover.
Reinstall the Original Glass, Front Holding Bracket and IR Upper Left Cover.
Reinstall all covers that have been removed.
7.3.23
7. Other
Operation Board
1. Remove the Operation Panel.
☞ 56
[3]
[3]
[2]
2. Disconnect two connectors [1] and
remove three flat cables [2]
3. Remove two screws [3] and the
Operation Board 1 [4].
[4]
4040F2C758DA
[6]
4. Remove two screws [5] and the
Bracket [6].
Maintenance
[1]
[5]
4040F2C759DA
[7]
[8]
[7]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. Remove ten screws [7] and the
Operation Key Board 1 [8].
4040F2C760DA
6. Remove two screws [9], connector
[10], and the Operation Key Board 2
[11].
[11]
[10]
[9]
4040F2C761DA
69
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[13]
[14]
7. Remove the screw [12], two connectors [13], and the Operation Board 2
[14].
[12]
[13]
4040F2C762DA
8. Remove two screws [15] and the
Bracket [16].
[16]
[15]
4040F2C763DA
Maintenance
9. Remove two screws [17] and the
LCD Board Cover [18].
[18]
[17]
4040F2C764DA
10. Remove four screws [19] and the
LCD Board [20].
[20]
[19]
70
4040F2C765DA
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
Manual Bypass Unit
Remove the Rear Right Cover.
50
Remove the Lower Right Rear Cover.
49
Remove the Front Manual Bypass Cover.
55
Remove the Rear Manual Bypass Cover.
55
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
7.3.25
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
4.
☞
bizhub 200/250/350
7.3.24
7. Other
4040F2C574DA
5. Remove five screws [1] and ground
wire [2], disconnect the three connectors [3], and remove the Manual
Bypass Unit [4].
NOTE
• When the Manual Bypass Unit has
been mounted, be sure to perform
the Manual Bypass Unit Installation
Check procedures.
☞ 214
PH Unit
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
Open the Front Door.
Remove the Paper Output Cover.
52
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
5. Remove nine screws [1] and the PH
protective metal bracket [2].
4040F2C611DA
[3]
6. Remove two screws [3] and the
Paper Output Tray Rear Cover [4].
[4]
4040F2C612DA
71
Maintenance
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7. Other
bizhub 200/250/350
[5]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[6]
7. Remove four screws [5] and two harness protective metal brackets [6].
[6]
[5]
[5]
4040F2C613DA
8. Remove the harness from the cord
holder.
Maintenance
4040F2C614DA
[8]
9. Remove five screws [7] and the
Mechanical Control Board Cover [8].
[7]
4040F2C615DA
10. Remove two flat cables (PJ3, PJ35)
[9].
[9]
4040F2C674DA
[10]
[10]
[11]
4040F2C616DA
72
11. Remove three screws [10] and the
PH Unit [11].
7. Other
• When replacing the PH, install spacers according to the color of the labels affixed
to the PH.
Screw Position
PH label color
A
B
C
Green label
No spacer
No spacer
No spacer
Blue label
No spacer
0.1 mm spacer
0.2 mm spacer
Yellow label
0.2 mm spacer
0.1 mm spacer
No spacer
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
• Spacers Used
Part No.
Spacer Color
0.1 mm spacer
4030-2053-01
Black
0.2 mm spacer
4030-2054-01
White
Maintenance
• Should be screw installation position
[A]
[B]
[C]
4040F2C659DA
73
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.3.26
Toner Hopper Unit
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Remove the screw [1] and the Toner
Hopper Unit [2].
[1]
[2]
4040F2C568DA
Maintenance
7.3.27
1.
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
5.
☞
6.
☞
Toner Replenishing Drive Unit
Remove the Imaging Unit.
Remove the Front Door.
51
Remove the Paper Output Cover.
52
Open the Right Door.
Remove the Front Cover.
53
Remove the Lower Front Cover.
52
[1]
[2]
7. Remove five screws [1] and the toner
hopper protective metal bracket [2].
[1]
4040F2C603DA
[4]
8. Remove the screw [3] and the Toner
Hopper Unit [4].
[3]
4040F2C604DA
9. Close the right door and remove the
pressure spring [5].
NOTE
• Make sure that the right door is
kept closed.
[5]
4040F2C605DA
74
7. Other
10. Remove four screws [6] and the
imaging unit protective metal bracket
[7].
[6]
[6]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[7]
4040F2C606DA
11. Unplug two connectors [8] and
remove four screws [9] and the Toner
Hopper Assy [10].
[9]
[8]
[9]
[8]
[10]
4040F2C607DA
12. Remove the two screws [11] and disconnect the connector [12] from the
rear side surface.
[12]
[11]
4040F2C673DA
[14]
13. Remove two screws [13] and the
Toner Replenishing Drive Unit [14].
[13]
4040F2C624DA
75
Maintenance
[9]
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.3.28
Duplex Unit
1. Remove the Lower Right Rear Cover.
☞ 49
[3]
2. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the screw [2] and ground
wire [3].
[2]
[1]
4040F2C569DA
3. Remove four screws [4] and the
Duplex Unit [5].
Maintenance
[5]
[4]
4040F2C570DA
7.3.29
Switch Back Unit
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Remove the Rear Right Cover.
☞ 50
3. Remove the screw [1] and the Front
Right Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4040F2C560DA
4. Unplug two connectors [3] of the
Switch Back Unit.
[3]
4040F2C563DA
76
7. Other
[4]
[6]
5.
6.
7.
8.
Loosen the screw [4] in front.
Remove the screw [5] in front.
Loosen the screw [6] in the back.
Remove the screw [7] in the back.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[7]
[5]
4040F2C564DA
9. Remove the Switch Back Unit [8].
[8]
4040F2C565DA
[9]
Maintenance
10. Remove two screws [9] and the
lower Switch Back Unit [10].
[10]
4040F2C567DA
7.3.30
1.
☞
2.
☞
Scanner Motor
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Right Cover.
51
3. Remove ten wiring saddles [1] and
disconnect the connector [2].
[1]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
4040F2C699DA
77
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Remove the spring [3], two screws
[4] and the scanner motor [5].
[5]
[4]
[3]
4040F2C690DA
7.3.31
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
Exposure Unit
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Maintenance
4. Slide the Exposure Unit [1] to the
removal position.
[1]
4040F2C700DA
[5]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[2]
4040F2C701DA
78
5. Remove two screws [2].
6. Remove the screw [3] and the flat
cable [4].
7. Remove the flat cable [5] and the
Exposure Unit [6].
8. To reinstall, reverse the order of
removal.
NOTE
• If the Exposure Unit has been
removed, be sure to make the Scanner positioning adjustment.
☞ 212
7.3.32
7. Other
Exposure Lamp
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
[1]
4040F2C705DA
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Move the Exposure Unit [1] to the
removal position.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. Disconnect the connector [2] and
remove the Exposure Lamp harness
[3].
[3]
[2]
Maintenance
4040F2C709DA
• Reinstall the Exposure Lamp harness as follows.
Front View
Side View
Back View
4040F2C706DA
6. Remove the screw [4].
7. Slide the Exposure Lamp [5] to the
front and pull it off the holder [6].
[4]
[6]
[5]
4040F2C710DA
79
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.33
A.
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
5.
☞
6.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner Drive Cables
Removal Procedure
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Remove the Exposure Unit.
78
Remove the Scanner Motor.
77
7. Remove six screws [1] and the Original Cover hinge support [2].
Maintenance
[2]
[1]
[1]
4040F2C707DA
8. Remove the screw [3] and the Scanner Drive Gear [4] from the shaft.
[3]
[4]
4040F2C711DA
9.
[5]
[5]
Remove two screws [5] and the front
and rear pulleys.
4040F2C712DA
[6]
[7]
4040F2C713DA
80
10. Remove the bearing [6] and shaft
[7].
11. Remove the Scanner Drive Cables
from each hook.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7. Other
Rear
bizhub 200/250/350
B. Reinstallation Procedure
<General View>
Pulley E
Pulley D
Pulley G
Scanner Drive Cable 4
Pulley H
Pulley F
Pulley C
Scanner Drive Cable 2
Scanner Drive Cable 3
Pulley A
Pulley B
Front
[1]
[2]
4040F2C714DA
<Front>
1. Position the round bead [1] of the
Scanner Drive Cable in the slit [2] in
the pulley.
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly
rests in the slit in the pulley.
4040F2C715DA
2. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 1 [3]
around the pulley four turns counterclockwise, from the rear toward the
front side.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable
rides on the other.
[3]
4040F2C716DA
[4]
3. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 2 four
turns clockwise from the front to the
rear side. Then, secure the cable
with tape.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable
rides on the other.
4040F2C717DA
81
Maintenance
Scanner Drive Cable 1
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
<Rear>
4. Position the round bead [5] of the
Scanner Drive Cable in the slit [6] in
the pulley.
NOTE
• Make sure that the bead snugly
rests in the slit in the pulley.
bizhub 200/250/350
[5]
[6]
4040F2C718DA
5. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 3 [7]
around the pulley four turns counterclockwise, from the rear toward the
front side.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable
rides on the other.
[7]
Maintenance
4040F2C719DA
6. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 4 [8] four
turns clockwise from the rear to the
front side. Then, secure the cable
with tape.
NOTE
• Make sure that no part of the cable
rides on the other.
[8]
4040F2C720DA
[10]
[9]
[12]
[11]
7. Install two pulleys (front and rear) [9]
to the shaft.
8. Attach two bushings [10] to the shaft.
4040F2C721DA
9. Secure the front and rear pulleys [11]
using one screw each [12].
[12]
[11]
4040F2C722DA
82
7. Other
10. Attach the Drive Gear [13] using one
screw.
NOTE
• Allow a clearance of about 0.1 mm
between the Drive Gear and bushing.
[13]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F2C757DA
11. Mount the Scanner Motor Assy.
☞ 77
<Front>
12. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 2 around
pulley D [14] and pulley B [15], hook
the fixing bead to the fixing spring
[16], and then hook the spring to the
catch [17] in the frame.
[14]
[15]
Maintenance
[17]
[16]
4040F2C723DA
13. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 1 around
pulley A [18] and pulley C [19] and
hook the bead to the side surface
[20] of the Scanner Frame.
[19]
[18]
[20]
4040F2C724DA
<Rear>
14. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 4 around
pulley E [21] and pulley G [22] and
hook the fixing bead to the fixing
spring [23], and then hook the spring
to the catch [24] in the frame.
[21]
[24]
[22]
[23]
4040F2C725DA
83
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
15. Wind Scanner Drive Cable 3 around
pulley H [25] and pulley F [26] and
hook the bead to the side surface
[27] of the Scanner Frame.
[26]
[25]
[27]
4040F2C726DA
16. Remove the pulley tape.
Maintenance
17. Mount the cable to the Exposure Unit
[28].
[28]
4040F2C727DA
18. Readjust the position of the Exposure Unit.
☞ 212
84
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
Main Motor
bizhub 200/250/350
7.3.34
7. Other
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
Remove the Rear Right Cover.
50
4. Remove two screws [1] and the
Ozone Filter Assy [2].
[2]
[1]
5. Remove four screws [3], disconnect
the connector [4], and remove the
Main Motor [5].
[5]
[3]
[4]
[3]
7.3.35
1.
☞
2.
☞
4040F2C618DA
IU Motor
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
3. Remove four screws [1], disconnect
the connector [2], and remove the IU
Motor [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
[1]
4040F2C619DA
85
Maintenance
4040F2C617DA
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.3.36
1.
☞
2.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Fusing Unit Cooling Fan Motor
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
3. Remove three wiring saddles [1] and
disconnect the connector (PJ33) [2].
[2]
[1]
4040F2C622DA
Maintenance
[4]
[3]
4. Remove two screws [3] and the Fusing Unit Cooling Fan Motor [4].
[3]
4040F2C623DA
7.3.37
1.
☞
2.
☞
Toner Suction Fan Motor
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
3. Remove two screws [1] and two wiring saddles [2], disconnect the connector [3], and remove the Toner
Suction Fan Motor [4].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
86
[1]
4040F2C621DA
7.3.38
1.
☞
2.
☞
7. Other
Temperature/humidity Sensor
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
3. Disconnect the connector [1], widen
the two tabs [2], and remove the
Temperature/humidity Sensor [3].
[2]
[1]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
[2]
4040F2C620DA
7.3.39
ATDC Sensor
Maintenance
1. Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Counter] → [Special Parts Counter] → [Developer] and
clear the counter.
2. Turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE
• Clear the counter before removing the IU.
• After clearing the counter, be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
3. Open the Right Door.
4. Remove the Imaging Unit [1].
[1]
4040F2C555DA
[2]
[3]
5. Remove four screws (silver) [2] and
disassemble the Photo Conductor
Unit [3] and the Developing Unit [4].
[4]
[2]
4040F2C556DA
6. Remove three screws [5] and the
Developer Scattering Prevention
Plate [6].
[6]
[5]
4040F2C579DA
87
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7. Remove the Toner Supply Port [7].
[7]
4040F2C580DA
8. Remove the developer [8].
[8]
Maintenance
4040F2C581DA
4040F2C582DA
Removal of the Developer
• Dump the developer on the Sleeve
Roller by rotating the gear in the
direction of the arrow.
• If you rotate the gear in reverse,
mylar for cleaning the ATDC Sensor
• Dump developer until almost no
developer sticks to the Sleeve
Roller.
9. Remove two screws [9] and open the
Cover [10].
[10]
[9]
4040F2C745DA
[13]
[12]
[11]
4040F2C746DA
88
10. Remove two screws [11], disconnect
the connector [12], and remove the
ATDC Sensor [13].
11. Add developer.
☞ 34
7.3.40
7. Other
Thermistor
1. Remove the Fusing Unit.
☞ 37
2. Snap off the C-clip [1] and remove
the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate [2].
[1]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[2]
4040F2C625DA
[4]
3. Remove two shoulder screws [3], the
screw [4], and the Exit Rolls 2 Assy
[5].
Maintenance
[3]
[3]
[5]
4040F2C643DA
4. Remove the wiring saddle [6] and
the harness.
[6]
4040F2C730DA
5. Disconnect the connector [7] of the
Exit Sensor and remove the Exit
Rolls 2 Assy [8].
[8]
[7]
4040F2C431DA
89
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Bracket
[9]
[9]
Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor side
Fusing Roller Thermistor side
Maintenance
4040F2E753DA
6. Press the Thermistor Holding/Check Jig [9] up against the bracket and fix it in position.
CAUTION
• Press the Thermistor Holding/
Check Jig squarely so as to eliminate no gap between the bracket
that supports the thermistor and
the jig.
4040F2C733DA
7. Remove two screws [10], the Fusing
Roller Thermistor [11], and Fusing
Roller Sub Thermistor [12].
[11]
[12]
[10]
90
4040F2C732DA
Precautions for mounting the thermistors
• When reinstalling the thermistors,
use the Thermistor Holding/Check
Jig.
• After installation, use the jig to
make sure that the bracket is not
bent.
7.3.41
7. Other
Paper Exit Roll 1
1. Remove the Fusing Unit.
☞ 37
[2]
[1]
2. Remove four screws [1] and four Exit
Rolls 1 Assy [2].
4040F2C641DA
Maintenance
3. Remove the Exit Roll 1 [3].
[3]
4040F2C642DA
7.3.42
Paper Exit Roll 2
1. Remove the Fusing Unit.
☞ 37
2. Snap off the C-clip [1] and remove
the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate [2].
[1]
[2]
4040F2C625DA
[4]
3. Remove two shoulder screws [3], the
screw [4], and the Exit Rolls 2 Assy
[5].
[3]
[5]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
4040F2C643DA
91
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
4. Remove the wiring saddle [6] and
the harness.
[6]
4040F2C730DA
5. Disconnect the connector [7] of the
Exit Sensor and remove the Exit
Rolls 2 Assy [8].
[8]
[7]
Maintenance
4040F2C431DA
[10]
6. Remove the screw [9] and the Separation Claw Assy [10].
[9]
4040F2C644DA
7. Remove the Exit Roll 2 [11].
[11]
4040F2C645DA
7.3.43
Separation Claw
1. Remove the Fusing Unit.
☞ 37
2. Snap off the C-clip [1] and remove
the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate [2].
[1]
[2]
4040F2C625DA
92
7. Other
[4]
3. Remove two shoulder screws [3], the
screw [4], and the Exit Rolls 2 Assy
[5].
[3]
[3]
[5]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F2C643DA
4. Remove the wiring saddle [6] and
the harness.
[6]
5. Disconnect the connector [7] of the
Exit Sensor and remove the Exit
Rolls 2 Assy [8].
[8]
[7]
4040F2C431DA
[10]
6. Remove the screw [9] and the Separation Claw Assy [10].
[9]
4040F2C644DA
[12]
[13]
[11]
7. Remove four springs [11], the shaft
[12], and four Separation Claws [13].
4040F2C747DA
93
Maintenance
4040F2C730DA
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cleaning procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
7.4.1
Manual Bypass Feed Roller
1. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
2. Remove two screws [1] and the Manual Bypass Separation Fixing
Bracket Assy [2].
[2]
[1]
4037F2C515DA
Maintenance
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Manual Bypass
Feed Roller [3] clean of dirt.
[3]
7.4.2
4037F2C516DA
Manual Bypass Separation Roller
1. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
2. Remove two screws [1] and the Manual Bypass Separation Fixing
Bracket Assy [2].
[2]
[1]
4037F2C515DA
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Manual Bypass
Separation Roller [3] clean of dirt.
[3]
94
4037F2C521DA
7.4.3
7. Other
Tray 1 Feed Roller
1. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove the Tray 1
[3].
[2]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
2. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
[4]
Maintenance
[5]
4040F2C509DA
3. Unplug the connector [6].
4. Remove two screws [7] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C510DA
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Tray 1 Feed Roller
[9] clean of dirt.
[9]
4040F2C511DA
95
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.4.4
Tray 1 Pick-up Roller
1. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove the Tray 1
[3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
2. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
Maintenance
[5]
[4]
4040F2C509DA
3. Remove the connector [6].
4. Remove two screws [7] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C510DA
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Tray 1 Pick-up
Roller [9] clean of dirt.
[9]
4040F2C516DA
96
7.4.5
7. Other
Tray 1 Separation Roller
1. Remove the screw [1] and, holding
the stopper [2], remove the Tray 1
[3].
[2]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[3]
4040F2C508DA
2. Remove two screws [4] and the Connector Cover [5].
[4]
Maintenance
[5]
4040F2C509DA
3. Remove the connector [6].
4. Remove two screws [7] and the Tray
1 Feed Roller Assy [8].
[6]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C510DA
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Tray 1 Separation
Roller [9] clean of dirt.
[9]
4040F2C519DA
97
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.4.6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Tray 2 Feed Roller
1. Slide out the Tray 2.
2. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
3. Remove the Lower Right Cover [1].
[1]
4040F2C524DA
Maintenance
[2]
4. Remove two connectors [2].
5. Remove three screws [3] and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
4040F2C595DA
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Feed Roller
[5] clean of dirt.
[5]
4040F2C525DA
7.4.7
Tray 2 Pick-up Roller
1. Slide out the Tray 2.
2. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
3. Remove the Lower Right Cover [1].
[1]
4040F2C524DA
98
7. Other
[2]
4. Remove two connectors [2].
5. Remove three screws [3] and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [4].
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
[4]
[3]
4040F2C595DA
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Pick-up
Roller [5] clean of dirt.
[5]
7.4.8
Maintenance
4040F2C532DA
Tray 2 Separation Roller
1. Slide out the Tray 2.
2. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
3. Remove the Lower Right Cover [1].
[1]
4040F2C524DA
[2]
4. Remove two connectors [2].
5. Remove three screws [3] and the
Tray 2 Feed Roller Assy [4].
[3]
[4]
[3]
4040F2C595DA
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Tray 2 Separation
Roller [5] clean of dirt.
[5]
4040F2C535DA
99
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.4.9
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Registration Roller
1. Remove the Paper Dust Remover
☞ 31
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Registration Roller
[5] clean of dirt.
[1]
4040F2C543DA
7.4.10
Paper Dust Remover
1. Open the Right Door [1].
Maintenance
[1]
4040F2C540DA
2. Remove the Paper Dust Remover
[2].
[2]
4040F2C541DA
3. Using a brush, whisk dust and dirt off
the Paper Dust Remover [3].
[3]
4040F2C542DA
7.4.11
Transport Roller
1. Open the Lower Right Door [1].
2. Using a brush, whisk dust and dirt off
the Transport Roller [2].
[2]
[1]
100
4040F2C550DA
7.4.12
7. Other
Scanner Rails
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
[1]
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
Bushings
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Remove the Exposure Unit.
78
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Bushings [1] clean
of dirt.
[1]
[1]
4040F2C702DA
7.4.14
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
NOTE
• When installing the Exposure Unit,
be sure to perform scanner position
adjustment.
☞ 212
Mirrors
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Mirrors [1] clean of
dirt.
[1]
[1]
4040F2C576DA
101
Maintenance
7.4.13
4040F2C704DA
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Scanner Rails [1]
clean of dirt.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.4.15
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Lens
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
[1]
[2]
4. Remove six screws [1] and the CCD
Unit Cover [2].
[1]
[1]
4040F2C675DA
Maintenance
5. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Lens [3] clean of
dirt.
[3]
4040F2C703DA
7.4.16
Original Scanning Glass
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Original Scanning
Glass [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
4040F2C551DA
7.4.17
Original Glass
[1]
4040F2C552DA
102
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Original Glass [1]
clean of dirt.
7.4.18
7. Other
Charge Neutralizing Plate
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Wipe the Charge Neutralizing Plate
[1] clean of dirt with a cloth.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
4040F2C553DA
7.4.19
Ds Collar
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
NOTE
• Clear the PC Life counter before removing the IU.
• After clearing the PC counter, be sure to turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
2. Open the Right Door.
3. Remove the Imaging Unit [1].
Maintenance
[1]
4040F2C555DA
[2]
[3]
4. Remove four screws (silver) [2] and
disassemble the Photo Conductor
Unit [3] and the Developing Unit [4].
[4]
[2]
4040F2C556DA
5. Remove three screws [5] and the
Developer Scattering Prevention
Plate [6].
[6]
[5]
4040F2C579DA
103
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
[9]
[9]
4040F2C588DA
Maintenance
7. Turn ON the main power switch.
104
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Ds Collar [9] clean
of dirt.
NOTE
• Make sure the alcohol does not
touch the Developer Roller.
7.5
Mount Kit MK-709
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
3. Remove five screws [1] and Mechanical Control Board Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4040F2C561DA
4. Remove the ferrite core (black) [3].
Maintenance
1.
☞
2.
☞
7. Other
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
4040F2C734DA
[5]
[4]
4040F2C735DA
[8]
[7]
5. Remove the Connector [4].
6. Remove two screws [5], shield
clamp, and harness.
NOTE
• When the connector is to be connected, plug the side of the harness, around which red tape is
wound, in the connector (PJ38) of
the Mechanical Control Board.
7. Remove the Connector [6].
8. Remove two screws [7] and the
Mount Kit Assy [8].
[6]
4040F2C736DA
[9]
[10]
[11]
9. Remove four screws [9], two shoulder screws [10], and the Mount Kit
Board [11].
[9]
4040F2C737DA
105
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.6
Option counter
7.6.1
1.
☞
2.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Installation method for the Key Counter
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the IR Right Cover.
51
3. Install the spacer [2] using two
screws [1].
4. Fold the sheet [3] in half.
5. Insert the edge of the sheet having
no holes between the harness [4]
and the Key Counter Mounting
Bracket [5].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[5]
Maintenance
[4]
[3]
4040F2C738DA
6. Peel off the tape [6] from the sheet.
7. Align threaded holes in the sheet
with those in the Key Counter Mounting Bracket. Then, affix the folded
halves together so as to sandwich
the Mounting Bracket.
[6]
4040F2C739DA
8. Remove the knockout [7] from the IR
Right Cover.
9. Pass the Key Counter Harness [8]
through the IR Right Cover.
10. Reinstall the IR Right Cover.
[7]
[8]
4040F2C740DA
106
7. Other
[10]
11. Using three screws [9], secure the
Counter Mounting Bracket [10].
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[9]
4040F2C741DA
12. Connect the Key Counter Socket
connector.
13. Using two screws [11], secure the
counter socket [12].
Maintenance
[12]
[11]
4040F2C742DA
14. Using two screws [13], secure the
Key Counter Cover [14].
[14]
[13]
4040F2C744DA
107
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.7
7.7.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Original Size Detecting Sensors
Original Size Detecting Sensor Layout
A. For U.S.
: Standard
: Option
PC206
: Not Used
PC207
PC201
PC205
PC202
PC204
PC203
4040F2E754DA
B. For Europe and Others
Maintenance
: Standard
: Option
PC206
PC207
PC201
PC205
PC202
PC204
PC203
4040F2E755DA
108
7.7.2
7. Other
Mounting of the Original Size Detecting Sensors (Option)
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
5.
6.
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Mount the Original Size Detecting Sensor (option).
Reinstall all parts which have been removed.
Select the functions as follows: Tech. Rep. Mode → [System Input] → [Original Size
Detecting Option]. Then, change the setting for Original Size Detecting Option from
[No] to [Yes].
7. Select the Tech. Rep. Mode → [Function] → [F7-1].
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8. Stack five sheets of blank A3 paper on the Original Glass.
9. Press the Start key to perform automatic adjustment by the Original Size Detecting
Sensor
10. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
NOTE
• The Start key remains lit up orange while this function is being run and lights up
green as soon as the sequence is completed.
109
Maintenance
NOTE
• Select [F7-2] if the Fax Kit is mounted.
bizhub 200/250/350
7. Other
7.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
EEPROM
7.8.1
Remounting of the EEPROM
NOTE
• When the Mechanical Control Board is replaced with a new one, be sure to
demount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the old Mechanical Control Board and mount it
on the new Mechanical Control Board.
1.
☞
2.
☞
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
[2]
3. Remove five screws [1] and Mechanical Control Board Cover [2].
Maintenance
[1]
4040F2C561DA
4. Unplug the all connectors.
5. Remove five screws [3] and Mechanical Control Board [4].
[3]
[4]
4040F2C562DA
6. Demount the EEPROM (IC3A) from
the new Mechanical Control Board.
7. Mount the EEPROM (IC3A) from the
old Mechanical Control Board to the
new Mechanical Control Board.
A
A
4040F2C501DA
110
NOTE
• Note the alignment notch on the
EEPROM (IC3A) when mounting the
IC.
8. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting
8.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
111
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.
9.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Utility/Counter Mode
Utility/Counter Mode function tree
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Utility/Counter
User Setting *1
User's Choice
1/6
Mixed Original Detection
Language Selection
Measurement Unit Setting
Machine Authentication PW Change *1
2/6
Default Setting Simplex/Duplex
Auto Paper/Auto Zoom
PriorityTray
Special Paper Setting
Zoom Ratio for Combine Booklets
3/6
Low Power Mode
Sleep Mode
LCD Back-Light OFF
Auto Reset
Auto Reset when Account is changed
4/6
4in1 Copy Order
Adjustment / Setting
Default Quality/Density Modes
Default Copy Density Levels
Print Density
Default Finishing Mode
5/6
Sort/Non-Sort Auto Change
Output Tray Settings *1
Auto Paper Select for Small Original
Dehumidify Scanner
Crease/Center Staple *1
6/6
Default Screen
Default LCD Screen
Default Device
Default E-Mail Screen
Image Quality (ADF)
E-mail Input *2 *3
One-Touch
Index
E-Mail Program *2
Domain Name
Bulletin *1
Conf. Box *1
Store Overlay
*1
4040F3E544DA
112
User Management
9. Utility/Counter Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Confirmation Beep
Alarm Volume
Line Monitor Sound *1 *3
Job Complete Beep
Panel Cleaning
Dehumidify
Toner Supply
Memory RX ON/OFF *3
POP3 RX *3
Admin.1
Initial Setting
Date & Time Setting
Language for Communication *3
Self-Telephone # information *1 *3
TSI Registration *3
Self-ID *1 *3
Admin. Set
Administrator Code Input
Max. Copy Sets
Disable Sleep Mode
Restrict One-Touch Editing *3
Call Remote Center *1
Account/User
Auth.
General
Settings
User Authentication ON/OFF
Account Track ON/OFF
Allow Print without
Authentication
Account Data
User Auth. Setting
TX Settings *3
Quality/Mode
Default Density
Default Density
Communication Mode
Comm. Menu
TX
TSI
Rotation TX
2-Sided TX
Retry *2
Number of auto retrys*2
Auto-retry Interval *2
RX Settings *3
Memory RX
Time Setting
Memory Lock Time
Memory Lock
Password
Confidential RX User Box Delete *1
4040F3E545DA
113
Adjustment / Setting
Admin.
Management
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
FAX Setting *1 *3
Number Display
Number Display
Function 1
Number Display
Function 2
Number Display
Call Rejection
Setting
Dial-In Settings
Dial-In Function 1
Dial-In Function 2
RX Functions
Reception Mode
Numbers of RX
Call Rings
Password
Communication
Print Lists *3
Setting List
Report Settings *3
TX Report
Communication
Password
Activity Report
Document Management *3
TX Document
RX Document
Admin. 2
Network Setting
Basic Settings
Adjustment / Setting
DNS Settings
Machine Name
SMTP Settings
POP3 Settings
Mail/Scan Settings
Scanner Settings
LDAP Setting
Frame Type Set
IP Relay Settings *1 *3
Prefix/Suffix Settings *1
Printer Setting
Timeout
Software SW
Ping
Delete Job *3
SSL/TLS
4040F3E546DA
114
Reports
9. Utility/Counter Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
TX Report
RX Report
One-Touch List
Mail Program List *3
Bulletin List *1 *3
Confidential List *1 *3
Printer Setting
MFP Set
Proof Print Hold Time
Overwrite A4
Lettwe
Document Hold Time
PostScript Error Report
Default Set
Basic
Tray
Paper Size
Original Direction
Print Method
# of Sets
Font
Font #
Symbol Set
Number Lines
Adjustment / Setting
Font Size
CR/LF Mapping
PDL Set
Test Print
Check Detail
4040F3E547DA
NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
• *1: Become available on the screen if a corresponding option is mounted or
depending on the setting made.
• *2: Key names are different if the Fax Kit FK-503 is mounted.
• *3: For more details, see the FK-503 manual.
• If HD-504 is not mounted, [User’s Choice] is directly shown.
115
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.2
9.2.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Utility/Counter Mode function setting procedure
Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. The Utility/Counter mode screen will appear.
4040F3E540DA
9.2.2
Exiting
• Touch the [Enter] key.
Adjustment / Setting
9.2.3
Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions
• Use the +/- key to enter or change the setting value.
• Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press
the Clear key before making an entry.)
116
9.3
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Settings in the User Setting
9.3.1
User’s Choice 1/6
A. Mixed Original Detection
Functions
• To set whether or not the Mixed Original Detection function is selected when the screen
shifts to the initial one.
Use
• To set Mixed Original Detection as the default.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
“OFF”
B. Language Selection
Functions
Use
• To select the language of the Touch Panel messages.
• To change the language of the control panel display to the corresponding language.
• Select the language, and then touch [Enter] to set the language.
Setting/
Procedure
<For U.S.>
Japanese
“English”
French
Spanish
<For Europe>
Japanese
German
“English”
Italian
French
Spanish
C. Measurement Unit Setting
• To select the unit displayed on the LCD display.
• Available only in machines for U.S.
Use
• To change the unit displayed on the control panel.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Inch (Fraction)”.
“Inch (Num. Value)”
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
Inch (Fraction)
D. Machine Authentication PW Change
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• The password entered for machine authentication with user authentication can be
changed.
• Available only when the machine authentication setting is made.
[Current Password]: Type in the currently specified machine authentication password.
[New Password]: Type in the new machine authentication password.
[Confirm New Password]: Type in the new machine authentication password again for
confirmation.
117
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
User’s Choice 2/6
A. Default Setting Simplex/Duplex
Functions
• To set the default copy mode selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
Use
• To change the default copy mode selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
• The default setting is “1 → 1” if “Simplex/Duplex” is “Simplex & Duplex” that is accessed
by the following: Tech. Rep. Mode → [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [System Set] → Simplex/
Duplex.
Setting/
Procedure
1→2
2→2
1→1
• The default setting is “1 → 2” if “Simplex/Duplex” is “Duplex Only” that is accessed by
the following: Tech. Rep. Mode → [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [System Set] → Simplex/
Duplex.
1→2
2→2
B. Auto Paper/Auto Zoom
Functions
• To set the default Auto mode selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
Use
• To change the default Auto mode selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Auto Paper Select”.
“Auto Paper Select”
Auto Zoom
Manual
Adjustment / Setting
C. Priority Tray
Functions
• To select the priority paper source that is selected when the copier is set to [Auto Size]
or [Manual].
Use
• To set a priority paper source.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Tray 1”.
“Tray 1”
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
D. Special Paper Setting
Functions
• To specify the type of paper used in each paper Tray.
Use
• To set the type of paper used in each paper Tray.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Normal”.
“Normal”
1-Sided only
Recycled
Special Paper
E. Zoom Ratio for Combine Booklets
Functions
• To select whether or not to call up an optimum zoom ratio automatically when the 2in1,
4in1, or Booklet function is selected.
Use
• To set so as to call up an optimum zoom ratio automatically when the 2in1, 4in1, or
Booklet function is selected.
• The default setting is “Recall”.
Setting/
Procedure
118
“Recall”
Do Not Recall
• 4in1: ×0.500
• 2in1/Booklet: ×0.647 <For U.S.>
2in1/Booklet: ×0.707 <For Europe>
9.3.3
9. Utility/Counter Mode
User’s Choice 3/6
A. Low Power Mode
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set the time until Low Power starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
• Low Power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption.
• To change the time until Low Power starts.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
• Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.
• The default setting is “15 min.”
“15 min.” (10 to 240)
B. Sleep Mode
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set the time until Sleep Mode starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
• Turn all lines OFF except 3.3 V line for Control.
• “OFF” will only be displayed when “Disable Sleep Mode” in Admin. Management is set.
• To change the time until the Sleep Mode starts.
• Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.
• The default setting is “15 min.”
“15 min” (1 to 240)
OFF
Functions
• To set the time until LCD Back-Light OFF starts operating after the last key operation
has been completed.
Use
• To change the time until LCD Back-Light OFF starts operating after the last key operation has been completed.
Setting/
Procedure
• Use the 10-Key Pad for setting.
• The default setting is “1 min.”
“1 min” (1 to 240)
D. Auto Reset
Functions
• To set the time until Auto Reset starts operating after the last key operation has been
completed.
• Auto Reset: Resets the panel to the default settings.
Use
• To change the time until Auto Reset starts operating after the last key operation has
been completed.
• The default setting is “1 min.”
Setting/
Procedure
30 seconds
3 min
“1 min”
5 min
2 min
OFF
119
Adjustment / Setting
C. LCD Back-Light OFF
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
E. Auto Reset when Account is changed
Functions
• To set so that the screen changes to the initial one when the Plug-in Counter is
removed, a Data Controller card is removed, or the administrator access code is
entered to access the Admin. Management mode.
Use
• To select not to allow the screen to change to the initial one even when the users are
changed as they use a machine for account management.
Setting/
Procedure
9.3.4
• The default setting is “ON”
“ON”
OFF
User’s Choice 4/6
A. 4in1 Copy Order
Functions
• To select the layout of copied images when a 4in1 Copy setting is selected.
Use
• To change the layout of copied images when a 4in1 Copy setting is selected.
• The default setting is the following layout of copied images.
Setting/
Procedure
1
2
1
3
3
4
2
4
Default
Adjustment / Setting
B. Default Quality/Density Modes
Functions
• To set the default image density and image quality selected when the screen shifts to
the initial one.
Use
• To change the default image density and image quality selected when the screen shifts
to the initial one.
<Density>
• The default setting is “Auto”.
“Auto”
Setting/
Procedure
Manual
<Original Type>
• The default setting is “Text”
“Text”
Dot Matrix
Photo
Text & Photo
C. Default Copy Density Levels
Functions
• To set the default image density level when the Auto or Manual Exposure is selected.
Use
• To change the default image density level when the Auto or Manual Exposure is
selected.
When “Auto” is selected:
• The default setting is “Std.”
Setting/
Procedure
Lighter
“Std.”
When “Manual” is selected:
• The default setting is “EXP5”
EXP1 (Light) through EXP9 (Dark)
120
Darker
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Functions
bizhub 200/250/350
D. Print Density
• To specify the default print density.
Use
• To change the default print density.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “0”.
-2
-1
0
1
2
E. Default Finishing Mode
Functions
Use
• To set the default finishing mode selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
• The contents of the display vary depending on the types of finishing options mounted
on the machine.
• To change the default finishing mode selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
• The default setting is “Non-Sort”.
Setting/
Procedure
9.3.5
“Non-Sort”
Corner Staple
Sort
Group
2 Staples
User’s Choice 5/6
A. Sort/Non-Sort Auto Change
• To select whether to enable or disable the function that automatically switches between
[Sort] and [Non- Sort] according to the number of originals and the number of copy sets
to be made.
Use
• To set so as to enable the function that automatically switches between [Sort] and
[Non-Sort] according to the number of originals and the number of copy sets to be
made.
Setting/
Procedure
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
B. Output Tray Settings
(1) Copier/Printer
Functions
Use
• To specify the output tray for copies and computer printouts when output options are
mounted on the copier.
• The screen that appears differs depending on the options that are mounted on the
copier.
• To change the output tray for copies and computer printouts.
<Printer>
• The default setting is “1”.
“1”
Setting/
Procedure
2
(3)
<Copies>
• The default setting is “2”; or “1” if the Mailbin Kin is mounted.
(“1”)
“2”
3
* ( ): when the Mailbin Kit is mounted
121
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C. Auto Paper Select for Small Original
Functions
• To set whether or not to specify the paper tray when an original, whose size falls outside the detectable range, is loaded or no originals are loaded at all with the [Auto
Paper Select] setting selected.
Use
• [Copy]: Enables copying by using the priority paper source.
• [Prohibit Copy]: Displays a screen prompting the user to select the paper source.
• The default setting is “Copy”.
Setting/
Procedure
“Copy”
Prohibit Copy
• If “Copy” is selected, the copy can be made after a paper source is selected.
D. Dehumidify Scanner
Functions
• To set the time at which the Scanner is dehumidified in order to prevent dew condensations from being formed on the Scanner.
• Becomes available when the corresponding Tech. Rep. Mode function is set.
Use
• To change the time at which the Scanner is dehumidified.
Setting/
Procedure
• The 10-Key Pad is used for setting the time.
Hour: 00 to 24
Minute: 00 to 59
Adjustment / Setting
E. Crease/Center Staple
Functions
• To specify the folding position when the [Crease] setting is selected.
• To specify the binding position when the [Corner Staple] setting is selected.
• Available only when the options mounted.
Use
• To adjust the folding position of the [Crease] function and the binding position of the
[Center Staple] function.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Select [Crease/Center Staple].
2. Select the paper size.
3. Adjust the position of crease and center staple.
<Crease>
• The default setting is “0”
-10 to +10
<Center Staple>
• The default setting is “0”
-10 to +10
122
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
User’s Choice 6/6
bizhub 200/250/350
9.3.6
9. Utility/Counter Mode
A. Default Screen
(1) Default LCD Screen
Functions
• To set the default screen selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
Use
• To change the default screen selected when the screen shifts to the initial one.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Copy”
“Copy”
E-mail
(2) Default E-Mail Screen
Functions
• To set the default screen selected when the Scanner is selected.
Use
• To change the default screen selected when the Scanner is selected.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “One-Touch”
“One-Touch”
Search
Address Input
Index
B. Default Device
Functions
• To set the mainly used function.
Use
• To change the mainly used function.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Copy”
“Copy”
Printer
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Adjustment / Setting
C. Image Quality (ADF)
• To adjust the copy image density level when the ADF is being used.
• Mode 1: When a standard original (text, etc.) is used
• Mode 2: To improve the reproduction of a faint original.
• To change the copy image density level when the ADF is being used.
• The default setting is “Mode 1”
Mode1 (for black lines): “
"
Mode2 (standard):
123
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.3.7
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Store Overlay
NOTE
• Available only when the HD-504 is mounted.
A. Set
Functions
• To store an image to be called up in overlay.
Use
• To store image in the Hard Disk.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Setting/
Procedure
Place the original to be stored for overlay.
Press the Utility/Counter key.
Touch [User Setting] and then [Store Overlay].
Touch [Set] and select the number key, in which the image is to be stored.
Select the size of the range to be read.
Touch [Auto Detect] to let the machine automatically detect the reading range according to the image of the original.
7. Touch [Custom Size]. Then, a screen that prompts the user to enter an irregular size
will appear. Touch [X] or [Y], enter the value from the 10-Key Pad, and touch [Enter].
8. Touch the [Enter].
9. Select the orientation of the original.
Portrait: "
"
Landscape:
10.Press the Start key.
Adjustment / Setting
B. Delete
Functions
• To delete an image that has previously been stored.
Use
• To delete an image that has previously been stored in the Hard Disk.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch [User Setting] and then [Store Overlay].
3. Touch [Delete] and select the number key, in which the image to be deleted is stored.
C. Check
Functions
• To check the image that has previously been stored by having it printed.
Use
• To check the image that has previously been stored in the Hard Disk.
Setting/
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
124
Press the Utility/Counter key.
Touch [User Setting] and then [Store Overlay].
Touch [Set] and select the number key, in which the image to be checked is stored.
Select paper and press the Start key.
9.4
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Settings in the User Management
9.4.1
Functions
Confirmation Beep
• To set whether or not to produce a sound when a key in the Keypad is pressed.
Use
• To change whether or not to produce a sound when a key in the Keypad is pressed.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “3”.
9.4.2
0 to 5
Alarm Volume
Functions
• To specify the volume of the alarm that sounds when an error occurs or an incorrect
operation is specified.
Use
• To change the volume of the alarm that sounds when an error occurs or an incorrect
operation is specified.
9.4.3
• The default setting is “3”.
0 to 5
Job Complete Beep
Functions
• To set the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is completed.
Use
• To change the volume of the beep that sounds when a job is completed.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “3”.
9.4.4
0 to 5
Panel Cleaning
Functions
• To disable control panel key operations.
Use
• To disable control panel keys before cleaning the display on the control panel.
Setting/
Procedure
• To cancel this function, press the Panel Reset key to display the Basics screen.
9.4.5
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Dehumidify
Functions
• To dehumidify the Scanner when dew condensations are formed on the Scanner
because of sudden changes in temperature or high humidity.
Use
• To prevent dew condensations from being formed on the Photo Conductor during
changes in ambient conditions.
Setting/
Procedure
• When [Dehumidify] is touched, the Photo Conductor or Exposure Lamp is operated for
a predetermined period of time and then stops in the mode set by the corresponding
Tech. Rep. Choice function.
125
9.4.6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Toner Supply
Functions
• To adjust the set toner-to-carrier level by providing an auxiliary supply of toner when a
low image density occurs due to a lowered toner-to-carrier ratio after large numbers of
copies have been made of originals having a high image density.
Use
• To replenish the supply of toner in an auxiliary manner.
Setting/
Procedure
• Touch [Toner Supply] for the copier to detect the current toner density and, if the density is lower than the standard value, a toner-replenishing sequence, then a developer
agitation sequence are performed. If the toner density is detected to be higher than the
standard value, only a developer agitation sequence is performed.
Adjustment / Setting
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
126
9.5
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Settings in the Admin. Management
• The Admin. Management will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Admin. Set. (The administrator password is initially set to “00000000”)
9.5.1
Initial Setting
A. Date & Time Setting
(1) Date & Time Setting
Functions
• To set the date and time of day.
Use
• To set or change the date and time of day.
Setting/
Procedure
• Use the Keypad to type in the date (Month, Day, and Year) and time of the day.
• Touching [Enter] will start the clock.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(2) Time Zone
Functions
• To set the time difference from the standard time appended to the mail header when
sending e-mail.
Use
• To change the time difference from the standard time.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “-05:00”.
-12:00 to +12:00
Functions
• To adjust daylight saving time automatically.
Use
• To set daylight saving time.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Auto”.
9.5.2
“Auto”
Adjustment / Setting
(3) Day Light Saving Time
OFF
Admin. Set
A. Administrator Code Input
Functions
• To change the administrator access code.
Use
• To change the administrator access code.
Setting/
Procedure
• Setting range: 00000000 to 99999999
[Current Code]: Enter the current administrator access code.
[New Code]: Enter the new administrator access code.
[Retype New Code]: Enter the new administrator access code again for confirmation.
B. Max. Copy Sets
Functions
• To set whether or not to limit the number of copies to be made at one time.
Use
• To limit the number of copies to be made at one time.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
1 to 99
OFF
127
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C. Disable Sleep Mode
Functions
• To display the setting [OFF] in the Sleep Mode Setting screen, available from the User’s
Choice screen.
Use
• To enable the setting of [OFF] in the Sleep Mode Setting screen available from the
User’s Choice screen.
Setting/
Procedure
9.5.3
• The default setting is “NO”.
Yes
“No”
Account/User Auth.
A. General Settings
(1) User Authentication ON/OFF
Functions
• To set whether or not to make user authentication.
Use
• To select the scheme of user authentication, whether it is made by an external server or
MFP.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON (External Server)
ON (MFP)
“OFF”
Adjustment / Setting
(2) Account Track ON/OFF
Functions
• To set whether or not to enable the account track function.
Use
• To enable the account track function.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
(3) Allow Print without Authentication
Functions
• To set whether or not to authorize printing of data, which is specified for computer printouts and for which no accounts are specified, when the account track function is
enabled.
* Available only when [Account Track ON/OFF] is set to [ON].
Use
• To authorize printing of data, which is specified for computer printouts and for which no
accounts are specified, when the account track function is enabled.
Setting/
Procedure
128
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
9. Utility/Counter Mode
B. Account Data
Functions
Use
• To control the Total Counter by setting a password and the upper limit for the output
pages for each account.
* Available only when [Account Track ON/OFF] is set to [ON].
• To set, control, or delete account data.
<Set>
1. Select an unused account number (000 to 999).
2. Enter the Account Name and Password.
3. Set the Max. Print Allowance (0 to 999999).
4. Touch [Enter].
Setting/
Procedure
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
<Control>
1. Select the account number to be controlled.
2. Select [Counter].: Each of different counters of the selected account will be displayed.
3. Select [General Settings].: Change the settings made for the selected account.
4. Select [Clear Counter].: The counter of the selected account is cleared.
5. Touch [Enter].
<Delete>
1. Select the account number to be deleted.
2. Select [Delete Account].
3. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
C. User Auth. Setting
• To control the Total Counter by setting a password for each user.
• Available only when [User Authentication ON/OFF] is set to [ON (External Server)] or
[ON (MFP)].
Use
• To set authentication by external server or by MFP.
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
<Set of external server authentication>
1. Touch [General Settings] and select the authentication scheme.
• The default setting is “Active Directory”.
“Active Directory”
NTLM
NDS
2. Touch [Domain Name] and enter the domain name (up to 64 en-size characters).
NOTE
• If [NDS] is selected, enter [Tree Name] and [Context Name].
Setting/
Procedure
<Set of MFP authentication>
1. Touch [User Registration] and select an unused user number key.
2. Touch [User Information] and enter the User Name and User Password.
3. Touch [Enter].
<Control of MFP authentication>
1. Select the user number key to be controlled.
2. Select [Counter].: The counter of the selected account is cleared.
3. Select [General Settings].: Change the settings made for the selected user.
4. Select [Clear Counter].: Each of different counters of the selected account will be displayed.
5. Touch [Enter].
<Delete of MFP authentication>
1. Select the user number key to be deleted.
2. Select [Delete User].
3. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
129
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.5.4
Functions
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Call Remote Center
Use
• To call the CS Remote Care Center from the Administrator, When the CS Remote Care
setup is complete.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch and highlight [Call Remote Center].
2. The highlight display is cancels as soon as the function terminates normally.
9.5.5
Network Setting
A. Basic Settings
(1) DHCP
Functions
• To set DHCP for the network.
Use
• To use DHCP.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “IP Input”.
Auto-Obtain
IP Input
(2) IP Address Setting
Functions
• To set the IP address of the device used in the network.
Use
• To enter the IP address of the machine.
• Use this function when [IP Input] is selected for [DHCP].
Setting/
Procedure
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
Adjustment / Setting
(3) Subnet Mask
Functions
• To set the subnet mask of the device used in the network.
Use
• To enter the subnet mask of the machine.
• Use this function when [IP Input] is selected for [DHCP].
Setting/
Procedure
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
(4) Gateway
Functions
• To set the gateway address of the device used in the network.
Use
• To enter the gateway address of the machine.
• Use this function when [IP Input] is selected for [DHCP].
Setting/
Procedure
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
(5) Self-Domain Name
Functions
• To set the domain name of the local machine.
Use
• To enter the domain name of the local machine.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Self-Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on
the screen and then touch [Enter].
130
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Functions
• To set the data transfer rate of the Network Board.
Use
• To set a specific network data transfer rate.
bizhub 200/250/350
(6) Network Board Set
<Network Board Speed>
• The default setting is “Auto”.
“Auto”
Setting/
Procedure
100M
10M
NOTE
• Be sure to set the correct transfer rate so as to ensure that communications are
carried out correctly.
• If the network data transfer rate has been changed, be sure to turn OFF the Main
Power Switch of the machine, wait for 10 sec. or more, and then turn the switch
ON again.
<Duplex>
Functions
• To set the packet transmission/reception mode when the switching hub is connected.
Use
• To change the setting between Full Duplex and Half Duplex.
• Use this function when Network Board Speed has been set to [100M] or [10M].
• The default setting is “Half Duplex”.
“Half Duplex”
Setting/
Procedure
Full Duplex
NOTE
• If the Duplex setting has been changed, be sure to turn OFF the Main Power
Switch of the machine, wait for 10 sec. or more, and then turn the switch ON
again.
Functions
Use
Adjustment / Setting
B. DNS Settings
• To set the DNS Server.
• To enter DNS Server.
• The default setting is “NO”.
YES
Setting/
Procedure
“NO”
<Host Name>
1. Touch the [Host Name].
2. Enter the host name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the
screen and then touch [Enter].
<Domain Name>
1. Touch the [Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on
the screen and then touch [Enter].
<DNS Server Address>
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
* Up to three places can be set.
C. Machine Name
Functions
• To set the name of the machine.
Use
• To enter the name of the machine.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Machine Name].
2. Enter the machine name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on
the screen and then touch [Enter].
131
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
D. SMTP Settings
(1) SMTP Server Address
Functions
• To set the SMTP server address.
Use
• To set the SMTP server address required for performing Scan to E-Mail and Internet
Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
(2) E-Mail Address
Functions
• To set the e-mail address of the machine.
Use
• To enter the e-mail address of the machine.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [E-Mail Address].
2. Enter the e-Mail address of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on
the screen and then touch [Enter].
(3) SMTP Authentication User Name
Functions
• To set the user name for SMTP authentication.
Use
• To enter the user name when the mail transfer authentication (SMTP authentication)
function is used.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [SMTP Authentication User Name].
2. Enter the SMTP Authentication User Name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad
or the keyboard on the screen and then touch [Enter].
Adjustment / Setting
(4) SMTP Authentication Password
Functions
• To set the password for SMTP authentication.
Use
• To enter the password when the mail transfer authentication (SMTP authentication)
function is used.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [SMTP Authentication Password].
2. Touch [New Password], enter the password, and then touch [Enter].
3. Touch [Confirm New Password], enter the password once again, and then touch
[Enter].
E. POP3 Settings
(1) POP3 Server Address
Functions
• To set the POP3 server address.
Use
• To enter the POP3 server address required for receiving Internet Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
(2) POP3 User Name
Functions
• To set the POP3 server user name.
Use
• To enter the POP3 server user name required for receiving Internet Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [POP3 User Name].
2. Enter the POP3 User Name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard
on the screen and then touch [Enter].
132
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Functions
• To set the POP3 password.
Use
• To enter the POP3 password.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [POP3 Password].
2. Touch [New Password], enter the password, and then touch [Enter].
3. Touch [Confirm New Password], enter the password once again, and then touch
[Enter].
bizhub 200/250/350
(3) POP3 Password
(4) Auto-RX Check
Functions
• To set intervals, at which a check is made by connecting to the POP3 server.
Use
• To change the intervals, at which a check is made by connecting to the POP3 server.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Check OFF”.
• Setting range: 1 to 99 M
1. Touch the [Auto-RX Check].
2. Enter the value from the 10-Key Pad and touch [Enter].
3. Select [Check OFF] to select not to make the auto check.
F. Mail/Scan Settings
(1) E-Mail Mode
<TX Size (Max.)>
Functions
• To set the upper limit of the size of the document to be sent.
Use
• To set the default upper limit of the size of the document for Internet Fax.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “11x17”.
“11x17”
Adjustment / Setting
Letter/Legal
<TX Quality (Max.)>
Functions
• To set the upper limit of the image quality to be sent.
Use
• To set the upper limit of the image quality to be sent.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “600 dpi”.
200 dpi
400 dpi
“600 dpi”
<Coding Method>
Functions
• To set the coding method for the data to be sent.
Use
• To set the coding method for the data to be sent.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “MH”.
“MH”
MR
MMR
(2) Scan Mode
<File Type>
Functions
• To set the file type of the data to be sent.
Use
• To set the file type of the data to be sent.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “TIFF”.
“TIFF”
PDF
133
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
<Coding Method>
Functions
• To set the coding method for the selected file type.
Use
• To set the coding method for the selected file type.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “MH”.
“MH”
MMR
G. Scanner Settings
(1) Activity Report
Functions
• To set whether or not to give an activity report.
Use
• To set whether or not to return an activity report to the sending end of e-mail.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
(2) RX Doc. Header Print
Functions
• To set whether or not to print header in a received document.
Use
• To set whether or not to print the e-mail header on the first page of a received document.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
Adjustment / Setting
(3) E-Mail Header Text
Functions
• To set whether or not to insert text in a transmitted document.
Use
• To set the insertion method of text to be inserted in the transmitted document.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Fixed Text”.
“Fixed Text”
Custom Text
OFF
(4) Gateway TX
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set whether to enable or disable transmission of e-mail during fax transfer in gateway communications.
• The default setting is “Restrict”.
Allow
“Restrict”
(5) Subject Registration
Functions
• To set the subject during transmission.
Use
• To enter the subject during transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
• The maximum number of characters to be registered is 40 en-size (20 em-size) characters.
134
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Functions
bizhub 200/250/350
(6) Division Settings
<Page Division>
• To set whether or not to make page division during transmission.
Use
• To transmit data by dividing it by the page.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
<Binary Division>
Functions
• To set whether or not to make binary division during transmission.
Use
• To transmit data through binary division.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
<Binary Division Size>
Functions
• To set the binary division size.
Use
• To set the binary division size when Binary Division is set to [ON].
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “500 KB”.
• Setting range: 16 to 2000 KB
• Enter the value from the 10-Key Pad and touch [Enter].
9.5.6
LDAP Setting
Functions
• To enable or disable address search using the LDAP server.
Use
• To enable address search using the LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “No”.
Yes
Adjustment / Setting
A. LDAP Search
“No”
B. LDAP Server Setting
(1) LDAP Server Name
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set the LDAP server name.
• To enter the LDAP server name.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch the [LDAP Server Setting].
Touch the LDAP server key to be registered or changed.
Touch the [LDAP Server Name].
Enter the LDAP Server Name of the local machine from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and then touch [Enter].
(2) Server Address
Functions
• To set the IP address of the LDAP server.
Use
• To enter the IP address of the LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
135
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(3) Search Base
Functions
• To set the starting point of LDAP search.
Use
• To enter the starting point of LDAP search.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Search Base].
2. Enter the starting point from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and then
touch [Enter].
(4) Authentication Setting
Functions
• To make settings for authentication.
Use
•
•
•
•
General Settings: Use to select the LDAP authentication method.
Login name: Use to set the logon name for authentication.
Password: Use to set the password for authentication.
Domain Name: Use to set the domain name for authentication by GSS-SPNEGO.
<General Settings>
• The default setting is “Anonymous”.
“Anonymous”
GSS-SPNEGO
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
Simple
Digest-MD5/CRAM-MD5
<Login name>
1. Touch the [Login name].
2. Enter the logon name from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and then
touch [Enter].
<Password>
1. Touch the [Password].
2. Touch [New Password], enter the password, and then touch [Enter].
3. Touch [Confirm New Password], enter the password once again, and then touch
[Enter].
<Domain Name>
1. Touch the [Domain Name].
2. Enter the domain name from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and then
touch [Enter].
(5) Maximum number of search
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To change the maximum number of search items for LDAP search.
• The default setting is “100”.
5 to 100
(6) Connection time out
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
136
• To change the connection timeout for the LDAP server.
• The default setting is “60 sec”.
5 to 300
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Functions
bizhub 200/250/350
(7) SSL/TLS
• To set whether or not to use SSL/TLS during communications carried out with the
LDAP server.
Use
• To use SSL/TLS during communications carried out with the LDAP server.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
(8) Port Number
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To change the port number used for communications with the LDAP server.
• The default setting is “389”.
1 to 65535
(9) Initialize Setting
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To format all settings made in LDAP Server Setting.
1. Touch the [Initialize Setting].
2. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
(10) Check Connection
Use
Setting/
Procedure
9.5.7
• To check connection to the LDAP server.
1. Touch the [Check Connection].
2. When the message indicating the completion of connection check appears, touch
[Enter].
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
Frame Type Set
Functions
• To set the frame type for NetWare settings of NIC.
Use
• To specify the frame type used for communications.
• The default setting is “Auto Detect”.
Setting/
Procedure
“Auto Detect”
802.3
Ethernet-II
SNAP
802.2
137
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.5.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Prefix/Suffix Settings
A. ON/OFF Setting
Functions
• To set whether to add Prefix or Suffix to the address when calling or entering an
address.
Use
• To add Prefix or Suffix to the address.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
(1) Key Name
Functions
• To set the Key Name for Prefix/Suffix Settings.
Use
• To enter the Key Name for Prefix/Suffix Settings.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Key Name].
2. Enter the Key Name (consisting of up to eight en-size characters) from the 10-Key Pad
or the keyboard on the screen and then touch [Enter].
(2) Fixed File Format
Functions
• To set whether or not to fix the file format.
Use
• To select not to fix the file format.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
Adjustment / Setting
(3) Prefix Setting
Functions
• To register or change the Prefix.
Use
• To register or change the address displayed for Prefix.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to ten en-size characters can be used.
(4) Suffix Setting
Functions
• To register or change the Suffix.
Use
• To register or change the address displayed for Suffix.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to 30 en-size characters can be used.
138
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer Setting
bizhub 200/250/350
9.5.9
9. Utility/Counter Mode
A. Timeout
Functions
• To set the timeout for reception of print data.
Use
• To change the timeout for reception of print data.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Timeout].
2. Press the Clear key and enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
• The default setting is “300 sec”.
10 to 1000
9.5.10
Software SW
Functions
• To set the status of each function according to the use using the software switch.
Use
• To change the status of each function using the software switch.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call Admin. 2 to the screen and touch [Software SW].
2. Touch [Mode Selection] and enter the mode number (a 3-digit numeral) using the 10Key Pad.
3. Touch [Bit Selection].
4. Align the cursor using [←] or [→] key and define the bit with 0 or 1 of the 10-Key Pad.
(To define the value in hexadecimal, touch [HEX Selection] and enter the value using
the 10-Key Pad and A to F keys.)
5. Touch the [Enter].
Functions
Ping
• To execute Ping.
Use
• To check the TCP/IP network for condition.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Ping].
2. Select the address key to be executed and press the Start key.
9.5.12
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
9.5.13
Functions
Adjustment / Setting
9.5.11
Delete Job
• To delete all confidential print jobs.
1. Touch the [Delete Job].
2. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
SSL/TLS
• To set whether or not to use SSL/TLS for communications.
Use
• To use SSL/TLS for communications.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
139
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.6
Reports
9.6.1
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
9.6.2
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
9.6.3
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Adjustment / Setting
9.6.4
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
140
TX Report
• To print the TX report.
1. Press the Utility/Counter key and touch [Reports].
2. Touch the [TX Report].
RX Report
• To print the RX report.
1. Press the Utility/Counter key and touch [Reports].
2. Touch the [RX Report].
One-Touch List
• To print the one-touch list.
1. Press the Utility/Counter key and touch [Reports].
2. Touch the [One-Touch List].
Mail Program List
• To print the mail program list.
1. Press the Utility/Counter key and touch [Reports].
2. Touch the [Mail Program List].
3. Select the mail program to be printed.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Settings in the Printer Setting
9.7.1
bizhub 200/250/350
9.7
9. Utility/Counter Mode
MFP Set
A. Proof Print Hold Time
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To change the hold time of the proof print job.
• The default setting is “10 min.”
“10 min.”
20 min.
30 min.
B. Overwrite A4←→Letter
Functions
• To set whether to enable or disable the override function of A4 and Letter.
Use
• To enable the function that allows Letter to be used instead of A4, or vice versa, for
printout.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
C. Document Hold Time
Functions
Use
• To change the hold time of print data invoked when a condition, in which memory
capacity has exceeded, at the expiration of which the print data is discarded.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “5Min”.
• Setting range: 0 to 30
Functions
• To set whether or not to print error information when an error occurs during computer
printing.
Use
• To print error information when an error occurs during computer printing.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
9.7.2
ON
“OFF”
Default Set
A. Basic
(1) Tray
Functions
• To set a paper source when none is specified by the printer driver during computer
printing.
Use
• To specify a paper source when one cannot be specified by the printer driver during
printing from Windows DOS or in a similar case.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Auto Paper Select”.
141
Adjustment / Setting
D. PostScript Error Report
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(2) Paper Size
Functions
• To set a paper size when none is specified by the printer driver during computer printing.
Use
• To specify a paper size when one cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS or in a similar case.
Setting/
Procedure
<For U.S.>
• The default setting is “Letter”.
<For Europe>
• The default setting is “A4”.
(3) Original Direction
Functions
• To set orientation of the image when none is specified by the printer driver during computer printing.
Use
• To specify orientation of the image when one cannot be specified by the printer driver
during printing from Windows DOS or in a similar case.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Portrait”.
(4) Print Method
Functions
• To set a print method when none is specified by the printer driver during computer
printing.
Use
• To specify a print method when one cannot be specified by the printer driver during
printing from Windows DOS or in a similar case.
Adjustment / Setting
[Print Method]
• The default setting is “Simplex”.
Setting/
Procedure
“Simplex”
2-Sided Print
[Binding Method]
• The default setting is “left bind”.
“Left bind”
Top bind
(5) # of Sets
Functions
• To set the number of copy sets when none is specified by the printer driver during computer printing.
Use
• To specify the number of copy sets when one cannot be specified by the printer driver
during printing from Windows DOS or in a similar case.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “1 Set”.
• Setting range: 1 to 999
B. Font
(1) Font #
Functions
• To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
Use
• To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows
DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “0” (Courier).
• Setting range: 0 to 80
142
9. Utility/Counter Mode
(2) Symbol Set
Functions
• To set the Font Symbol Set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
Use
• To use when the Font Symbol Set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.
• Setting range: 0 to 35
Setting/
Procedure
<For U.S.>
• The default setting is “29” (Window 3.1 Latin2).
<For Europe>
• The default setting is “35” (ISO8859-10).
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(3) Number Lines
Functions
Use
• To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data.
• To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data.
• Setting range: 5 to 128
Setting/
Procedure
<For U.S.>
• The default setting is “60”.
<For Europe>
• The default setting is “64”.
(4) Font Size
• To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing.
Use
• To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from
Windows DOS, etc.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Bit Map Font Size” (10.00 Pitch).
• Setting range: Scalable font (4.00 to 999.75 points)
• Setting range: Bit map font size (0.44 to 99.00 pitch)
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
(5) CR/LF Mapping
Functions
• To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
Use
• To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data.
OFF: Does not replace
Mode 1: Replacing CR with CR-LF
Mode 2: Replacing LF with CR-LF
Mode 3: Replacing CR and LF with CR-LF, and FF with CR-FF
Setting/
Procedure
9.7.3
Functions
• The default setting is “OFF”.
“OFF”
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3
PDL Set
• To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing.
Use
• To fix the PDL as necessary. It usually switches automatically.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Auto”.
Auto
PCL
PostScript
143
bizhub 200/250/350
9. Utility/Counter Mode
9.7.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Test Print
Functions
• To output the report or Demo Page concerning the print setting.
• To check the setting concerning the printer.
The types of report available for output are as follows.
Use
Check Job Details: The list of printer setting will be output.
PCL Demo Page: PCL Demo page will be output.
PS Font List: PS Font List will be output.
PCL Font List: PCL Font List will be output.
Setting/
Procedure
9.8
Check Detail
Functions
Use
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
144
1. Press the Utility/Counter key, and then touch [Printer Setting] and [Test Print] in that
order.
2. Touch the test print key, for which test print is to be produced.
• To check the counter reading or display a list of counters.
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch the [Check Detail].
9. Utility/Counter Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Adjustment / Setting
Blank Page
145
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Adjust Mode
Printer
Scanner
Counter
Tech. Rep.
Choice
2
Registration (CD)
3
Registration (FD)
4
Zoom (CD)
5
Zoom (FD)
6
F7-1
Document detection adjustment
7
F8
ATDC Sensor adjustment
8
F1
Paper passage test
9
FD
Bypass paper max/
min set
10
Special
Parts
Counter
(1) (1) (1)
I/C Life Clear
13
(2) (2) (2)
Developer Clear
14
Counter clear
15 (1) (1) (1)
Registration Loop
16
(3)
(1)
(1)
17
18
19
Leading Edge Erase 20
Trailing Edge Erase
21
Right/Left Edge Erase
22
23
HDD selection
24
Optional Original Size Sensor
selection
25
Scanner Position Adjustment
Replace Fusing Unit
Replace Developing Unit
Replace Developer
Replace Photo Conductor Unit
Replace Transfer Roller Unit
Replace Registration Roller Gear
11
12
Loop Adjustment
(2) (2)
26
Remounting of the EEPROM
27
Install I/U in machine
28
Replace Developer
29
F/W upgrading
30
146
(4) (4) (5)
(2) (2) (2) (1) (1)
PC Life Clear
SheetZoom
throughFeed (CD)
ADF
Feed (FD)
Printer
System Input
1
Registration (FD)
HDD Format
Tech. Rep. Mode
Adjustment / Setting
Function
N0
Registration (CD)
Replace Pick-up Roller
Adjustment/Setting Items
Replace Separation Roller
Replacement Part/Service Job
Replace Registration Roller Bearing
10. Adjustment item list
Replace Feed Roller
bizhub 200/250/350
10. Adjustment item list
(3) (3) (4)
10. Adjustment item list
1
(1)
2
(2)
3
(8) (2)
4
(9)
5
(6) (1)
6
(7)
(3)
(2)
7
(2)
(5)
{
9
Adjustment / Setting
8
Install Optional Original Size Sensors
Install Hard Disk
Replace Multi Bypass Unit
Install Scanner Unit
Wind Scanner Drive Cables
Replace CCD Unit
Replace PH Unit
Replace Mechanical Control Board
N0
Replace ATDC Sensor
• This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has
been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated
by the corresponding number in the parentheses.
10
11
(2)
12 (1)
13 (2)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
(3)
22
(4)
23
(5)
24
(1)
(1)
25
(1) {
26
27
(1)
28 (4)
29 (3)
30
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(2)
147
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.1 Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure
NOTE
• Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures. They
should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service
jobs.
A.
1.
2.
3.
Procedure
Press the Utility/Counter key.
Touch [Check Detail].
Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
4. Enter the 8-digit service code and touch [END]. (Default value: 00000000)
NOTE
• When [END] is touched after a wrong service code has been entered, the Basic
screen reappears.
• At the fourth access after entries of three wrong access codes, [END] is not available on the screen. It is therefore necessary to turn OFF and ON the Main Power
Switch.
• If you forget the service code, it becomes necessary to replace the RAMS Board
with a new one. Take necessary steps not to forget the service code.
• The RAMS Board is not available as a replacement part. If it requires replacement,
contact Office Printing Support Division by way of CSES.
Adjustment / Setting
5. The Tech. Rep. Mode menu will appear.
4040F3E543DA
NOTE
• To change the service code, see “Service Security Mode.”
☞ 200
B. Exiting
• Touch the [Exit] key.
C. Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions
• Use the +/- key to enter or change the setting value.
• Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press
the Clear key before making an entry.)
148
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
11.2 Tech. Rep. Mode function tree
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
Tech. Rep.Mode
Tech. Rep. Choice
System Set
Auto Paper Configuration
Auto Paper Configuration
Simplex/Duplex
Dry Key Set
Function Limit
✱ (Special image setting)
Printer
Edge Erase
Loop Adjustment
Image density
ATDC Sensor Gain
Grid Voltage Adjustment
Fuser Temp.
Sheet-through-ADF
Registration Loop
Zoom
Feed (CD)
Feed (FD)
Country Set
Adjustment / Setting
The amount of Center Erase
*1
Orientation Change
Finisher
Punch Stop Position
Punch Loop Adjustment
Trail Erase (Dup)
Internet ISW Setting
System Input
LCT Paper Size
Change Fixed Zoom
Machine Configuration
Technical Memo
Hard Disk
Original Size Detecting Option
Administrator # Initialize
4040F3E541DA
149
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Counter
Paper
Jam Counter
Special Parts Counter
Service Call Counter
Application Counter
Maintenance Counter
Fax Connection Counter
Function
F1
F2
F7-1
F7-2
F8
F12
Hard Disk Format
FD
FC
Org. Width Detect Adjust
FW Download
I/O Check
Printer
*1
Scanner
Adjustment / Setting
Job Tray
Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided)
Finisher
Operation Check
ADF
Bypass/Duplex
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Toner/Side Cover
Drive Motor Detect
LCT
Engine
Paper Passage
ADF Sencor Adjust
Backup Data Initialization
Exp. Lamp Check
Scanner
CS Remote Care
ROM Version
Level History
FAX Set
*1
Soft Switch Setting
*1
4040F3E542DA
*1: For more details, see FK-503 Service Manual.
150
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.3 Settings in the Tech. Rep. Choice
11.3.1
System Set
A. Auto Paper Configuration
Functions
• To select whether the paper source is selected according to the results of the original
size detection or whether the nearest larger size is selected according to the marketing
region.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
<Inch/Metric>
• <Metric> or <Inch> is displayed according to the applicable marketing area.
Use
<Inches>
• All original sizes detected are corrected to ones in mm.
• The default setting is “Inch/Metric”.
Setting/
Procedure
<For U.S.>
“Inch/Metric”
Inches
<For Europe and Others>
“Inch/Metric”
Metric
B. Priority Foolscap
Functions
• To set the paper size for foolscap.
Use
• To change the paper size for foolscap.
• Select the foolscap paper size from among the following four.
• The default setting is “F: 330 mm, C: 210 mm”.
F: 330 mm
C: 203 mm
“F: 330 mm”
“C: 210 mm”
F: 330 mm
C: 216 mm
F: 330 mm
C: 220 mm
C. Simplex/Duplex
Functions
• To select whether or not the [1→1] setting is available for the [Default Setting Simplex/
Duplex] function in User’s Choice.
<Simplex & Duplex>
• To display all modes in [Default Setting Simplex/Duplex] of User’s Choice.
Use
<Duplex Only>
• To display Duplex only in [Default Setting Simplex/Duplex] of User’s Choice.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Inch/Metric”.
“Simplex & Duplex”
Duplex Only
151
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
D. Dry Key Set
Functions
• To select whether or not the [Dehumidify] button is available on the User Management
screen of the Utility/Counter mode.
• When the image density is low
<Scanner>
• The [Dehumidify] button appears and the operation is performed only for the scanner.
Use
<Scanner/Drum>
• The [Dehumidify] button appears and the operation is performed for both the scanner
and the PC Drum.
<Disable>
• The [Dehumidify] button does not appear.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Scanner/Drum”.
Scanner
“Scanner/Drum”
Disable
E. Function Limit
Functions
• To select whether or not access to some of the copy functions is restricted.
Use
• To disable some of the copy functions.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
Adjustment / Setting
F. [✱] (Special image setting)
Functions
• To select whether or not to display the special image [✱] key on the Density screen.
Use
• Highlight the [✱] key on the Density screen and then select the appropriate mode to
produce a special image output.
• When Photo mode is selected: Low density mode
• When Text mode is selected: The image density level is increased two steps higher
than in the ordinary Text mode.
• When Text/Photo mode is selected: The image density level is increased one step
higher than in the ordinary Text mode.
Setting/
Procedure
152
<[✱] highlighted>
• The special image key is displayed on the Density screen.
<[✱] not highlighted>
• The special image key is not displayed on the Density screen.
11.3.2
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Printer
A. Edge Erase
Functions
• To change the laser emission timing to adjust the width of the image area that is erased
at the leading edge, trailing edge and top and bottom.
Use
• When the PH unit is replaced
Width A
Width B
Width
C
Adjustment
Specification
Width
C
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Adjust the following erase width values so that
each falls within the following adjustment range:
Width A (Leading Edge); Width B (Trailing
Edge); and Width C (Top/Bottom).
Default setting: 4 mm
Adjustment range: 0 to 5 mm (in 1-mm increments)
4040F3C508DA
The default setting for 2-sided trailing edge
erase width is “2 mm.”
Adjustment To make the erase width (Width A, B, or C) smaller, decrease the setting value.
Instructions To make the erase width (Width A, B, or C) greater, increase the setting value.
Adjustment
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch the keys in this order: [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Printer] → [Edge Erase].
Select the specific edge to be adjusted.
Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.
Touch [END] to validate the new setting value.
Functions
• To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper before the Regist Rollers.
Use
• When a paper skew occurs.
• When a paper jam occurs.
Adjustment
Range
• The default setting is “0”.
• The adjustment range is -5 mm to +5 mm. (in 1 mm increments)
Adjustment
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch the keys in this order: [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Printer] → [Loop Adjustment].
Select the paper source, for which the adjustment is made.
Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.
Change the + or - sign using the Access key or * key.
Touch [END] to validate the new setting value.
153
Adjustment / Setting
B. Loop Adjustment
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C. Image density
Functions
• To change the Vg and Vb of the engine to select the image density.
Use
• When the image density is high or low:
• With the Printing Density setting specified in User’s Choice as a reference point, the
density can be set to one of seven settings.
Adjustment
Range
• The default setting is “0”.
• The adjustment range is -3 mm to +3 mm. (in 1 mm increments)
Adjustment If the image density is high, decrease the setting value.
Instructions If the image density is low, increase the setting value.
Adjustment
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch the keys in this order: [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Printer] → [Image density].
Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.
Change the + or - sign using the Access key or * key.
Touch [END] to validate the new setting value.
D. ATDC Sensor Gain
Functions
• To display the value automatically adjusted using function F8 and to change that value.
• When the spare Developing Unit or the Imaging Unit has been temporarily used
<Current>
• ATDC control voltage automatically adjusted using function F8
Adjustment / Setting
Use
<Job Setting>
• Normally, the value displayed here is the same as that displayed for Current.
NOTE
• If a Developing Unit other than a new one is installed, type in the setting for the
installed product.
Adjustment
Range
• The adjustment range is 0 to 255.
Adjustment
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch the keys in this order: [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Printer] → [ATDC Sensor Gain].
Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad
Touch [END] to validate the new setting value.
E. Grid Voltage Adjustment
Functions
• To change the Vg setting for sensitivity variations due to the durability of the PC Drum
and adjust the image density.
Use
• When the PC Drum Unit is replaced
• If a foggy background occurs, increase the setting value.
Adjustment
Range
• The default setting is “0”.
• The adjustment range is -2 to +2.
Adjustment
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the keys in this order: [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Printer] → [Grid Voltage Adjustment].
3. Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad
4. Touch [END] to validate the new setting value.
154
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
F. Fuser Temp.
Functions
• To adjust the temperature of the Fusing Roller for each paper type in order to change
the fusing performance according to the operating environment and paper type.
Use
• To adjust the fusing temperature for each type of paper.
• When a fusing failure occurs.
• When the paper type is changed.
Adjustment
Range
• The default setting is “1”.
• Setting Range: 1 to 4 (Normal)
1 to 3 (Thin Paper)
Adjustment
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the keys in this order: [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Printer] → [Fuser Temp.].
3. Select the paper, for which the adjustment is made.
4. Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad
5. Touch [END] to validate the new setting value.
• For more details, see the temperature table for fusing temperature adjustment.
☞ 157
11.3.3
1 to 3 (Thick Paper)
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1 to 3 (OHP)
Sheet-through-ADF
A. Registration Loop
Functions
• To adjust the length of the loop formed in the paper before the Registration Rollers.
Use
• If slippage occurs due to a worn Document Take-Up Roller, which sometimes results in
misfeeds, the loop length may be increased as a temporary measure until the part can
be replaced with a new one.
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option DF-605.
B. Zoom
Functions
• To set the scanning zoom ratio in the main and sub scanning directions of the Sheetthrough-ADF.
Use
• Upon setup of the Automatic Document Feeder
Setting/
Procedure
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option DF-605.
C. Feed (CD)
Functions
• To adjust the scan start position in the main scanning direction (CD) of the Sheetthrough-ADF.
Use
• Upon setup of the Automatic Document Feeder
Setting/
Procedure
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option DF-605.
D. Feed (FD)
Functions
• To adjust the scan start position in the sub scanning direction (FD) of the Sheetthrough-ADF.
Use
• Upon setup of the Automatic Document Feeder
Setting/
Procedure
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option DF-605.
155
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.3.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
The amount of Center Erase
Functions
• To set the amount of center erase for bound originals.
Use
• To change the amount of center erase for bound originals.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “12 mm”.
• The adjustment range is 2 to 20 mm.
11.3.5
Functions
Orientation Change
• To set whether or not to match the orientation of the image when paper is fed out
between the normal mode and Staple and Punch mode.
<ON>
• Turn ON the function if the orientation of the image when paper is fed out is matched
between the normal mode and Staple and Punch mode.
Use
<OFF>
• Turn OFF the function if the orientation of the image when paper is fed out is not
matched between the normal mode and Staple and Punch mode.
Setting/
Procedure
11.3.6
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
Finisher
Adjustment / Setting
A. Punch Stop Position
Functions
• To adjust the paper stop position for punching.
Use
• To adjust the punch position.
Setting/
Procedure
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option FS-508.
B. Punch Loop Adjustment
Functions
• To adjust the length of the loop for correcting skew during punching.
Use
• To correct any skew in the punch position.
Setting/
Procedure
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option FS-508.
11.3.7
Trail Erase (Dup)
Functions
• To set the adjustment value for the amount of erase on the trailing edge for 2-sided
printing.
Use
• The amount erased at the trailing edge of the second side of a 2-sided print is the Trailing setting for Edge Erase + Duplex Trailing Erase setting.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “2 mm”.
• The adjustment range is 0 to 5 mm.
156
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.4 Table of Temperatures for Adjusting the Fusing Temperature
11.4.1
Standard paper
Tech. Rep. Choice Setting
Touch Panel Setting
Paper width
Marketing
region
Mode 1
Mode 3
Heater temperature (main/sub)
bizhub 350
220 mm or
less
1
221 or more
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
220 mm or
less
221 or more
bizhub 350
220 mm or
less
2
221 or more
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
220 mm or
less
221 or more
bizhub 350
220 mm or
less
3
221 or more
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
220 mm or
less
221 or more
bizhub 350
220 mm or
less
4
221 or more
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
220 mm or
less
180 °C
U.S.
Europe
200 °C
190 °C
U.S.
170 °C
Europe
180 °C
U.S.
Europe
180 °C
U.S.
160 °C
Europe
180 °C
U.S.
190 °C
Europe
200 °C
U.S.
180 °C
Europe
190 °C
U.S.
Europe
190 °C
U.S.
170 °C
Europe
190 °C
U.S.
200 °C
Europe
190 °C
U.S.
190 °C
Europe
170 °C
U.S.
Europe
200 °C
U.S.
180 °C
Europe
200 °C
U.S.
170 °C
Europe
180 °C
U.S.
Europe
U.S.
Europe
Adjustment / Setting
221 or more
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
160 °C
170 °C
U.S.
160 °C
Europe
170 °C
157
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.4.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Special Paper
Tech. Rep. Choice Setting
Touch Panel Setting
Mode 1
Mode 3
Heater temperature (main/sub)
11.4.3
1
200 °C
2
190 °C
3
180 °C
OHP
Tech. Rep. Choice Setting
Touch Panel Setting
Mode 1
Mode 3
Heater temperature (main/sub)
1
2
Adjustment / Setting
3
11.4.4
bizhub 350
165 °C
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
160 °C
bizhub 350
170 °C
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
170 °C
bizhub 350
155 °C
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
150 °C
Thin Paper
Tech. Rep. Choice Setting
Touch Panel Setting
Mode 1
Mode 3
Heater temperature (main/sub)
158
1
170 °C
2
180 °C
3
160 °C
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.5.1
bizhub 200/250/350
11.5 Settings in the System Input
LCT Paper Size
Functions
• To enter the paper size when the LCT is installed.
• The function can be set only when the LCT is mounted on the machine.
Use
• The default setting is “Letter”.
<For U.S.>
A4
“Letter”
<For Europe and Others>
“A4”
Letter
Setting/
Procedure
Change Fixed Zoom
Functions
• To change the fixed zoom ratio.
Use
Adjustment
Range
• x0.250 to x4.000 (common to all zoom keys)
Setting/
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
11.5.3
Functions
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch [System Input] and [Change Fixed Zoom] in that order.
Select the specific zoom ratio to be changed.
Press the Clear key and change the setting value using the 10-Key Pad.
Touch [Set] to validate the setting value.
Machine Configuration
• Displays the machine configuration.
Use
• [Yes] or [No] indicates whether or not the option is installed.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [System Input] and [Machine Configuration] in that order.
11.5.4
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
11.5.5
Technical Memo
• Enter the serial number and other data.
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [System Input] and [Technical Memo] in that order.
3. Enter the Password from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and touch
[Enter].
Hard Disk
Functions
• To set whether or not the HDD is mounted.
Use
• Select [Yes] if the HDD is mounted.
• [Yes] is automatically set when Hard Disk Format is executed.
Setting/
Procedure
Adjustment / Setting
11.5.2
• The default setting is “No”.
Yes
“No”
159
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.5.6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Original Size Detecting Option
Functions
• To set whether or not the optional Original Size Sensors are mounted.
Use
• Select [Yes] when the optional Original Size Sensors are mounted.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “No”.
Yes
“No”
11.6 Settings in the Administrator # Initialize
Functions
• To initialize the administrator number.
Use
• To initialize the administrator number (00000000).
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Administrator # Initialize].
3. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
11.7 Settings in the Counter
11.7.1
Checking the counter reading
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Counter].
3. Touch [Check] and the specific counter key whose reading is to be checked.
Adjustment / Setting
11.7.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Clearing readings of all counters at once
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch the [Counter].
Touch the [Counter Reset].
Touch the counter keys to be cleared and then touch [OK].
11.7.3
Clearing the reading of a specific counter
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Counter].
3. Touch the specific counter key to be cleared and press the Clear key.
If the reading of a wrong counter key has been cleared, press the Interrupt key to undo
the clearing operation.
11.7.4
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
160
Paper
• To display the number of sheets used for each paper size and each paper type.
To clear the data for any counter.
Checking the counter reading
☞ 160
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 160
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
Functions
Use
Jam Counter
• To display the number and frequency of misfeeds.
To clear the data for any counter.
Checking the counter reading
Setting/
Procedure
11.7.6
☞ 160
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 160
Special Parts Counter
Functions
• To display the number of times that each PM part is used.
To clear the data for any counter.
Use
• When any maintenance part is replaced.
• PC Life:
Is the ratio of the PC Drum rotation compared to PC Drum Life.
Clear this counter when the PC Drum Unit or developer has been replaced.
• I/C Life:
Displays the number of prints according to the length of the paper.
• Developer: Number of times that the Developing Unit is replaced.
Automatically counts up when the PC Life counter is cleared.
• Bypass: Number of sheets of paper fed from the Manual Feed Tray.
• Tray 1: Number of sheets of paper fed from the Tray 1.
• Tray 2: Number of sheets of paper fed from the Tray 2.
• Tray 3: Number of sheets of paper fed from the Tray 3.
• Tray 4: Number of sheets of paper fed from the Tray 4.
• LCT Parts 1: Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT.
• Other PM Parts 1: Number of sheets of paper fed.
• Other PM Parts 2: Number of sheets of paper fed.
• Other PM Parts 3: Number of sheets of paper fed.
• ADF Take-Up: Number of document pages fed through the take-up section of the ADF.
• ADF Reverse: Number of document pages fed through the turnover unit of the ADF
• IR 1: Number of IR scans.
• IR 2: Number of IR scans.
• Toner Pages:Number of pages equivalent to the number of black dots on A4 original
with B/W 5%
• Fusing Unit: Number of pages fed out.
Checking the counter reading
Setting/
Procedure
11.7.7
Functions
Use
☞ 160
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 160
Service Call Counter
• To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred for each type of malfunction.
To clear the data for the counter.
Checking the counter reading
Setting/
Procedure
☞ 160
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 160
161
Adjustment / Setting
11.7.5
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.7.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Application Counter
Functions
• To display or clear the readings of application counters.
Use
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting/
Procedure
Checking the counter reading
☞ 160
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 160
11.7.9
Functions
Copy: Number of copies made
Printer: Number of printed pages produced via computer
List Print: Number of printed pages of lists
Fax Print: Number of printed pages received as fax and mail
Fax Transmission: Number of pages of fax transmitted
Mail Transmission: Number of pages transmitted by fax/scanner
Maintenance Counter
• To set the counter value at which maintenance should be performed for any given part.
<Maintenance Counter (Set)>
• Use the Keypad to type in the maintenance counter value.
Use
• When the reading reaches a predetermined value,
appears in the sub-message
display area.
<Maintenance Counter (Count)>
• Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the copier.
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
Checking the counter reading
☞ 160
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 160
11.8 Settings in the Function
11.8.1
F1
Functions
• To check the paper feeding in the paper take-up/transport sections without printing on
the paper with the engine unit.
Use
• When a paper misfeed occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [F1] in that order.
2. Select the paper source, and then press the Start key.
Touch [Duplex] to feed out the paper along the paper path for 2-sided copying.
3. The sequence is halted when the Stop key is pressed or there is no paper.
These pages are not counted with the counters.
11.8.2
F2
• This test is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used.
11.8.3
F7-1
Functions
• To automatically adjust the Original Size Detecting Sensor.
Use
• When the Original Size Detecting Sensor is replaced
• When an optional sensor is mounted
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [F7-1] in that order.
☞ 109
162
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
F7-2
Functions
• To automatically adjust the Original Size Detecting Sensor. (only for a FAX)
Use
• When the Original Size Detecting Sensor is replaced
• When an optional sensor is mounted
Setting/
Procedure
11.8.5
Functions
bizhub 200/250/350
11.8.4
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option FK-503.
F8
• To automatically adjust the ATDC sensor.
Use
• When developer is replaced
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [F8] in that order.
2. Press the Start key to perform the ATDC sensor gain adjustment.
• After the adjustment is finished, the operation stops automatically.
• The adjusted setting overwrites the current setting for ATDC Sensor Gain in Printer of
Tech. Rep. Mode.
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
11.8.7
F12
• To print on paper with the engine unit and check the printing and paper feeding in the
paper take-up/transport sections.
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [F12] in that order.
2. Select the paper source, and then press the Start key.
Touch [Duplex] to feed out the paper along the paper path for 2-sided copying.
3. The sequence is halted when the Stop key is pressed or there is no paper.
Adjustment / Setting
11.8.6
Hard Disk Format
Functions
• To format the hard disk.
Use
• When a hard disk drive is installed.
• When the hard disk is initialized.
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [Hard Disk Format] in that
order.
2. Press the Start key to start the HDD formatting sequence.
Setting/
Procedure
NOTE
• NEVER turn OFF the power while the formatting sequence is in progress.
3. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or more, and turn ON the Main
Power Switch again.
163
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.8.8
FD
Functions
• To set the maximum and minimum sizes for manually fed paper.
Use
• When the Manual Feed Unit is replaced.
Setting/
Procedure
11.8.9
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
<Maximum Size>
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [FD] in that order.
2. Load paper with a maximum size of 301 mm into the Manual Feed Tray.
3. In the Touch Panel, touch [Maximum Size], and then press the Start key to automatically adjust the setting.
<Minimum Size>
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [FD] in that order.
2. Load paper with a minimum size of 89 mm into the Manual Feed Tray.
3. In the Touch Panel, touch [Minimum Size], and then press the Start key to automatically adjust the setting.
FC
Functions
• To check the Finisher operations.
Use
Mode 1: Performs the move operation for the Stapling Unit.
Mode 2: Performs the move operation for the Aligning Plate.
Mode 3: Performs the ascent operation for the Elevator Tray.
Mode 4: Performs the descent operation for the Elevator Tray.
Mode 5 *1: Performs the Punch drive operation.
Mode 6 *1: Performs the Punch drive operation. (2 holes)
Mode 7: Performs the open/close operations for the Exit.
Mode 8 *2: Performs the drive operation for the Creasing Unit.
Mode 9 *2: Performs the open/close operations for the Saddle Exit.
Mode 10: Drives the transport section.
Mode 11: Performs the open/close operations for the Shutter.
Mode 12 *3: Drives the Mail Bin Solenoid.
Mode 13: Performs the single rotate operation for the Storage Paddle.
Mode 14: Performs the single rotate operation for the Exit Paddle.
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Function] → [FC] in that order.
2. Select an operation, and then press the Start key to begin the operation.
*1: appears only when the Punch Kit PU-5016 is installed.
*2: appears only when the Saddle Kit SD-502 is installed.
*3: appears only when the Mail Bin Kit MT-501 is installed.
11.8.10
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
11.8.11
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
164
Org. Width Detect Adjust
• To set the maximum and minimum sizes of the original for the ADF.
☞ For details on adjustment, see the Service Manual for Option DF-605.
FW Download
• To upgrade the firmware of the engine or Finisher.
☞ For details of upgrading of engine firmware, see p. 44.
☞ For details of upgrading of Finisher firmware, see FS-508 (Option) Service Manual.
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.9 I/O Check
Functions
• To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine
remains stationary.
Use
• Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
• The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time
basis.
• It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a cover is
open.
11.9.1
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Electrical Components Check Procedure Through Input Data Check
<Example>
• When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper take-up section of the machine, the Vertical
Conveyance Sensor is considered to be responsible for it.
1. Remove the sheet of paper misfeed.
2. From the Sensor Check List that follows, check the panel display of the Vertical Conveyance Sensor. For the Vertical Conveyance Sensor, you check the data of “2nd
Paper Feed”.
3. Call the Service mode to the screen.
Touch [I/O Check] → [Printer] → [Bypass/Duplex] in that order and call to the screen the sensor
check screen that contains 2nd Paper Feed.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Check that the data for 2nd Paper Feed is [0] (sensor blocked).
Move the actuator to unblock the Vertical Conveyance Sensor.
Check that the data for 2nd Paper Feed changes from [0] to [1] on the screen.
If the input data is [0] change the sensor.
Adjustment / Setting
4.
165
11.9.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O Check Screens
• These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine.
Adjustment / Setting
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
4040F3E548DA
166
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F3E549DA
167
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.9.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O Check List
A. Printer (Main Unit, PC-102, PC-202, PC-402)
Symbol
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Paper not
present
PC1
Timing Roller
Synchronizing Roller Sensor
Paper
present
PC4
Exit
Paper Exit Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC2
2nd Paper Feed
Vertical Conveyance Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC117-PF
3rd Paper Feed
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC126-PF
4th Paper Feed
Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Bypass Tray
Manual Bypass Tray Set signal
-
Bypass Paper Empty Sensor
PC19
FD Size 1
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1
Paper
present
Paper not
present
FD Size 2
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2
Paper
present
Paper not
present
FD Size 3
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC22
FD Size 4
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC29
Bypass Tray Pick
Up
Bypass Lift Sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
PC24
Duplex Paper
Passage 1
Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC25
Duplex Paper
Passage 2
Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC26
Reverse
Switch Back Unit Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Duplex Set
Duplex Unit Set signal
Out of
position
Set
PC23
Duplex Cover
Duplex Unit Door Sensor
Open
Close
VR1
Bypass Paper
Width Detect
Bypass Paper Size Detection Unit
-
Bypass/Duplex
Paper Empty
PC21
Adjustment / Setting
Set
Paper
present
PC18
PC20
168
Not set
Paper not
present
Analog value
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Set
Out of
position
Tray Set
Tray1 Set Sensor
PC8
Paper Near
Empty
Tray1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
PC9
Paper Empty
Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor
Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC6
Upper Side
Detect
Tray1 Paper Lift Sensor
At upper
limit
Not at
upper limit
PC11
CD Size 1
Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
CD Size 2
Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
PC10
Tray 1
PC7
FD Size 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
PWB-I1
FD Paper Size Board 1
FD Size 3
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 4
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
Set
Out of
position
Tray2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
Paper Empty
Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor
Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC12
Upper Side
Detect
Tray2 Paper Lift Sensor
At upper
limit
Not at
upper limit
PC17
CD Size 1
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
CD Size 2
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
Tray Set
Tray2 Set Sensor
PC14
Paper Near
Empty
PC15
PC16
Tray 2
PC13
FD Size 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
PWB-I2
PC3
FD Paper Size Board 2
FD Size 3
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 4
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
2nd Take-up
Right Lower Door Sensor
Out of
position
Set
169
bizhub 200/250/350
Symbol
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Symbol
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Set
Out of
position
Tray Set
Tray3 Set Sensor
PC113-PF
Paper Near
Empty
Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
PC115-PF
Paper Empty
Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor
Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC114-PF
Upper Side
Detect
Tray3 Lift Sensor
At upper
limit
Not at
upper limit
PC118-PF
CD Size 1
Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
CD Size 2
Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
PC119-PF
FD Size 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
PWB-I3 PF
Tray3 FD Paper Size Detection Board
PC111-PF
FD Size 3
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 4
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
Take-up Lower
Door Sensor
Open
Close
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Set
Out of
position
PC116-PF
Pickup
Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC121-PF
Tray Set
Tray4 Set Sensor
PC122-PF
Paper Near
Empty
Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
Unblocked
Blocked
PC124-PF
Paper Empty
Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor
Paper not
present
Paper
present
PC123-PF
Upper Side
Detect
Tray4 Lift Sensor
At upper
limit
Not at
upper limit
PC127-PF
CD Size 1
Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
CD Size 2
Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
PC128-PF
Tray 4
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC112-PF
Tray 3
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 1
FD Size 2
PWB-I4 PF
PC125-PF
170
Tray4 FD Paper Size Detection Board
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 3
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
FD Size 4
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
Pickup
Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor
Maximum Not at maxvalue
imum value
Symbol
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Set
Set
Side Cover
Right Side Door Interlock Switch 1
Out of
position
Front Cover
Front Door Sensor
Out of
position
Sub Hopper
Empty
Sub Hopper Empty Switch
M1
Main Motor
Main Motor
When
turning
When
stopped
M2
I/U Motor
IU Motor
When
turning
When
stopped
Polygon Motor
Polygon Motor
When
turning
When
stopped
Cooling Fan
(Power Supply)
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor
When
turning
When
stopped
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan Motor
When
turning
When
stopped
M6
IU Cooling Fan
IU Cooling Fan Motor
When
turning
When
stopped
M11
Toner Suction Fan
Toner Suction Fan Motor
(Ventilation)
When
turning
When
stopped
M9
M4
M5
Toner not loaded: 1 and
0 alternately displayed.
Toner loaded: 0 displayed
Adjustment / Setting
SW4
Drive Motor Detect
PC5
Toner/Side Cover
SW2
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
171
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Symbol
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Paper not
present
PC2-LCT
Vertical Transport Vertical Conveyance Sensor
Paper
present
PC1-LCT
Feed
Paper Feed Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC9-LCT
Shift Tray Paper
Empty
Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC3-LCT
Main Tray Paper
Empty
Upper Paper Empty Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Paper Empty
Paper Empty Board
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-LCT
Lower Overrun
Lower Limit Sensor
Malfunction
Operational
UN1-LCT
Manual Button
Down
Paper Descent Key
ON
OFF
Tray Open
Tray Set Sensor
PC6-LCT
LCT
PWB-E LCT
Open
Close
Not at
upper limit
PC4-LCT
Raised (Lift-Up)
Tray Upper Limit Sensor
At upper
limit
PC13-LCT
Lowered (Lift up)
Tray Lower Position Sensor
At lower
limit
Not at
lower limit
PC12-LCT
Home (Shift)
Shifter Home Position Sensor
At home
Out of
home
PC11-LCT
Shift Tray Stop
Position
Shifter Return Position Sensor
At stop
position
Not at stop
position
PC10-LCT
Elev. Mtr Pulse
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC8-LCT
Shift Mtr Pulse
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC14-LCT
Dividing Position
Shift Gate Home Position Sensor
At home
Out of
home
Open
Close
PC5-LCT
Right Door Open
Right Lower Door Sensor
TH1
Fusing
Thermistor 1
Fusing Roller Thermistor
Analog value
TH2
Fusing
Thermistor 2
Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor
Analog value
UN2
TH4
TH3

172
Engine
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
ATDC Sensor
ATDC Sensor
Analog value
Drum Thermistor
Drum Thermistor
Analog value
Temperature
Humidity
Temperature/humidity Sensor
I/C Discrimination I/C Type Detection signal
Analog value
Analog value
Analog value
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
B. Scanner
Symbol
Panel Display
SW201
Scanner
PC208
PC209
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
At home
Out of
home
Scanner (HP)
Scanner Home Sensor
Size reset S
Size Reset Switch
Lowered
Raised
Original Cover Angle Sensor
Less than
15°
15° or
more
Orig. cover
detecting S
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C. Job Tray
PC1-JOB
Upper Tray Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor
Turn Over Unit
Switch Back Unit Set signal
Set
Not set
Job Tray
Job Tray Set signal
Set
Not set

Job Tray
Panel Display

Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
Symbol
1
0
Blocked
Unblocked
D. Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided)
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Paper not
present
Empty
Empty Sensor
PC9-ADF
Registration
Registration Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC8-ADF
Before Scanning
Original Detection Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC10-ADF
Exit and Turn Over Exit/Turnover Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Orig. Length 1
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 1
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Orig. Length 2
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked
Orig. Length 3
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 3
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Orig. Length 4
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 4
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Behind Separator
Separator Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Open
Close
PC1-ADF
PC2-ADF
PC3-ADF
PC4-ADF
PC6-ADF
PWB-SIZE
Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided)
PC5-ADF
Paper
present
Org. Width Detect
0
Org. Width Detect
1
Mix Document Size Detection Board
Org. Width Detect
2
PC7-ADF
Side Cover
Upper Door Open/Close Sensor
PBA-VR
Orig. Width Vol.
Variable Resistor
Analog value
173
Adjustment / Setting
Symbol
Symbol
Panel Display
PC5-FN
Paper Passage
(Middle)
PC4-FN
PC3-FN
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Paper Passage
(Feed in)
Entrance Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Elevate Tray
Upper/Lowered
Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor
At upper
limit
Not at
upper limit
S2-FN
Shutter Status
Shutter Detection Switch
Close
Open
S1-FN
Front Door Set
Front Cover Detection Switch
Close
Open
Unblocked
PC2-PK
Punch Pulse
Punch Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked
PC14-FN
Lower (Elev.)
Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC15-FN
Surface (Elev.)
Top Face Detection Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked

Optional Tray
(Elevate)

Set
Not set
PC3-FN
Elevate Tray
position
Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Align Home 1
Alignment Home Position Sensor 1
At home
Out of
home
Align Home 2
Alignment Home Position Sensor 2
At home
Out of
home
PC16-FN
Home (Shutter)
Shutter Home Position Sensor
At home
Out of
home
PC11-FN
Paddle home (Exit) Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor
At home
Out of
home
PC12-FN
Exit R Home
Exit Roller Home Position Sensor
At home
Out of
home
PC8-FN
Empty (Finisher)
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC6-FN
PC7-FN
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
E. Finisher
PC10-FN
Finisher
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Staple Home (CD) Staple Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked

Self Priming
Self-Priming Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked

Staple Empty
Staple Empty Detection Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked

Staple Home
Staple Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC3-PK
Punch Pos. 1
Punch Positioning Sensor 1
Unblocked
Blocked
PC4-PK
Punch Pos. 2
Punch Positioning Sensor 2
Unblocked
Blocked
174
Panel Display
Part/Signal Name
Operation Characteristics/ Panel Display
1
0
PC1-PK
Punch Scraps Full
Detect
Punch Trash Full
Blocked
Unblocked
PC22-SK
Home (Paper Hold
Crease Roller Home Position Sensor
R)
Blocked
Unblocked
S4-FN
Middle Guide
Transport Jam Detection Switch
Close
Open
Paper not
present
Exit (Saddle)
Saddle Exit Sensor
PC21-SK
Saddle Empty
Saddle Tray Empty Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
S4-SK
Saddle Reset
Saddle Interlock Switch
Open
Close

Staple Home 1
(Saddle)
Staple Home Position Sensor 1
Blocked
Unblocked

Self Priming 1
(Saddle)
Self-Priming Sensor 1
Blocked
Unblocked

Staple Empty 1
(Saddle)
Staple Empty Detection Sensor 1
Blocked
Unblocked

Staple Home 2
(Saddle)
Staple Home Position Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked

Self Priming 2
(Saddle)
Self-Priming Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked

Staple Empty 2
(Saddle)
Staple Empty Detection Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked
Home (Saddle In &
In & Out Guide Home Sensor
Out Guide)
Blocked
Unblocked
PC26-SK
Layable Guide
Home (Saddle)
Layable Guide Home Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC10-MK
Paper Passage 1
(Mail Bins)
Lower Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC9-MK
Paper Passage 2
(Mail Bins)
Upper Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC11-MK
Mail Bin Door
Cover Open/Close Sensor
PC23-SK
Finisher
PC20-SK
Paper
present
PC1-MK
1st Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 1
PC5-MK
1st Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 1
PC2-MK
2nd Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 2
PC6-MK
2nd Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 2
PC3-MK
3rd Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 3
PC7-MK
3rd Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 3
PC4-MK
4th Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 4
PC8-MK
4th Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 4
Open
Close
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
175
bizhub 200/250/350
Symbol
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11.10 Settings in the Operation Check
11.10.1
ADF
A. Paper Passage
Functions
• To let the document loaded in the ADF be fed through under the specified mode.
Use
• 1-sided No Detect
• Double-Sided
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Operation Check] → [ADF] → [Paper Passage] in that order.
2. Select the mode.
3. Load the document in the ADF and press the Start key.
4. When the Start key is then pressed, the paper passage operation is temporarily halted.
Pressing the Stop key brings the paper passage operation to an immediate stop. The
operation is stopped as soon as all pages of the document have been fed through.
B. ADF Sensor Adjust
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To carry out automatic adjustments of the ADF sensor.
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Operation Check] → [ADF] → [ADF Sensor
Adjust] in that order.
2. Press the Start key to begins the automatic adjustment of the sensors.
C. Backup Data Initialization
Functions
Adjustment / Setting
Use
Setting/
Procedure
11.10.2
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
11.10.3
• Resets the settings specified with Sensor Auto Adjust.
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Operation Check] → [ADF] → [Backup Data
Initialization] in that order.
2. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter] to initialize the backup data.
Exp. Lamp Check
• To check the intensity of the Exposure Lamp in the Image Reading Section.
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Operation Check] → [Exp. Lamp Check] in
that order.
Scanner
Functions
• To check the operation of the Scanner.
Use
• Turns on the Exposure Lamp.
• Moves the Scanner.
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, touch [Operation Check] → [Scanner] in that order.
2. Use the Keypad to type in the amount to move, and then touch [Set].
176
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.11 CS Remote Care
11.11.1
Outlines
• CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to
exchange data through telephone line or E-Mail in order to control the machine.
• CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble
occurs. It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the necessary data.
• Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
a. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count, PM count.
b. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how
often errors occur.
c. Data on adjustment
d. Data on setting
11.11.2
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Setting Up the CS Remote Care
NOTE
• For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up,
clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting.
☞ For clearing the RAM, see 187 Page.
• When using the telephone line for connection, use the recommended modem.
(For recommended modem, contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA.)
Procedure
Using the telephone line modem
Using E-mail
0
Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care Center.
The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered.
1
Connecting the modem
Turn the power for the modem OFF. Connect
the machine and the modem with a modem
cable. Connect the modem and the wall jack
with a modular cable.
* For connecting the modular cable, see the
manual for the modem.
2
Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [RAM Clear].
3. Select [Yes], and touch [END].
☞ 187
3
Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remove Care] Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remove Care]
→ [System Input], and touch [Modem].
→ [System Input], and touch [E-Mail].
4
Inputting the ID Code
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and touch [ID Code] again.
☞ 186
5
Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-Key Pad, and touch [Job Start].
☞ 187
Be sure to remove the telephone line modem
when e-mail is used.
177
Adjustment / Setting
Step
Step
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Procedure
Using the telephone line modem
6
Setting the Center ID
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote
Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Basic] → [Center ID], and input the
Center ID (five digits).
☞ 186
7
Setting the Device ID
3. Touch [[Fwd] → [Device ID], and input
Device ID (nine digits).
☞ 186
Setting the Device ID
4. Touch [Device ID], and input Device ID (nine
digits).
☞ 186
8
Inputting the Device telephone number
Setting the Respond Timeout
5. Touch [Device Phone No].
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote
6. Input the Device telephone number using the
Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
10-Key Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-] keys.
2. Touch [Respond Timeout] and enter the
☞ 186
response timeout using the 10-Key Pad.
NOTE
• Under normal conditions, there is no
need to change the default setting.
☞ 187
Inputting the AT command for initializing the
modem
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote
Care] → and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [AT Command].
3. Input AT Command.
NOTE
• Change this Command only when it is
necessary. (They do not need to be
changed in normal condition.)
• For details on AT Command, see the manual for the modem.
☞ 188
9
178
Using E-mail
Setting the Center ID and telephone number of
the Center
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote
Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [Basic] → [Center ID], and input the
Center ID (five digits).
☞ 186
3. Touch [Center Phone No].
4. Input the telephone number of the Center
using the 10-Keys Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-]
keys.
☞ 186
Adjustment / Setting
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Setting the E-mail address
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote
Care] → and touch [Server Setting].
2. Touch [Initial data].
3. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter] to perform initialization.
4. Touch [Server for RX] and set POP3 Server
Address, POP3 User Name, POP3 Password, and POP3 Port Number.
☞ 188
5. Touch [RX Settings] and set E-Mail Address,
Auto-RX Check, Connection Timeout, and
APOP Authentication.
☞ 188
6. Touch [TX Settings] and set SMTP Server
Address, SMTP Port Number, Connection
Timeout, and Authentication Setting.
☞ 189
7. Touch [TX/RX Test] and press the Start key
to carry out the transmission/reception test.
Make sure that data is correctly transmitted
and received and then proceed to the next
step. If the test fails, make checks again by
following the instructions given as the error
message; then, carry out the transmission/
reception test once again.
☞ 190
10
11
Procedure
Using the telephone line modem
bizhub 200/250/350
Step
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Using E-mail
Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• This setting is not normally necessary.
Take this step only when necessary in a
specific connecting condition.
To step 11
Executing the initial transmission
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote
Care], and touch [Detail Setting].
2. Touch [initial transmission] on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected
with the Center, CS Remote Care setting
screen will be displayed.
NOTE
• The initial transmission key at the right
bottom of the screen will be displayed
only when the Center ID, the Device ID,
Telephone number of the Center and the
Device telephone number have been
input.
☞ 186
Executing initial connection mail reception
The initial connection mail reception is performed from the Center side to the e-mail
address of the local machine.
NOTE
• If a CS Remote Care-related screen is
open during reception of the initial connection mail from the center, the data
being set up is discarded and the CS
Remote Care setting screen appears.
• For the initial connection mail transmission procedure, see the CS Remote Care
center manual.
• Transmission and reception of e-mail is
possible only between the center and the
machine which are initially connected.
• The initial connection is made from the
center, at which time the center mail
address is stored in the machine.
• After the initial registration has been
completed, the center mail address is displayed in E-Mail address which is
accessed as follows: Tech. Rep. Mode →
[CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting] →
[Basic] → E-Mail address.
179
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.11.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Software SW setting for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• In case you changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state.
A. Input procedure
1. Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and touch [Software
Switch Setting].
2. Touch [Mode Selection], and input the SW number (two digits) using the 10-Key Pad.
3. Touch [Bit Selection], and select SW bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0 or 1
using the 10-Key Pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, touch [HEX Selection], and input using the 10Key Pad or A to F keys.)
4. Touch [Enter].
NOTE
• About functions of each switch, see to “B. List of software SW for CS Remote
Care.”
B. List of software SW for CS Remote Care
NOTE
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.
Bit
SW 01
0
Dial Mode
1
Adjustment / Setting
SW No.
SW 02
SW 03
SW 04
180
Functions
0
1
Default
Pulse
Tone
1
Reservation
—
—
0
2
Reservation
—
—
0
3
Reservation
—
—
0
4
Baud rate
*1
*1
0
5
*1
*1
0
6
*1
*1
0
7
*1
*1
1
0
Emergency transmission
Do not call
Call
1
1
Date specified transmission
Do not call
Call
1
2
Reservation
—
—
0
3
Reservation
—
—
0
4
Reservation
—
—
0
5
Auto call on the IC Life
Do not call
Call
1
6
Reservation
Do not call
Call
1
7
Reservation
—
—
0
0
0
Reservation
1
Auto call on the toner empty
—
—
Do not call
Call
2
1
Reservation
—
—
0
3
Reservation
Do not call
Call
1
4 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
0 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
Bit
SW 05
0
Functions
0
1
*2
*2
1
1
*2
*2
1
2
*2
*2
0
3
*2
*2
0
—
—
0
*3
*3
0
1
*3
*3
1
2
*3
*3
0
3
*3
*3
1
4
*3
*3
0
5
*3
*3
0
6
*3
*3
0
—
—
0
Do not redial
Redial
1
—
—
0
Modem redial interval
4 to 7 Reservation
SW 06
SW 07
0
Modem redial times
7
Reservation
0
Redial for response time out
1 to 7 Reserved
SW 08
0
*4
*4
0
*4
*4
1
2
*4
*4
1
3
*4
*4
0
—
—
0
*5
*5
0
1
Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error
4 to 7 Reservation
SW 09
0
1
SW 11
Retransmission times on E-Mail
delivery error
*5
*5
1
2
*5
*5
0
3
*5
*5
1
4
*5
*5
0
5
*5
*5
0
6
*5
*5
0
Reservation
—
—
0
0 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
*6
*6
0
*6
*6
0
*6
*6
0
3
*6
*6
0
4
*6
*6
0
5
*6
*6
1
6
*6
*6
0
7
*6
*6
0
7
SW 10
Default
0
1
2
Timer 1
RING reception → CONNECT
reception
181
bizhub 200/250/350
SW No.
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
SW No.
Bit
SW 12
0
1
2
SW 13
SW 14
1
*7
Default
0
*7
*7
0
*7
0
*7
*7
0
4
*7
*7
0
5
*7
*7
0
6
*7
*7
1
7
*7
*7
0
—
—
0
*8
*8
0
*8
*8
0
*8
*8
0
3
*8
*8
0
4
*8
*8
0
5
*8
*8
1
6
*8
*8
0
7
*8
*8
0
*9
*9
0
0 to 7 Reservation
0
0
1
Adjustment / Setting
0
*7
*7
2
Timer 4
Line connection → Start request
telegram delivery
Timer 5
Wait time for other side's response
*9
*9
1
2
*9
*9
1
3
*9
*9
1
4
*9
*9
1
5
*9
*9
0
6
*9
*9
0
7
*9
*9
0
SW 16
0 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
SW 17
0 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
Do not call
Call
1
1 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
0 to 7 Reservation
—
—
0
SW 18
0
SW 19 to
SW 40
182
Functions
Timer 2
Dial request completed → CONNECT
reception
3
1
SW 15
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Attention display
To set weather to give the alarm display
when using the modem but the power
for the modem is OFF.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Mode
01-7
01-6
01-5
01-4
“9600 bps”
0
1
1
0
19200 bps
0
1
1
1
38400 bps
1
0
0
0
05-0
bizhub 200/250/350
*1: Baud rate
*2: Modem redial interval
Mode
05-3
05-2
05-1
1 minute
0
0
0
1
2 minutes
0
0
1
0
“3 minutes”
0
0
1
1
4 minutes
0
1
0
0
5 minutes
0
1
0
1
6 minutes
0
1
1
0
7 minutes
0
1
1
1
8 minutes
1
0
0
0
9 minutes
1
0
0
1
10 minutes
1
0
1
0
Mode
06-6
06-5
0 to 9 times
“10 times”
06-4
06-3
06-2
06-1
06-0
1
0
000 0000 to 000 1001
0
0
11 to 99 times
0
1
0
000 1011 to 110 0011
*4: Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error
Mode
08-3
08-2
08-1
0 minute
0
0
0
08-0
0
10 minutes
0
0
0
1
20 minutes
0
0
1
0
30 minutes
0
0
1
1
40 minutes
0
1
0
0
50 minutes
0
1
0
1
“60 minutes”
0
1
1
0
70 minutes
0
1
1
1
80 minutes
1
0
0
0
90 minutes
1
0
0
1
100 minutes
1
0
1
0
110 minutes
1
0
1
1
120 minutes
1
1
0
0
183
Adjustment / Setting
*3: Modem redial times
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
*5: Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error
Mode
09-6
09-5
09-4
0 to 9 times
“10 times”
09-3
09-2
09-1
09-0
1
0
000 0000 to 000 1001
0
0
0
11 to 99 times
1
0
000 1011 to 110 0011
*6: Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT reception)
Mode
11-7
11-6
11-5
0 to 31 sec
“32 sec”
11-4
11-3
11-2
11-1
11-0
0
0
0
12-2
12-1
12-0
0
0
0
14-2
14-1
14-0
0
0
0
15-2
15-1
15-0
1
0
0000 0000 to 0001 1111
0
0
1
33 to 255 sec
0
0
0010 0001 to 1111 1111
*7: Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT reception)
Mode
12-7
12-6
12-5
0 to 63 sec
“64 sec”
12-4
12-3
0000 0000 to 0011 1111
0
1
0
65 to 255 sec
0
0
0100 0001 to 1111 1111
*8: Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request telegram delivery)
Mode
14-7
14-6
14-5
Adjustment / Setting
0 to 31 (x 100 msec)
“32 (x 100 msec)”
14-4
14-3
0000 0000 to 0001 1111
0
0
1
33 to 255 (x 100 msec)
0
0
0010 0001 to 1111 1111
*9: Timer 5 (Wait time for other side’s response)
Mode
15-7
15-6
15-5
0 to 29 sec
“30 sec”
31 to 255 sec
184
15-4
15-3
0000 0000 to 0001 1101
0
0
0
1
1
0001 1111 to 1111 1111
1
11.11.4
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Setup confirmation
• Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set
up.
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Make sure that either [E-Mail] or [Modem], whichever has been selected, is displayed
on the screen.
11.11.5
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Calling the Maintenance
• When CE starts maintenance, inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which
CE can identify. They are controlled by the distributor.) will transmit the information to the
Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. When the maintenance is finished, touching [Maintenance is completed.] key will transmit the information to the Center and tells that it is finished.
A.
1.
2.
3.
When starting the Maintenance
Select Tech. Rep. Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
Touch [ID Code], and input ID Code.
Touch [ID Coke].
B. When finishing the Maintenance
1. Select Tech. Rep. Mode and touch [CS Remote Care].
2. Touch [Maintenance is completed.]
11.11.6
Calling the Center from the Administrator
• When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote
Care center.
1. From the setting menu, touch the keys in this order: [Admin. Management] → [Admin.
1] → [Call Remote Center].
2. Touch [Call Remote Center].
3. Press the Start key.
When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out, the
Admin. transmission key will not be displayed, and the transmission is not available.
NOTE
• For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date
and time, refer to the manual for CS Remote Care Center.
11.11.7
Checking the transmission log
• The transmission log list will be output to be checked.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and touch [Detail setting].
Touch [Communication Log Print].
Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4R paper.
When the Basic screen reappears after the Tech. Rep. mode has been exited, an output of the communication log is produced.
185
Adjustment / Setting
* The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
11.11.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Detail on settings
A. System Input
Functions
• To select the system type for remote diagnosis.
Use
• Use to newly build or change the system.
Setting/
Procedure
• Select E-Mail or Modem.
• The default setting is “E-Mail”.
“E-Mail”
Modem
B. ID Code
Functions
• To register the Service ID.
Use
• Use when registering and changing Service ID.
• Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-Key Pad. (0000001 to 9999999)
Setting/
Procedure
Registration
• Touch [ID Code] and enter the Service ID.
• Touch [ID code] to register the ID.
• The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered.
C. Detail Setting
(1) Basic
Functions
• Execute the primary setting.
Use
• Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center.
Adjustment / Setting
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [CS Remote Care].
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting.
Primary Setting
• Set the Center ID, Device ID, and the phone No.
• When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, E-mail
address of the Center is displayed.
Setting/
Procedure
* When entering the phone No, 10-Keys and keys on the screen have following meanings.
[-] Pose
: Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait
: Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing
[*],[#]
: To be used as necessary
Initial Transmission
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care
Center to register the machine.
(Only when the Modem is selected on the system Input.)
186
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
(2) Date & Time Setting
Functions
• To set the data and time-of-day
Use
• Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.
Setting/
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch [CS Remote Care].
Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting.
Enter the date (month, day and year), time-of-day, and the time zone from the 10-Key
Pad.
5. Touch [Job Start] to start the clock.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(3) RAM Clear
Functions
• To clear the following data at the Center
ID Code, Primary Setting, Date/Time Input (Time Zone), Software SW Setting and AT
Command.
Use
• To be used for setting CS Remote Care.
• To be used for reset the every data of the Center to default.
NOTE
• If RAM Clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be
implemented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether it
is done properly or not.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “NO”
YES
“NO”
(4) Communication Log Print
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To print out the Communication Log.
• Use to output and use the Communication Log.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch [CS Remote Care].
Touch [Detail Setting] to access Communication Log Print.
Load Tray 1 or Bypass Tray with A4R or 81/2 x 11 paper.
When the Basic screen reappears after the Tech. Rep. mode has been exited, an output of the communication log is produced.
(5) Software Switch Setting
Functions
• To change the CS Remote Care settings.
Use
• To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary.
Setting/
Procedure
☞ For procedures on settings, see 180.
(6) Respond Timeout
Functions
• To set retry intervals for an e-mail transmission error.
• This setting can be made only when [E-Mail] is selected in System Input.
Use
• To change the retry intervals for an e-mail transmission error.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “30 min.”
10 to 1440 min.
187
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(7) AT Command
Functions
• To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.
• This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting.
Use
• To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.
Setting/
Procedure
• Enter the command and touch [Enter] to register.
D. Server Setting
• Server Setting can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected in System Input.
(1) Server for RX
<POP3 Server Address>
Functions
• To set the POP3 server address used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the address of the POP3 server.
• The POP3 server address can be set as an IP address or domain name.
Setting/
Procedure
<IP Address>
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
<FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
Adjustment / Setting
<POP3 User Name>
Functions
• To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the logon name for the POP3 server.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to 63 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
<POP3 Password>
Functions
• To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the logon password for the POP3 server.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to 15 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
<POP3 Port Number>
Functions
• To set the POP3 port number used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the port number for the POP3 server.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “110”
“110” (1 to 65535)
(2) RX Settings
<E-Mail Address>
Functions
• To set the e-mail address used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the e-mail address.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to 129 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
188
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
<Auto-RX Check>
Functions
• To set whether or not to use Auto-RX Check and the time interval for the POP3 server
used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To select not to use Auto-RX Check.
• To change the time interval for Auto-RX Check.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
“OFF” (1 to 120)
<Connection Timeout>
Functions
• To set the timeout period for connection during reception.
Use
• To change the timeout period for connection during reception.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “60 sec”
“60 sec” (30 to 300)
<APOP Authentication>
Functions
• To set whether or not to enable APOP authentication during reception.
Use
• To enable APOP authentication during reception.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”
ON
“OFF”
Functions
• To set the SMTP server address for transmission used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the address of the SMTP Server.
• The SMTP server address can be set as an IP address or domain name.
Setting/
Procedure
Adjustment / Setting
(3) TX Settings
<SMTP Server Address>
<IP Address>
• IP address Version 4 format
[0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255] . [0 to 255]
<FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
<SMTP Port Number>
Functions
• To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To set the port number of the SMTP Server.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “25”
“25” (1 to 65535)
<Connection Timeout>
Functions
• To set the timeout period for transmission.
Use
• To change the timeout period for connection during transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “60 sec”
“60 sec” (30 to 300)
189
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
<Authentication Setting>
Functions
• To set whether or not to enable authentication during transmission via the SMTP
server.
Use
• Use to enable authentication during transmission.
Types of authentication to be set: POP Before SMTP, SMTP authentication
• The default setting is “OFF”
ON
Setting/
Procedure
“OFF”
* If POP Before SMTP is set, make the setting for POP Before SMTP.
• The default setting is “60 sec”
“60 sec” (0 to 60)
* If SMTP authentication is set, make the following settings.
User ID: Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication.
Password: Enter the password for SMTP authentication.
(4) TX/RX Test
Functions
• To carry out the transmission/reception tests for CS Remote Care.
Use
• To carry out the transmission/reception tests for CS Remote Care.
Setting/
Procedure
• Press the Start key to start transmission.
• The test progress and results are displayed on the screen.
(5) Initial data
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
• To initialize server settings.
Use
• To initialize server settings.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “NO”
190
YES
“NO”
List of the CS Remote Care error code
A. For telephone line modem
Error code
Error
Solution
0001
The line is busy (Busy detection)
• Transmit again manually.
0002
Failure of the Modem default setting at transmitting (When the transmission completes with
modem initial setting failed)
• Check if the power of the
modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition
between the modem and the
main unit.
0003
Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting
(No response to ATD)
• Transmit again manually
• Check if the power of the
modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition
between the modem and the
main unit.
0004
Timeout of Incoming request response
(No response to incoming (starting) request
MSG)
0005
Timeout of CONNECT at receiving
(No response to ATA)
• Check if the power of the
modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition
between the modem and the
main unit.
0006
Shut down of the data modem line (Host)
(Carrier OFF is detected)
• No solution, because the line is
shut down at the host side.
0007
Shut down of the data modem line (Main unit)
(Line is shut down forcibly due to event)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0008
Timeout of start request telegram delivery
• Transmit again manually.
(Start request telegram is not delivered after line
connection)
0009
Timeout of finish request telegram delivery
• Transmit again manually.
(Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of
shut down).)
000A
Receiving rejection
(Receiving is made when the main unit is set to
reject receiving.)
• Check the setting condition of
the host side.
• Check the setting condition of
the main unit side.
000B
RS232C Driver Over Run
(When the modem detects Over Run.)
• If the same error is detected
several times, turn the modem
power OFF and ON.
000C
If the same error is detected several times, turn
the modem power OFF and ON.
• If the same error is detected
several times, turn the modem
power OFF and ON.
000D
Break Interrupt (BI) Indicator
(When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI)
Indicator.)
• If the same error is detected
several times, turn the modem
power OFF and ON.
000E
Receiving RING Buffer Full
(When the Receiving RING Buffer is full.)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
000F
Transmitting RING Buffer Full
(When the Transmitting RING Buffer is full.)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
bizhub 200/250/350
11.11.9
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
191
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Adjustment / Setting
bizhub 200/250/350
Error code
192
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Error
Solution
0010
RX FIF0 ERROR
(when Read / Write error occurs at RX FIF0)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0011
Baud Rate ERROR
• Check the Baud rate of the
(When selected Baud Rate is out of the specificasoftware DipSW.
tion (9600 bps to 38400 bps).)
0012
TX FIF0 Level Error
(When the threshold of the selected TX FIF0 is
not error value (1, 3, 9, 13).)
0013
RX FIF0 Level Error
(When the threshold of the selected RX FIF0 is
not error value (0, 4, 8, 14).)
0014
Receiving Data Over Error
• Contact responsible person of
(When the data whose size exceeds the transmitKONICA MINOLTA.
ting RING buffer is requested.)
0015
Status Error
(During modem operation is being confirmed)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0016
Status Error (During receiving)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0017
Status Error
(During line is being shut down)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0018
Machine ID has already been registered
(Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the
main unit that has already registered Machine
ID.)
• Set the initial registrations
again for all including the host
side.
0019
Center ID Error
• Check Center ID setting of the
(Center ID of the host is not identical with the one
main unit side.
of start request telegram.)
• Check Center ID setting of the
main unit side.
001A
Device ID inconsistency
• Check Device ID setting of the
(Device ID of the host is not identical with the one
main unit side.
of start request telegram.)
• Check the setting of the host
side.
001B
Device ID Unregistered
• Check Device ID setting of the
(Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting,
main unit side.
Emergency call) comes from the main unit that
• Check the setting of the host
has not registered Machine ID yet.)
side.
001C
Grammar Error
• Contact responsible person of
(Received response telegram is unregulated forKONICA MINOLTA.
mat.)
001D
Impossible to change (Unchangeable items)
(Host requests to change the setting of items
which are not allowed to change.)
001E
Impossible to change (During printing)
• Try again when the machine is
(Setting cannot be changed because the setting
not printing.
change is made during the machine is printing or
starts printing.)
001F
Impossible to change (Unread items)
(The host tries to make writing on the items the
current value has not been read.)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
Error
Solution
0020
Timeout of Telegram Delivery
(At waiting mode of telegram delivery the
machine fails to receive the telegram in a given
time.)
• Try communication again.
0021
Telegram Size Over
(The machine receives the telegram whose size
exceeds the specification.)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0022
Transmitting Phase Response NG
• Contact responsible person of
(Transmitting phase response MSG is not approKONICA MINOLTA.
priate.)
0023
Timeout of Transmitting Phase Response MSG
(Transmitting phase response MSG is timeout.)
0024
Event Data Acquisition Function Error
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
(Although the transmitting phase response MSG
is OK, the function for Data acquisition shows
“No event,”.)
0025
Timeout of Driver transmitting check MSG
(Transmitting check MSG from the driver task is
timeout.)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0026
Detection of Internal Contradiction
(Unknown event is detected. Condition value is
not correct or so on.)
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
0027
Transmission / Receiving collision
(Receiving is detecting during transmitting processing)
• Try communication again.
• Contact responsible person of
KONICA MINOLTA.
B. For e-mail
Error code
Error
bizhub 200/250/350
Error code
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Solution
0001
Connection timeout during transmission
• Check SMTP server on the
user side.
0***
Failure in transmission
***: SMTP response code (hexadecimal form)
• Check SMTP server on the
user side.
0003
Connection timeout during reception
• Check POP3 server on the
user side.
0005
Failure in reception
• Check POP3 server on the
user side.
1030
Machine ID mismatch
(Mail with a machine ID different from that of the
local machine has been received.)
• Check machine ID setting.
• Check machine ID setting on
the host side.
1050
Grammatical error
(Mail with undefined CS Remote Care command
portion (2 digits) has been received.)

1061
Rewrite disabled
(Mail requesting rewriting for data item that is disabled for setting change has been received from
the host.)

1062
Rewrite disabled during copy cycle
(To return rewrite disabled during copy cycle to
the host)
• Have the host send another
rewrite request mail.
193
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Adjustment / Setting
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
194
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Error code
Error
Solution
1080
Data length error
(LEN value of TEXT data does not coincide with
actual data length.)

1081
Frame number error
(Last frame not received) (Some digits of frame
number missing)
1082
Subject Type error
(Code with Subject Type undefined has been
received.)
1084
Validity period exceeded
(Validity period of data rewrite command is
exceeded.)
1091
Command size over
(Attached file that exceeds the size of the reception buffer the copier is equipped with has been
received.)
1092
Faulty mail has been received when the machine • Check the host side for
is yet to be registered.
machine registration status.
2039
Socket is not connected
(LAN cable on the server side is loose.)
203C
Connection timeout
• Check the host side for
machine registration status.

• Have the host send another
rewrite request mail.

• Check the SMTP server and
POP3 server on the user side.

203E
Network is down
(LAN cable on the copier side is loose.)
• Check the network connector
for connection to the copier on
the user side.
• Check the network environment on the user side.
3000
POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3001
POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3002
POP3_CONNECT_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3003
POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3004
POP3_FORMAT_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3005
POP3_MEMORY_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3006
POP3_JOBID_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3007
POP3_NO_DATA_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3008
POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
3009
POP3_MAILBOX_FULL
• Check the POP3 server environment on the user side.
4103
Not ready (MIO)
(An attempt is made to send or receive mail when • Wait for some while and then
e-mail reception is not ready yet after power has
retry.
been turned ON.)
Error code
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Error
Solution
4104
SMTP channel not ready
• Wait for some while and then
retry.
4105
POP3 channel not ready
• Wait for some while and then
retry.
4106
Not ready in conditions other than above
• Wait for some while and then
retry.
5***
MIO has detected an error while transmission of
attached file is being processed.
***: Error code detected by MIO

6***
MIO has detected an error during main transmission sequence.
***: Error code detected by MIO

bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11.11.10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care
Display of
Communication result
Communicating
Communication trouble
with the Center
Complete successfully
Cause
Solution


Although the machine tries to com• See the list of error message and conmunicate with the Center, there is
firm the corresponding point.
any trouble and the communica☞ 261
tion completes unsuccessfully.


Modem trouble
Although the machine tries to com- • Check if the Power of modem in ON.
municate with the Center, there is • Check if there is any problem in conany trouble in the modem.
nection between the modem and the
main unit.
Busy line
Although the machine tries to com- • Communicate with the Center again.
municate with the Center, the line
to the Center is busy.
No response
Although the machine tries to com- • Communicate with the Center again.
municate with the Center, there is • Check the communication environno response from the Center.
ment of the Center side.
195
Adjustment / Setting
If communication is not done properly during use of the modem, check the condition by following the procedures shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Tech. Rep. Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of initial transmission / Call Remote Center / Maintenance Start
transmitting / Maintenance is completed., the communication result will be displayed at
the top of the screen.
* For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure.
bizhub 200/250/350
11. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11.12 ROM Version
Functions
• To check the ROM version.
Use
• To check the ROM version when firmware is upgraded.
• To check the ROM version when the board is replaced with a new one.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [ROM Version] from the Tech. Rep. mode.
• MSC: MFBS
• Printer: PWB-A
• ADF: PWB-A AF
• LCT: PWB-C1 LCT
• Finisher: PWB-A FN
* If the option is not installed, [None] appears.
11.13 Level History
• To display the various level histories.
Use
• Used for troubleshooting of image problems.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Level History] from the Tech. Rep. mode.
• ATDC Set: Displays the voltage set with the automatic ATDC sensor adjustment.
• ATDC Current: Displays the T/C ratio for the ATDC sensor.
• Vg Current: Displays the current value of the grid voltage.
• Vb Current: Displays the current value of the developing bias voltage.
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
196
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
12. Counters
bizhub 200/250/350
12. Counters
12.1 Counters Function Setting Procedure
12.1.1
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 9
3. Select a function.
4040F3E550DA
12.1.2
Exiting
Adjustment / Setting
• Press the Reset Key.
12.2 Counters Function Tree
Tech. Rep. Mode
Counters
Total Counter
Large Size Counter
Copy Kit Counter
Copy Kit
Plug-In Counter
Key Counter
Vendoer Mode
4040F3E551DA
197
bizhub 200/250/350
12. Counters
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
12.3 Settings in the Counters
12.3.1
Total Counter
Functions
• To set the counting method for the Total Counter.
Use
• The default setting is “Mode 1”.
Setting/
Procedure
12.3.2
“Mode 1”
Mode 2
Mode 3
• Mode 1: 1 count per copy cycle
• Mode 2, Mode 3: 2 counts according to the paper size and copy mode
Large Size Counter
Functions
• To set the counting method for the Size Counter.
Use
• The default setting is “A3/11x17”.
Setting/
Procedure
No Count
A3/B4/11x17/Legal
A3/11x17
A3/11x17/B4/11x14/Foolscape/Legal
<Count Table for the Total Counter and Size Counter>
Setting
For 1-sided copies
Large Size Counter
Total Counter
Total Counter
Count
Adjustment / Setting
Copy Mode
Non-standard
size
Standard size
Mode
1
2
For 2-sided copies
Mode
3
2
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
Large Size Counter
0
0
Total by Account
1
1
2
2
Large Size by Account
0
1
1
2
Functions
Use
0
1
2
0
1
198
2
3
2
4
4
2
2
0
1
4
2
2
4
4
0
2
2
0
• To select whether to enable or disable the Copy Kit Counter.
Mode 2
1
1
1
Copy Kit Counter
“Mode 1”
Mode
3
2
• The default setting is “Mode 1”.
Setting/
Procedure
Standard size
Mode
1
2-Sided Total Counter
12.3.3
Non-standard
size
Mode 3
• Mode 1: The Copy Kit Counter is disabled.
• Mode 2: Copying continues even after the set value is reached.
• Mode 3: Copying is prohibited after the set value is reached.
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Copy Kit
Functions
bizhub 200/250/350
12.3.4
12. Counters
• To enter a value for the Copy Kit Counter.
Use
• When the current value reaches the set value, the following appears.
• Mode 2: The icon
Setting/
Procedure
appears in the Additional Message Display.
• Mode 3: The maintenance call reminder “M4” appears and copying is prohibited.
• Press the Clear key to clear the set value.
• Use the Keypad to type in the set value.
12.3.5
Plug-In Counter
Functions
• To select the counting method.
Use
• The default setting is “No. of Prints”.
Setting/
Procedure
“No. of Prints”
Copy Cycle
• No. of Prints: The count increments according to the number of pages that is outputted.
• Copy Cycle: The count increments according to the number of copies.
<Count Table for the Plug-In Counter>
Large Size Counter
Setting
Count
For 1-sided copies
Total Counter
Non-standard
size
Standard size
Mode
1
2
For 2-sided copies
Mode
3
Mode
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
2
1
4
4
2
4
4
1
2
2
With “Copy Cycle” selected
1
1
2
2
Use
Mode
2
1
Functions
Standard size
1
With “No. of Prints”
selected
12.3.6
Non-standard
size
2
Key Counter
• To select whether to enable or disable the Key Counter.
• The default setting is “OFF”.
Setting/
Procedure
Yes
“OFF”
• If the Key Counter is installed, select “Yes”.
12.3.7
Functions
Vendor Mode
• When the Key Counter, Coin Vendor or Data Controller is installed, select the appropriate option.
Use
• To select the mounted option.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
“OFF”
Coin
Card
199
Adjustment / Setting
Copy Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
13. Service Security Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
13. Service Security Mode
13.1 Service Security Mode Function Setting Procedure
13.1.1
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 0→ Clear Key
3. Select a function.
4040F3E552DA
13.1.2
Exiting
Adjustment / Setting
• Press the Reset Key.
13.2 Service Security Mode Function Tree
Tech. Rep. Mode
Service Securuty Mode
Service Code Change
4040F3E553DA
13.3 Settings in the Service Security Mode
13.3.1
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
200
Service Code Change
• To change the service code used to access the Tech. Rep. mode, Initial mode, and
Maintenance mode.
1. Call the Service Security mode from the Tech. Rep. mode and then touch [Service
Code Change].
2. Touch [Current Code] and enter the currently set 8-digit service code.
3. Touch [New Code] and enter a new 8-digit service code.
4. Touch [Retype New Code] and enter the new 8-digit service code once again.
• The “#” and “*” keys may be used in combination with the 10-Key Pad for entry of the
service code.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
14. Adjust Mode
bizhub 200/250/350
14. Adjust Mode
14.1 Adjust Mode Function Setting Procedure
14.1.1
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → Start Key
3. Select a function.
4040F3E554DA
14.1.2
Exiting
Adjustment / Setting
• Press the Reset Key.
14.2 Adjust Mode Function Tree
Tech. Rep. mode
Adjust
Printer
Registration (CD)
Registration (FD)
Scanner
Registration
Zoom
4040F3E555DA
201
bizhub 200/250/350
14. Adjust Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
14.3 Settings in the Adjust Mode
14.3.1
Printer
A. Registration (CD)
Functions
• To vary and adjust the image start position in the main scanning direction for each
paper source.
Use
• The PH Unit has been replaced.
• The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction.
• A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
Width A on the test pattern produced should fall
within the following range.
Adjustment
Specification
Width A
Specifications: 10 mm ± 2.0 mm
Setting Range: -4.0 mm to +4.0 mm
(in 0.1 mm increments)
4040F3C517DA
If width A on the test pattern is wider than specifications.
Adjustment
Longer than the actual scale: decrease the setting value.
Instructions
Shorter than the actual scale: increase the setting value.
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
202
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Enter the Adjust Mode.
Touch [Printer] and [Registration (CD)] in that order.
Touch the [Test Print].
Select the paper source and press the Start key.
Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern.
If it fails to meet the specifications, change the setting and redo the check.
If it meets the specifications, touch [END].
Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
14. Adjust Mode
B. Registration (FD)
Functions
• To vary and adjust the image start position in the sub scanning direction for each paper
source.
Use
• The PH Unit has been replaced.
• The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction.
Width B on the test pattern produced should fall
within the following range.
Adjustment
Specification
Width B
4040F3C518DA
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Specifications: 11.3 mm ± 1.5 mm
Setting Range:
<bizhub 350>
-19 (-6.08 mm) to +19 (+6.08 mm)
(in 0.32 mm increments)
<bizhub 250/bizhub 200>
-21 (-5.88 mm) to +21 (+5.88 mm)
(in 0.28 mm increments)
If width B on the test pattern is wider than specifications.
Adjustment
Longer than the actual scale: decrease the setting value.
Instructions
Shorter than the actual scale: increase the setting value.
Enter the Adjust Mode.
Touch [Printer] and [Registration (FD)] in that order.
Touch the [Test Print].
Select the paper source and press the Start key.
Check the dimension of width B on the test pattern.
If it fails to meet the specifications, change the setting and redo the check.
If it meets the specifications, touch [END].
Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources.
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
203
14.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner
• Use the following Test Chart for the adjustment of the Scanner Section.
• If the Test Chart is not available, a scale may be used instead.
D
• A: Scan image position: CD adjustment
• B: Scan image position: FD adjustment
• C: Scanner CD zoom ratio adjustment
• D: Scanner FD zoom ratio adjustment
B
5.6
4.5
6.3
5.0
4.5
4.0
4.0
3.6
3.2
3.2
2.8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2.0
2.0
ABCDEFGHIJKLabcdefghijklm1234567890
9pt.
ABCDEFGHIJKabcdefghijkl12345678
ABCDEFGHIJabcdefghijk1234567
12pt.
ABCDEFGabcdefg123456789
14pt.
ABCDEFabcdefg1234567
18pt.
ABCDEabcdef12345
8pt.
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧞౮
9pt.
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
10pt.
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀ
12pt.
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼ
14pt.
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀
18pt.
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝
R1
.5
Ǿ4.8
Ǿ14
C
2.5
2.2
8pt.
10pt.
.5
2.5
Original
Reference
6.3
5.6
5.0
3.6
2.8
2.2
C1
bizhub 200/250/350
14. Adjust Mode
5.6
4.5
3.6
2.8
6.3
5.0
4.0
al plates and gen
ts an office mach
while and after
rol over the ink
ickness quality c
ut tools a positive
antly longer than
you with copy qu
ets you and impre
tically separate w
nder constant con
t cylinders to con
10
2.5
40
2.0
stment and runs job no blanket wash your office offset to cut copying costs with this can on automatic changeover from paper masters and automated short rur
n from a pound of ink copy can be run on both sides of the sheet with multiple colors of on a master turning on the machine and running off the copies its not
many sizes of materials on almost all kinds of stock rag bond card stock smooth finish adding new versatility speed and efficiency mated run a choice of optior
en changes are nccessary now advanced fingertip programming single lever action control the inking and dampening system permits the operator to exercise pre
rating cycle greatly reduces repetitive shortrun duplicating time for example when used and impression cylinders that are selfadjusting for changes is paper or r
anually control even though the machine is running on automatic changeover from pater to scales on paper feed that match scales on rceiving tray of machine
t runs to metal plates and general duplicating takes only a matter of seconds the machine includes two ductor rollers and five distributor rollers offset rollers las
s its not a press its an office machine heres practical automation the wide image model nylon for longer wear people who arent acquaited you want it to be it p
a choise of options before while and after copies are run allows the operator to adjust the quality aquamatic control not only assures sharp clean first copies b
o metal plate and from shortrun prese the inking and dampening system permits the three with varying weigts of paper no special adjustments needed cylinders
ollers are large size to insure even distribution of ink the two form rollers are of different machine all without tools a positive vacuum paper feed system keeps
rs soft rollers are made of polyurethane to resist chemical attack most hard rollers are for to gripper master and impression cylinders automatically adjust to th
7㧙 ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ
12㧙 ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
A
5
3.2
2.2
20㧙
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ
20㧙
ABCDEFG
7㧙 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
12㧙 ABCDEFGHIJKL
MODEL :
MACHINE S/N :
DATE :
EXP. :
7㧙 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRST
12㧙 ABCDEFGHIJKL
㧛
AUTO
㧛
͠
㧑
MANUAL(
TOTAL COUNTER :
MODE :
Text
imply makes desti
many as copies c
send out you can
uable printed mat
a simplifies the e
compared to a sta
isters and automa
and running off t
nd efficiency to m
ation from pater t
plate the three osd
longer then ordin
Photo
Text / Photo
Printing Direction :
20㧙
ABCDEFG
)
7㧙 ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫㧝౮⌀ᬀሼශ
12㧙 ౮⌀ᬀሼශሼഀઃ⴫
20㧙
౮⌀ᬀሼශሼ
Original-Set Direction :
OTHERS :
5.6
4.5
3.6
2.8
2.2
6.3
5.6
5.0
4.5
4.0
3.6
3.2
2.8
2.5
2.2
2.0
6.3
5.0
4.0
3.2
2.5
2.0
PART NO. 4034-7940-01
(TEST CHART NO. KMTC-001-01)
Printed in Japan
4040F3C519DA
Adjustment / Setting
A. Registration (CD)
Functions
• To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scanning direction.
Use
• When the Original Glass is replaced.
• When the CCD Unit is with a new one.
• Adjust so that width A on the sample copy
made falls within the following range.
• It is required that Registration (CD) of Printer be
adjusted so as to meet the specifications.
A
Adjustment
Specification
Specifications: 20 mm ± 1.0 mm
Setting Range: -72 to +72 (1 mm = 24 dot)
4040F3C523DA
If width A of the output copy falls outside the specified range and
Adjustment
if width A is 19 mm or less: increase the setting value.
Instructions
if width A is 21 mm or greater: decrease the setting value.
Setting/
Procedure
204
1. Position the Test Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the
scale.
2. Press the Start key to make a copy.
3. Check point A on the image of the copy.
4. If width A on the copy falls outside the specified range, enter the Adjust mode.
5. Touch [Scanner] → [Registration] → [CD] in that order.
6. Press the Clear key and enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
7. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
14. Adjust Mode
B. Registration (FD)
Functions
• To adjust for variations in the accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the sub scanning direction.
Use
• When the Original Glass is replaced.
• When the CCD Unit is with a new one.
B
Adjustment
Specification
• Adjust so that width B on the sample copy
made falls within the following range.
• It is required that Registration (FD) of Printer be
adjusted so as to meet the specifications.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Specifications: 20 mm ± 1.0 mm
Setting Range: -24 to +72 (1 mm = 24 dot)
4040F3C524DA
If width B of the output copy falls outside the specified range and
Adjustment
if width B is 19 mm or less: decrease the setting value.
Instructions
if width B is 21 mm or greater: increase the setting value.
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
1. Position the Test Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the
scale.
2. Press the Start key to make a copy.
3. Check point B on the image of the copy.
4. If width B on the copy falls outside the specified range, enter the Adjust mode.
5. Touch [Scanner] → [Registration] → [FD] in that order.
6. Press the Clear key and enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
7. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
205
bizhub 200/250/350
14. Adjust Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C. Zoom (CD)
Functions
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the Scanner Section
Use
• When the CCD Unit is with a new one.
Adjustment
Specification
• Measure C width on the test chart and on the
sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within
the following specification.
• It is required that Registration (CD) of Printer be
adjusted so as to meet the specifications.
C
4040F3C525DA
Specifications: ± 2.0 mm
Setting Range: 0.990 to 1.010
(in 0.001 mm increments)
If width C on the sample copy made is wider than that on the test chart, decrease the setAdjustment ting value.
Instructions If width C on the sample copy made is narrower than that on the test chart, increase the
setting value.
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
206
1. Call the Adjust Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Scanner] → [Zoom] in that order.
3. Position the test Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the
scale.
4. Touch [Test Print] to make a copy.
5. Check the C width on the image of the copy.
6. If width C on the sample copy made falls outside the specified range, touch CD:
[Copy].
7. Press the Clear key and enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
8. Touch [Test Print] again to make a copy.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
14. Adjust Mode
D. Zoom (FD)
Functions
• To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the Scanner Section
Use
• When the CCD Unit is with a new one.
• Measure D width on the test chart and on the
sample copy, and adjust the gap to be within
the following specification.
• It is required that Registration (FD) of Printer be
adjusted so as to meet the specifications.
Adjustment
Specification
D
4040F3C526DA
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Specifications: ± 2.0 mm
Setting Range: 0.990 to 1.010
(in 0.001 mm increments)
If width D on the sample copy made is wider than that on the test chart, decrease the setAdjustment ting value.
Instructions If width D on the sample copy made is narrower than that on the test chart, increase the
setting value.
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Adjust Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [Scanner] → [Zoom] in that order.
3. Position the test Chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the
scale.
4. Touch [Test Print] to make a copy.
5. Check the D width on the image of the copy.
6. If width D on the sample copy made falls outside the specified range, touch FD: [Copy].
7. Press the Clear key and enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
8. Touch [Test Print] again to make a copy.
9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.
207
bizhub 200/250/350
15. Initial Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
15. Initial Mode
15.1 Initial Mode Function Setting Procedure
[2]
[1]
4040F3C533DA
Adjustment / Setting
1. Remove the Compact Flash Cover [1].
2. Press the Warm Restart switch [2].
4040F3C521DA
3. When “z” appears at the center on the left-hand side of the screen, enter “3” from the
10-Key Pad.
4. Enter the 8-digit service code and touch [END]. (Default value: 00000000)
NOTE
• When [END] is touched after a wrong service code has been entered, the Basic
screen reappears.
• At the fourth access after entries of three wrong access codes, [END] is not available on the screen. It is therefore necessary to turn OFF and ON the Main Power
Switch.
• If you forget the service code, it becomes necessary to replace the RAMS Board
with a new one. Take necessary steps not to forget the service code.
• The RAMS Board is not available as a replacement part. If it requires replacement,
contact Office Printing Support Division by way of CSES.
5. Select a function.
15.1.1
Exiting
• Touch [Exit].
208
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
15. Initial Mode
Initial Mode
Total Clear
Touch Panel Adjustment
Marketing Area
Image Data Clear
Clear FAX Setting
Date/Time Setting *1
Trouble Reset
bizhub 200/250/350
15.2 Initial Mode Function Tree
4040F3E556DA
*1: For details, see FK-503 Service Manual.
15.3 Settings in the Initial Mode
NOTE
• Be sure to turn the main power switch OFF and ON after the Initial mode has been
completed.
Total Clear
Functions
• To clear all data.
Use
The following settings are cleared.
• Fax-related setting information
• Bulletin board setting information
• Transmission/reception log information
• Image data
• Network setting information
• Destination information
• Soft switch information
• Management-by-account setting information
• User authentication setting information
• Account/user counter
• Remote maintenance setting information
• FW download setting information
• Copy setting information (zoom ratio, paper size, erase width, paper source detailed
information, copy job program, bypass free size registration, etc.)
• CSRC setting information
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Total Clear] from the Initial mode screen.
2. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter] to start the clearing sequence.
3. When the message indicating completion of the clearing sequence appears, touch
[OK].
209
Adjustment / Setting
15.3.1
bizhub 200/250/350
15. Initial Mode
15.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Touch Panel Adjustment
Functions
• To adjust the position of the Touch Panel display
Use
• Make this adjustment if the Touch Panel is slow to respond to a pressing action.
• When the control panel is replaced.
1. Touch [Touch Panel Adjustment] from the Initial mode screen.
2. Following the arrow mark, touch the four points (+) sequentially on the screen using a
pen.
NOTE
• Be sure to touch the very center of each point.
• Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen.
1
2
3
4
Adjustment / Setting
Adjustment
Procedure
4040F3E557DA
15.3.3
Marketing Area
Functions
• To specify the marketing region.
Use
• When the marketing area is changed.
• Fixed zoom ratios shown on the screen, the default values for Total Clear, and related
items are changed according to the setting.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch [Marketing Area] from the Initial mode screen.
2. Select the appropriate marketing area and touch [END].
Japan
15.3.4
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
210
U.S.
Europe
Others
Image Data Clear
• To clear all image data stored on the memory of the MFBS Board.
1. Touch [Image Data Clear] from the Initial mode screen.
2. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
15.3.5
15. Initial Mode
Clear FAX Setting
Functions
• To clear all fax settings.
Use
• To clear all settings of the local machine, remote machine, communication control, and
soft switches.
Setting/
Procedure
15.3.6
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
15.3.7
☞ For details, see FK-503 Service Manual.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Date/Time Setting
• To specify the date and time.
• Touch [Date/Time Setting] from the Initial mode screen.
• Enter the data from the 10-Key Pad and touch [END].
Trouble Reset
• To clear all malfunctions, including fusing errors (C3XXX).
Use
• To reset fusing-related malfunctions.
• Malfunctions relating to units other than fusing can be reset by turning OFF and ON the
Main Power Switch and opening and closing the side cover.
Setting/
Procedure
• Touching [Trouble Reset] on the Initial mode screen will reset the malfunctions.
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
211
bizhub 200/250/350
16. Mechanical adjustment
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
16. Mechanical adjustment
16.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section
16.1.1
Scanner Position Adjustment
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed:
• After the Scanner Drive Cables have been replaced.
• When the Scanner has been removed.
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
Remove the IR Upper Left Cover.
49
Remove the Front Holding Bracket.
49
Remove the Original Glass.
49
Remove the Exposure Unit.
78
Adjustment / Setting
5. Move the Mirror Unit to the position
shown on the left.
• Distance of part A from the IR left side
surface: 68.5 mm
4040F2C691DA
6. Wind the cables on the Exposure
Unit.
7. 7. Mount the Exposure Unit at the
location shown on the left.
• Distance of the right side surface of
the Exposure Unit from the IR left side
surface: 138 mm
4040F2C692DA
212
16. Mechanical adjustment
16.2 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section
16.2.1
Adjustment of the Bypass Paper Size Unit
This adjustment must be made in the following case:
• The Bypass Paper Size Unit has been removed.
[3]
[1]
1. Install the gear so that the protrusion
of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on
the Bypass Guide Rack Gear [2] are
aligned in a straight line.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[2]
[3]
[2]
2. Install the Bypass Unit Cover so that
part A (edge) [2] of the Rack Gear [1]
for the Bypass Paper Size Unit and
part B [3] of the Bypass Unit Cover
are aligned in a straight line.
[1]
[3]
[2]
4036fs3051c0
213
Adjustment / Setting
4036fs3050c0
16. Mechanical adjustment
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
3. When the Bypass Paper Size Unit
base is mounted, align the lever
position of the Bypass Paper Size
Unit with the tab at the center in a
straight line.
4036fs3052c0
4. After the Bypass Paper Size Unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the
Bypass Paper Size Unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the
Bypass Guide.
5. Select [Function] from the Tech. Rep. mode and run [FD].
☞ 164
Adjustment / Setting
16.2.2
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
5.
Manual Bypass Unit Installation Check
Remove the Rear Right Cover.
50
Remove the Lower Right Rear Cover.
49
Remove the Front Manual Bypass Cover.
55
Remove the Rear Manual Bypass Cover.
55
Check the Tray 2 Paper Feed Guide [1] and Manual Bypass Guide [2] for correct operation.
[1]
[2]
4040F3C536DA
NOTE
• Pull open the Tray 2 Paper Fed Door in the direction of the arrow and check that it
opens smoothly without binding.
• If the door binds, perform the installation procedures again for the Tray 2 Feed Roll
Assy and Manual Bypass Unit.
214
Adjustment of the Manual Bypass Take-up Mechanical Clutch
[1]
1. Remove the Manual Bypass Unit.
☞ 71
2. Remove the Manual Feed Tray Liftup Sensor (PC29) [1].
4040F2C646DA
3. Remove the screw [2] and the Manual Paper Feed Pick-up Solenoid
(SL3) [3].
[3]
[2]
4040F2C647DA
4. Remove the C-clip [4], actuator [5],
C-ring [6], and washer [7]. Then,
remove the manual bypass take-up
mechanical clutch [8].
[6]
[5]
[4]
[8]
[7]
4040F2C648DA
5. Disassemble the Manual Bypass
Take-up Mechanical Clutch.
4040F2C649DA
6. Mount the torque limiter [10] to the
gear [9].
[10]
[9]
4040F2C650DA
215
Adjustment / Setting
16.2.3
16. Mechanical adjustment
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
16. Mechanical adjustment
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[11]
7. Fit hook 1 of the torque limiter [11]
into stopper B of the coupling [12].
[12]
4040F2C651DA
8. Fit hook 2 of the torque limiter [13] in
a slit in the collar [14].
[13]
[14]
4040F2C652DA
9. Holding the tab [15] of the coupling, rotate the gear several turns in the direction of the
arrow so that hook 2 is located at the center of portion P [17] of the coupling. If hook 2
[16] cannot be brought to the center, fit hook 1 of the torque limiter in stopper A [18] or
stopper C [19] of the coupling; then turn the gear again as necessary. Bring hook 2 [16]
into a point nearest the center of portion P [17].
Adjustment / Setting
[15]
[18]
[19]
[17]
[16]
4040F2C653DA
216
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
17. Functions of switches and parts on PWBs
bizhub 200/250/350
17. Functions of switches and parts on PWBs
17.1 Test Print Switch (S1)
Symbol
Name
Description
S1
Test Print Switch
Produces the test pattern for Function F12.
17.1.1
1.
☞
2.
☞
Procedure
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Remove the Rear Cover.
51
[2]
3. Remove the five [1] and the Mechanical Control Board Cover [2].
[1]
4040F2C561DA
4. Press S1 to start the feed operation.
5. Press S1 a second time to stop the feed operation.
217
Adjustment / Setting
4040F3C527DA
bizhub 200/250/350
17. Functions of switches and parts on PWBs
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
17.2 Read white reference position adjustment
17.2.1
Jumper switch setting
• If fine black lines occur on the copy, adjust the position of the read white reference position of the Shading Sheet by using jumper switches.
NOTE
• NEVER make any settings other than the following for the jumper switch.
Jumper Switch
Step 2
IR left side
IR front
IR back
IR right side
Step 1
Default
Adjustment / Setting
4040F3C534DA
1.
2.
☞
3.
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
50
Make the appropriate settings of the jumper switches on the BCRS Board.
Scanning Position
Jumper Switch Setting
Default scan position
A B P
4040F3C537DA
Step 1 scan position
A B P
4040F3C538DA
Step 2 scan position
A B P
4040F3C539DA
218
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
17. Functions of switches and parts on PWBs
bizhub 200/250/350
17.3 Sub Power Switch (SW49)
4040F3C528DA
SW49
Name
Sub Power Switch
Description
Turning OFF the Sub Power switch sets the machine in
the same state as in the Sleep mode, in which the control
panel gives no indication.
No copy can be made with the Sub Power switch turned
OFF.
Adjustment / Setting
Symbol
17.4 Warm Restart Switch
• Used to enter the initial mode.
[2]
[1]
4040F3C533DA
17.4.1
Procedure
1. Remove the Compact Flash Cover [1].
2. Press the Warm Restart switch [2].
219
bizhub 200/250/350
17. Functions of switches and parts on PWBs
Adjustment / Setting
Blank Page
220
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
18. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
18. Jam Display
18.1 Misfeed Display
• When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper location are displayed on the Touch Panel of the machine.
[1]
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[3]
[4]
[4]
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F4E509DA
Display
Misfeed Location
Misfeed Processing Location
Action
Right Lower Door
☞ 225
Image Transfer section
Right Door
☞ 226
Fusing/Paper Exit section
Right Door
☞ 227
Duplex Unit transport section
Duplex Unit Right Door
☞ 228
Duplex Unit take-up section
Duplex Unit Right Door
☞ 229
[2]
Tray 2 take-up/Vertical Transport section
Right Lower Door
☞ 230
[3]
Manual Bypass take-up section
Manual Bypass Slide Board
☞ 231
Tray 3 take-up section
Paper Feed Unit Right Door
☞ 232
Tray 4 take-up section
Paper Feed Unit Right Door
☞ 233
LCT take-up section
LCT Right Door
☞ 234
[1]
[4]
18.1.1
Troubleshooting
Tray 1 take-up section
Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the
door.
221
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
18.2 Sensor layout
18.2.1
System Mounted with PC-102/PC-202
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
Troubleshooting
[10]
4040F4C501DA
[1] Switch Back Unit Sensor
PC26
[6] Vertical Conveyance Sensor
PC2
[2] Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor PC24
[7] Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor PC117-PF
[3] Paper Exit Sensor
PC4
[8] Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor
[4] Synchronizing Roller Sensor
PC1
[9] Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor PC126-PF
[5] Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor PC25
222
[10] Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC116-PF
PC125-PF
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
System Mounted with PC-402
bizhub 200/250/350
18.2.2
18. Jam Display
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[1] Switch Back Unit Sensor
PC26
[5] Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor PC25
[2] Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor PC24
[6] Vertical Conveyance Sensor
[3] Paper Exit Sensor
PC4
[7] Vertical Conveyance Sensor
PC2
PC2-LCT
[4] Synchronizing Roller Sensor
PC1
[8] Paper Feed Sensor
PC1-LCT
223
Troubleshooting
4040F4C502DA
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
18.3 Solution
18.3.1
Initial Check Items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items.
Check Item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Change paper.
Is paper curled, wavy, or damp.
Change paper.
Instruct user in correct paper storage.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or
is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean or change the paper path.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or Clean or change the defective Paper Separator
worn?
Finger.
Clean or change the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct position to accommodate paper?
Set as necessary.
Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation?
Correct or change the defective actuator.
Troubleshooting
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
224
18.3.2
18. Jam Display
Misfeed at Tray 1 take-up section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
Detection of misfeed at
Tray 1 take-up section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Synchronizing Roller
Sensor (PC1) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 1st
Drawer Paper Feed Clutch (CL3) has been energized.
Size error detection
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not unblocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the sensor has been blocked by the paper.
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is unblocked before the set period
of time.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
1st Drawer Paper Feed Clutch (CL3)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC1 I/O check
PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON)
M-8
3
CL3 operation check
PWB-A PJ22A-14 (ON)
D-7
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
225
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
18.3.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Misfeed at Image Transfer section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Detection of misfeed at
Image Transfer section
Detection of paper left in
Image Transfer section
Description
The Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL1) is set to OFF.
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the sensor has been unblocked by the
paper.
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL1)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
226
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC1 I/O check
PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON)
M-8
3
PC4 I/O check
PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON)
M-12
4
CL1 operation check
PWB-A PJ11A-2 (ON)
M-9
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
18.3.4
18. Jam Display
Misfeed at Fusing/Paper Exit section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) is not unblocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) has been
blocked by the paper.
Detection of misfeed at
Fusing/Paper Exit section The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not unblocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) has been
unblocked by the paper.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
The Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is set
Detection of paper left in
to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
Fusing/Paper Exit section
reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC1 I/O check
PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON)
M-8
3
PC4 I/O check
PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON)
M-12
4
PC26 I/O check
PWB-A PJ19A-9 (ON)
M-5
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
227
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
18.3.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Misfeed at Switch Back Unit/Duplex Unit transport section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) has been
unblocked by the paper.
Detection of misfeed at
Switch Back Unit/Duplex
Unit transport section
The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is not blocked even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the Switch Back Unit Sensor
(PC26) is blocked by the paper.
The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor
(PC24) is blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
Switch Back Unit/Duplex
Unit transport section
The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
228
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC4 I/O check
PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON)
M-12
3
PC26 I/O check
PWB-A PJ19A-9 (ON)
M-5
4
PC24 I/O check
PWB-A PJ20A-5 (ON)
M-16
5
PC25 I/O check
PWB-A PJ20A-8 (ON)
M-16
6
Change PWB-A
-
-
18.3.6
18. Jam Display
Misfeed at Duplex Unit take-up section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
Detection of misfeed at
Duplex Unit take-up
section
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor
(PC25) has been blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
Duplex Unit take-up
section
The Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC1 I/O check
PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON)
M-8
3
PC25 I/O check
PWB-A PJ20A-8 (ON)
M-16
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
229
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
18.3.7
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Misfeed at Tray 2 take-up/Vertical Transport section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Detection of misfeed at
Tray 2 take-up/Vertical
Transport section
Detection of paper left in
Tray 2 take-up/Vertical
Transport section
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the 2nd
Drawer Paper Feed Clutch (CL4) has been energized.
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the leading edge of the paper has blocked
the Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2).
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2)
2nd Drawer Paper Feed Clutch (CL4)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
230
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
2
PC1 I/O check
-
-
PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON)
M-8
3
PC2 I/O check
PWB-A PJ22A-9 (ON)
D-7
4
CL4 operation check
PWB-A PJ21A-10 (ON)
D-10
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
18.3.8
18. Jam Display
Misfeed at Manual Bypass take-up section
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
Detection of misfeed at
Manual Bypass take-up
section
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Bypass
Paper Feed Clutch (CL5) has been energized.
Detection of paper left in
Manual Bypass take-up
section
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2)
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC2 I/O check
PWB-A PJ22A-9 (ON)
D-7
3
CL5 operation check
PWB-A PJ13A-14 (ON)
M-11
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
231
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
18.3.9
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Misfeed at Tray 3 take-up/Vertical Transport section (PC-202)
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) has been energized.
Detection of misfeed at
Tray 3 take-up/Vertical
Transport section
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor
(PC117-PF) is blocked by the paper.
The Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray3 Vertical Conveyance
Sensor (PC117-PF) has been blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
Tray 3 take-up/Vertical
Transport section
The Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the
Main Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
The Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF)
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2)
Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF)
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
232
Action
1
Initial check items
2
PC116-PF I/O check
3
PC117-PF I/O check
4
PC2 I/O check
5
M122-PF operation check
6
Change PWB-C2 PF
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
-
-
☞ See PC-102/PC-202 Service
Manual.
-
-
18.3.10
18. Jam Display
Misfeed at Tray 4 take-up/Vertical Transport section (PC-202)
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) has been energized.
Detection of misfeed at
Tray 4 take-up/Vertical
Transport section
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
The Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Vertical Conveyance
Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked by the paper.
The Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF) is not unblocked even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the Tray4 Vertical Conveyance
Sensor (PC126-PF) has been blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
Tray 4 take-up/Vertical
Transport section
The Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the
Main Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF)
Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF)
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF)
Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF)
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
1
Initial check items
2
PC125-PF I/O check
3
PC126-PF I/O check
4
PC117-PF I/O check
5
M123-PF operation check
6
Change PWB-C2 PF
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
-
-
☞ See PC-102/PC-202 Service
Manual.
-
Troubleshooting
Step
-
233
bizhub 200/250/350
18. Jam Display
18.3.11
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Misfeed at LCT take-up/Vertical Transport section (PC-402)
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Feed Sensor
(PC1-LCT) or Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT) has been
energized.
Detection of misfeed at
LCT take-up/Vertical
Transport section
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2LCT) is blocked by the paper.
The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is not unblocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) has
been blocked by the paper.
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2-LCT) is not unblocked even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the Vertical Conveyance Sensor
(PC2-LCT) has been blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
LCT take-up/Vertical
Transport section
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or
malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2-LCT)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2)
Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
234
Action
1
Initial check items
2
PC1-LCT I/O check
3
PC2-LCT I/O check
4
PC2 I/O check
5
M1-LCT operation check
6
Change PWB-C1 LCT
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
-
-
☞ See PC-402 Service Manual.
-
-
19. Malfunction code
19. Malfunction code
19.1 Trouble code
• The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch
Panel.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F4E510DA
19.1.1
Trouble code list
• For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the Service Manual for the
corresponding option.
Item
Description
☞ See PC-402 Service Manual.
Rank
LCT Communication Failure
C0202
Tray 1 Elevator Failure
C0204
Tray 2 Elevator Failure
C0206
Tray 3 Elevator Failure
C0208
Tray 4 Elevator Failure
B
C0209
LCT Elevator Motor Failure
B
C0210
LCT Lift Failure
C0211
Bypass Lifting Motion Failure
B
B
• The Lift-Up Sensor is not unblocked even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift up operation for the drawer has begun.
☞ See PC-402 Service Manual.
• The Bypass Lift Sensor (PC29) is not blocked or
unblocked even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the Bypass Pick-Up Solenoid (SL3)
is energized after the manual feed paper take-up
operation has begun.
B
B
B
B
C0212
LCT Ejection Failure
B
C0213
LCT Shift Gate Malfunction
B
C0214
LCT Shifting Failure
C0215
LCT Shift Motor Malfunction
C0701
Manual Paper Size Detection
Adjustment Failure
• The control value of the Manual Paper Size
Detection Unit does not fall within the specified
range when an adjustment is made of manual
paper size detection.
B
C1080
Exit Option Communication
Failure
• The connection status of a finishing option is
changed after the copier has been turned on.
B
☞ See PC-402 Service Manual.
B
B
235
Troubleshooting
Code
C0001
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Code
Item
C1183
Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent
Drive Failure
Description
B
C1190
Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure
B
C1191
Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure
B
C11A0 Paper-Lifter Drive Failure
B
C11A1
Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction
Failure
B
C11A2
Saddle Exit Roller Pressure/
Retraction Failure
B
C11A3 Shutter Drive Failure
C11A4 Saddle Exit Motor Failure
B
☞ See FS-508 or SD-502 Service Manual.
B
Saddle In & Out Guide Motor
C11A5
Failure
B
Saddle Layable Guide Motor
Drive Failure
B
C11B0 Staple Unit CD Drive Failure
B
C11B2 Staple Drive Failure
B
C11B5 Saddle Staple 1 Drive Failure
B
C11B6 Saddle Staple 2 Drive Failure
B
C11A6
C11C0 Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure
B
C11D0 Crease Motor Drive Failure
B
IU Motor Failure
• The IU Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a
set period of time while the IU Motor is turning.
• The IU Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a
set period of time while the IU Motor remains
stopped.
B
C2351
Toner Suction Fan Motor
Failure
• The Toner Suction Fan Motor Lock signal
remains set to H for a set period of time while the
Toner Suction Fan Motor is turning.
• The Toner Suction Fan Motor Lock signal
remains set to L for a set period of time while the
Toner Suction Fan Motor remains stopped.
C
C2431
IU Fuse Blowing Failure (*1)
• The fuse is not blown even after the lapse of a
predetermined period of time.
B
C2557
ATDC Sensor Failure
• The scanning value of the ATDC Sensor is less
than 7 % while the IU Motor is turning.
• The scanning value of the ATDC Sensor is more
than 19 % while the IU Motor is turning.
B
C255C ATDC Adjustment Failure
• The adjustment of the ATDC control voltage
could not be completed in the set period of time
when function F8 is run.
• The ATDC control voltage was not within the
range of 5.39 V to 8.15 V when function F8 is
run.
B
C2654
EEPROM Failure
• An EEPROM where no initial data is written is
detected.
B
C2702
Abnormal Image Transfer
Voltage
• The image transfer voltage exceeds 100 V for
the set period of time while the IU Motor remains
stopped.
B
C2211
Troubleshooting
Rank
236
Item
Description
Rank
C3451
• The Fusing Roller Thermistor does not detect
the required temperature within 30 sec. after a
warmup cycle has begun; therefore, the copier
Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Main)
does not complete the warm-up cycle.
• The temperature of the Fusing Rollers does not
reach the required level even after the set period
of time has elapsed during a warm-up cycle.
A
C3452
• The Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor does not
detect the required temperature within 30 sec.
after a warm-up cycle has begun; therefore, the
copier does not complete the warm-up cycle.
• The temperature of the Fusing Rollers does not
reach the required level even after the set period
of time has elapsed during a warm-up cycle.
A
C3751
C3752
C3851
C3852
Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Sub)
High Fuser Temperature Failure • The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller
(Main)
Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature above 240 °C when the Main Power Switch
High Fuser Temperature Failure
is set to ON.
(Sub)
Low Fuser Temperature Failure • The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller
(Main)
Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a temperature below 105 °C during standby.
Low Fuser Temperature Failure • The Fusing Roller Thermistor and Fusing Roller
Sub Thermistor are detected to be at a tempera(Sub)
ture below 105 °C during printing.
A
A
A
A
Main Unit Communication
Failure
• Communications with the Mechanical Control
Board and the MFBS Board fail.
B
HSYNC Detection Failure
• No SOS falling edges are detected within the set
period of time after laser emission began while
the Polygon Motor is turning.
• No SOS falling edges are detected while VIA
remains ON.
B
C4101
Polygon Motor Failure
• The Polygon Motor Lock signal could not be
detected within the set period of time after the
Polygon Motor is energized. (Faulty start detection)
• No First Lock signals are detected during the 1second period that starts 1 second after a First
Lock signal. (Faulty lock signal detection)
• The Polygon Motor Lock signal could not be
detected after the set period of time has elapsed
while the Polygon Motor is turning. (Out-of-timing
lock detection)
• The Polygon Motor Lock signal is set to ON for
longer than the set period of time while the Polygon Motor remains stopped. (Abnormal lock
detection)
B
C4721
Main Unit G/A Communication
Failure
• Communications with the gate array for expansion I/O (the IC mounted on the Mechanical Control Board) fail.
B
C5102
Main Motor Failure
• The Transport Motor Lock signal remains set to
H for a set period of time while the Transport
Motor is turning.
B
C4001
C4002
bizhub 200/250/350
Code
19. Malfunction code
237
Troubleshooting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
Code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Description
Rank
Power Supply Cooling Fan
Motor Failure
• The Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to H for a set period of time while
the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor is turning.
• The Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set to L for a set period of time while
the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor remains
stopped.
B
Cooling Fan Motor Failure
• The Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set
to H for a set period of time while the Cooling
Fan Motor is turning.
• The Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains set
to L for a set period of time while the Cooling Fan
Motor remains stopped.
B
C5353
IU Cooling Fan Motor Failure
• The IU Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains
set to H for a set period of time while the IU Cooling Fan Motor is turning.
• The IU Cooling Fan Motor Lock signal remains
set to L for a set period of time while the IU Cooling Fan Motor remains stopped.
B
C8301
EDH Fan Motor Failure
C5351
C5352
Item
☞ See DF-605 Service Manual.
C
CA052 MIO Device Failure
• The MIO device does not operate properly.
C
CC153 Flash ROM Failure
• The Flash ROM data was determined to be faulty
when the unit was turned on.
B
CC155 Exit Option Flash ROM Failure
☞ See FS-508 Service Manual.
B
*1: Not supported by this machine
19.2 How to reset
• Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble
code.
* List of Malfunction Resetting Procedures
Trouble Code Rank
Troubleshooting
Rank A
238
Resetting Procedures
• Trouble Reset
☞ For details, see Adjustment/Setting.
Rank B
• Opening/Closing the front door
Rank C
• Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
19. Malfunction code
19.3.1
C0202: Tray 1 Elevator Failure
19.3.2
C0204: Tray 2 Elevator Failure
19.3.3
C0206: Tray 3 Elevator Failure
19.3.4
C0208: Tray 4 Elevator Failure
bizhub 200/250/350
19.3 Solution
Relevant Electrical Parts
Tray1 Paper Lift Motor (M7)
Tray2 Paper Lift Motor (M8)
Tray3 Lift Motor (M124-PF)
Tray4 Lift Motor (M125-PF)
Tray1 Paper Lift Sensor (PC6)
Tray2 Paper Lift Sensor (PC12)
Tray3 Lift Sensor (PC114-PF)
Tray4 Lift Sensor (PC123-PF)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Check the motor and sensor connectors for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the connector of each motor for proper drive
coupling, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Check the PU1 connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
-
-
4
PC6 I/O check
PWB-A PJ15A-11 (ON)
D-17
5
PC12 I/O check
PWB-A PJ22A-6 (ON)
D-6
6
PC114-PF I/O check
7
PC123-PF I/O check
8
M7 operation check
-
D-23
9
M8 operation check
-
D-19
10
M124-PF operation check
11
M125-PF operation check
12
Change PWB-A
-
13
Change PWB-C2 PF
-
-
14
Change PU1
-
-
☞ See PC-102/PC-202 Service
Manual.
☞ See PC-102/PC-202 Service
Troubleshooting
Step
Manual.
-
239
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
19.3.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C0211: Bypass Lifting Motion Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Bypass Pick-Up Solenoid (SL3)
Bypass Lift Sensor (PC29)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
-
-
Step
Action
1
Check the SL3 connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
2
Check cam position.
-
-
3
PC29 I/O check
PWB-A PJ12A-11 (ON)
M-14
4
SL3 operation check
PWB-A PJ12A-5 (ON)
M-13
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
19.3.6
C0701: Manual Paper Size Detection Adjustment Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Bypass Paper Size Detection Unit (VR1)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check the VR1 connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Readjust the VR1.
-
-
3
Replace VR1
-
-
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
Step
Action
1
Troubleshooting
19.3.7
C1080: Exit Option Communication Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
2
Check the PWB-A FN and the PWB-A for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
Step
Action
1
240
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C2211: IU Motor Failure
bizhub 200/250/350
19.3.8
19. Malfunction code
Relevant Electrical Parts
IU Motor (M2)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check the M2 connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the M2 for proper drive coupling, and correct
as necessary.
-
-
3
Check the PWB-A connector for proper connection
and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
M2 operation check
PWB-A PJ28A-11 (REM)
M-4
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
6
Change PU1
-
-
Step
Action
1
19.3.9
C2351: Toner Suction Fan Motor Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Toner Suction Fan Motor (M11)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check the M11 connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
3
Check the PWB-A connector for proper connection
and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
M11 operation check
PWB-A PJ5A-13 (REM)
D-14
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
6
Change PU1
-
-
Action
1
Troubleshooting
Control Signal
Step
241
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
19.3.10
C2557: ATDC Sensor Failure
19.3.11
C255C: ATDC Adjustment Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
ATDC Sensor (UN2)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check the UN2 connector for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Remove the Developing Unit from the IU, and then
replace UN2.
-
-
3
Run F8.
-
-
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
5
Change PU1
-
-
Step
Action
1
19.3.12
C2654: EEPROM Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
2
Check the EEPROM on the Mechanical Control
Board for proper connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Change PWB-A
-
-
4
Change EEPROM
-
-
19.3.13
C2702: Abnormal Image Transfer Voltage
Relevant Electrical Parts
Transfer Roller
High Voltage Unit (HV1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
242
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Check the installation of the Transfer Roller.
-
-
2
Change HV1
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C3451: Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Main)
19.3.15
C3452: Fusing Warm-Up Failure (Sub)
19.3.16
C3751: High Fuser Temperature Failure (Main)
19.3.17
C3752: High Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub)
bizhub 200/250/350
19.3.14
19. Malfunction code
Relevant Electrical Parts
Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1)
Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp (H2)
Fusing Roller Thermistor (TH1)
Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor (TH2)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check that the H1 comes on when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, and correct or replace as necessary.
-
-
2
Check that the H2 comes on when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, and correct or replace as necessary.
-
-
3
Check the installation of the TH1 and the TH2, and
correct or clean as necessary.
-
-
4
Check the operation of the TH1.
Remove CN80 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN80-2 and -3 on the Thermistor is
infinity.
-
-
5
Check the operation of the TH2.
Remove CN81 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN81-2 and -3 on the Thermistor is
infinity.
-
-
6
Check the continuity of the H1.
Correct or replace as necessary.
-
-
7
Check the continuity of the H2.
Correct or replace as necessary.
-
-
8
Change PU1
-
-
9
Change PWB-A
-
-
Action
1
Troubleshooting
Control Signal
Step
243
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
19.3.18
C3851: Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Main)
19.3.19
C3852: Low Fuser Temperature Failure (Sub)
Relevant Electrical Parts
Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1)
Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp (H2)
Fusing Roller Thermistor (TH1)
Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor (TH2)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check that the H1 comes on when the Right-Side
Door is opened, then closed, and correct or replace
as necessary.
-
-
2
Check that the H2 comes on when the Right-Side
Door is opened, then closed, and correct or replace
as necessary.
-
-
3
Check the installation of the TH1 and the TH2, and
correct or clean as necessary.
-
-
4
Check the operation of the TH1.
Remove CN80 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN80-2 and -3 on the Thermistor is
infinity.
-
-
5
Check the operation of the TH2.
Remove CN81 (4P), and then check that the resistance across CN81-2 and -3 on the Thermistor is
infinity.
-
-
6
Check the continuity of the H1.
Correct or replace as necessary.
-
-
7
Check the continuity of the H2.
Correct or replace as necessary.
-
-
8
Change PU1
-
-
9
Change PWB-A
-
-
Action
1
Troubleshooting
Step
244
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C4001: Main Unit Communication Failure
bizhub 200/250/350
19.3.20
19. Malfunction code
Relevant Electrical Parts
MFBS Board (MFBS)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Check the MFBS connector for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the PWB-A connector for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Check the flat cable between MFBS and PWB-A for
proper connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
5
Change MFBS
-
-
6
Change PWB-A
-
-
19.3.21
C4002: HSYNC Detection Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
PH Unit (PH)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
2
Check the PH and the PWB-A connectors for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Change PH
-
-
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
Action
1
Troubleshooting
Control Signal
Step
245
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
19.3.22
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C4101: Polygon Motor Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
PH Unit (PH)
MFBS Board (MFBS)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check the PH connector for proper connection, and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Change PH
-
-
3
Change PWB-A
-
-
Step
Action
1
19.3.23
C4721: Main Unit G/A Communication Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
2
Check each control board and the PWB-A for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Change PWB-A
-
-
Step
Action
1
19.3.24
C5102: Main Motor Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Troubleshooting
Main Motor (M1)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Check the M1 connector for proper connection, and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the M1 for proper drive coupling, and correct
as necessary.
-
-
3
Check the PWB-A connector for proper connection
and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
M1 operation check
PWB-A PJ28A-4 (REM)
M-4
5
Change PWB-A
-
-
6
Change PU1
-
-
Step
Action
1
246
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C5351: Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor Failure
bizhub 200/250/350
19.3.25
19. Malfunction code
Relevant Electrical Parts
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M4)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Check the M4 connectors for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
3
M4 operation check
PWB-A PJ33A-1 (REM)
D-5
4
Change PU1
-
-
19.3.26
C5352: Cooling Fan Motor Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Cooling Fan Motor (M5)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Check the M5 connectors for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
3
M5 operation check
PWB-A PJ11A-6 (REM)
M-8
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
C5353: IU Cooling Fan Motor Failure
Troubleshooting
19.3.27
Relevant Electrical Parts
IU Cooling Fan Motor (M6)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Check the M6 connectors for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the fan for possible overload, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
3
M6 operation check
PWB-A PJ15A-1 (REM)
D-16
4
Change PWB-A
-
-
247
bizhub 200/250/350
19. Malfunction code
19.3.28
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
CA052: MIO Device Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
BCRS Board (BCRS)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
2
Check the BCRS connectors for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Change BCRS
-
-
Step
Action
1
19.3.29
CC153: Flash ROM Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
248
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical
Component)
1
Disconnect and then connect the power cord. Turn
OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
-
-
2
The firmware data is overwritten.
-
-
3
Change PWB-A
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
20. Power supply trouble
bizhub 200/250/350
20. Power supply trouble
20.1 Machine is not Energized at All (PU1 Operation Check)
Relevant Electrical Parts
Main Power Switch (S1)
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
MFBS Board (MFBS)
Step
Check Item
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Result
1
Is a voltage being applied to the electrical
outlet?
-
NO
Provide a power supply.
2
Is the wiring to terminal S1 correct?
W-22
NO
Rewire
3
Is there continuity across the fuse (F101)
on PU1?
-
NO
Change the fuse.
4
Is there continuity across the fuse (F103)
on PU1?
-
NO
Change the fuse.
5
Is the wiring between the MFBS Board and
Mechanical Control Board correct?
-
NO
Rewire
6
Is the wiring between the Mechanical Control Board and Power Supply Unit correct?
-
NO
Rewire
7
Is DC 5 V being output from PJ8A-2 on the
PWB-A?
-
Action
NO
Change PWB-A
YES
Change PU1
20.2 Only the Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor turns
Relevant Electrical Parts
Step
Check Item
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Result
NO
1
Is DC 4.5 V being output from PJ8A-3 on
the PWB-A?
-
2
Is DC 5 V being output from PJ9PU1-1 on
PU1?
-
Action
Troubleshooting
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
Control Panel (UN1)
Change PWB-A
NO
Change PU1
YES
Change UN1
249
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
20.3 The Start key (LED) on the control panel blinks green
Relevant Electrical Parts
Total Counter
Control Panel (UN1)
Step
Check Item
Location
(Electrical
Component)
Result
1
Is the Total Counter connector connected?
-
NO
Connect
2
Is the machine in the Initial mode?
-
YES
Turn OFF the Main Power
Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the
Main Power Switch.
Troubleshooting
bizhub 200/250/350
20. Power supply trouble
250
Action
21. Image quality problem
21. Image quality problem
21.1 How to identify problematic part
• This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial Check Items” and “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image Quality Problem.”
• When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial Check Items” and, if
the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Troubleshooting Procedure by a Particular Image
Quality Problem.”
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
21.2 Initial Check Items
21.2.1
Initial Check Items 1
• Determine if the failure is attributable to a basic cause or causes.
Section
Step
Check Item
Result
Action
Recommended paper is used.
NO
Instruct user.
2
Paper is damp.
YES
Replace paper.
Instruct user on
proper paper storage.
3
Original not flat.
YES
Correct
4
Faint original (light pencil, etc.)
YES
Instruct user.
5
Highly transparent original (OHP transparencies,
etc.)
YES
Instruct user.
6
Dirty or scratched Original Glass.
YES
Clean or Replace.
PM parts
7
PM parts relating to image formation have
reached the end of cleaning/replacement cycles.
YES
Clean or Replace.
Adjustment
items
8
There are settings that can be readjusted to remedy the image failure.
YES
Readjust.
Paper
Original
Troubleshooting
1
251
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.2.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Initial Check Items 2
• Determine if the failure is attributable to the Scanner system or the Printer system.
Check Item
Result
Full size
Cause
Reduction
Make copies at different
zoom ratios.
Scanner system
Full size
Reduction
Troubleshooting
Printer system
252
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
21. Image quality problem
21.3.1
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3 Solution
Scanner System: Blank copy or black copy
A. Typical Faulty Images
Blank copy
Black copy
4036fs4038c0
4036fs4039c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
PWBs and Con- Connectors are securely connected with
nection Cables
no bent pins and no breaks in the connection cables.
NO
Reconnect.
Replace the connection
cable.
2
Exposure Unit
The Exposure Lamp comes on.
NO
Change Exposure Lamp.
Change Exposure Unit.
3
Inverter Board
Connectors on the Inverter Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 3.
NO
Change Inverter Board.
Connectors on the BCRS Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 5.
NO
Change BCRS Board.
Connectors on the MFBS Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 7.
NO
Change MFBS Board.
Connectors on the CCD Unit Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 9.
NO
Change CCD Unit.
4
5
BCRS Board
6
7
MFBS Board
8
9
10
CCD Unit
Troubleshooting
1
253
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner System: Low image density or rough image
A. Typical Faulty Images
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Action
Shading sheet is dirty.
YES
Clean.
2
Mirrors/Lens/
Original Glass
Mirrors, lens and/or Original Glass are
dirty.
YES
Clean.
3
Exposure Lamp
Exposure Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Change Exposure Lamp.
4
PWBs and Con- Connectors are securely connected with
nection Cables
no bent pins and no breaks in the connection cables.
NO
Reconnect.
Replace the connection
cable.
5
MFBS Board
Connectors on the MFBS Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 5.
NO
Change MFBS Board.
Connectors on the CCD Unit Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 7.
NO
Change CCD Unit.
7
8
Troubleshooting
Result
Shading Sheet
6
254
Check Item
1
CCD Unit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner System: Foggy background
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.3
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
4036fs4030c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Section
Check Item
Result
-
Sunlight or any other extraneous light
enters the machine.
2
Original
Original is damaged or dirty.
YES
Change original.
3
Original Cover
Original Pad is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Original Cover does not lie flat.
YES
Replace Original Cover if
it is deformed or the
hinges are broken.
4
YES
Action
1
Protect the copier from
extraneous light.
5
Shading Sheet
Shading sheet is dirty.
YES
Clean.
6
Mirrors/Lens/
Original Glass/
Reflectors
Mirrors, lens, Original Glass and/or
reflectors are dirty.
YES
Clean.
7
Exposure Lamp
Exposure Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Change Exposure Lamp.
8
PWBs and Con- Connectors are securely connected with
nection Cables
no bent pins and no breaks in the connection cables.
NO
Reconnect.
Replace the connection
cable.
9
MFBS Board
Connectors on the MFBS Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 9.
NO
Change MFBS Board.
Connectors on the CCD Unit Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 11.
NO
Change CCD Unit.
10
11
12
CCD Unit
255
Troubleshooting
Step
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner System: Black streaks or bands
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
1
Original
2
Original Cover
Troubleshooting
3
Result
YES
Action
Change original.
Original Pad is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Original Cover does not lie flat.
YES
Replace Original Cover if
it is deformed or the
hinges are broken.
4
Shading Sheet
Shading sheet is dirty.
YES
Clean.
5
Mirrors/Lens/
Original Glass/
Reflectors
Mirrors, lens, Original Glass and/or
reflectors are dirty.
YES
Clean.
6
Exposure Lamp
Exposure Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Change Exposure Lamp.
7
BCRS Board
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 6.
NO
Change the Jumper
Switch Setting on the
BCRS Board.
☞ 218
8
PWBs and Con- Connectors are securely connected with
nection Cables
no bent pins and no breaks in the connection cables.
NO
Reconnect.
Replace the connection
cable.
9
MFBS Board
Connectors on the MFBS Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 9.
NO
Change MFBS Board.
Connectors on the CCD Unit Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 11.
NO
Change CCD Unit.
10
11
12
256
Check Item
Original is damaged or dirty.
CCD Unit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner System: Black spots
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.5
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
AA
4036fs4029c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Original
2
3
4
Check Item
Result
Action
Original is damaged or dirty.
YES
Change original.
Original Cover
Original Pad is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Original Glass
Original Glass is dirty.
YES
Clean.
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 3.
NO
Change Exposure Unit.
Change CCD Unit.
Troubleshooting
1
257
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner System: White streaks or bands
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
1
Original
2
Original Cover
3
Troubleshooting
Result
YES
Action
Change original.
Original Pad is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Original Cover does not lie flat.
YES
Replace Original Cover if
it is deformed or the
hinges are broken.
4
Shading Sheet
Shading sheet is dirty.
YES
Clean.
5
Mirrors/Lens/
Original Glass/
Reflectors
Mirrors, lens, Original Glass and/or
reflectors are dirty.
YES
Clean.
6
Exposure Lamp
Exposure Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Change Exposure Lamp.
7
BCRS Board
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 6.
NO
Change the Jumper
Switch Setting on the
BCRS Board.
☞ 218
The white lines or bands are blurry or
opaque.
YES
Change Exposure Unit.
Change CCD Unit.
8
258
Check Item
Original is damaged or dirty.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Scanner System: Uneven pitch
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.7
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
4040F4C500DA
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Scanner Motor
Scanner Motor drive is being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive
coupling mechanism.
2
Exposure Lamp
Exposure Lamp harness is not hooked.
NO
Correct.
3
Scanner Drive
Cable
Scanner Drive Cable is taut.
NO
Correct the wiring or
replace the cable.
4
Scanner Rails
Scanner Rails are scratched or dirty.
NO
Clean or Change.
5
PWBs and Con- Connectors are securely connected with
nection Cables
no bent pins and no breaks in the connection cables.
NO
Reconnect.
Replace the connection
cable.
6
MFBS Board
Connectors on the MFBS Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 6.
NO
Change MFBS Board.
Connectors on the CCD Unit Board are
connected properly.
NO
Reconnect.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 8.
NO
Change CCD Unit.
7
8
9
CCD Unit
Troubleshooting
1
259
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Blank copy or black copy
A. Typical Faulty Images
Blank copy
Black copy
4036fs4038c0
4036fs4039c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Check Item
Result
Developing Unit drive is being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive
coupling mechanism.
2
Image transfer current contact terminal
is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
3
Developing bias contact terminal is dirty
or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Troubleshooting
1
260
Section
Imaging Unit
Action
4
PH Unit
PH Shutter (shutter in the path of the
laser beam from the PH Unit to the
Photo Conductor) opens and closes
properly.
NO
Correct.
5
PWBs
Connectors are securely connected with
no bent pins on the Mechanical Control
Board or PH Unit.
NO
Correct.
6
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 5.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change PH Unit.
Change High Voltage
Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Low image density or rough image
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.9
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
Step
Check Item
Result
Action
Image transfer current contact terminal
is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
2
Developing bias contact terminal is dirty
or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
3
Tech. Rep. Mode Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Tech. Rep.
→ Image DenChoice] → [Printer] → [Image Density].
sity
The image problem can be corrected by
selecting an Image Density setting
toward the + end.
YES
Make setting again.
4
Tech. Rep. Mode Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Tech. Rep.
→ Grid Voltage Choice] → [Printer] → [Grid Voltage
Adjustment
Adjustment].
The image problem can be corrected by
selecting an VG Adjust setting toward
the + end.
YES
Make setting again.
5
-
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change PH Unit.
Change High Voltage
Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
1
Section
Imaging Unit
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 4.
261
Troubleshooting
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.10
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Foggy background
A. Typical Faulty Images
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
4036fs4030c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Action
Sunlight or any other extraneous light
enters the machine.
YES
Protect the copier from
extraneous light.
2
Imaging Unit
Photo Conductor is dirty.
YES
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
3
Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty
or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
4
Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or
deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
5
Charge Neutralizing Sheet contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Erase Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Is there continuity across the Erase
Lamp?
NO
Change Erase Lamp.
Erase Lamp
7
Troubleshooting
Result
-
6
262
Check Item
1
8
Tech. Rep. Mode Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Tech. Rep.
→ Image DenChoice] → [Printer] → [Image Density].
sity
The image problem can be corrected by
selecting an Image Density setting
toward the - end.
YES
Make setting again.
9
Tech. Rep. Mode Select Tech. Rep. Mode → [Tech. Rep.
→ Grid Voltage Choice] → [Printer] → [Grid Voltage
Adjustment
Adjustment].
The image problem can be corrected by
selecting an VG Adjust setting toward
the - end.
YES
Make setting again.
10
-
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change PH Unit.
Change High Voltage
Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 9.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Black streaks or bands
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.11
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4023c0
4036fs4024c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Paper Path
Toner is on the paper path.
YES
Clean.
2
Imaging Unit
Photo Conductor is dirty.
YES
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
3
Fusing Unit
Fusing Rollers are dirty or scratched.
YES
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
4
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 3.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Troubleshooting
1
263
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.12
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Black spots
A. Typical Faulty Images
AA
4036fs4029c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Action
Toner is on the paper path.
YES
Clean.
2
Imaging Unit
Photo Conductor is dirty.
YES
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
3
Fusing Unit
Fusing Rollers are dirty or scratched.
YES
Change Fusing Unit.
4
Imaging Unit
Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty
or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
5
Grid voltage contact terminal is dirty or
deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
6
Charge Neutralizing Sheet contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean.
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Erase Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean.
Is there continuity across the Erase
Lamp?
NO
Change Erase Lamp.
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 8.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change High Voltage
Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Erase Lamp
8
9
Troubleshooting
Result
Paper Path
7
264
Check Item
1
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: White streaks or bands
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.13
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4021c0
4036fs4022c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Transfer Roller
Transfer Roller is dented or scratched.
YES
Change Transfer Roller
Unit.
2
Imaging Unit
Photo Conductor is dirty.
YES
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
3
Fusing Unit
Fusing Rollers are dirty or scratched.
YES
Change Fusing Unit.
4
PH Unit
Window glass of the PH Unit is dirty.
YES
Clean.
5
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 4.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Troubleshooting
1
265
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.14
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Void areas
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4050c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
266
Result
Action
1
Imaging Unit
Section
Photo Conductor is dirty.
Check Item
YES
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
2
Transfer Roller
Transfer Roller is dented or scratched.
NO
Change Transfer Roller
Unit.
3
Fusing Unit
Fusing Rollers are scratched or
deformed.
YES
Change Fusing Unit.
4
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 3.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Smears on back of paper
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.15
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
AA
4036fs4062c0
4036fs4063c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Paper Path
Toner is on the paper path.
YES
Clean.
2
Transfer Roller
Transfer Roller is dirty.
YES
Change Transfer Roller
Unit.
3
Fusing Unit
Fusing Roller is dirty.
YES
Change Fusing Unit.
Troubleshooting
1
267
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.16
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Uneven image density
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4046c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
268
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
1
Transfer Roller
Transfer Roller is dirty or deformed.
YES
Change Transfer Roller
Unit.
2
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 1.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Gradation reproduction failure
bizhub 200/250/350
21.3.17
21. Image quality problem
A. Typical Faulty Images
4036fs4048c0
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Step
Section
Check Item
Result
Action
Transfer Roller
Transfer Roller is dirty or deformed.
YES
Change Transfer Roller
Unit.
2
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 1.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
Troubleshooting
1
269
bizhub 200/250/350
21. Image quality problem
21.3.18
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Printer System: Uneven pitch
A. Typical Faulty Images
4040F4C500DA
B. Troubleshooting Procedure
Troubleshooting
Step
270
Check Item
Result
1
Imaging Unit
Section
Developing Unit drive is being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive
coupling mechanism.
Action
2
Developing
Section
Photo Conductor and Transfer Roller
drive is being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive
coupling mechanism.
3
Transport
Section
Synchronizing Rollers Unit drive is
being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive
coupling mechanism.
4
Fusing Section
Fusing Unit drive is being transmitted.
NO
Correct or change drive
coupling mechanism.
5
Imaging Unit
Ds Collar is dirty.
YES
Clean.
6
PH Unit
PH Unit is securely installed.
YES
Correct.
7
-
The problem has been eliminated after
performing step 6.
NO
Change Photo Conductor
Unit.
Change Developing Unit.
Change Mechanical Control Board.
22. Abort codes
22. Abort codes
• The copier displays an abort code on the Touch Panel as it becomes unable to process
tasks properly through its software control.
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Abort codes
4040F4C748DA
22.1 List of Abort Codes
• When the system program is aborted, the copier attempts to restart it automatically. If it
fails to restart the program, check the electrical component, unit, option, and connection
relating to the specific type of the abort condition.
Description
Code
Relevant Electrical Components, Units, and Options
0x00000000 to
0x000fffff
MFBS Board
Device control system failure
0x00100000 to
0x001fffff
MFBS Board, FAX Board, Memory Board*, FS-508, JS502, MT-501, SD-502
Copy control system failure
0x00200000 to
0x002fffff
MFBS Board
Operation system failure
0x00300000 to
0x003fffff
MFBS Board, Touch Panel, Panel Board
Conversion processing
system failure
0x00500000 to
0x005fffff
MFBS Board
Encoding processing system failure
0x00600000 to
0x006fffff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
File control system failure
0x00700000 to
0x007fffff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
G3 protocol processing
system failure
0x00800000 to
0x008fffff
MFBS Board, FAX Board, Memory Board*
G3 device control system
failure
0x00900000 to
0x009fffff
MFBS Board, FAX Board, Memory Board*
Scanner control system
failure
0x00c00000 to
0x00c0ffff
MFBS Board, BCRS Board, Inverter Board, DF-605
Scanner control system
failure
0x00c10000 to
0x00c2ffff
MFBS Board, BCRS Board, Inverter Board, DF-605
Troubleshooting
OS processing system
failure
271
Troubleshooting
bizhub 200/250/350
22. Abort codes
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Code
Relevant Electrical Components, Units, and Options
Scanner control system
failure
0x00c30000 to
0x00c4ffff
MFBS Board, BCRS Board, Inverter Board, DF-605
Scanner control system
failure
0x00c50000 to
0x00c5ffff
MFBS Board, BCRS Board, Inverter Board, DF-605
Scanner device control
system failure
0x00d00000 to
0x00d3ffff
MFBS Board, BCRS Board, Inverter Board
Scanner device control
system failure
0x00d80000 to
0x00dbffff
MFBS Board, BCRS Board, Inverter Board, DF-605
Scanner device control
system failure
0x00dc0000 to
0x00dfffff
MFBS Board, Scanner Home Sensor, Scanner drive system, BCRS Board
Printer sequence system
failure
0x00e00000 to
0x00e000ff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
Printer sequence system
failure
0x00e00100 to
0x00e001ff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
Printer sequence system
failure
0x00e00200 to
0x00e002ff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
Printer sequence system
failure
0x00e00300 to
0x00e003ff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
Printer sequence system
failure
0x00e00400 to
0x00e004ff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
Printer system failure
0x00f00000 to
0x00f0ffff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
EP-NET sequence system failure (U.S.A. and
Canada only)
0x00f10000 to
0x00f1ffff
MFBS Board
Counter sequence system
failure
0x00f20000 to
0x00f2ffff
MFBS Board
Other failures
0x01100000 to
0x011000ff
MFBS Board
Copy sequence system
failure
0x01100100 to
0x011001ff
MFBS Board
Function sequence system failure
0x01100400 to
0x011004ff
MFBS Board
OS message processing
system failure
0x02000000 to
0x020fffff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
Network processing system failure
0x03000000 to
0x030fffff
MFBS Board, Memory Board*
*: Attached to Network Scan Kit, Internet Fax & Network Scan Kit and Printer Controller,
Expansion Memory.
272
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23. Parts layout drawing
bizhub 200/250/350
Appendix
23. Parts layout drawing
23.1 Main unit
[17]
[1]
[2]
[16]
[3]
[4]
[15]
[5]
[14]
[6]
[13]
[7]
[12]
[8]
[9]
[11]
[10]
4040F5C500DA
[10] Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25)
[2] Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
[11] Sub Hopper Solenoid (SL1)
[3] Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24)
[12] AC Power Source
[4] Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
[13] Main Power Switch (S1)
[5] Fusing Roller Thermostat (TS1)
[14] Main Hopper Solenoid (SL2)
[6] Bypass Lift Sensor (PC29)
[15] Sub Hopper Empty Switch (S4)
[7] Right Lower Door Sensor (PC3)
[16] Right Side Door Interlock Switch 1 (S2)
[8] Bypass Paper Empty Sensor (PC18)
[17] Switchback Solenoid (SL4)
Appendix
[1] Duplex Unit Door Sensor (PC23)
[9] Bypass Pick-Up Solenoid (SL3)
273
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[21]
[22]
[2]
[20]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[19]
[11]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[12]
[13]
[15]
[14]
Appendix
4040F5C501DA
[1]
Switchback Motor (M3)
[12]
[2]
Duplex Unit Transport Clutch 1 (CL6)
[13]
High Voltage Unit (HV1)
Bypass Paper Feed Clutch (CL5)
[3]
Synchronizing Roller Clutch (CL1)
[14]
Erase Lamp (LA1)
[4]
Duplex Unit Transport Clutch 2 (CL7)
[15]
Power Supply Unit (PU1)
[5]
Fusing Roller Sub Thermistor (TH2)
[16]
Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor (M4)
[6]
High Voltage Register (R2)
[17]
Toner Suction Fan Motor (M11)
[7]
Fusing Unit Cooling Fan Motor (M10)
[18]
Drum Thermistor (TH4)
[8]
Fusing Roller Thermistor (TH1)
[19]
Temperature/humidity Sensor (TH3)
[9]
Fusing Roller Sub Heater Lamp (H2)
[20]
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
[10]
Fusing Roller Heater Lamp (H1)
[21]
Main Motor (M1)
[11]
Total Counter (CNT1)
[22]
IU Motor (M2)
274
[20]
[21]
[19]
23. Parts layout drawing
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[18]
[2]
[17]
[3]
[16]
[4]
[15]
[5]
[6]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[1]
Scanner Motor (M12)
[12]
Original Size Sensor 1 (PC201)
[2]
MFBS Board (MFBS)
[13]
Original Size Sensor 7 (PC207)
[3]
CCD Board (CCD)
[14]
Exposure Lamp (LA2)
[4]
Size Reset Switch (SW201)
[15]
Scanner Home Sensor (PC208)
[5]
Control Panel (UN1)
[16]
Original Cover Angle Sensor (PC209)
[6]
Pre-Transfer Guide Plate Register (R3)
[17]
Inverter Board (INV)
[7]
Original Size Sensor 3 (PC203) (Option)
[18]
BCRS Board (BCRS)
[8]
Speaker (SP1)
[19]
Original Size Sensor 4 (PC204)
[9]
FD Paper Size Board 1 (PWB-I1)
[20]
Original Size Sensor 5 (PC205) (Option)
[10]
FD Paper Size Board 2 (PWB-I2)
[21]
Original Size Sensor 6 (PC206) (Option)
[11]
Original Size Sensor 2 (PC202)
275
Appendix
4040F5C508DA
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[27]
[2]
[3]
[26]
[25]
[4]
[5]
[24]
[23]
[6]
[22]
[7]
[8]
[21]
[20]
[19]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[18]
[17]
[14]
[16]
[15]
Appendix
4040F5C509DA
[1]
Cooling Fan Motor (M5)
[15]
[2]
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
[16]
Tray2 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC14)
Tray2 Paper Lift Motor (M8)
[3]
Tray1 Paper Lift Sensor (PC6)
[17]
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC16)
[4]
Tray2 Paper Lift Sensor (PC12)
[18]
Tray2 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC17)
[5]
Tray1 Paper Empty Sensor (PC9)
[19]
Tray2 Set Sensor (PC13)
[6]
Front Door Sensor (PC5)
[20]
Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC11)
[7]
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/4 (PC22)
[21]
Tray1 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC10)
[8]
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/2 (PC20)
[22]
Tray1 Set Sensor (PC7)
[9]
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/3 (PC21)
[23]
Tray1 Paper Lift Motor (M7)
[10]
Bypass FD Paper Size Sensor/1 (PC19)
[24]
Tray1 Paper Near-Empty Sensor (PC8)
[11]
Bypass Paper Size Detection Unit (VR1)
[25]
2nd Drawer Paper Feed Clutch (CL4)
[12]
IU Cooling Fan Motor (M6)
[26]
1st Drawer Paper Feed Clutch (CL3)
[13]
Right Side Door Interlock Switch 2 (S3)
[27]
Vertical Conveyance Clutch (CL2)
[14]
Tray2 Paper Empty Sensor (PC15)
276
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23. Parts layout drawing
bizhub 200/250/350
23.2 Duplex Unit
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
Duplex Unit Door Sensor (PC23)
[4]
Duplex Unit Transport Clutch 2 (CL7)
[2]
Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24)
[5]
Duplex Unit Transport Clutch 1 (CL6)
[3]
Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25)
Appendix
4040F5C502DA
277
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23.3 Switch Back Unit
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
Appendix
4040F5C503DA
278
[1]
Switchback Motor (M3)
[3]
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
[2]
Fusing Unit Cooling Fan Motor (M10)
[4]
Switchback Solenoid (SL4)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23. Parts layout drawing
[2]
[1]
[20]
[3]
bizhub 200/250/350
23.4 DF-605
[4]
[19]
[18]
[5]
[17]
[16]
[6]
[15]
[7]
[14]
[8]
[13]
[12]
[9]
[11]
[10]
4040F5C525DA
Interface Board (PWA-TRAY)
[11]
Stamp Solenoid (SL2-ADF)
[2]
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 1
(PC1-ADF)
[12]
Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF)
[3]
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 3
(PC3-ADF)
[13]
Exit/Turnover Sensor (PC10-ADF)
[4]
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 4
(PC4-ADF)
[14]
Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF)
[5]
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 2
(PC2-ADF)
[15]
Separator Sensor (PC6-ADF)
[6]
Variable Resistor (PBA-VR)
[16]
Transport Motor (M2-ADF)
[7]
Mix Document Size Detection Board
(PBA-SIZE)
[17]
Paper Feed Motor (M1-ADF)
[8]
Print Lamp Board (PBA-LED)
[18]
Upper Door Open/Close Sensor (PC7-ADF)
[9]
Exit Roller Retraction Solenoid (SL1ADF)
[19]
Cooling Fan Motor (M3-ADF)
[10]
Empty Sensor (PC5-ADF)
[20]
Main Control Board (PBA-CONT)
Appendix
[1]
279
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23.5 PC-102/PC-202 (Option)
[1]
[23] [24]
[25]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[26]
[2]
[22]
[21]
[20]
[6]
[7]
[19]
[8]
[18]
[9]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[10]
[13]
Appendix
[14]
[11]
[12]
4037F5C511DA
[14]
Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
(PC122-PF)
Door Sensor (PC111-PF)
[15]
Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC128-PF)
Tray3 Lift Sensor (PC114-PF)
[16]
Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC127-PF)
[4]
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor
(PC117-PF)
[17]
Tray4 FD Paper Size Detection Board
(PWB-I4 PF)
[5]
Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF)
[18]
Tray4 Set Sensor (PC121-PF)
[6]
Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor (PC115-PF)
[19]
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
[7]
Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor
(PC126-PF)
[20]
Tray3 FD Paper Size Detection Board
(PWB-I3 PF)
[8]
Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF)
[21]
Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 1 (PC118-PF)
[9]
Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor (PC124-PF)
[22]
Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2 (PC119-PF)
[10]
Tray4 Lift Sensor (PC123-PF)
[23]
Tray3 Set Sensor (PC112-PF)
[11]
Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Motor
(M121-PF)
[24]
Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
(PC113-PF)
[12]
Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF)
[25]
Tray3 Lift Motor (M124-PF)
[13]
Tray4 Lift Motor (M125-PF)
[26]
Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF)
280
[1]
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Motor
(M120-PF)
[2]
[3]
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23. Parts layout drawing
[22]
[23]
[24]
bizhub 200/250/350
23.6 PC-402 (Option)
[1]
[2]
[3]
[21]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[20]
[7]
[8]
[19]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[18]
[12]
[13]
[17]
[14]
[15]
[16]
4037F5C512DA
[1]
Vertical Conveyance Motor (M2-LCT)
[2]
Right Lower Door Sensor (PC5-LCT)
[14] Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT)
[3]
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2-LCT)
[15] Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT)
[4]
Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT)
[16] Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor (PC9-LCT)
[5]
Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT)
[17] Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT)
[6]
Upper Paper Empty Sensor (PC3-LCT)
[18] Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT)
[7]
Paper Empty Board (PWB-E LCT)
[19] Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT)
[8]
Elevator Motor (M5-LCT)
[20] Interface Board (PWB-H LCT)
[9]
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT)
[21] Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
[22] Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT)
[11] Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT)
[23] Tray Set Sensor (PC6-LCT)
[12] Shift Motor (M4-LCT)
[24] Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT)
Appendix
[10] Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT)
[13] Paper Descent Key (UN1-LCT)
281
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23.7 JS-502 (Option)
[1]
[2]
4040F5C504DA
Appendix
[1]
282
Paper Full Detection Sensor (PC1-JOB)
[2]

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23. Parts layout drawing
[1]
bizhub 200/250/350
23.8 FS-508 (Option)
[2]
[3]
[27]
[5]
[4]
[28]
[6]
[30]
[7]
[29]
[26]
[8]
[25]
[24]
[23]
[9]
[20]
[19]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[15]
[22]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[21]
4040F5C510DA
[1] Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN)
[16] Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN)
[2] Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) [17] Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN)
[3] Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) [18] Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN)
[19] Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN)
[5] Entrance Motor (M3-FN)
[20] Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN)
[6] Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN)
[21] Elevator Board (PWB-B FN)
[7] Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
[22]
[8] Registration Clutch (CL1-FN)
[23] Elevator Motor (M11-FN)
Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor
(PC3-FN)
[9] Transport Jam Detection Switch (S4-FN)
[24] Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC14-FN)
[10] Front Cover Detection Switch (S1-FN)
[25] Top Face Detection Sensor (PC15-FN)
[11] Storage Paddle Solenoid (SL1-FN)
[26] Shutter Detection Switch (S2-FN)
[12] Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
[27]
[13] Exit Motor (M1-FN)
[28] Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN)
[14] Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN)
[29] Shutter Opening Motor (M12-FN)
Elevator Tray Upper/Lower Limit Switch
(S3-FN)
[15] Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) [30] Transport Motor (M2-FN)
283
Appendix
[4] Transport Sensor (PC5-FN)
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23.9 PU-501 (Option)
[1]
4040F5C505DA
Appendix
[1]
284
Punch Trash Full (PC1-PK)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23. Parts layout drawing
[16]
bizhub 200/250/350
23.10 MT-501 (Option)
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[14]
[7]
[8]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
4040F5C506DA
Cover Open/Close Sensor (PC11-MK)
[9]
[2]
Paper Full Detection Sensor 4 (PC8-MK)
[10]
Paper Detection Sensor 1 (PC1-MK)
Paper Detection Sensor 2 (PC2-MK)
[3]
Paper Detection Sensor 4 (PC4-MK)
[11]
Paper Detection Sensor 3 (PC3-MK)
[4]
Paper Full Detection Sensor 3 (PC7-MK)
[12]
Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid 1 (SL1-MK)
[5]
Paper Full Detection Sensor 2 (PC6-MK)
[13]
Main Control Board (PWB-A MK)
[6]
Upper Transport Sensor (PC9-MK)
[14]
Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid 2 (SL2-MK)
[7]
Paper Full Detection Sensor 1 (PC5-MK)
[15]
Transport Motor (M1-MK)
[8]
Lower Transport Sensor (PC10-MK)
[16]
Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid 3 (SL3-MK)
Appendix
[1]
285
bizhub 200/250/350
23. Parts layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
23.11 SD-502 (Option)
[1]
[14]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[3]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
Appendix
4040F5C507DA
286
[1]
Crease Motor (M10-SK)
[8]
Saddle Tray Empty Sensor (PC21-SK)
[2]
Crease Roller Home Position Sensor
(PC22-SK)
[9]
In & Out Guide Motor (M13-SK)
[3]
Saddle Interlock Switch (S4-SK)
[10]
Transport Pulse Sensor (PC25-SK)
[4]
Layable Guide Home Sensor (PC26-SK)
[11]
Saddle Exit Motor (M8-SK)
[12]
Saddle Exit Roller Home Position Sensor
(PC18-SK)
[5]
In & Out Guide Home Sensor (PC23-SK)
[6]
Saddle Exit Sensor (PC20-SK)
[13]
Saddle Exit Open/Close Motor (M9-SK)
[7]
Layable Guide Motor (M14-SK)
[14]
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
24. Connector layout drawing
bizhub 200/250/350
24. Connector layout drawing
Description
➀ Possible to confirm by removing external cover.
Number of Pin
1
Not possible to confirm by removing external cover.
[17]
[1]
[16]
[2]
[15]
[3]
4
[14]
11
8
[4]
3
7 4
2
[13]
15
2
12
2
3
2
13
3
3
3
[12]
[5]
[11]
[6]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[9]
4040F5C511DA
CN No.
Location
No.
CN No.
[1]
CN13
L-18 to 19
[10]
CN2
Location
F-14
[2]
CN25
F-15
[11]
CN31
K-13
U-17
[3]
CN44
L-11
[12]
CN5
[4]
CN81
M-12
[13]
CN43
F-16
[5]
CN42
L-8
[14]
CN12
K-15 to 16
[6]
CN45
L-9
[15]
CN28
F-6
[7]
CN82
L-8
[16]
CN17
L-12
[8]
CN4
T-17
[17]
CN14
L-5 to 6
[9]
CN30
L-9
Appendix
No.
287
bizhub 200/250/350
24. Connector layout drawing
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[25]
[2]
[24]
[3]
[23]
[4]
[22]
[5]
2
2
[21]
[6]
2
26
2
2
22
[20]
[7]
4
2
2
8
4
[19]
2
2
2
11
3
2
2
2
6
[18]
[17]
2
[8]
2
12
[9]
3
[10]
[11]
[16]
[12]
[15]
[13]
[14]
Appendix
4040F5C512DA
No.
CN No.
Location
No.
CN No.
Location
[1]
CN53
F-15
[14]
CN32
L-10
[2]
CN55
M-5
[15]
CN18
L-7
[3]
CN50
L-15
[16]
CN1
V-22
[4]
CN80
M-12
[17]
CN20
F-8
[5]
CN51
L-14
[18]
CN19
L-6
[6]
CN46
E-10
[19]
CN27
F-10
[7]
CN48
E-10
[20]
CN52
E-11
[8]
CN24
F-15
[21]
CN10
D-2 to 3
[9]
CN26
F-16 to 17
[22]
CN11
D-12 to 13
[10]
CN49
M-11
[23]
CN70
E-11
[11]
CN54
M-13
[24]
CN23
E-11
[12]
CN71
M-13
[25]
CN47
F-7
[13]
CN15
F-14
288
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
25. Timing chart
bizhub 200/250/350
25. Timing chart
25.1 Main unit
A4 1-page printing, paper fed from Tray 1
Print request received
Main Motor (M1)
Synchronizing Roller
Sensor (M1)
Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
Synchronizing Roller
Clutch (CL1)
1st Drawer Paper Feed
Clutch (CL3)
IU Motor (M2)
Drum Charge Corona Bias
Developing Bias (DC)
Developing Bias (AC)
Transfer output
Print
Appendix
4040F5E519DA
289
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
25.2 DF-605
1-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding)
4040F5E520DA
25.2.1
Appendix
bizhub 200/250/350
25. Timing chart
290
2-Sided Mode (A4 two sheets feeding)
Appendix
4040F5E521DA
25.2.2
25. Timing chart
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
291
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Appendix
4040F5E522DA
bizhub 200/250/350
25. Timing chart
292
Fax Fine mode (A4 two sheets feeding)
Appendix
4040F5E523DA
25.2.3
25. Timing chart
bizhub 200/250/350
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
293
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Fax real-time transmission mode (A4 two sheets feeding)
4040F5E524DA
25.2.4
Appendix
bizhub 200/250/350
25. Timing chart
294
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
CONTENTS
Duplex Unit/Switchback Unit
General
Maintenance
Other ....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 3
2.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list .................................................................... 4
2.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly list............................................................................ 4
2.2.2
Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 4
Disassembly/Assembly procedure........................................................................ 4
2.3.1
Duplex Unit.................................................................................................... 4
2.3.2
Switch Back Unit ........................................................................................... 5
2.4
Cleaning procedure .............................................................................................. 5
2.4.1
Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1 and 2............................ 5
2.4.2
Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 3...................................... 5
2.4.3
Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Ventilation Section ............................................ 6
2.4.4
Cleaning of the Switch Back Unit Transport Roller/Roll ................................ 6
Adjustment/Setting
3.
How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 7
4.
I/O Check ................................................................................................................ 8
4.1
Check procedure .................................................................................................. 8
4.2
I/O check list ......................................................................................................... 8
4.2.1
I/O check screen ........................................................................................... 8
4.2.2
I/O check list.................................................................................................. 8
5.
Adjustment .............................................................................................................. 9
5.1
Adjusting the paper reference position ................................................................. 9
Troubleshooting
6.
Jam Display ........................................................................................................... 11
6.1
Misfeed display ................................................................................................... 11
6.1.1
Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 11
6.2
Sensor layout ...................................................................................................... 12
6.3
Solution............................................................................................................... 13
i
Maintenance
2.3
Adjustment / Setting
2.
General
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Troubleshooting
1.
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
ii
6.3.1
Initial check items ....................................................................................... 13
6.3.2
Duplex Unit Take-Up Section Misfeed......................................................... 13
6.3.3
Turnover Unit/Duplex Unit Transport Section Misfeed ................................ 14
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
1.
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
General
Product specifications
A. Type
(1) Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit
Type
Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit
Installation
Mounted on the right side door of main unit
Document Alignment
Center
General
Name
B. Paper type
(1) Duplex Unit
56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 (15 to 24 lb)
Paper Type
Plain paper
Paper Size
A5R to A3, 5.5 × 8.5R to 12.25 × 18
C. Machine specifications
(1) Duplex Unit
Power Requirements
DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V ± 5 % (supplied from the main unit)
Dimensions *1
89 mm (W) x 419 mm (D) x 358 mm (H)
3.5 inch (W) x 16.5 inch (D) x 14 inch (H)
Weight *1
Approx. 2.2 kg (4.75 lb)
*1: Values given only for reference when the Duplex Unit is demounted from the machine,
since it is standard on the machine
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
1. Product specifications
Blank Page
2
2. Other
Maintenance
2.
2.1
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
3
2. Other
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
2.2
2.2.1
No
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list
Disassembly/Assembly list
Section
Part name
1
2
Exterior parts
3
2.2.2
No
Section
Maintenance
2.3
2.3.1
Switch Back Unit Fan Motor Cover
☞ 5
Switch Back Unit Right Cover
☞ 5
Part name
Transport section
3
4
☞ 4
Cleaning parts list
1
2
Ref. page
Duplex Unit Right Cover
Ventilation Section
Ref. page
Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1, 2
☞ 5
Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 3
☞ 5
Switch Back Unit Transport Roller/Roll
☞ 6
Duplex Unit Ventilation Section
☞ 6
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
Duplex Unit
A. Right Cover
[1]
[2]
4346F2C500DA
1. Remove two screws [1] and Right Cover [2].
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Switch Back Unit
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
2.3.2
2. Other
A. Fan Motor Cover/Right Cover
[3]
[1]
[4]
[2]
Maintenance
4526F2C500DA
1. Remove two screws [1] and Fan Motor Cover [2].
2. Remove two screws [3] and Right Cover [4].
2.4
Cleaning procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
2.4.1
Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1 and 2
1. Open the Duplex Unit Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 1 and 2 [1] clean of
dirt.
[1]
[1]
2.4.2
4040F2C502DA
Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 3
1. Remove the Duplex Unit.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Duplex Unit Transport Roller/Roll 3 [2] clean of dirt.
[2]
4040F2C503DA
5
2. Other
Cleaning of the Duplex Unit Ventilation Section
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
2.4.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the outside of the
Duplex Unit Ventilation Section [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
4040F2C504DA
2. Open the Duplex Unit Door [2].
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the inside of the
Duplex Unit Ventilation Section [3]
clean of dirt.
[3]
[2]
Maintenance
4040F2C505DA
2.4.4
Cleaning of the Switch Back Unit Transport Roller/Roll
[1]
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Switch Back Unit
Transport Roller/Roll [1] clean of dirt.
4040F2C506DA
6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
3. How to use the adjustment section
3.
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
Adjustment/Setting
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
7
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
4. I/O Check
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
4.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O Check
4.1
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Touch the [I/O Check].
3. Touch the [Printer].
4. Touch the [Bypass/Duplex].
4.2
I/O check list
4.2.1
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4040F3E566DA
4.2.2
Symbol
Panel display
Operation characteristics/Panel display
1
0
Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor
Paper not
present
Duplex Paper
Passage 2
Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Revers
Switch Back Unit Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Duplex Set
Duplex Unit Set signal
Not set
Set
Duplex Cover
Duplex Unit Door Sensor
Open
Close
PC24
PC25
PC26
-
Part/Signal name
Paper
present
Duplex Paper
Passage 1
PC23
8
I/O check list
5.1
Adjustment
Adjusting the paper reference position
1. Display Adjust Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the
Adjust Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service
manual.
2. Touch the [Printer].
4040F3E567DA
3. Touch the [Registration (CD)].
4040F3E568DA
4. Touch the [Test Print].
Adjustment / Setting
5.
5. Adjustment
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4040F3E569DA
5. Touch the [Duplex].
6. Press the Start key.
4040F3E570DA
A
4040F3C571DA
7. Measure the width of printed reference line A
Specification: 10 mm ± 3.0 mm
8. If width A falls within the specified
range, finish the adjustment procedure.
If outside the specified range, perform the adjustment below.
9
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
5. Adjustment
Adjustment / Setting
4040F3E569DA
10
9. Touch [END] to display the Registration (CD) screen.
10. Touch the [Duplex].
11. Press the Clear key and use the 10Key Pad to set the value.
• If width A is wider than the specified
range: Enter a negative value.
• If width A is narrower than the specified range: Enter a positive value.
Adjustment range: + 4.0 max. and -4.0
min.
Use the * key to switch between + and -.
12. Produce another test print and check
for width A.
6. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
6.
Jam Display
6.1
Misfeed display
• When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
4040F4E511DA
Display
[1]
6.1.1
Misfeed location
Duplex Unit Take-Up Section Misfeed
Turnover Unit/Duplex Unit Transport
Section Misfeed
Misfeed access location
Duplex Unit Door
Action
☞ 13
Misfeed display resetting procedure
Troubleshooting
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
11
6. Jam Display
Sensor layout
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
6.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Troubleshooting
4040F4C505DA
12
[1]
Switch Back Unit Sensor
PC26
[4] Synchronizing Roller Sensor
PC1
[2]
Duplex Unit Upper Transport
Sensor
PC24
[5] Duplex Unit Lower Transport
Sensor
PC25
[3]
Paper Exit Sensor
PC4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.3.1
Solution
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
6.3
6. Jam Display
Initial check items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Instruct the user on the correct paper storage
procedures.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the Clean the paper path and replace if necespaper path deformed or worn?
sary.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed, or
worn?
Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper?
Set as necessary.
Are the actuators operating correctly?
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
6.3.2
Duplex Unit Take-Up Section Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
Duplex Unit
Take-Up Section
misfeed detection
The Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) is blocked
by the paper.
Detection of paper
remaining in the
Duplex Unit
Take-Up Section
The Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Operations
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Initial checks
-
-
2
PC1 sensor check
PWB-A PJ11A-5 (ON)
M-8
3
PC25 sensor check
PWB-A PJ22A-14 (ON)
D-7
4
Replace PWB-A.
-
-
13
Troubleshooting
Synchronizing Roller Sensor (PC1)
Duplex Unit Lower Transport Sensor (PC25)
6. Jam Display
Duplex Unit/
Switchback Unit
6.3.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Turnover Unit/Duplex Unit Transport Section Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) is unblocked by the paper.
Turnover Unit/
Duplex Unit
Transport Section
misfeed detection
Detection of paper
remaining in the
Turnover Unit/
Duplex Unit
Transport Section
The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked
by the paper.
The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked
by the paper.
The Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26) is blocked when the Main Power Switch is
set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
The Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
Switch Back Unit Sensor (PC26)
Duplex Unit Upper Transport Sensor (PC24)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
14
Operations
Control signal
Location
(Electrical
components)
1
Initial checks
-
-
2
PC4 sensor check
PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON)
M-12
3
PC26 sensor check
PWB-A PJ19A-9 (ON)
M-5
4
PC24 sensor check
PWB-A PJ20A-5 (ON)
M-16
5
Replace PWB-A.
-
-
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
200 / 250 / 350
Standard Controller
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Standard Controller
CONTENTS
Standard Controller
General
Maintenance
2.
Firmware upgrade ................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Preparations for Firmware rewriting...................................................................... 3
2.1.1
Service environment ..................................................................................... 3
2.1.2
Writing into the Compact flash ...................................................................... 3
2.1.3
Checking ROM version ................................................................................. 3
2.2
Firmware rewriting ................................................................................................ 3
2.2.1
MSC .............................................................................................................. 3
Troubleshooting
3.
General
Controller specifications .......................................................................................... 1
Maintenance
1.
Troubleshooting procedures .................................................................................... 5
Unable to print ...................................................................................................... 5
3.2
Unable to specify desired settings or unable to print as specified ........................ 6
Troubleshooting
3.1
i
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
General
Standard Controller
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Controller specifications
1.
Standard Controller
General
Controller specifications
A. Type
Built-in type controller
Power Requirements
Shared with main unit
CPU
RM5231
Program ROM
32 MB
RAM
192 MB
HDD
40 GB (Option)
Host Interface
Standard: Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T), USB 1.1/2.0
Option: IEEE1284
Frame type
Ethernet 802.2
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet II
Ethernet SNAP
Supported protocols
TCP/IP
IPX/SPX
NetBEUI
AppleTalk (EtherTalk)
Print speed
Fast print time
bizhub 350
35 pages/minute (Letter)
bizhub 250
25 pages/minute (Letter)
bizhub 200
20 pages/minute (Letter)
bizhub 350
4.8 seconds or less (Letter)
bizhub 250
bizhub 200
5.3 seconds or less (Letter)
Printer language
PCL5e emulation
PCL6 (XL 2.1) emulation
PostScript 3 emulation
Operating Environmental
Requirements
Temperature 10 to 35
Humidity 15 to 85% RH
Resolution
Data processing
600 x 600 dpi
Printing
600 x 600 dpi
Compatible Paper Size
Max. standard paper size
Fonts
PCL: Latin 80 fonts,
Postscript 3 emulation: Latin 136 fonts
General
Type
1
1. Controller specifications
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Standard Controller
B. Supporting client specifications
PC
IBM PC and its compatible
RAM
32 MB or more
OS
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows XP (Service Pack 2 or
later), or Windows NT 4.0 (Service Pack 6a)
Mac OS 9.2 or later or Mac OS X 10.2 or Mac OS X 10.3
General
PageScope Web Connection
Web browser:
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 or later recommended
Netscape Navigator 4.73 or 7.0
Browser
Windows 2000
Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 or later recommended
Netscape Navigator 7.0
Windows XP
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 or later recommended
Netscape Navigator 7.0
* If using Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5, use Service Pack 1 or later.
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Firmware upgrade
2.
Standard Controller
Maintenance
Firmware upgrade
2.1
Preparations for Firmware rewriting
2.1.1
Service environment
• Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash
• Compact flash (with 32 MB or more)
2.1.2
Writing into the Compact flash
• Copy the firmware files using the computer.
2.1.3
Maintenance
NOTE
• The copying operation should be performed on the files contained in the folder,
instead of the folder.
• Copy only those files to be upgraded to the compact flash.
• If wrong firmware is copied, no screen display is given and thus no firmware can
be downloaded.
Checking ROM version
• Before attempting to upgrade the firmware, check the current ROM version.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2.2
Firmware rewriting
NOTE
• NEVER attempt to remove or insert the compact flash with the machine power
turned ON.
2.2.1
MSC
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Remove the Compact flash Cover
[1].
[1]
4040F2C596DA
3. Insert the compact flash card [2], in
which only the MSC upgrading files
have been written, into the slot.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
NOTE
• Make sure that this compact flash
card contains only the upgrading
firmware of the MSC, and not that of
the engine or Finisher.
3
2. Firmware upgrade
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Standard Controller
NOTE
• Be sure to turn ON the sub power switch first before turning ON the main power
switch.
4. Turn ON the main power switch.
4040F2C749DA
5. The firmware upgrading sequence
will start.
6. When the upgrading sequence is
completed, which is notified by the
message “FINISH” appearing on the
screen, turn OFF the main power
switch.
NOTE
• NEVER turn OFF the main power
switch until the message “FINISH”
appears on the screen.
Maintenance
7. Remove the Compact Flash [2] card
from the slot.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
8. Turn ON the main power switch.
9. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
10. Select [ROM Version].
11. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
3. Troubleshooting procedures
3.1
Troubleshooting procedures
Unable to print
No.
Symptom
1
The message “No
printers are connected” or “Print error”
appears.
2
3
A postscript error
appears.
The machine does not
start printing although
the print job was completed on the computer.
Probable cause
The printer driver selected for
printing is not compatible with
the printer controller.
Action
Check the printer name selected.
The network cable or USB cable Check that the cable is connected
is disconnected.
properly.
An error has occurred in this
machine.
Check this machine’s control panel.
Available memory space is not
sufficient.
Perform a test print to check whether
printing is possible.
Available computer memory
space is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check whether
printing is possible.
There is an error in the application software settings.
Refer to the user’s manual of the application software to check the settings.
The file printing settings are
incorrect.
Change the settings and try to print
again.
The printer driver selected for
printing is not compatible with
the printer controller.
Check the printer name selected.
The network cable or USB cable Check that the cable is connected
is disconnected.
properly.
An error has occurred in this
machine.
Check this machine’s control panel.
A print job is queued in this
machine, delaying printing.
Check the job order on the Active Jobs
list of the machine’s control panel.
“Save in User Box” was selected Check if the print job is stored on the
for the print job.
Box screen of this machine’s control
panel.
“Secure Print” was selected for
the print job.
Check if the print job is held on the
Secure Print screen of this machine’s
control panel.
If the account track settings have Enter the correct account name (or
been applied, an unregistered
password).
account name (or password)
may have been entered.
If the authentication settings
have been applied, an unregistered user name (or password)
may have been entered.
Enter the correct user name (or password).
Available computer memory
space is not sufficient.
Perform a test print to check whether
printing is possible.
The connection of this machine Consult with the network administrator.
to the network is not yet established (while connecting to a network).
5
Troubleshooting
3.
Standard Controller
Troubleshooting
3. Troubleshooting procedures
Standard Controller
3.2
No.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Unable to specify desired settings or unable to print as specified
Symptom
Probable cause
Action
1
A printer driver setting can- Some functions cannot be comnot be selected.
bined.
Do not try to select settings that
are not available.
2
The “Conflicts” message
with “Unable to Select” or
“Function Canceled”
appears.
An incorrect combination of functions has been specified.
Check the settings and specify
the functions correctly.
3
Printing is not performed
as specified.
Incorrect settings are specified.
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
4
The watermark cannot be
printed.
A combination of functions,
although possible in the printer
driver, is not possible with this
machine.
The paper size, orientation, and
other settings specified in the
application have priority over
those specified in the printer
driver.
Enter the correct settings in the
application.
The watermark is not correctly
set.
Check the watermark settings.
The watermark density is set to a Check the density settings.
level that is too low.
Watermarks cannot be printed in
graphics applications.
Troubleshooting
5
The staple function cannot Stapling is not possible if “Paper
be specified.
Type” is set to “Thick” or “Transparency”.
The staple function requires
optional finisher.
6
Stapling cannot be performed.
No watermark can be printed in
this case.
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
Install the required optional finisher and enable it using the
printer driver.
Number of pages that can be sta- Print by specify the number of
pled: Up to 50 pages of Letter
pages per set for the number of
A4R or smaller plain paper.
pages that can be stapled.
Number of pages that can be center-stapled: Up to 15 pages of
plain paper.
Stapling is not possible if the doc- Check the document.
ument contains pages of different
sizes.
6
7
The stapling position is not The orientation setting is not coras expected.
rect.
Check the stapling position in the
printer driver setup dialog box.
8
The hole punch function
cannot be specified.
Hole punching cannot be specified if “Booklet”, “Transparency”,
“Thick2”, “Thick3”, or “Envelope”
is selected.
Check each setting in the printer
driver.
For the hole punch function, the
punch unit must be installed on
optional finisher.
Install the required optional finisher and enable it using the
printer driver.
No.
Symptom
The pages are not
punched.
Probable cause
Action
Printed pages may be fed out
without being punched if the
paper is loaded into the paper
source with an incorrect orientation.
Check the orientation setting.
10 The hole punch position is
not as expected.
The orientation setting is not correct.
Check the punch position on the
Layout tab of the printer driver
setup dialog box.
11 The form is not printed
properly.
Available computer memory
space is not sufficient.
Simplify the form to reduce the
data size.
12 The image is not printed
properly.
Available computer memory
space is not sufficient.
Simplify the image to reduce the
data size.
13 Paper is not fed from the
specified paper source.
Load the paper source with paper
Paper will not be fed from the
specified paper source if that
of the appropriate size and orienpaper source is loaded with paper tation.
of a different size or orientation.
14 The numbering function is
not performed.
The “Collate” (for Windows) or
“Collated” (for Mac OS X) check
box is selected on the print setup
dialog box.
15 Proof and Print is no be
performed.
Clear the “Collate” (for Windows)
or “Collated” (for Mac OS X)
check box.
Troubleshooting
9
3. Troubleshooting procedures
Standard Controller
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Standard Controller
3. Troubleshooting procedures
Troubleshooting
Blank Page
8
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
FK-503
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
CONTENTS
FK-503
General
Other ....................................................................................................................... 5
2.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 5
3.
Connection .............................................................................................................. 6
4.
Disassembly/Reassembly ....................................................................................... 7
4.1
FAX Board (with G3 Multi Port option).................................................................. 7
4.2
Spare TX Marker Stamp 2 .................................................................................... 7
4.3
Ni-MH battery Replacement ................................................................................. 9
Adjustment/Setting
5.
How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 11
6.
Utility/Counter Mode.............................................................................................. 12
6.1
Utility/Counter Mode function tree ...................................................................... 12
6.2
Utility/Counter Mode function setting procedure................................................. 14
6.2.1
Procedure ................................................................................................... 14
6.2.2
Exiting ......................................................................................................... 14
6.2.3
Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions................................... 14
6.3
Settings in the User Setting ................................................................................ 15
6.3.1
User’s Choice 5/6........................................................................................ 15
6.3.2
User’s Choice 6/6........................................................................................ 15
6.3.3
FAX ............................................................................................................. 16
6.4
Settings in the User Management ...................................................................... 17
6.4.1
Line Monitor Sound..................................................................................... 17
6.4.2
Memory RX ON/OFF .................................................................................. 17
6.4.3
POP3 RX .................................................................................................... 17
6.5
Maintenance
2.
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Settings in the Admin. Management................................................................... 18
6.5.1
Initial Setting ............................................................................................... 18
6.5.2
Admin. Set .................................................................................................. 19
6.5.3
TX Settings ................................................................................................. 19
6.5.4
RX Settings ................................................................................................. 21
6.5.5
FAX Setting ................................................................................................. 21
i
Troubleshooting
1.
FK-503
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.5.6
Print Lists .................................................................................................... 22
6.5.7
Report Settings........................................................................................... 22
6.5.8
Document Management ............................................................................. 23
6.6
Settings in the Repoerts ..................................................................................... 24
6.6.1
6.6.2
Bulletin List ................................................................................................. 24
6.6.3
Confidential List .......................................................................................... 24
General
7.
Initial Mode............................................................................................................ 25
7.1
Initial Mode Function Setting Procedure ............................................................ 25
7.1.1
Initial Mode Function Tree .................................................................................. 25
7.3
Settings in the Initial Mode ................................................................................. 26
Clear FAX Setting ....................................................................................... 26
Maintenance Mode ............................................................................................... 27
8.1
Maintenance Mode Function Setting Procedure ................................................ 27
8.2
Maintenance Mode function tree ........................................................................ 28
8.3
Settings in the Maintenance Mode ..................................................................... 28
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
8.
8.3.1
Mem. contents ............................................................................................ 28
8.3.2
Memory Dump ............................................................................................ 28
8.3.3
File Display ................................................................................................. 28
8.3.4
File Dump ................................................................................................... 29
8.3.5
Soft Switch Set ........................................................................................... 29
8.3.6
Touch Panel Adjustment ............................................................................. 29
8.3.7
Protocol Trace............................................................................................. 29
8.3.8
Service Call Report..................................................................................... 29
9.
Troubleshooting
Exiting ......................................................................................................... 25
7.2
7.3.1
Tech. Rep. Mode ................................................................................................... 30
9.1
Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure ...................................................... 30
9.2
Tech. Rep. Mode function tree............................................................................ 31
9.3
Settings in the Tech. Rep. Choice ...................................................................... 31
9.3.1
9.4
9.5
Country Set................................................................................................. 31
Settings in the System Input............................................................................... 32
9.4.1
Machine Configuration................................................................................ 32
Settings in the Counter....................................................................................... 32
9.5.1
ii
Program List ............................................................................................... 24
Checking the counter reading..................................................................... 32
9.5.2
Clearing readings of all counters at once ................................................... 32
9.5.3
Clearing the reading of a specific counter .................................................. 32
9.5.4
Application Counter .................................................................................... 32
9.5.5
Fax Connection Error.................................................................................. 33
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Settings in the Function ...................................................................................... 33
9.6.1
9.7
10.
F7-2............................................................................................................. 33
Settings in the FAX Set....................................................................................... 33
9.7.1
Service Call Set .......................................................................................... 33
9.7.2
Terminal TX................................................................................................. 35
9.7.3
Stamp.......................................................................................................... 35
FK-503
9.6
Fax-related Adjustment Items ............................................................................... 36
11.
Soft Switch List...................................................................................................... 37
11.1 Soft Switches Disclosed to Users (Screen Setting) ............................................ 37
General
10.1 CD/FD Zoom Ratio Correction (Fax) .................................................................. 36
11.2 List of Defaults .................................................................................................... 44
11.3 List of Soft Switches ........................................................................................... 51
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 161
12.1 Diagnosis by Alarm Code ................................................................................. 161
12.2 Communication Error Codes ............................................................................ 162
12.2.1
Errors in operations................................................................................... 162
12.2.2
Terminal alarm .......................................................................................... 163
12.2.3
Communication errors (TX)....................................................................... 163
12.2.4
Communication errors (RX) ...................................................................... 165
12.2.5
Malfunction................................................................................................ 167
Troubleshooting
12.3 Diagnosis by Symptoms ................................................................................... 168
Adjustment / Setting
12.
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
iii
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
FK-503
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Blank Page
iv
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
General
Product specifications
FK-503
1.
A. Type
32MB
Communication mode
G3/ECM
Scanning resolution
(main line x feed line)
8 x 3.85 line/mm
8 x 7.7 line/mm
8 x 15.4 line/mm
16 x 15.4 line/mm
Data speed
G3 / ECM: 2.4 Kbps - 33.6 Kbps
Transmission time
G3 / ECM: Image signal - 2 sec approx. (V.34 JBIG)
Coding method
MH / MR / MMR / JBIG
Applicable network
G3/ECM
Options
Stamp Unit SP-501
Fax Multi Line ML-502
General
Memory Capacity
Phone line, FAX communication network,
dedicated line
1
1. Product specifications
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B. Functions
FK-503
Function
General
Speed
Resolution
Operability
bizhub 350, 250, 200
High speed scanning
{ (0.55 sec/Letter fine)
High speed printout
{
bizhub 350 35 ppm/A4
bizhub 250 25 ppm/A4
bizhub 200 20 ppm/A4
ECM mode
{ (2 sec approx./Std document)
High speed half tone
{
Super fine mode
{
Half tone transmission
{
Auto retransmission after error
{ (ECM)
Full automatic exposure control
{
Manual brightness control
{ (Only for copy)
Smoothing
{
Mixed mode (Text + Photo)
{
One-touch dialing
{ (540 destinations)
Abbreviated dialing
-
One-touch program dialing
{ (30)
Auto re-dialing
{
Transmission Booking
{ (200)
Broadcast Destination
{ (300)
Origination Selecting
{ (8 types)
LCD display
{ (320 x 240)
Operation
{ (Analog touch panel)
Disable copy function
-
Select auto-mode screen
{ (Copy/Fax automatic switch)
Automatic selection of print paper size {
Utility functions
2
Password communication
{
Multi polling
-
Polling at regular times
-
Nonstorage transmission
{
Priority transmission
{
Insert destination
{
Message printing
-
Automatic pause for PSTN number
{
Display communication result
{
Record TSI information
{
ID display/record
{ (Received date and time record)
Power Source saving mode
{
Switch document reading length
(1m/4m)
-
ADF 2 sided transmission
{
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
Transmission report
{ (with document merge)
Incompleted transmission report
{ (with document merge)
Serial broadcast report
{ (with document merge)
Report functions One-Touch list
Fax program list
System
Configuration
Mutual
Connectivity
Maintenance
{
{
Bulletin Board list
{
Confidential list
-
Forwarding list
{
Setting list
{
Multi access
{
Transmission Booking Document
Number
{ (200)
Retransmission
{ (Destination changeable)
Document retransmission
{
Reception by memory
{
Transmission Manage ment Document Number
{ (200)
Batch Tx
{ (30 destinations)
Memory polling transmis sion
{
Confidential transmission
Confidential print
{ (F code)
Serial broadcast
{ (300 destinations)
Relay broadcast
{ (F code)
Memory full control
{ (Separate Tx)
Quick memory transmission
{
File backup
{ (12H)
Rotated Rx
{
Selective polling
{
Relay transmission
-
Extra telephone
{ (PB forwarding reception possible)*
*PSTN (Port 1 only)
Account track mode
{ (100 sections)
Chain dialing
{
Multi-port
{ (G3 multi-option)
Hard disk
-
Inch/mm conversion
{
Memory
{ (32MB)
ITU-T G4
-
ITU-T G4/ECM
{
Facsimile communication network
{ (G3)
Self diagnostics
{
Counter per application
{
Adjust touch panel resistration
{
General
Account list
Memory
functions
bizhub 350, 250, 200
{
FK-503
Function
Activity report (TX/RX)
3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
FK-503
1. Product specifications
Blank Page
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Other
Maintenance
2.1
Other
FK-503
2.
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
5
3. Connection
3.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Connection
FK-503
• Connect cables from the phone line and other devices with the system as shown below.
[1]
Standard machine
[2]
[5]
Maintenance
Machine mounted
options
[4]
[3]
Back side of the main
product
Left side of the main product
4040F2E756DA
6
No.
Name
[1]
TEL PORT1
Connect to
Extra telephone set
Remark
Standard
[2]
LINE PORT1 Phone line (PORT1)
[3]
LINE PORT2 Phone line (PORT2)
Standard
[4]
LAN
LAN (PC print option)
Standard
[5]
USB
Printer Controller
Standard
Option
Option (G3 Multi-port)
Used in the Scanner & iFAX function
and printer function (printer function
only for USB)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4.
4. Disassembly/Reassembly
Disassembly/Reassembly
FAX Board (with G3 Multi Port option)
FK-503
4.1
1. Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
☞ For details, see Service Manual of the machine.
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
☞ For details, see Service Manual of the machine.
3. Remove three screws [1].
4. Unlock the card spacer [2].
5. Sliding the Fax Board [4] downward,
disconnect the connector [3] and
then remove the Fax Board [4].
[3]
[2]
Maintenance
[1]
[4]
4040F2C684DA
4.2
Spare TX Marker Stamp 2
1. Unlock the Top Door of the Automatic Document Feeder [1].
2. Open the Top Door [2].
3. Open the Processing Guide [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
4040F2C685DA
[1]
[2]
4. Using tweezers, pick up and remove
the stamp (ink portion) [1].
NOTE
• At reinstallation, align the round
protrusion [2] on the stamp with a
slit in the TX Marker Stamp 2.
4040F2C686DA
7
4. Disassembly/Reassembly
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
5. Remove the screw [3] and the Guide
Plate [4].
[3]
[4]
4040F2C687DA
6. Disconnect the connector [5] and
remove the hookup harness [6].
[5]
[6]
NOTE
• At reinstallation, use care not to
allow the hookup harness to ride
over the rib [7].
[7]
Maintenance
4040F2C688DA
[8]
[9]
[10]
4040F2C689DA
8
7. Remove the screw [8], disconnect
the connector [9], and remove TX
Marker Stamp 2 [10].
NOTE
• Make sure that this step is performed only after the stamp (ink
portion) has been removed.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Ni-MH battery Replacement
1. Check on the screen that the memory capacity still available for use reads 100%.
NOTE
• If the memory capacity does not read 100%, let the machine output contents of the
memory or wait until the machine completes transmission.
FK-503
4.3
4. Disassembly/Reassembly
2. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
3. Remove the Upper Rear Cover.
☞ For details, see Service Manual of the machine.
4. Unplug one connectors (CN10) [11]
of the MFB3 Board.
[1]
[1]
5. Tie band [2] is cut with nippers, and
the Ni-MH battery [3] is replace.
[2]
4040F2C739DA
6. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
NOTE
• After the Ni-MH battery has been replaced with a new one, be sure to turn ON the
Main Power Switch.
• Discard the used battery in accordance with the corresponding local regulations
and NEVER discard it or let it discharge on the user’s premises.
9
Maintenance
4040F2C738DA
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance
FK-503
4. Disassembly/Reassembly
Blank Page
10
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. How to use the adjustment section
5.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
FK-503
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
11
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
6. Utility/Counter Mode
FK-503
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Utility/Counter Mode
Utility/Counter Mode function tree
• The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.
NOTE
• The following function tree shows only the fax-related functions.
Utility/Counter
User Setting
User's Choice
5/6
Output Tray Settings
6/6
Default Screen
Default LCD Screen
Default FAX Screen
FAX
One-Touch
Index
FAX Program
Domain Name
Bulletin
Conf. Box
User Management
Line Monitor Sound
Memory RX ON/OFF
POP3 RX
Adjustment / Setting
Admin.
Management
Initial Setting
Date & Time Setting
Language for Communication
Self-Telephone # information
TSI Registration
Self-ID
Admin. Set
Restrict One-Touch Editing
FAX Regist.
TX Settings
Quality/Mode
Default Density
Default Density
Communication Mode
Comm. Menu
TX
TSI
Rotation TX
2-Sided TX
RX Settings
Memory RX Time
Setting
Memory Lock Time
Memory Lock Password
Confidential RX User Box Delete
4040F3E558DA
12
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
RX Functions
Reception Mode
Numbers of RX Call Rings
Password Communication
Print Lists
Setting List
Report Settings
TX Report
Communication Password
FK-503
FAX Setting
6. Utility/Counter Mode
Activity Report
Document Management
TX Document
TX Forwarding
RX Document
F-CODE
Port
All Other Documents
Repoerts
Program List
Bulletin List
Confidential List
4040F3E559DA
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.
13
6. Utility/Counter Mode
FK-503
6.2
6.2.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Utility/Counter Mode function setting procedure
Procedure
1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. The Utility/Counter mode screen will appear.
4040F3E560DA
6.2.2
Exiting
• Touch the [Enter] key.
Adjustment / Setting
6.2.3
Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions
• Use the +/- key to enter or change the setting value.
• Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press
the Clear key before making an entry.)
14
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.3
6. Utility/Counter Mode
Settings in the User Setting
6.3.1
FK-503
NOTE
• Only the fax-related functions will be described for User Setting.
User’s Choice 5/6
A. Output Tray Settings
(1) Faxes/Prints
Functions
• To set the output bin in each of different applications when a finishing option is
mounted.
• Different contents of display are given depending on the type of option mounted.
Use
• When changing the finishing tray during reception of fax or computer printouts.
Setting/
Procedure
<Port 1>
• The default setting is “1”.
“1”
2
(3)
2
(3)
2
(3)
<Port 2>
• The default setting is “1”.
“1”
“1”
6.3.2
User’s Choice 6/6
A. Default Screen
(1) Default LCD Screen
Functions
• To set the default screen that is preferentially selected upon auto clear or similar event.
Use
• When changing the default screen that is preferentially selected upon auto clear or similar event.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Copy”.
“Copy”
FAX
Scanner
FAX/Copy Auto
(2) Default FAX Screen
Functions
• To set the default screen that is preferentially selected when the fax is selected.
Use
• When changing the default screen that is preferentially selected when the fax is
selected.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “One-Touch”.
“One-Touch”
Search
Direct Input
Index
15
Adjustment / Setting
<Faxes/Prints>
• The default setting is “1”.
6. Utility/Counter Mode
6.3.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FAX
FK-503
A. One-Touch
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To store a destination in a one-touch dial key or change or delete one that has previously been stored as one-touch dial.
• Up to a total of 540 different destinations can be stored, each screen containing 15.
1. Touch the [One-Touch].
2. Select the specific key, in which a destination is to be stored or for which a previously
stored destination is to be modified or deleted.
3. Make the necessary settings.
B. Index
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To group one-touch dials into different index keys.
• There are a total of 36 index keys.
C. FAX Program
Functions
Adjustment / Setting
Use
• To store functions to be used during communications together with the destination
information.
• It is necessary to store in advance the one-touch dial or abbreviated dial before storing
this function.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to 30 programs can be set.
D. Domain Name
Functions
• To set part of the address in advance as address input support.
Use
• When it is required that address input be made swiftly
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Domain Name].
2. Touch the key, for which Domain Name is to be stored or modified.
3. Type the characters (up to 64 en-size characters) and touch [Enter].
E. Bulletin
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To make settings necessary for setting up a bulletin board.
1. Touch the [Bulletin].
2. Touch the number of the bulletin board to be stored, or modified or deleted.
3. Make the necessary settings.
F. Conf. Box
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
16
• To register a private box, in which a fax message with an F-CODE is to be stored.
1. Touch the [Conf. Box].
2. Select the specific key, in which a private box is to be set or in which previously stored
private box information is to be modified or the private box itself is to be deleted.
3. Make the necessary settings.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.4.1
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
6.4.2
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
6.4.3
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Line Monitor Sound
• To set the volume of the line monitor sound that can be heard from the monitor speaker
during fax transmission.
FK-503
Settings in the User Management
• The default setting is “3”.
0 (mute) to 5
Memory RX ON/OFF
• To allow the machine to produce a print temporarily even in the off mode.
• A print control password is necessary to print data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch the [Memory RX ON/OFF].
Type the 4-digit password (default value: 1111) and touch [Enter].
Touch the [Lock OFF].
To halt the print cycle, touch [Lock ON] and then [Enter] while the print cycle is being
run.
5. Touch [Temporarily Print] to resume the print cycle.
POP3 RX
• To check reception from the POP3 server.
1. Touch the [POP3 RX].
Adjustment / Setting
6.4
6. Utility/Counter Mode
17
6. Utility/Counter Mode
FK-503
6.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Settings in the Admin. Management
• The Admin. Management will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Admin. Set . (The administrator password is initially set to “00000000”)
6.5.1
Initial Setting
A. Date & Time Setting
Functions
• To set time and date for the fax machine.
Use
• When setting or changing the time and date set for the fax machine.
Setting/
Procedure
• Enter the day, month, and year, and time-of-day from the 10-Key Pad.
• Touch [Enter] to start the clock.
B. Language for Communication
Functions
• To set the language used with the fax machine.
Use
• To change the language used with the fax machine.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “English”.
Japanese
“English”
C. Self-Telephone # information
Functions
Use
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
• To register information required for fax communication, including the telephone number
of the local fax machine, whether or not a PBX is available, and the type of line.
1. Touch the [PBX Connection Mode].
2. Touch [Self-telephone #] and enter the telephone number.
3. Touch the [PBX Connection Mode].
[Extension]: If a connection is made via the PBX to the ordinary fixed line
[Outside]: If a connection is made directly to the ordinary fixed line
* If [Extension] is selected, enter the Outside Line Access Code.
4. Touch the [Dial Method].
[DP20]: 20 pps pulse dialing line
[DP10]: 10 pps pulse dialing line
[PB]: Tone dialing line
D. TSI Registration
Functions
• To set the name (of the sending party) to be notified to the recipient.
Use
• When changing the name (of the sending party) to be notified to the recipient.
Setting/
Procedure
• Up to eight different names can be registered.
1. Touch the [TSI Registration].
2. Select the number, for which the sending party is to be registered.
3. Enter the name of the sending party and touch [Enter].
E. Self-ID
Functions
• To register the name, telephone number, and other information of the local machine as
an ID.
Use
• When the ID is to be printed on journals and displayed on the panel of the fax machine
on the receiving end.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Self-ID].
2. Enter the local machine ID (up to 12 en-size characters) and touch [Enter].
18
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.5.2
6. Utility/Counter Mode
Admin. Set
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
6.5.3
FK-503
A. Restrict One-Touch Editing
• To restrict the user from registering or modifying one-touch dials.
• The default setting is “OFF”.
ON
“OFF”
TX Settings
A. Quality/Mode
(1) Default Density
Functions
• To set the default image quality selected during transmission.
Use
• To change the default image quality selected during transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Standard”.
“Standard”
Text/Photo
Fine
GSR
SuperFine
Super GSR
(2) Default Density
Functions
• To set the default image density selected during transmission.
Use
• To change the default image density selected during transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Std.”
• Setting range: 5 steps
Adjustment / Setting
Light to Std. to Dark
(3) Communication Mode
Functions
• To set the communication mode established during transmission.
Use
• To change the communication mode established during transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
<FAX>
G3-1
<Internet FAX>
Internet FAX
G3-2
IP-TX
IP Relay
<PC>
E-Mail
Scanner
B. Comm. Menu
(1) TX
Functions
• To set the type of transmission to be made.
Use
• To change the type of transmission to be made.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Memory TX”.
“Memory TX”
Quick Scan TX
19
6. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
(2) TSI
Functions
• To set where the name of the sending party is to be printed on the transmitted text, and
select the specific name to be printed.
Use
• When having the name of the sending party printed on the transmitted text.
Setting/
Procedure
<TX Time Information>
Inside Body Text Outside Body TextOFF
<TSI Selection>
• To select the specific name of the sending party to be printed.
(3) Rotation TX
Functions
• To select whether to turn ON or OFF rotation transmission.
Use
• When rotation transmission is to be made
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
(4) 2-Sided TX
• To set the file margin of the original for 2-sided transmission.
Use
• When changing the file margin of the original for 2-sided transmission.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “OFF”.
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
20
2-Sided TX:
ON
“OFF”
Original Bind Direction:
Left Bind
Top Bind
“Auto”
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
RX Settings
A. Memory RX Time Setting
(1) Memory Lock Time
Functions
• To set the time of day and the day of the week, at which printing of the received fax is to
be started or stopped.
Use
• When a received fax is to be printed at a specific time specified without allowing it to be
printed on the spot
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Memory RX Time Setting].
2. Touch the [Memory Lock Time].
3. Make the necessary settings and touch [Enter].
* Touch [OFF] if no settings are to be made.
FK-503
6.5.4
6. Utility/Counter Mode
(2) Memory Lock Password
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set a password used for printing a fax received at a time not specified.
• The default setting is “0000”.
1. Touch the [Memory RX Time Setting].
2. Touch the [Memory Lock Password].
3. Touch [Password], then enter the password and touch [Enter].
4. Touch [Confirm New Password], then enter the password a second time and touch
[Enter].
B. Confidential RX User Box Delete
• To delete a private box that has previously been registered.
Use
• When deleting a private box.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Confidential RX User Box Delete].
2. Select the private box to be deleted.
3. Touch the [Yes].
6.5.5
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
FAX Setting
A. RX Functions
(1) Reception Mode
Functions
• To set the reception mode of faxes.
Use
• When changing the reception mode of faxes.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Auto”.
“Auto”
Manual
(2) Numbers of RX Call Rings
Functions
• To set the number of call rings heard before automatic reception is activated.
Use
• When changing the number of call rings heard before automatic reception is activated
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “1x”.
1 to 20
* Setting range when the optional handset is mounted: 0 to 20 rings
21
6. Utility/Counter Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
B. Password Communication
(1) Communication Password
Functions
• To allow a fax to be received only when there is a match in the password that has previously been registered on the transmitter and receiver ends.
Use
• When using password reception
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “00”.
6.5.6
“00” (Disabled)
01 to 99 (Enabled)
Print Lists
A. Setting List
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
6.5.7
• To print information concerning the initial settings of the machine.
1. Touch the [Print Lists].
2. Touch the [Setting List].
3. The setting list is printed.
Report Settings
Adjustment / Setting
A. TX Report
Functions
• To set the mode of output of the report used for confirming results of transmission.
Use
• When changing the mode of output of the report used for confirming results of transmission
• Setting is made individually for a single destination and two or more destinations.
Setting/
Procedure
<Single Dest>
ON
“If TX Fails”
OFF
<Broadcasting>
ON
“If TX Fails”
OFF
B. Activity Report
Functions
• To select whether or not to print the activity report for every 50 transactions automatically.
Use
• When printing the activity report for every 50 transactions automatically.
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “ON”.
22
“ON”
OFF
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Document Management
A. TX Document
(1) TX Forwarding
Functions
• To set to forward received text to a destination that has been set by the administrator.
Use
• When forwarding received text to a destination that has been set by the administrator
Setting/
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
FK-503
6.5.8
6. Utility/Counter Mode
Touch the [Document Management].
Touch the [TX Document].
Touch the [TX Forwarding].
Specify the destination to which the received fax is to be forwarded and touch [Enter].
[One-Touch]: To specify the destination by the one-touch dial
[Search]: To search through one-touch dials
B. RX Document
(1) F-CODE
Functions
• To set to receive text for every F-CODE
Use
• When setting to receive text for every F-CODE
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [RX Document].
2. Touch the [F-CODE].
3. Select the specific key, in which the F-CODE is to be registered.
4. Touch [F-CODE] and make the necessary settings.
5. Touch [RX Doc. Settings], then select the desired processing type and touch [Enter].
* If [Forward] or [Print & Forward] is selected, set the forwarding destination.
Functions
• To set how text received for each line is processed, whether it is to be printed, forwarded, etc.
Use
• When printing, forwarding, or otherwise processing text received for each line.
Setting/
Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch the [RX Document].
Touch the [Port].
Select [G3-1] or [G3-2].
If [Yes] is selected for [Document Management], set how the received document is to
be handled.
5. Touch [RX Doc. Settings], then select the desired processing type and touch [Enter].
* If [Forward] or [Print & Forward] is selected, set the forwarding destination.
(3) All Other Documents
Functions
• To set how text received from a line other than the port is processed.
Use
• When setting how text received from a line other than the port is processed.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [RX Document].
2. Touch the [All Other Documents].
3. Touch [RX Doc. Settings], then select the desired processing type and touch [Enter].
* If [Forward] or [Print & Forward] is selected, set the forwarding destination.
23
Adjustment / Setting
(2) Port
6. Utility/Counter Mode
FK-503
6.6
Settings in the Repoerts
6.6.1
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
6.6.2
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
6.6.3
Functions
Adjustment / Setting
Use
Setting/
Procedure
24
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Program List
• To print the contents of programs stored in one-touch keys.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Utility/Counter Key.
Touch the [Repoerts].
Touch the [Program List].
A program list will be printed.
Bulletin List
• To print a list of text stored in the bulletin board.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Utility/Counter Key.
Touch the [Repoerts].
Touch the [Bulletin List].
A bulletin list will be printed.
Confidential List
• To print the contents of the private box.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the Utility/Counter Key.
Touch the [Repoerts].
Touch the [Confidential List].
A confidential list will be printed.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.1
Initial Mode
Initial Mode Function Setting Procedure
FK-503
7.
7. Initial Mode
1. Press the Warm Restart switch, and “●” appears at the center on the left end of the
screen.
2. Enter “3” from the 10-Key Pad.
3. Type the 8-digit service code and touch [Enter]. (Default value: 00000000)
NOTE
• When [END] is touched after a wrong service code has been entered, the Basic
screen reappears.
• At the fourth access after entries of three wrong access codes, [END] is not available on the screen. It is therefore necessary to turn OFF and ON the Main Power
Switch.
• If you forget the service code, it becomes necessary to replace the RAMS Board
with a new one. Take necessary steps not to forget the service code.
• The RAMS Board is not available as a replacement part. If it requires replacement,
contact Office Printing Support Division by way of CSES.
4. Select a function.
Exit
Total Clear
Touch Panel
Adjustment
To t a l C o u n t e r
Clear
Marketing Area
Image Data Clear
Clear FAX
Setting
Data/
Time Setting
Trouble Reset
4040F3E565DA
7.1.1
Exiting
• Touch [Exit].
7.2
Initial Mode Function Tree
NOTE
• Of the Initial mode functions, only those related to the fax machine will be
described in the following.
Initial Mode
Clear FAX Setting
4040F3E561DA
25
Adjustment / Setting
Initial
7. Initial Mode
Settings in the Initial Mode
7.3.1
Clear FAX Setting
Functions
• Clears the FAX-related settings.
Use
• Own Setting: To clear data relating to the local machine.
• Destination: To clear data relating to destinations, including the telephone directory and
one-touch dials.
• Activity: To clear activity report information.
• Soft Switch: To clear settings made with soft switches.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Clear FAX Setting].
2. Select the item, in which the settings are to be cleared, and touch [END]. (Two or more
items can be selected.)
3. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
Adjustment / Setting
FK-503
7.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
26
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.1
Maintenance Mode
Maintenance Mode Function Setting Procedure
FK-503
8.
8. Maintenance Mode
A.
1.
2.
3.
Procedure
Press the Utility/Counter key.
Touch [Check Detail].
Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 2
4. Touch [Maintenance Mode].
5. Type the 8-digit service code and touch [Enter]. (Default value: 00000000)
NOTE
• When [END] is touched after a wrong service code has been entered, the Basic
screen reappears.
• At the fourth access after entries of three wrong access codes, [END] is not available on the screen. It is therefore necessary to turn OFF and ON the Main Power
Switch.
• If you forget the service code, it becomes necessary to replace the RAMS Board
with a new one. Take necessary steps not to forget the service code.
• The RAMS Board is not available as a replacement part. If it requires replacement,
contact Office Printing Support Division by way of CSES.
Adjustment / Setting
6. The Maintenance Mode menu will appear.
4040F3E562DA
NOTE
• To change the service code, see “Service Security Mode.”
B. Exiting
• Touch the [Exit] key.
NOTE
• The Maintenance mode is not disclosed to users. After the job is completed, therefore, be sure to exit the mode by turning OFF and ON the Main Power Switch.
27
8. Maintenance Mode
FK-503
8.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance Mode function tree
NOTE
• Of the Maintenance mode functions, only those related to the fax machine will be
described in the following.
Maintenance Mode
Mem. contents
Memory Dump
File Display
File Dump
Soft Switch Set
Touch Panel Adjustment
Protocol Trace
Service Call Report
4040F3E563DA
8.3
Settings in the Maintenance Mode
8.3.1
Functions
Use
Adjustment / Setting
Setting/
Procedure
8.3.2
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
8.3.3
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
28
Mem. contents
• This displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its absolute
address which will be provided by our technical department.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
Touch the [Mem. contents].
Type the absolute address from the 10-Key Pad and [A] to [F] and touch [Enter].
Touch [Ç] or [È] to change the address to be displayed.
Touch [Enter] twice.
Memory Dump
• This outputs a report on the RAM data of MAIN-CPU by specifying its absolute address
which will be provided by our technical department.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
Touch the [Memory Dump].
Touch the [Address].
Type the absolute address from the 10-Key Pad and [A] to [F] and touch [Enter].
Touch the [Length].
Type the absolute address from the 10-Key Pad and [A] to [F] and touch [Enter].
Touch [Enter], and the memory dump sequence is started.
File Display
• This displays the RAM data of MAIN-CPU on the LCD by specifying its file name.
1. Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [File Display].
3. Type the file name from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and touch
[Enter].
4. Touch [Ç] or [È] to change the address to be displayed.
5. Touch the [Enter].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Use
Setting/
Procedure
8.3.5
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
8.3.6
• This outputs a report on the RAM data of MAIN-CPU by specifying its file name.
1. Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [File Dump].
3. Type the file name from the 10-Key Pad or the keyboard on the screen and touch
[Enter].
4. Touch [Ç] or [È] to change the address to be displayed.
5. Touch [Enter], and the file dump sequence is started.
Soft Switch Set
• This sets up the soft switches for maintenance.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
Touch the [Mode Select].
Enter the mode number (a 3-digit numeral) from the 10-Key Pad.
Touch the [Bit Select].
Align the cursor using [Å] or [Æ] and define the bit using 0 or 1 of the 10-Key Pad. (To
set using hexadecimal numbers, touch [HEX Selection] and enter the data using the
10-Key Pad and A to F keys.)
6. Touch [Enter] twice.
Touch Panel Adjustment
Functions
• To adjust the position of the Touch Panel.
Use
• When the Touch Panel is slow to respond when touched
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Touch Panel Adjustment].
3. Following the arrow, sequentially press four points (+) on the screen using a pen or
similar object.
NOTE
• Press the very center of each point.
• Use care not to allow the tip of the pen to damage the surface of the screen.
8.3.7
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
8.3.8
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
FK-503
Functions
File Dump
Adjustment / Setting
8.3.4
8. Maintenance Mode
Protocol Trace
• To produce an output of a protocol trace.
1. Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Protocol Trace].
Service Call Report
• To produce an output of a service call report.
1. Call the Maintenance Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Service Call Report].
29
9. Tech. Rep. Mode
FK-503
9.
9.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Tech. Rep. Mode
Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure
NOTE
• Ensure appropriate security for Service mode function setting procedures. They
should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service
jobs.
A.
1.
2.
3.
Procedure
Press the Utility/Counter key.
Touch [Check Detail].
Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
4. Enter the 8-digit service code and touch [END]. (Default value: 00000000)
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• When [END] is touched after a wrong service code has been entered, the Basic
screen reappears.
• At the fourth access after entries of three wrong access codes, [END] is not available on the screen. It is therefore necessary to turn OFF and ON the Main Power
Switch.
• If you forget the service code, it becomes necessary to replace the RAMS Board
with a new one. Take necessary steps not to forget the service code.
• The RAMS Board is not available as a replacement part. If it requires replacement,
contact Office Printing Support Division by way of CSES.
5. The Tech. Rep. Mode menu will appear.
4040F3E543DA
NOTE
• To change the service code, see “Service Security Mode.”
B. Exiting
• Touch the [Exit] key.
C. Changing the Setting Value in Service Mode Functions
• Use the +/- key to enter or change the setting value.
• Use the 10-Key Pad to enter the setting value. (To change the setting value, first press
the Clear key before making an entry.)
30
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9.2
9. Tech. Rep. Mode
Tech. Rep. Mode function tree
FK-503
NOTE
• Of the Tech. rep. mode functions, only those related to the fax machine will be
described in the following.
Tech. Rep. Mode
Tech. Rep. Choice
Country Set
System Input
Machine Configuration
Counter
Application Counter
Fax Connection Error
Function
F7-2
FAX Set
Service Call Set
Maintenance Date/Toner Type
Service Destination
TX Condition
Transmission Method
Service FAX Number
Contact Number
User System Code
Terminal TX
Soft Switch Settings
4040F3E564DA
9.3
Settings in the Tech. Rep. Choice
9.3.1
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
Country Set
• To set the default value for each country for communications-related choice functions.
• The function becomes available on the screen to choose only for the machine that is to
be marketed in Europe or Others and that is equipped with the optional fax function.
• Select the applicable country.
<For Europe>
GermanyFrance
U.K.
Swiss Belgium
Holland
DenmarkNorway
Sweden
Hungary Poland
<For Others>
South AfricaAustralia
ArgentinaKorea
other 2
Hong Kong
Taiwan
Italy
Spain
Finland
Austria
Portugal
Czech
Singapore
other 1
New ZealandMalaysia
31
Adjustment / Setting
Stamp
9. Tech. Rep. Mode
FK-503
9.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Settings in the System Input
9.4.1
Machine Configuration
Functions
• Displays the machine configuration status.
Use
• The machine configuration status is displayed as Yes or No.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch [System Input] and [Machine Configuration], in that order.
9.5
Settings in the Counter
9.5.1
Checking the counter reading
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Counter].
3. Touch [Check] and the specific counter key whose reading is to be checked.
9.5.2
1.
2.
3.
4.
Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
Touch the [Counter].
Touch the [Counter Reset].
Touch the counter keys to be cleared and then touch [OK].
9.5.3
Adjustment / Setting
Clearing readings of all counters at once
Clearing the reading of a specific counter
1. Call the Tech. Rep. Mode to the screen.
2. Touch the [Counter].
3. Touch the specific counter key to be cleared and press the Clear key.
If the reading of a wrong counter key has been cleared, press the Interrupt key to undo
the clearing operation.
9.5.4
Application Counter
Functions
• To display or clear the readings of application counters.
Use
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting/
Procedure
Checking the counter reading
☞ 32
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 32
32
Copy: Number of copies made
Printer: Number of printed pages produced via computer
List Print: Number of printed pages of lists
Fax Print: Number of printed pages received as fax and mail
Fax Transmission: Number of pages of fax transmitted
Mail Transmission: Number of pages transmitted by fax/scanner
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Fax Connection Error
Functions
• To display or clear the count of the number of errors occurred during fax transmission.
Use
• Transmission Error: Counts fax transmission errors
• Receive Error: To count fax reception errors
Setting/
Procedure
FK-503
9.5.5
9. Tech. Rep. Mode
Checking the counter reading
☞ 32
Clearing the counter reading (all and a specific one)
☞ 32
Settings in the Function
9.6.1
F7-2
Functions
• To automatically adjust the Original Size Detecting Sensor. (only for a FAX)
Use
• When the Original Size Detecting Sensor is replaced
• When an optional sensor is mounted
Setting/
Procedure
1. From the Tech. Rep. mode menu, touch [Function] and [F7-2], in that order.
2. Place fives sheets of A3 paper, one on top of another, on the Original Glass and lower
the Original Cover.
3. Press the Start key to let the machine start the adjustment procedure.
4. The adjustment procedure is automatically terminated as soon as the required adjustment has been made.
9.7
Settings in the FAX Set
9.7.1
Service Call Set
• When a set condition takes place, the status of the machine is automatically notified to
the call center.
A. Maintenance Date/Toner Type
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set the maintenance date and type of toner.
<Toner Type>
• The default setting is “14k”.
5k
“14k”
<Maintenance Date>
• Enter [Year], [Month], and [Day].
B. Service Destination
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set the telephone number and communication mode.
1. Touch [Service Destination] and enter the telephone number of address (up to 64 digits can be entered).
2. Touch [Change Comm. Mode] and select the communication mode.
[FAX]: G3-1, G3-2
[InternetFAX]: InternetFAX
[PC]: E-Mail
33
Adjustment / Setting
9.6
9. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
C. TX Condition
(1) Prints
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• Service call for exceeding specified number of papers.
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
(2) Toner Empty
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• Service call for empty toner.
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
(3) Drum Life
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• Service call for reaching life cycle of drum.
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
(4) Malfunction
Adjustment / Setting
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
• To set whether or not to make a service call when a machine failure occurs.
• The default setting is “ON”.
“ON”
OFF
D. Transmission Method
Functions
• To set the transmission method.
Use
• When changing the transmission method
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “Data”.
Report
“Data”
E-Mail
• Select [Report] for fax transmission, [Data] for data transmission, and [E-Mail] for e-mail
transmission.
E. Service FAX Number
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
34
• Enters the Fax number on a report when a notification to the call center fails.
1. Touch [Service FAX Number] and enter the telephone number.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Tech. Rep. Mode
F. Contact Number
Setting/
Procedure
• Enters the information call number on a report when a notification to the call center
fails.
FK-503
Functions
Use
1. Touch [Contact Number] and enter the telephone number.
G. User System Code
Functions
Use
Setting/
Procedure
9.7.2
Functions
• Memo screen, on which to record user system identification information
1. Touch the [Fwd].
2. Touch [User System Code] and then enter the code.
Terminal TX
Use
• You can receive data on the one touch dial or send the data stored in the system to the
call center.
Setting/
Procedure
1. Touch the [Terminal TX].
2. Set [Function ID Code] and [Extended ID Code] and touch [Execute].
Functions
Stamp
• Used to indicate when the TX marker option is installed.
Use
• When the TX marker option is mounted
Setting/
Procedure
• The default setting is “YES”.
“YES”
Adjustment / Setting
9.7.3
NO
35
10. Fax-related Adjustment Items
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
10. Fax-related Adjustment Items
10.1 CD/FD Zoom Ratio Correction (Fax)
• Factory adjustment items
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• This mode is for factory adjustment only and should NOT be used.
36
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
11. Soft Switch List
FK-503
11.1 Soft Switches Disclosed to Users (Screen Setting)
Utility
1/6
Mixed Original Detection (ON/OFF)
MODE 400 Bit 6
Language Selected for LCD
MODE 401 Bit 7 to 4
(Japanese/English/French/Spanish)
Measurement Unit Setting (Inch (Num. Value)/Inch (Fraction))
2/6
Default Setting Simplex/Duplex (1 2, 2 2, 1 1)
Auto Paper/Auto Zoom (Auto Paper Select/Auto Zoom/Manual)
Priority Tray (1st Cassette)
Special Paper Setting
(Normal/1-Sided Only/Recycled/Special)
Zoom Ratio for Combine Booklets (ON/OFF)
MODE 402 Bit 7 to 5
MODE 402 Bit 4, 3
MODE 408 Bit 7 to 4
3/6
Low Power Mode (1 to 240 Minutes)
Sleep Mode (1 to 240 Minutes)
LCD Back-Light OFF (1 to 240 Minutes)
Auto Reset (No Reset/30 Sec./1 to 240 Minutes)
Auto Reset when Account is Changed (ON/OFF)
MODE 405 Bit
MODE 406 Bit
MODE 407 Bit
MODE 404 Bit
MODE 403 Bit
4/6
13
4-in-1 Copy Order ( 12
34 / 24 )
Default Quality/Density Modes (Auto/Manual)
(Text/Photo/Text+Photo/Dot Matrix)
Priority Copy Density Levels (Lighter/Normal/Darker)
Print Density (-2/-1/0/1/2)
Output Priority (Non-Sort/Sort/Group)
(Corner Staple/2 Staples/Hole Punch are options)
MODE 409 Bit 7, 6
MODE 409 Bit 5
MODE 409 Bit 4 to 1
MODE 410 Bit 7, 6, 3 to 0
MODE 411 Bi t 7, 2 to 0
MODE 412 Bit 7 to 4, 2 to 0
5/6
Sort/Non-Sort Auto Change (ON/OFF)
MODE 412 Bit 3
Output Tray Settings (Optional)
Reception Print: (FAX/Network) MODE 413 Bit 7 to 4, 2 to 0
Copier/Printer: (PC print/Copy) MODE 419 Bit 7 to 0
User’s Choice
Auto Paper Select for Small Original (Copy/Prohibit Copy)
Dehumidify Scanner
Crease/Center Staple (-10 to 0 to +10) (Optional)
6/6
MODE 403 Bit 7
7 to 0
7 to 0
7 to 0
7 to 0
0
MODE 424 Bit 3
Adjustment / Setting
User Setting
Priority Screen
Default Device Priority (Copy/FAX/Scanner/Auto)
MODE 402 Bit 1, 0
Priority FAX Screen
MODE 018 Bit 5, 4
(One-Touch/Search/10-key Dialing/Index)
MODE 402 Bit 2
Default Device (Copy/Printer)
FAX Input
One-Touch
Index
FAX Program
Domain Name
Bultn. Board
Conf. Box
Copy Program
Maintenance
Confirmation Beep (0 to 5: 3)
Alarm Beep (0 to 5: 3)
Line Monitor Sound (0 to 5: 3)
Job Complete Beep (0 to 5: 3)
Panel Cleaning
Dehumidify
Toner Replenisher
Memory Lock RX (Lock off/Lock on/Temp. Print)
POP3 RX
MODE 415 Bi t 7 to 5
MODE 415 Bi t 4 to 2
MODE 416 Bi t 7 to 5
MODE 038 Bi t 1
Continued to next page
37
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
Continued from previous page
Admin. Management
Admin.1
Initial Settings
Date/Time Set
Time Date (Month/Day/Year/Hour/Minute)
Time Zone (GMT-12:00 to +12:00:-5:00)
D. S. T. (Auto/OFF)
MODE 354 Bit 7 to 2
MODE 197 Bit 7, 6
Language (Com.)
MODE 434 Bit 7 to 2
(Japanese/English/French/Spanish)
Self-telephone # information 1 (Self telephone MODE 006 Bit 7 to 4
#, PSTN/Ext Line Switch, Line Type)
Self-telephone # information 2 (Self telephone MODE 011 Bit 7 to 4
number, PSTN/Ext Line Switch, Line Type)
TSI Registration
Self-ID
Admin. Set
(Password entry
required)
Counter
Administrator Number
Activity Report E-mail TX
Disable Sleep Mode (Yes, No)
Total
Total
Large Size Total
2-Sided Total
Original Total
Print Total
Device
Adjustment / Setting
FAX Print
Copy Print
Report Print
FAX TX
PC Print
E-mail TX
FAX Total
Total
Large Size Scan
Print Total
Large Size Print
TX Total
RX Total
Copy Total
Total
Large Size
PC Printer Total
Total
Large Size
Account/User Auth.
General Setting
User Authentication
(ON (External Server)/ON (MFP)/OFF)
Account Track ON/OFF (ON, OFF)
Allow Print Without Authentication
(ON, OFF)
Continued to next page
38
Continued to next page
MODE 416 Bit 0
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Admin. Management
FK-503
Continued from previous page
Admin.1
Account/User Auth.
Account Data
All Counter Clear
Account #
Account Name
Password
Max. Print Page
User Auth. Setting
User Registration
User Information
User Number
User Name
User Password
Network Info.
‘From’ E-mail Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
SMTP AUTH User Name
SMTP AUTH Password
TX Settings
Adjustment / Setting
General Settings (Active Directory/NTLM/NDS)
Domain Name
Tree Name
Context Name
Quality/Mode
Priority Quality (Standard/Fine/Super Fine/
Text+Photo/GSR/Super GSR)
MODE 001 Bi t 7 to 4
Priority Contrast
MODE 001 Bi t 3 to 1
(Lighter - Normal - Darker)
Communication Mode
(FAX(G3-1/G3-2)/InternetFAX (E-mail/
IP-TX/IP Relay)/PC (E-mail/Scanner))
MODE 009 Bi t 7 to 5
Com. Menu
TX (Memory TX/Real-Time)
TSI
MODE 000 Bi t 1
TSI Position
(On The Doc./Out of Doc./OFF)
TSI Selection (1 to 8)
Rotation TX (ON/OFF)
2-Sided TX (ON/OFF)
(Document Margin: Standard Book/
Top Margin/Auto)
Continued to next page
MODE 000 Bit 5, 4
MODE 017 Bit 3 to 0
MODE 030 Bi t 7
MODE 031 Bi t 5, 4
Continued to next page
39
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
Continued from previous page
Admin. Management
Admin.1
RX Settings
Memory Lock
MODE 038 Bit 1, 0
Memory Lock On/Off
(Start Time/Stop Time/Day)
Memory Lock Password
Delete Conf. Box
FAX Setting
RX Functions
Reception Mode (Auto/Manual)
No. of RX Call Rings (1 to 20: 1)
MODE 019 Bit 7 to 3
Password Com.
Com. Password (00 to 99)
MODE 000 Bit 2
Rep. Print
Setting List
Report Settings
TX Report
(Single destination: ON/If TX Fail/OFF)
(Multiple destinations: ON/If TX Fail/OFF)
MODE 002 Bit 6, 5
Activity Report (ON/OFF)
MODE 002 Bit 7
Doc Manage.
TX Document
TX Forwarding (One-touch, Search)
RX Document
Adjustment / Setting
F-CODE (1 to 10)
F-CODE
F-CODE
F-CODE Password
Remote Input Check (ON/OFF)
RX Doc. Settings
(Print/Forward/Prt&Forward)
Forwarding Dest.
Port (G3-1/G3-2/Network)
YES/NO
RX Doc. Settings
(Print/Forward/Prt&Forward)
Forwarding Dest.
Public document
RX Doc. Settings
(Print/Forward/Prt&Forward)
Forwarding Dest.
Continued to next page
40
Continued to next page
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Admin. Management
FK-503
Continued from previous page
Admin.2
Network Set
Basic Setting
DHCP (Auto-Obtain/IP Input)
MODE 355 Bit 4
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Self-domain Name
Network Board Set
MODE 355 Bit 7, 6
Network Board Speed
(Auto/100M/10M)
MODE 355 Bit 5
Duplex (Half Duplex/Full Duplex)
DNS Settings (Yes/No)
Host Name
Domain Name
DNS Server Address
MODE 361 Bit 0
Set when you
set the DNS
settings as Yes.
Equipment Name
SMTP Setting
SMTP Server Address
E-mail Address
SMTP AUTH User Name
SMTP AUTH Password
POP3 Settings
Adjustment / Setting
POP3 Server Address
POP3 User Name
POP3 Password
Auto-RX Check
(Check OFF/1 to 99 Minutes)
Mail/Scan Setting
E-mail Mode
TX Size (Max.) (Letter/Legal/11x17)
TX Quality (Max.)
(200dpi/400dpi/600dpi)
Coding Method (MH/MR/MMR)
MODE 350 Bit 5, 4
MODE 350 Bit 3, 2
MODE 360 Bit 6 to 4
Scan Mode
Continued to next page
File Format (TIFF/PDF)
MODE 360 Bit 1, 0
MODE 360 Bit 3, 2
Coding Method (MH/MMR)
MODE 359 Bit 6 to 4
Continued to next page
41
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
Continued from previous page
Admin. Management
Admin.2
Network Set
Scanner Settings
Activity Report (ON/OFF)
MODE 352 Bit 7
RX Doc. Header Print (ON/OFF)
MODE 353 Bit 6
E-mail Header Text
(Fixed Text/Custom Text/OFF)
Gateway TX (Yes/No)
MODE 353 Bi t 7, 4
MODE 351 Bit 7
Subject Registration (1 to 4)
Divide Settings
Page Division (ON/OFF)
Size Division (ON/OFF)
MODE 371 Bit 0
MODE 371 Bit 1
Divide Size (16 to 2000KB: 500KB)
LDAP Settings
LDAP Search (Yes/No)
LDAP Server Setting
MODE 466 Bit 6
MODE 466 Bi t 5 to 3
Search Default Setting
Frame Type Set
(Auto/Ethernet-II/802.2/802.3/SNAP)
MODE 467 Bi t 7 to 5
IP Relay Settings
IP Relay STA Reg.
IP Relay STA Set
Adjustment / Setting
Relay Result Port (1 to 65535: 49152)
Continued to next page
42
Print Set
Soft SW Set
Timeout (10 to 1000: 300 Sec.)
Ping
SMTP Server Address
POP3 Server Address
Ping IP Address
MODE 455 Bi t 7 to 0
MODE 456 Bi t 1, 0
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Reports
TX Act. Report
RX Act. Report
One-Touch List
FAX Program List
Bulletin Board List
Confidential List
Printer Settings
MFP Set
Default Set
FK-503
Continued from previous page
Proof Print Hold Time
(10 Minutes/20 Minutes/30 Minutes)
Overwrite A4
Letter (ON/OFF)
Document Hold Time (0 to 30 Minutes: 5 Minutes)
PostScript Error Report (ON, OFF)
MODE 031 Bi t 2 to 1
MODE 452 Bi t 7
MODE 432 Bi t 7 to 0
MODE 453 Bi t 7
Basic
Tray (Auto Paper Select/1 to 4)
MODE 441 Bi t 7 to 4
Paper Size
Original Direction ( A
MODE 440 Bi t 5 to 1
A )
MODE 441 Bi t 3 to 2
Print Method (Simplex/2-Sided Print)
MODE 441 Bi t 1 to 0
Sets (1 to 999 Sets)
MODE 442 Bi t 7 to 0
MODE 443 Bi t 1 to 0
Font
Font # (0 to 80)
MODE 444 Bi t 7 to 1
Symbol Set (0 to 35: 19)
MODE 445 Bi t
MODE 446 Bi t
MODE 447 Bi t
MODE 448 Bi t
MODE 449 Bi t
MODE 450 Bi t
MODE 451 Bi t
MODE 452 Bi t
(Bit Map Font : 0.44 to 99.00 : 10.00 Pitch)
CR/LF Mapping
(No Reset, Mode 1, Mode 2, Mode 3)
PDL Set (Auto Set, PCL, PostScript)
Test Print
7 to 2
7 to 0
0
7 to 0
3 to 0
7 to 0
5 to 0
5, 4
Adjustment / Setting
Number Lines (5 to 128: 60)
Font Size
(Scalable Font: 4.00 to 999.75 : 12.00 Point)
MODE 440 Bi t 7, 6
Mode Check
PCL Demo Page
PS Font List
PCL Font List
43
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
11.2 List of Defaults
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
44
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
Remark
000
30
30
TX Marker, TSI, Password, Memory TX *
001
14
14
FAX quality, Density, Dest. Insert *
002
A8
A8
Report *
003
63
63
Line monitor, Report of broadcast transmissions *
004
16
16
Memory time *
005
10
20
# of redialing *
006
32
32
DP speed, PB switch, PSTN Port auto selection
007
B9
B5
Print range *
008
00
00
Select print paper *
009
1A
1A
Communication mode *
010
20
20
(Undefined)
011
31
31
DP speed, PB switch *
012
40
40
# key on one-touch screen
013
35
35
Auto-mode screen, Operation when INBOX forward failed
014
01
01
Redialing interval *
015
00
00
(Undefined)
016
40
40
RX Time Stamp, Extra telephone
017
C0
C0
Select initial value of TSI *
018
01
01
Destination displaying screen *
019
08
08
Ringer detection counts (PSTN 1) *
020
40
40
Display report
021
08
08
Display symbol rate
022
02
02
FAX memory nearly full capacity
023
F8
F8
Set merge for report image, E-mail error retransmission
024
81
81
Display forward function button, Display caller ID, Receiving by other users
025
7F
7F
Various service calls
026
DE
DE
Service call, Remote maintenance
027
24
24
Display ID, Display button, Secured comm., F code
028
63
63
Remote print protocol, # of remote multi-copies
029
00
00
(Undefined)
030
B1
B0
Rotation TX, Rotate print, 2in1, print paper selection restriction *
031
A0
A0
Margins for multi-sheet report image, Margins for output format of report
image *
032
35
21
FAX photo/txt mixed mode
033
14
14
Draft printing mode and level *
034
02
02
Cut print paper leading edge, Overlapped printing
035
03
03
RX by memory
036
01
01
Receiving (remote copy) printing order *
037
F8
F8
Select FAX print paper cassette
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
MODE
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
038
0A
0A
039
00
00
(Undefined)
040
FA
FA
2-dim coding, T.6 coding, JBIG, V34JBIG
FK-503
Remark
Turn on print lamp for out-of print paper, Print stop/start *
40
40
ECM mode
042
3F
3F
Redialing interval *
043
80
80
# of resending doc., Redialing non-answered call
044
80
80
RTN sending error, Action against abnormal overseas communications, T4
timer
045
D4
D4
(Undefined)
046
00
00
(Undefined)
V34 fallback tolerance
047
88
88
048
C6
C6
Set up MODEM standard
049
0D
0D
Transmission speed upper limit (TX)
050
0D
0D
Transmission speed upper limit (RX)
051
20
20
Declare RX print paper size
(Undefined)
052
00
00
053
C8
C8
Sender’s character code size
054
7A
7A
History control of V.34 auto dialing, Demodulation method
(Undefined)
055
02
02
056
0C
0C
F code function
057
19
19
Time that ANSam TX starts after line is blocked
058
|
076
3C
|
14
3C
|
14
(Undefined)
077
60
60
Hook monitoring counts
078
00
00
(Undefined)
079
02
02
(Undefined)
080
23
6E
Estimated time of line connection (PSTN1)
081
00
00
(Undefined)
082
04
24
Detect busy tone, Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity) (PSTN1)
083
50
50
Hook monitoring cycle, Hook detection voltage (PSTN1)
084
14
28
PB sending lever (PSTN1)
085
90
C0
TX level (PSTN1)
086
40
40
RX attenuator (PSTN1)
087
90
90
Detect continuous ringer, Ringer detection frequency (PSTN1)
088
C0
C0
Process detection time out of 2nd dial tone, 1300 Hz detection (PSTN1)
089
00
00
TX method, Prefix # (PSTN1) *
090
00
00
(Undefined)
091
00
00
(Undefined)
092
70
70
Sending echo protection tone, switch carrier frequency (PSTN1)
093
48
40
CED, Receive command echo (PSTN1)
Adjustment / Setting
041
45
Adjustment / Setting
FK-503
11. Soft Switch List
46
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
094
0C
0C
AGC lock (PSTN1)
095
20
20
Digital TX/RX cable equalizer (PSTN1)
096
14
14
CI signal sending time (PSTN1)
097
14
14
TCF/NTCF sending level down, V.34 symbol rate (PSTN1)
Remark
098
46
46
CM signal sending start time, EQM threshold value (PSTN1)
099
88
88
Symbol speed threshold value (PSTN1)
110
23
23
Estimated time of line connection (PSTN2)
111
00
00
(Undefined)
112
28
28
Detect busy tone, Detect line disconnection (inverted polarity) (PSTN2)
113
59
59
(Undefined)
114
14
1C
PB sending lever (PSTN2)
115
90
90
TX level (PSTN2)
116
40
40
RX attenuator (PSTN2)
117
90
90
Detect continuous ringer, Ringer detection frequency (PSTN2)
118
C0
C0
Process detection time out of 2nd dial tone, 1300 Hz detection (PSTN2)
119
00
00
TX method, Prefix # (PSTN2) *
120
00
00
(Undefined)
121
00
00
(Undefined)
122
70
70
Sending echo protection tone, switch carrier frequency (PSTN2)
123
48
48
CED, Receive command echo (PSTN2)
124
0C
0C
AGC lock (PSTN2)
125
20
20
Digital TX/RX cable equalizer (PSTN2)
126
14
14
CI signal sending time (PSTN2)
127
14
14
TCF/NTCF sending level down, V33/V29 sending level down, V.34 symbol
rate (PSTN2)
128
46
46
CM signal sending start time, EQM threshold value (PSTN2)
129
88
88
Symbol speed threshold value (PSTN1)
130
|
189
00
|
00
00
|
00
(Undefined)
190
00
00
Restrict SF/SSF comm.
191
00
00
(Undefined)
192
C0
C0
Order of displaying year to date
193
|
196
33
|
32
33
|
32
(Undefined)
197
C0
C1
Daylight saving time
198
D0
D0
TX forwarding *
199
|
211
00
|
02
00
|
02
(Undefined)
212
40
00
DP make rate (PSTN1)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
MODE
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
213
|
231
42
|
05
42
|
02
(Undefined)
232
40
00
DP make rate (PSTN2)
233
|
248
42
|
51
42
|
51
(Undefined)
249
08
08
Ringer detection counts (PSTN2)
250
|
287
00
|
FF
00
|
FF
(Undefined)
288
FF
FF
Insert dummy data before PIX
289
|
299
FF
|
00
FF
|
00
(Undefined)
300
00
00
REV soft switch for maintenance
301
00
00
REV soft switch for maintenance
302
00
00
REV soft switch for maintenance
303
00
00
REV soft switch for maintenance
304
00
00
REV soft switch for maintenance
305
00
00
REV soft switch for maintenance
306
|
309
00
|
00
00
|
00
(Undefined)
310
00
00
Increase sound level *
311
00
00
Invert screen *
312
03
03
Key repeat start time *
313
01
01
Key repeat interval *
314
03
03
Display reservation completion screen *
315
4C
4C
Buzzer
316
|
319
00
|
00
00
|
00
(Undefined)
320
F0
F0
Cassette-specified printing (G3-1)
321
F0
F0
Cassette-specified printing (G3-2)
322
F0
F0
Cassette-specified printing (Network)
323
F0
F0
Cassette-specified printing (Reports)
324
|
349
00
|
00
00
|
00
(Undefined)
350
A8
A8
Network, Internet fax capability of receiver *
351
18
18
Network, Gateway transmission *
352
D0
D0
Network, Notification of result *
353
88
80
Network, Text insertion, Header printing
Adjustment / Setting
FK-503
Remark
47
Adjustment / Setting
FK-503
11. Soft Switch List
48
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
354
38
60
355
20
20
Network, Switch 10M/100M, Switch Full-duplex/Half-duplex
356
40
40
Network, SMTP transmission timeout *
Remark
Network, Time zone setting
357
40
40
Network, SMTP receive timeout *
358
20
20
Network, POP3 receiving timeout *
359
00
00
Network, # of E-mail TX re-trials
360
80
80
Network, Coding method *
361
78
78
DNS function *
362
80
80
(Undefined)
363
20
20
Network, Image quality of text document
364
00
00
(Undefined)
365
04
04
Network, FTP timeout
366
08
08
Network, Network maintenance window display *
367
20
20
Network, Time of DNS inquiry timeout *
368
C2
C2
Network, Report CVS output *
369
00
00
Network, PING timeout
370
FF
FF
Network, Additional # of E-mail TX re-trials
371
40
40
Network, Interval of retrials to be set for additional # of E-mail TX re-trials *
372
0F
0F
Network, Transmission interval of size-divided E-mail file data *
373
08
08
Network, Full mode function *
374
40
40
Network, NOTIFY setting
375
00
00
(Undefined)
376
00
00
(Undefined)
377
00
00
(Undefined)
378
00
00
(Undefined)
379
10
10
Edit data when forwarding received documents
380
00
00
(N/W) APOP authentication, SMTP authentication *
381
80
80
(N/W) IP Relay function *
382
40
40
(N/W) IP Relay result timeout processing, default *
383
|
399
00
|
C0
00
|
C0
(Undefined)
400
01
01
Copy, Set up memory recall, Priority doc. mixed mode, Language code *
401
00
00
(Undefined)
402
01
01
Priority doc. mode, Priority copy mode, Automatic function priority mode,
Priority application *
403
01
01
Draft print zoom ratio, Auto-reset by user *
404
01
01
Auto-reset time *
405
0F
0F
Pre-heat time *
406
0F
0F
Auto-Power source off time *
407
01
01
LCD back light (Off time) *
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
MODE
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
408
00
00
409
08
08
4-in-1 print Order, Density Priority, Original Image Type *
410
54
54
AE density level, Priority manual density level *
411
00
00
Sign bit, Adjust print density *
412
08
08
Priority Sort Mode, Priority Stapling Mode, Priority Punch Mode, Intelligent
Sorting,
# of holes to punch *
FK-503
Remark
413
04
04
Specify output bin *
414
A0
A0
Reserve memory copy
415
6C
6C
Beep Volume, Alarm Volume *
416
60
60
Set sound vol. (monitor), Orientation change, No auto-Power source off *
417
63
63
Set max # of copies *
418
58
58
Imaging unit life stop, near life stop
419
40
40
Specify output bin *
420
00
00
Auto panel reset confirmation time *
421
21
42
(Undefined)
422
08
08
Total Counter, Size Counter, Copy Kit Counter
423
4E
4C
Copy, key counter, vendor mode, Doc. size OP *
424
18
18
Metric/inch mix, Copy mode, Small doc. *
425
00
00
Copy, Adjust quality mode
426
50
00
Movement finisher bin *
427
00
00
(Undefined)
428
00
00
(Undefined)
429
00
04
Copy, Auto reset of panel for ADF *
430
00
00
(Undefined)
431
00
00
(Undefined)
432
05
05
PC printer, Over-memory wait time *
433
04
04
Specify language code (Display-use) *
434
04
04
Specify language code (Machine-use) *
435
04
04
Specify language code (Network-use) *
440
12
04
PC printer, PDL set, paper size *
441
80
80
PC printer, paper tray, paper orientation, print method *
442
01
01
PC printer, # of copies (Scalable) (Least significant 8 bits) *
443
00
00
PC printer, # of copies (Scalable) (Most significant 2 bits) *
444
00
00
PC printer, font # *
445
74
4C
PC printer, symbol set *
446
3C
40
PC printer, # of lines *
447
00
00
PC printer, Unit of font size
448
30
30
PC printer, Font size (Scalable) (Least significant 8 bits) *
449
00
00
PC printer, Font size (Scalable) (Most significant 8 bits) *
450
E8
E8
PC printer, Font size (Bitmap) (Least significant 8 bits) *
Adjustment / Setting
Default feeder (Print paper) *
49
Adjustment / Setting
FK-503
11. Soft Switch List
50
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
HEX
(For
U.S.)
HEX
(For
Europe)
451
03
03
452
00
00
PC printer, Switch A4/letter, Map CR/LF *
453
00
00
Set PostScript error print *
455
2C
2C
PC printer, Timeout set (Least significant 8 bits) *
456
01
01
PC printer, Timeout set (Least significant 2 bits)
457
|
463
00
|
00
00
|
00
(Undefined)
464
8C
8C
PC printer, RAW port number set (Least significant 8 bits)
465
23
23
PC printer, RAW port number set (Most significant 8 bits)
466
00
00
Set LDAP, SSL/TLS with HTTP
PC printer, frame type set *
Remark
PC printer, Font size (Bitmap) (Most significant 6 bits) *
467
00
00
468
0F
0F
(Undefined)
469
00
00
(Undefined)
470
00
00
Set export extension, simple format, IT Series Agent *
471
00
00
Set user’s list screen display, default *
472
00
00
(Undefined)
473
00
00
Set priority Job List screen *
474
00
00
(Undefined)
475
00
00
(Undefined)
476
00
00
(Undefined)
477
00
00
Set fax registration restriction, destination display *
478
|
511
00
|
00
00
|
00
(Undefined)
512
80
80
Detect dial tone (PSTN1)
768
0D
0D
DCS-TCF interval in V.17 and V.27tar (PSTN1)
769
09
09
DCS-TCF interval in V.29 (PSTN1)
770
22
C8
CFR-PIX interval (PSTN1)
771
23
23
T1 timer for auto-TX (PSTN1)
772
23
23
T1 timer for auto-RX (PSTN1)
773
23
23
T1 timer for manual TX (PSTN1)
774
23
23
T1 timer for manual RX (PSTN1)
775
23
23
T1 timer for auto-TX of polling (PSTN1)
776
23
23
T1 timer for manual TX of polling (PSTN1)
777
07
08
PIX-Post command interval (PSTN1)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
NOTE
• If no bit settings are given in the soft switch list that follows, the factory settings
for those particular bits are fixed and should never be changed.
FK-503
11.3 List of Soft Switches
: Default settings of U.S.
: Default settings of Europe
: Default settings are common
000
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Bit
Feature
7
Specifies whether TX
markers are return to ON
or OFF after completing
operations. <*>
OFF
Yes
6
Select position of TX
markers. <*>
Top &
bottom
of doc.
bottom of
doc.
5
Specifies whether printNo
ing TSI on transmitted
document is returned to
ON or OFF after completing operations. *
Yes
4
Select position of TSI. *
Outside
doc.
Outside
doc.
3
Specifies whether confirming communication
password at TX is
returned to ON or OFF
after completing operations. <*>
No
Yes
2
Confirm communication
password at RX. <*>
No
Yes
1
Specifies which TX
Memory- Nonmethod is returned to ON, stored
stored
memory-stored TX or
nonstorage TX, after completing operations. *
0
1
HEX:30
Description
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Memory-stored TX
includes quick
memory TX.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
51
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
001
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
Specify which image qual- Bit 7-4:
ity is returned to be
assigned after completing
operations. *
4
3
2
Adjustment / Setting
1
0
Specify which density is
returned to be assigned
after FAX communication. *
Specify whether to insert
a destination name on
document to send. <*>
HEX:14
Bit 3-1:
No
Description
1
0000
Not available
0001
Standard
0010
Fine
0011
Not available
0100
Superfine
0101
GSR
0110
Not available
0111
Super GSR
1000
Text + photo
Others
Not available
000
Much lighter
001
Lighter
010
Normal
011
Darker
100
Much darker
Others
Not available
Yes
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
52
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
002
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
0
Description
1
7
Print communication
activity report automatically for every 50 activities. *
6
Select when a result
Bit 6-5:
report should be printed. *
5
HEX:A8
Logic
Feature
No
Yes
“No” means manual print.
00
No print
Specifies result reports
for TX, incomplete TX,
Print for
incomplete TX or broadcasting TX.
01
10
Always print
11
Not available
3
Print memory clear report. No
Yes
2
Log management of
broadcast transmissions.
<*>
Individual
All
together
FK-503
MODE
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
003
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
0
Result report of broadcast Bit 7to 6:
transmissions *
Monitor line. (PSTN1)
HEX:63
Logic
Feature
No
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Description
1
00
No print
01
Output for
incomplete TX
10
Always print
11
Not available
Yes
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
53
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
004
Bit
3
2
1
Adjustment / Setting
0
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 0
HEX:16
Logic
0
Selects holding time of
Bit 3-0:
incompleted TX document
in memory. <*>
Description
1
0000
IC memory device
Delete file from memory immediately (No
redialing function.
0001
10 min
0010
20 min
0011
30 min
0100
40 min
0101
50 min
0110
1 hr
0111
2 hr
1000
4 hr
1001
8 hr
1010
12 hr
1011
24 hr
1100
72 hr
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
54
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Bit
7
6
5
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Select number of redialing Bit 7-4:
1.
(Number of auto redialing
at 1st stage) *
4
3
2
1
0
HEX:10
Logic
0
Select number of redialing Bit 3-0:
2.
(Number of auto redialing
at the 2nd stage) *
FK-503
005
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Description
1
0000
0
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
1010
10
1011
11
1100
12
1101
13
1110
14
1111
15
0000
0
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
1010
10
1011
11
1100
12
1101
13
1110
14
1111
15
Specifies the number of redialing with the interval specified
by “Select redialing interval 1
(MODE 042 Bit 7-4).”
Once redialing set by “Select
number of redialing 1 (MODE
005 Bit 7-4)”, the system redials the number of times specified by this soft switch.
Redialing interval follows
“Select redialing interval 2
(MODE 042 Bit 3-0)” at the first
time and then follows “Select
redialing interval 1 (MODE 042
Bit 7-4)” from the second time.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
• If the first stage has been set [0000], the system proceeds to the second stage
after 10 minutes without carrying out the first stage.
• If the first and the second stages have been set [0000], the auto redialing process
will not be is carried out.
55
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
006
Bit
7
Adjustment / Setting
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0
HEX:32
Logic
Feature
0
Select dial line speed (DP Bit 7-6:
speed). (PSTN1) *
00
10 pps
01
20 pps
10
16 pps
11
Not available
DP : pulse
PB : tone
5
Select a line type (tone or DP
pulse) for calling (Switch
PB/DP). (PSTN1) *
PB
4
Select standard phone
Extenline connected with the
sion consystem (Extension / Exter- nection
nal line connection).
(PSTN1) *
External
line connection
1
Select PSTN port automatically:
Specify how to dial standard phone lines. <**>
Yes
No
Description
1
This is valid only when
“Switch PB/DP (MODE
006 Bit5)” sets DP.
16 pps is unavailable to
users.
• When the system has 2 PSTN lines
and one of them is used, you can use
the other line by selecting “Yes.”
If you have only 1 PSTN line or wish to
use 2 lines for the extension and the
external lines separately, select “No.”
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
The feature with [**] (Bit 1) is available only in a system with a multi-port option.
• For PSTN2, see mode 011.
56
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Bit
7
6
5
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 1
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 1
HEX:B9 (For U.S.)
HEX:B5 (For Europe)
Logic
0
Bit 7-5:
Select upper limit of cut-off
length after printing:
When a received document
is longer than the print paper
and if the excess length is
shorter than that specified
here, it is cut off.
If it is longer than that value
specified with these bits, it is
split into multiple pages. This
feature is enabled when the
following 2 conditions are
satisfied:
• When printing a received
document
• When bit 1 of this mode is
1 <*>
Description
1
000
0 mm
001
8 mm
010
12 mm
011
14 mm
100
18 mm
101
20 mm
110
24 mm
111
Not
available
Bit 4-2:
Select upper limit of reduction ratio of received document:
When a received document
is longer that the print paper,
it will be reduced to fit the
paper with the upper limit
specified with these bits. This
feature is enabled when the
following 2 conditions are
satisfied:
• When printing a received
document
• When bit 1 of this mode is
0
Example: The reduction is
100 to 90% when “90%” is
specified. <*>
000
100 %
001
95 %
010
90 %
011
85 %
1
0
4
3
2
FK-503
007
Factory setting bit
Bit:
100
80 %
101
65 %
Reduction will not be
done if a received document is still longer
than the paper for a
specified reduction.
110
60 %
111
Not
available
Select cut off/reduction of
Reducreceived document:
tion
This bit specifies cutting off
or reducing a received document that is longer than the
print paper.
(This feature is enabled when
printing a received document.) <*>
Cut off
This bit determines that the received
document will be cut off with “Select
upper limit of cut off length after printing (MODE 007 Bit 7 to 5)” or
reduced with “Select upper limit of
reduction ratio of received document
(MODE 007 Bit 4 to 2).”
Printing specification of
received document.
All
pages.
First
page.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
57
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
008
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
7
Where to detect print
From
papers.
print
(Valid only when printing a paper
received document) <*>
6
Select size of print paper Bit 6-3:
for received document.
(Valid only when printing a
received document) <*>
5
4
3
1
Description
From
cassette
“From print paper” detects print papers
from actual print papers while “From
cassette” indicates print papers with a
cassette size or the last information on
print papers regardless of actual print
papers.
0000
Std method 1 “Std method” determines
Std method 2 an appropriate print
paper for the length and
Std method 3 the width of a print
Std method 4 image.
Method 1: Same width
No wider
and no reduction.
width 1
Method 2: Same width
No wider
and minimum margin.
width 2
Method 3: No reduction
No wider
without considering
width 3
width of paper.
Method 4: Minimum
No wider
margin without considerwidth 4
ing width of paper.
Same width
“No wider width” will not
only
take printer paper wider
Not available than the print image.
No Wider
Width 1: Same width
and no reduction.
Width 2: Same width
and minimum margin.
Width 3: No reduction
without considering
width of paper.
Width 4: Minimum margin without considering
width of paper.
“Same width only”
selects paper with the
same width as the print
image.
Note.
• Margin means the
non-printed area.
• Methods 2 to 4 are
unavailable to users.
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
Adjustment / Setting
HEX:00
Others
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
58
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
Bit
Feature
7
Select default display of
communication mode:
Specifies what to display
at first as communication
mode. *
6
5
3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0
HEX:1A
Logic
0
Bit 7-5:
FK-503
009
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Description
1
000
G3-1
010
PC Scanner
011
G3-2
100
Mail (I-FAX)
101
Scan to
E-mail
110
IP Address
FAX
111
IP Relay
Others
Not available
Returns “Communication mode” to its default
after each operation.
This soft switch is
unavailable in some systems:
This soft switch is
unavailable in some systems:
• With single port
(including pseudomulti port)
G3 type: all are
unavailable
• With multi port
PSTN+PSTN:
G3-1, G3-2 available
• “Mail” can be used
when the FAX is
equipped with Network Application
Option.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. This applies only to systems with multi
port. *: Screen setting
59
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
011
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Select dial line speed (DP Bit 7-6:
speed). (PSTN2) *
00
10 pps
01
20pps
10
16 pps
11
Not available
• DP : pulse
• PB : tone
5
Select a line type (tone or DP
pulse) for calling. (Switch
PB/DP). (PSTN2) *
PB
4
Select standard phone
Extenline connected with the
sion consystem (Extension / Exter- nection
nal line connection).
(PSTN2) *
External
line connection
1
Display illustrations.
Bit 1-0:
0
Adjustment / Setting
HEX:31
• This is valid only when
“Switch PB/DP
(MODE 011 Bit5)”
sets DP.
• 16 pps is unavailable
to users.
00
Not display
01
Display (Animation)
10
Display (Still picture)
11
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. This applies only to system with multiport option. *: Screen setting
MODE
012
Bit
60
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
6
Select function of # key on Full dialone-touch screen.
ing number
0
Accumulated sheets:
Change the number of
accumulated sheets.
1
HEX:40
Description
Onetouch
number
Can be
Changes
changed. not
allowed.
• Change items “Facsimile Print”, “Copy
Print”, “Report Print”, “Send Facsimile”, “PC Print”, and “Send E-mail” on
the “Number of sheets” tab.
• The accumulated sheets can be
changed in the maintenance mode
even if this bit is set to “Changes not
allowed”.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 1
HEX:35
Logic
Feature
Select numbers of fax
one-touches and of copy
programs on auto-mode
screen.
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 1
0
Description
1
One-touch
Bit 7-5:
Determine the input of
Bit 4-3:
numbers of copies or of
FAX destinations on automode screen.
FK-503
013
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Print program
000
5
001
4
1
010
3
2
011
2
3
100
1
4
101
0
5
Others
Not available
00
1 digit
01
2 digit
10
3 digit
Others
Not available
0
Regards these digits as
an input of number of
copies.
2
Automatically switch destinations
No
Yes
You can register main addresses and
2ndary addresses with onetouch. You
can send to 2ndary addresses when
communication with main addresses is
abnormal. (Optional Network Application
Kit must be installed.)
0
Select operation when
INBOX forward failed.
Destroy
document
immediately
Destroy
document
after
printing
Specify the action to be taken when
INBOX forwarding has failed. (Failed
means communications cannot be delivered. Communications means communication via FAX and E-mail.)
61
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
014
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
Logic
Feature
0
Select redialing interval
for resending document.
0
Broadcast transmission
setting confirmation window. <*>
Description
1
Bit 7-5:
5
1
HEX:01
Bit 1-0:
000
10ïb
001
30 sec
010
60 sec
011
120 sec
100
180 sec
Others
Not available
00
Not display
01
Confirms settings at broadcast transmission
10
Confirms settings (single destination/all
destinations)
11
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
016
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
6
Use of extra telephone.
<*>
No
Yes
5
Mail mode: Print date &
time received <*>
No
Yes
4
Mail mode: Position of
Inside
print date & time received doc.
<*>
Outside
doc.
1
RX Time Stamp: Print
date & time received <*>
No
Yes
0
RX Time Stamp: Position
of print date & time
received <*>
Inside
doc.
Outside
doc.
HEX:40
Description
This is valid only when “(MODE 016
Bit5)” sets Yes.
This is valid only when “(MODE 016
Bit1)” sets Yes.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
62
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
017
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:C0
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
0000
TSI 1
0001
TSI 2
1
0010
TSI 3
0
0011
TSI 4
0100
TSI 5
0101
TSI 6
0110
TSI 7
3
2
Select initial value of TSI
name *
Bit 3-0:
FK-503
MODE
0111
TSI 8
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
018
Bit
5
4
3
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:01
Logic
0
00
Specify full-dial sending
Not
allowed
Allowed
Description
1
Select destination screen: Bit 5-4:
Displays screen of destination when document is
loaded in FAX mode. *
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
One-touch 1st
screen
01
Name screen
10
Dial number screen
11
Index screen
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
63
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
019
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:08
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Bit 7-3:
Specify the ringing
count of auto receiving
call (PSTN1) *
00000
0
00001
1
Specify the ringing count
till the main product
starts receiving a call.
|
4
10100
20
3
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
• Some machines cannot receive calls.
Care must be taken when you set the ringing count to 10 or more.
• For PSTN2, refer to MODE 249.
MODE
020
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
64
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
HEX:40
Description
7
Displays # of reports.
No
Yes
“Yes” displays # of pages on phone line
in addition to ordinary # of papers.
6
Trace protocol.
No
Yes
“Yes” prints result of protocol trace after
completing communication. If next communication is proceeded before this
printing, information on previous communication protocol will be deleted.
5
Display number of error
No
lines/transmission speed.
Yes
“Yes” displays # of error lines/transmission speed on panel and outputs port for
auto checking.
4
Select monitor interval for Phase A
line.
All
phases
Specifies interval for monitoring phone
lines for G3 communication.
3
Display error codes.
(Panel, report)
Yes
“Yes” displays error codes (6 digit) on
panel and in report.
No
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
4
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:08
Logic
Feature
0
Call hold guard timer
Description
1
Bit 4-3:
3
00
1 hr
01
10 hr
10
24 hr
11
72 hr
2
Display symbol rate.
No
Yes
Symbol rates are 2400/2743/2800/3000/
3200/3429.
Rate of 2743 is not actually used.
1
Observe EQM:
Check modem & line statuses
No
Yes
Do not change the set value.
0
Observe probing informa- No
tion:
Check modem & line statuses
Yes
Do not change the set value.
MODE
022
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
HEX:02
Description
2
FAX memory nearly full to 256 KB
its capacity.
512 KB
“Memory nearly full” means that unused
memory becomes less than a specified
capacity.
This soft switch specifies threshold
capacity.
1
Restrict parameters of
memory stored TX.
Yes
If “Yes” is selected, then all relay transmissions will proceed with A4 size when
function of remote side is unknown (not
learned/full dialing).
For learned destination without size of
16×15.4, TX will be done with 8×7.7.
No
65
Adjustment / Setting
021
Factory setting bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
023
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
Select number of errors in Bit 7-4:
redialing terminal of data
type.
4
Adjustment / Setting
HEX:F8
Description
1
0000
0
0001
1
0010
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
1001
9
1010
10
1011
11
1100
12
1101
13
1110
14
1111
15
Specifies whether to carry out merge
process for report of image with merge.
3
Set margins for report
image. <*>
No
Yes
0
Select memory over
transmission mode.
Transmission
continued
Transmis- Specifies whether stored pages will be
sion dis- transmitted if memory is full while scanconnecte ning documents.
d
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
66
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:81
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
5
Display Administrator/
User passwords.
Yes
No
4
Display forwarding function button.
No
Yes
3
Select alarm buzzer pattern.
Pattern 0 Pattern 1
Pattern 0: Peep Poop Peep Poop Peep
Poop
Pattern 1: Peep Peep Peep
2
Select ID display order
when receiving.
Bit 2-1:
Expansion
IDT → TSI
1
0
Receive by other user.
No
MODE
025
Bit
00
01
TSI
Others
Not available
Yes
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1
Logic
Feature
0
1
HEX:7F
Description
6
Service call for printer
option failure.
No
Yes
Specifies whether to make a service call
for PC printer unit option failure. <Note>
5
Service call for printer fail- No
ure.
Yes
Specifies whether to make a service call
for printer failure. <Note>
4
Service call for scanner
failure.
No
Yes
Specifies whether to make a service call
for exceeding specified # of papers.
<Note>
1
Service call for reaching
near empty cycles of
toner.
No
Yes
Set whether to make a service call for
reaching near empty or empty cycles of
toner. <NOTE>
0
Service call for reaching
life times of drum.
No
Yes
Set whether to make a service call for
reaching near life time or life times of
drum. <NOTE>
NOTE
• This is valid only when “Allow service call? (MODE 026 Bit 6)” is set to “Yes.”
67
Adjustment / Setting
024
Factory setting bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
026
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
68
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 1 0
HEX:DE
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
7
Allow remote maintenance.
No
Yes
6
Allow service calls. (Email maintenance) (Network function)
No
Yes
4
Print incomplete TX of
service call for notifying
consumables.
No
Yes
3
Service call for empty
toner.
No
Yes
2
Service call for reaching
life times of drum.
No
Yes
1
Notify out-of-consumables.
No
Yes
Unused.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
027
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
HEX:24
Logic
Bit
Feature
7
Select ID display order:
Specifies priority order of
destination ID for printing
report/ displaying on
screen.
6
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
0
Description
1
Bit 7-6:
FK-503
MODE
00
Pattern 1:
1→2→3→4→5→6
01
Pattern 2:
4→5→6→1→2→3
01
Pattern 3:
4→5→1→2→3→6
11
5
Display anti-dew button.
No
Yes
4
Process drum dry button. No
Yes
3
Secure comm. with Nmethod.
Yes
2
F code function.
No
Yes
Need for G3 communications.
1
Assign non-reduction TX
for 2in1 scan.
No
Yes
Specifies whether 2in1 TX will be sent
by A4 always or by appropriate size to
receiver’s capability.
No
MODE
028
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
Feature
HEX:63
Logic
0
Description
1
7
Select remote print protocol. F CODE
N method Fixed to “0”, valid at TX
6
Select restricted number of
prints of remote multi copy.
0000000
Not available
(Same as 1
copy)
4
0000001
1 copy
3
|
2
1100011
5
1
0
Bit 6-0:
99 copies
Not available
(Same as 99
copies)
69
Adjustment / Setting
1: Name registered in one-touch button
2: Destination # registered in one-touch
button
3: Phone # of destination dialed
4: Destination phone # by TSI
5: Extended ID
6: Standard ID (# of TSI/CIG)
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
030
Bit
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
0
7
Rotation TX *
No
Rotate print of FAX RX.
<*>
Bit 6-5:
4
Receive 2in1 page.
(Valid for RX print) <*>
3
Restrict print paper selec- Bit 3-2:
tion:
Specifies unselectable
print paper (including orientation) for FAX.
2
1
0
Assign mixed mm/inch
papers.
(Priority Set)
(Valid for RX print)
HEX:B1 (For U.S.)
HEX:B0 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
6
5
Adjustment / Setting
Factory setting bit
Bit:
No
Bit 1-0:
Description
1
Yes
00
No rotate print
01
Rotate print
(without sort)
10
Rotate print
(with sort)
11
Not available
“Sort” means “alternate sort” here.
Yes
00
No B5R, A5R,
and postcard
01
No A5R and postcard
10
No postcard
11
Not available
00
Select mm only
01
Select inch only
10
Select both
11
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
70
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
031
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:A0
Logic
Feature
0
FK-503
MODE
Description
1
7
Margin process for multiple copies of report with
image merge.
No
Yes
Valid when “Set margins for report
image? (MODE 23 Bit 3)” is set to “Yes.”
6
Assign output format for
image margin report.
Same as
regular
report
Always
A5 forma
1: Always output with A5 format regardless of the set status of paper. This is
valid when a cassette has A4 C papers.
5
Margin layout for 2-sided
TX *
Bit 5-4:
4
2
1
Proof Print document hold Bit 2-1:
time of PC print *
00
Top margin
01
Standard
book
10
Automatic
11
Not available
00
No
01
20 min
10
30 min
11
Not available
Set the time to hold documents for the Proof
Print function.
MODE
032
Bit
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:35 (For U.S.)
HEX:21 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
0
1
4
Select metric/inch for FAX TX mm
inch
3
Set zoom ratio for reducing
ledger/letter.
64.7 %
77.2 %
2
Toggle metric and inch when
specifying reading area.
mm
inch
Description
71
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
033
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
Logic
0
Initial setting of 2-sided
TX
5
Select draft printing mode. Bit 5-4:
4
00
01
10
11
Adjustment / Setting
2
Select draft printing level.
Description
1
No 22-sided
sided-TX TX mode
mode
6
3
HEX:14
Bit 3-2:
No draft mode “Toner saving mode”
follows # of skipped pixels (Bit Nos. 3 to 2).
“High resolution saving
High resolumode” in which each
tion saving
pixel’s size will be
mode
reduced, follows # of
Not available
skipped pixels (Bit Nos.
3 to 2) for only at points
of transition between
white-black along the
direction of main scanning.
Toner saving
mode
00
No skipping
01
Skip 1/4
pixel
10
Skip 2/4 pixel
11
Skip 3/4 pixel
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
72
Specifies skipped printing level for copy, RX,
and report printing.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
5
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0
0
Select cut-off length at
leading edge of printing
paper.
0000
0 mm
0001
2 mm
0010
4 mm
0011
6 mm
0100
8 mm
0101
10 mm
0110
12 mm
0111
14 mm
1000
16 mm
1001
18 mm
1010
20 mm
1011
22 mm
1100
24 mm
1101
26 mm
1110
28 mm
1111
30 mm
3
Set special density.
No
Yes
1
Overlap printing.
No
Yes
MODE
Bit
Description
1
Bit 7-4:
4
035
HEX:02
Logic
Feature
FK-503
034
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Valid only at RX printing.
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Valid only at RX printing.
Overlapped print is fixed to 4 mm
regardless of line density.
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
Logic
Feature
0
1
1
RX by memory when
reaching I/C lifetime.
No
Yes
0
RX by memory when
reaching toner empty.
No
Yes
HEX:03
Description
73
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
036
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:01
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
00000
Not delete
00001
1 hr
5
00010
2 hr
4
00011
3 hr
3
|
7
6
0
Secure Print document
hold time <*>
Bit 7-3:
Specify RX (remote copy) Start printprint order.
ing after
receiving
first page.
|
11000
24 hr
Others
Not available
Start
printing
after
receiving
all pages.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
037
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
7
Select FAX paper cassette (1st cassette). <*>
No
Yes
6
Select FAX paper cassette (2nd cassette). <*>
No
Yes
5
Select FAX paper cassette (3rd cassette). <*>
No
Yes
4
Select FAX paper cassette (4th cassette). <*>
No
Yes
2
Select FAX paper cassette (Bypath). <*>
No
Yes
HEX:F8
Description
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
74
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
038
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0
HEX:0A
Logic
Feature
0
1
Description
7
Turn on print lamp when
out-of-paper.
On when
all cassettes are
out of
paper
On when
at least
one cassette is out
of paper
3
Print restart timer after
stopping.
Bit 3-2:
00
3 min
01
5 min
10
10 min
11
20 min
2
FK-503
MODE
1
Manual setting of print
stop/start. *
Stop
Start
0
Print stop/start timer. *
Does not
function
Function
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
040
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
HEX:FA
Description
7
2-dim coding at TX.
No
(Valid for G3 communication)
Yes
“No”: MH
“Yes”: MH + MR
6
T.6 coding.
No
(Valid for G3 communication)
Yes
“Yes”: MH + MR + MMR
Valid only when “2-dim coding?
(MODE 040 Bit 7)” is set to “Yes.”
5
JBIG communication.
(Valid for ECM communication)
No
Yes
4
Third party’s JBIG (ITU-T)
communication.
(Valid for ECM communication)
No
Yes
Valid only when “JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5)” is set to
“Yes.”
3
Proprietary JBIG (ITU-T)
communication.
(Valid for ECM communication)
No
Yes
Valid only when “JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5)” is set to
“Yes.”
1
JBIG capability at V.34 communication. (G3)
No
Yes
Valid only when “JBIG communication? (MODE 040 Bit 5)” is set to
“Yes.”
75
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
041
Bit
Adjustment / Setting
6
76
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Logic
Feature
ECM mode
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
0
No
1
Yes
HEX:40
Description
“No”: G3
“Yes”: G3 + ECM
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Bit
7
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0
HEX:3F
Logic
0
Not available
0001
1 min
5
0010
2 min
4
0011
3 min
0100
4 min
0101
5 min
0110
6 min
0111
7 min
1000
8 min
3
Select redialing interval 1. Bit 7-4:
*
Description
1
0000
6
Select redialing interval 2. Bit 3-0:
FK-503
042
Factory setting bit
Bit:
1001
9 min
1010
10 min
1011
11 min
1100
12 min
1101
13 min
1110
14 min
1111
15 min
0000
Not available
2
0001
1 min
1
0010
2 min
0
0011
3 min
0100
4 min
0101
5 min
0110
6 min
0111
7 min
1000
8 min
1001
9 min
1010
10 min
1011
11 min
1100
12 min
1101
13 min
1110
14ï min
1111
15 min
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
77
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
043
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
# of resending document. Bit 7-6:
Adjustment / Setting
6
78
HEX:80
Description
1
00
0
01
1
10
2
11
3
4
Redialing when line is
No
connected but no answer.
Yes
3
Auto-answering call frequency.
Not
limitation
(1 to 9)
limitation
(2 to 4)
Number of times for automatic reception calls.
2
TCI/CSI registration
screen.
User
Service
mode
telephone number setting.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
044
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
FK-503
MODE
HEX:80
Description
Select threshold value for 32 lines
RTN sending error trace. or more
64 lines
or more
Specifies # of error lines as reference of
sending RTN:
• “32 lines or more”:
MCF if error lines are 0 - 31, RTN if
error lines are 32 or more
• “64 lines or more”:
MCF if error lines are 0 - 31, RTP if
error lines are 32 to 63, RTN if error
lines are 64 or more
6
Process TCF sending
specially.
No
Yes
4
Select T4 timer (Action
against line delay).
3 sec
4.5 sec
3
Take an action for communication error from
overseas (Action against
LMCD-OFF).
Yes
No
• Select “No” unless bad line is experienced.
2
Take an action for communication error from
overseas (Action for fall
back).
Yes
No
• Select “No” unless bad line is experienced.
1
Process RTN RX failure.
discard
as error
not as
error
0
Retrain V. 34 control
channel.
Yes
(discard
as error)
No
(not as
error)
Adjustment / Setting
7
79
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
047
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
3
Select V. 34 fall back toler- Bit 7-5:
ance. (TX)
Select V. 34 fall back toler- Bit 4-2:
ance. (RX)
2
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
048
Bit
7
6
80
Description
1
5
4
HEX:88
000
0
001
1
010
2
011
3
100
4
Others
Not available
000
0
001
1
010
2
011
3
100
4
Others
Not available
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 0
HEX:C6
Logic
Feature
Select V.34/V.33/V.17
capabilities.
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 0
0
Bit 7-6:
Description
1
00
No capability
above 9600 bps
01
V.33
10
V.17 & V.33
11
V.17 & V.33 & V.34
Sets MODEM’s
function
2
Allow V.34.
No
Yes
Should be same as “V.8 (MODE 48 Bit
1)”
1
Allow V. 8.
No
Yes
Should be same as “V.8 (MODE 48 Bit
2)”
0
Allow V.34 communication V.34
for extensions.
V.17
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Bit
4
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
HEX:0D
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
00000
2400 bps
00001
4800 bps
2
00010
7200 bps
1
00011
9600 bps
0
00100
12.0 kbps
00101
14.4 kbps
00110
16.8 kbps
00111
19.2 kbps
01000
21.6 kbps
01001
24.0 kbps
01010
26.4 kbps
01011
28.8 kbps
01100
31.2 kbps
3
Select upper limit of trans- Bit 4-0:
mission speed. (TX)
MODE
050
Bit
4
01101
33.6 kbps
Others
Not available
• Need to disable “V.34
capability (MODE 048
Bit 2)” by setting “No”
for 2400 bps.
• 16.8 kbps or faster are
valid only when “Allow
V.34. (MODE 048 Bit
2)” is enabled (Yes).
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
HEX:0D
Logic
0
Select upper limit of trans- Bit 4-0:
mission speed. (RX)
Description
1
00000
2400 bps
00001
4800 bps
2
00010
7200 bps
1
00011
9600 bps
0
00100
12.0 kbps
00101
14.4 kbps
00110
16.8 kbps
00111
19.2 kbps
01000
21.6 kbps
01001
24.0 kbps
01010
26.4 kbps
01011
28.8 kbps
01100
31.2 kbps
3
FK-503
049
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
01101
33.6 kbps
Others
Not available
• Need to disable “V.34
capability (MODE 048
Bit 2)” by setting “No”
for 2400 bps.
• 16.8 kbps or faster is
valid only when “Allow
V.34 (MODE 048 Bit
2)” is enabled (Yes).
81
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
051
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
5
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
6
82
Description
1
Declare size of print paper Bit 7-5:
for received document.
053
HEX:20
000
Not available
001
Auto
010
A4/Letter
011
B4/Legal
100
A3/11×17
101
Auto including rotation
Others
Not available
Specifies declaration
value of printing function for RX.
“Auto” selects max size
of paper, max size of
loaded cassette, or max
size of the last paper.
“Auto including rotation”
is equivalent to A4R
(Letter R) set even A4
(Letter) is selected by
MODE 008 Bit 7.
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
0
Select received docuDo not
ment operation when F
destroy
code receiving has failed.
1
Destroy
HEX:C8
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
054
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0
HEX:7A
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Time to be detected as no Bit 7-4:
sound.
0000
Not available
0001
1 sec
5
|
4
1111
FK-503
MODE
7 sec
|
10 sec
Others
Not available
Valid only when a receiver system has
V.34 modulation.
3
Control history of V.34
auto dialing.
No
Yes
2
Modulation method for
V.34 manual, nonstorage
TX.
V.17
V.34
1
Modulation method for
V.17
V.34 polling TX document.
V.34
0
Modulation method for
V.34 manual RX.
V.34
V.17
MODE
056
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
HEX:0C
Logic
0
Description
1
3
Modem power-saving
mode (sleep)
No
powersaving
mode
Powersaving
mode
2
Select sending time of
ANSam.
Bit 2-0:
000
2.0 sec
001
2.5 sec
010
3.0 sec
1
0
Adjustment / Setting
1010
011
3.5 sec
100
4.0 sec
101
5.0 sec
110
6.0 sec
111
Not available
83
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
057
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
HEX:19
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Select the time from when Bit 7-0:
line is blocked to when
ANSam TX starts.
00000000 Not available
00000001 100 msec
4
Specify the time from
when line is blocked to
when ANSam TX starts.
|
3
00011001 2500 msec
2
|
1
11111111 25500 msec
0
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
077
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 0
Bit
Feature
4
# of times of hooking
monitoring during ringing
3
84
Factory setting bit
Bit:
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:60
Logic
0
Bit 4-3:
Description
1
00
3
01
5
10
8
11
12
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Factory setting bit
080 (PSTN1)
Bit:
110 (PSTN2)
Bit
7
6
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
HEX:23 (For U.S.)
HEX:6E (For Europe)
HEX:23 (For U.S.)
HEX:23 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
Select time expected for
line connection
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
0
FK-503
MODE
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00000000 0 sec
5
00000001 0.5 sec
4
|
3
00100011 17.5 sec
2
|
01101110 55 sec
1
01111000 60 sec
0
Others
Factory setting bit
082 (PSTN1)
112 (PSTN2)
Bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
5
Detect busy tone.
No
Yes
3
Detect line disconnection. No
(inverted polarity)
Yes
HEX:04
HEX:28
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Not available
Description
85
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
083 (PSTN1)
Bit
Feature
7
Monitoring cycle of hooking
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Adjustment / Setting
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Select upper limit of
detecting as hooking
(Adjustment of voltage
detected as hooking)
Select lower limit of
detecting as hooking
(Adjustment of voltage
detected as hooking)
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 7-6:
Bit 5-3:
Bit 2-0:
HEX:50
Description
1
00
12 msec
01
24 msec
10
36 msec
11
48 msec
000
8V
001
11 V
010
14 V
011
19 V
100
25 V
101
31 V
110
36 V
111
42 V
000
3V
001
5V
010
8V
011
11 V
100
14 V
101
17 V
110
19 V
111
22 V
NOTE
• The upper limit (Bit 5 to 3) must be higher than the lower limit (Bit 2 to 0).
86
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Factory setting bit
Bit:
114 (PSTN2)
Bit
5
Feature
Select PB sending level.
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
Description
1
0000
-1 dBm
0001
-2 dBm
3
0010
-3 dBm
2
0011
-4 dBm
0100
-5 dBm
Bit 5-2:
MODE
0101
-6 dBm
0110
-7 dBm
0111
-8 dBm
1000
-9 dBm
1001
-10 dBm
1010
-11 dBm
1011
-12 dBm
1100
-13 dBm
1101
-14 dBm
1110
-15 dBm
1111
-16 dBm
Factory setting bit
085 (PSTN1)
Bit:
115 (PSTN2)
7
HEX:14 (For U.S.)
HEX:1C (For Europe)
Logic
0
4
Bit
HEX:14 (For U.S.)
HEX:28 (For Europe)
FK-503
084 (PSTN1)
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Feature
Select TX level.
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:90 (For U.S.)
HEX:C0 (For Europe)
HEX:90 (For U.S.)
HEX:90 (For Europe)
Logic
0
Bit 7-4:
Description
1
1000
-9 dBm
6
1001
-10 dBm
5
1010
-11 dBm
4
1011
-12 dBm
1100
-13 dBm
1101
-14 dBm
1110
-15 dBm
1110
-16 dBm
Others
Not available
Specifies TX levels other
than PB.
87
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
Factory setting bit
FK-503
086 (PSTN1)
116 (PSTN2)
Bit
7
Bit:
Feature
Select RX attenuator.
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 7-6:
MODE
00
0 dB
(-48 dBm)
01
5 dB
(-43 dBm)
10
10 dB
(-38 dBm)
11
15 dB
(-33 dBm)
Adjustment / Setting
7
6
5
4
3
88
• Signals controlled by
this soft switch are
1300 Hz detection, PB
tone detection, V29 &
V27ter, V21 signal
detection, and all tonal
signal.
• Numbers within
parentheses represent the minimum
receiving sensitivity.
Factory setting bit
087 (PSTN1)
117 (PSTN2)
Bit
Description
1
6
HEX:40
Bit:
Feature
Select detection time of
continuous ringer.
Select frequency for
ringer detection.
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 7-6:
Bit 5-3:
HEX:90
Description
1
00
No detection
01
1.8 sec
10
3.0 sec
11
10 sec
000
10 to 27.5 Hz
001
10 to 75 Hz
010
10 to 90 Hz
011
10 to 200 Hz
Others
Not available
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Factory setting bit
088 (PSTN1)
118 (PSTN2)
Feature
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
Select process mode at
detection time out of 2nd
dial tone.
Keeps
same
operation
as before
detection
even after
time out
Generates TX
error at
time out
3
1300 Hz detection.
-28 dBm
-36 dBm
MODE
Factory setting bit
089 (PSTN1)
119 (PSTN2)
Bit
Description
1
6
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
Select TX method.
Insert
pause
after prefix for
external
lines
Insert
pause
after 1st
dial
6
Select method of detecting dial prefix for external
lines.
Dial #
search
method
Pause
search
method
5
Select prefix # for external Bit 5-2:
lines. *
HEX:00
Description
1
7
0000
0
0001
1
3
0010
2
2
0011
3
0100
4
0101
5
0110
6
0111
7
1000
8
4
HEX:C0
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
1001
9
Others
Not available
Valid only when “Select
method of detecting dial
prefix for external lines
(MODE 089 Bit6)” is set
to “Dial # search
method.”
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
89
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
Factory setting bit
FK-503
092 (PSTN1)
122 (PSTN2)
Bit
Adjustment / Setting
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
HEX:70
Description
1
7
Send V.29 echo protection No
tone.
Yes
6
Send V.17 echo protection No
tone.
Yes
5
Send V.33 echo protection No
tone.
Yes
4
Select V.17 and V.33 carrier frequency.
00
1800 Hz
01
1700 Hz
10
1800 + 1700 Hz
11
Not available
3
90
Bit:
Bit 4-3:
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Factory setting bit
093 (PSTN1)
Bit:
123 (PSTN2)
Bit
7
6
5
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Select CED frequency.
HEX:48 (For U.S.)
HEX:40 (For Europe)
HEX:48 (For U.S.)
HEX:48 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
Select timing for starting
CED sending.
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
0
Description
1
Bit 7-6:
Bit 5-4:
4
FK-503
MODE
00
0 msec
01
2000 msec
10
2500 msec
11
7 sec
00
2100 Hz
01
1080 Hz
10
1300 Hz
11
Not available
Specifies time interval
from line connection to
starting sending CED.
(7-sec is provided for the
second dial.)
Specifies frequency to
carry CED or N/A selection.
Process CED echo.
No
Yes
Specifies whether to process CED echo
at the intervals of 500 ms between CED
and initial identification.
2
Process incoming command echo.
No
Yes
Specifies whether to process incoming
echo at the intervals of 500 ms between
when receiving an initial identification
and when sending the incoming command.
1
Control channel data rate. Bit 1-0:
0
MODE
1200 bps
01
Non 1200 bps
10
2400 bps
11
Non 2400 bps
Factory setting bit
094 (PSTN1)
124 (PSTN2)
Bit
00
Adjustment / Setting
3
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
3
Lock AGC in V.33 mode.
No
2
Lock AGC in V.17 mode.
No
Yes
1
Lock AGC in V.29 mode.
No
Yes
0
Lock AGC in V.27ter
mode.
No
Yes
HEX:0C
Description
Yes
91
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
Factory setting bit
FK-503
095 (PSTN1)
125 (PSTN2)
Bit
7
6
5
4
Bit:
Feature
Adjust digital TX cable
equalizer.
Adjust digital RX cable
equalizer.
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
Logic
0
Bit 7-6:
Bit 5-4:
Adjustment / Setting
4
3
2
1
92
00
0 dB
01
4 dB
10
8 dB
11
12 dB
00
0 dB
01
4 dB
10
8 dB
11
12 dB
For V.29, actual value
will be the sum of 4 dB
and the specified value.
Factory setting bit
096 (PSTN1)
126 (PSTN2)
5
HEX:20
Description
1
MODE
Bit
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Bit:
Feature
Select time for CI signal
sending ON.
Select time for CI signal
sending OFF.
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 5-4:
Bit 3-1:
HEX:14
Description
1
00
0.5 sec
01
1.0 sec
10
1.5 sec
11
2.0 sec
000
0.4 sec
001
0.8 sec
010
1.0 sec
011
1.2 sec
100
1.6 sec
101
2.0 sec
Others
Not available
Use this soft switch for
error in V8 sequence.
Use this soft switch for
error in V8 sequence.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Factory setting bit
097 (PSTN1)
127 (PSTN2)
Bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
FK-503
MODE
HEX:14
Description
1
Attenuate TCF/NTCF
sending level.
No
Yes
3 dB
drops.
Specifies whether to attenuate sending
level of TCF and NTCF. For V33/V29,
level of attenuation is determined by
MODE 085 Bit 7 to 4 and MODE 097 Bit
6. Otherwise, level of attenuation is
determined by MODE 085 Bit 7 to 4.
6
Attenuate V33/V29 sending level.
No
Yes
3 dB
drops.
Specifies whether to attenuate sending
level of V17/V33/V29. Level of attenuation is determined by MODE 085 Bit 7 to
4 and MODE 097 Bit 6.
4
Select V.34 symbol rate.
Bit 4-2:
000
2400 Sym/S
3
001
Not available
2
010
2800 Sym/S
011
3000 Sym/S
100
3200 Sym/S
101
3429 Sym/S
Others
Not available
Adjustment / Setting
7
93
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
Factory setting bit
FK-503
098 (PSTN1)
128 (PSTN2)
Bit
7
Logic
0
0 sec
10
2 sec
11
3 sec
0000
-6
0001
-5
1
0010
-4
0
0011
-3
0100
-2
0101
-1
Select EQM threshold
value.
Bit 3-6:
Bit 3-0:
HEX:46
Description
1
1 sec
2
Select starting time of
sending CM signal.
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 0
00
3
Adjustment / Setting
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
01
6
94
Bit:
0110
0
0111
1
1000
2
1001
3
1010
4
1011
5
1100
6
Others
Not available
Use this soft switch for
error in V8 sequence.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
099 (PSTN1)
129 (PSTN2)
Bit
7
Bit:
Feature
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 7-4:
-8
0001
-7
5
0010
-6
4
0011
-5
0100
-4
0101
-3
0110
-2
0111
-1
1000
0
1001
1
1010
2
1011
3
1100
4
1101
5
1110
6
1111
7
0000
-8
0001
-7
1
0010
-6
0
0011
-5
0100
-4
0101
-3
0110
-2
0111
-1
3
2
Select threshold value 2
for symbol speed.
Bit 3-0:
HEX:88
Description
1
0000
6
Select threshold value 1
for symbol speed.
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
FK-503
Factory setting bit
1000
0
1001
1
1010
2
1011
3
1100
4
1101
5
1110
6
1111
7
Specifies range of tolerance for
V. 34 line characteristic distortion.
Specifies minimum tolerance
level of S/N ratio in V.34.
95
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
Factory setting bit
FK-503
114 (PSTN2)
Bit
Adjustment / Setting
5
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
Logic
Feature
0
Select PB sending level.
Bit 5-2:
0000
-1 dBm
0001
-2 dBm
3
0010
-3 dBm
2
0011
-4 dBm
0100
-5 dBm
190
HEX:14 (For U.S.)
HEX:1C (For Europe)
Description
1
4
MODE
96
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
0101
-6 dBm
0110
-7 dBm
0111
-8 dBm
1000
-9 dBm
1001
-10 dBm
1010
-11 dBm
1011
-12 dBm
1100
-13 dBm
1101
-14 dBm
1110
-15 dBm
1111
-16 dBm
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
HEX:00
Bit
Feature
7
Restrict SF/SSF communication (TX).
No
Yes
For risk management according to new
recommendation of G3 high resolution
transmission
6
Restrict SF/SSF communication (RX from other
company’s system).
No
Yes
For risk management according to new
recommendation of G3 high resolution
transmission
0
1
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
MODE
Bit
Description
1
Select order of displaying Bit 7-6:
year to date.
(Corresponding to each
region)
197
HEX:C0
00
Year-Month-Date
01
Not available
10
Date-month-year
11
Month-date-year
Order of displaying
date in OPE display
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:C0 (For U.S.)
HEX:C1 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
0
Not
available
7
Daylight saving function
6
Display ON/OFF switch of OFF
Daylight saving
ON
3
Daylight saving pattern
Bit 3-0:
Description
1
Available
0000
Pattern 1
2
0001
Pattern 2
1
0010
Pattern 3
0
0011
Pattern 4
0100
Pattern 5
0101
Pattern 6
Others
Not available
For the details of
patterns 1 to 6, see
NOTE below.
NOTE
Start Time
Pattern 1
2:00 am on 1st Sunday, April
End Time
2:00 am on last Sunday, October
Pattern 2
2:00 am on last Sunday, March
2:00 am on last Sunday, October
Pattern 3
2:00 am on last Friday, April
2:00 am on last Thursday, September
Pattern 4
2:00 am on last Sunday, March
2:00 am on last Sunday, September
Pattern 5
2:00 am on 1st Sunday, September
2:00 am on last Sunday, April
Pattern 6
2:00 am on last Sunday, October
2:00 am on last Sunday, March
97
Adjustment / Setting
192
Factory setting bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
198
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
TX forwarding to adminis- No
trator <*>
Yes
6
TX forwarding of scanner
function to administrator
<*>
Yes
5
Result report TX forward- Bit 5-4:
ing to administrator
No
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
7
Bit:
7
5
Always output
11
Not available
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:40 (For U.S.)
HEX:00 (For Europe)
Logic
Select DP make rate.
Description
1
Bit 7-6:
MODE
6
10
0
6
Bit
Not output
Output for
incomplete TX
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
249
00
01
Factory setting bit
212 (PSTN1)
232 (PSTN2)
Bit
Description
1
7
4
HEX:D0
00
33 %
01
40 %
Specify the DP signal
make ratio.
Others
Not available
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Specify the ringing count
of auto receiving call
(PSTN2) <*>
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:08
Logic
0
Bit 7-3:
Description
1
00000
0
00001
1
|
4
10100
20
3
Others
Not available
Specify the PSTN2 ringing detection count. The
ringing count is the number of rings until the
machine automatically
starts receiving a call.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
• Some machines cannot receive calls.
Care must be taken when you set the ringing count to 10 or more.
• For PSTN1, refer to MODE 019.
98
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1
Logic
Feature
0
00H
5
Add 200 ms
• Changes not allowed.
• Specify period to
transmit dummy data
Add 300 ms
before transmitting
(200 ms +
PIX.
100 ms)
• Add the period specified here to the first
flag (EMC) and FILL
Add 900 ms
(G3) of the image sig(200 ms +700
nal.
ms)
01H
4
3
2
1
07H
0
MODE
Bit
7
Description
1
Insert dummy data before Bit 7-0:
PIX.
310
HEX:FF
FFH
Add 200 ms
Others
Not available
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
Feature
0
Increase of sound level *
Description
1
Normal
sound
level
mode
Adjustment / Setting
288
Factory setting bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
Increased
sound
level
mode
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
311
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
1
7
Invert screen *
Normal
Inverted
6
Displaying next screen
when using Enlarge Display <*>
Wait for
specification
Display
upper-left
screen
HEX:00
Description
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
99
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
312
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:03
Logic
Feature
0
Key repeat start time *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
6
00000000 Not available
00000001 1×100 ms
5
|
4
00000011 3×100 ms
3
|
2
11111111 255×100 ms
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
313
Bit
7
6
5
4
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Key repeat interval *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:01
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
1
00000000 Not available
00000001 1×100 ms
|
11111111 255×100 ms
3
2
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
100
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
314
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:03
Logic
Feature
0
Display time of reservation completion screen *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
FK-503
MODE
00000000 Not closed
00000001 1 sec
5
|
4
00000011 3 sec
3
|
2
11111111 255 sec
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
315
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
Logic
0
7
Select buzzer ring pattern Normal
(JBMS). *
6
Sound level of buzzer *
Bit 6-5:
5
4
3
2
1
0
HEX:4C
Normal completion sound Bit 4-2:
(JBMS-correspondin) *
Description
1
JBMScorresponding
Specify whether to set the buzzer ring
pattern to normal pattern or JBMS-corresponding patern
00
Low
01
Normal
10
High
11
Not available
00000
0
|
01100
Set the sound volume.
3
|
10100
5
Others
Not available
101
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
320
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
102
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
1
HEX:F0
Description
Can print When Mode 320 Bit 0 “Cassette selection per reception port” is enabled, specCan print ify the paper tray (including Bypass Tray)
for printing if receiving by G3-1.
7
Cassette-specified printing (G3-1: Tray 1)
Cannot
print
6
Cassette-specified printing (G3-1: Tray 2)
Cannot
print
5
Cassette-specified printing (G3-1: Tray 3)
Cannot
print
Can print
4
Cassette-specified printing (G3-1: Tray 4)
Cannot
print
Can print
3
Cassette-specified printing (G3-1: Bypass Tray)
Cannot
print
Can print
0
Cassette selection per
reception port
Disable
Enable
Specify a cassette for printing received
documents per communication line.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
Cassette-specified printing (G3-2: Tray 1)
Cannot
print
6
Cassette-specified printing (G3-2: Tray 2)
Cannot
print
5
Cassette-specified printing (G3-2: Tray 3)
Cannot
print
Can print
4
Cassette-specified printing (G3-2: Tray 4)
Cannot
print
Can print
3
Cassette-specified printing (G3-2: Bypass Tray)
Cannot
print
Can print
322
Bit
Description
Can print When Mode 320 Bit 0 “Cassette selection per reception port” is enabled, specCan print ify the paper tray (including Bypass Tray)
for printing if receiving by G3-2.
7
MODE
HEX:F0
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
1
HEX:F0
Description
Can print When Mode 320 Bit 0 “Cassette selection per reception port” is enabled, specCan print ify the paper tray (including Bypass Tray)
for printing if receiving by Network.
7
Cassette-specified printing (Network: Tray 1)
Cannot
print
6
Cassette-specified printing (Network: Tray 2)
Cannot
print
5
Cassette-specified printing (Network: Tray 3)
Cannot
print
Can print
4
Cassette-specified printing (Network: Tray 4)
Cannot
print
Can print
3
Cassette-specified printing (Network: Bypass
Tray)
Cannot
print
Can print
103
Adjustment / Setting
321
Factory setting bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
323
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
0
Can print When Mode 320 Bit 0 “Cassette selection per reception port” is enabled, specCan print ify the paper tray (including Bypass Tray)
for printing if receiving by Reports.
Cassette-specified printing (Reports: Tray 1)
Cannot
print
6
Cassette-specified printing (Reports: Tray 2)
Cannot
print
5
Cassette-specified printing (Reports: Tray 3)
Cannot
print
Can print
4
Cassette-specified printing (Reports: Tray 4)
Cannot
print
Can print
3
Cassette-specified printing (Reports: Bypass
Tray)
Cannot
print
Can print
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
0
No
6
POP3 before SMTP <*>
Maximum width of docu- Bit 5-4:
ment to be transmitted
when the fax capability of
the receiver is set to
[Advanced]
(Network function) *
3
2
HEX:A8
Logic
Feature
5
4
Description
1
7
350
HEX:F0
Logic
Feature
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Maximum resolution to be Bit 3-2:
used when the fax capability of the receiver is set
to [Advanced]
(Network function) *
Description
1
Yes
00
A4/Letter
01
B4/Legal
10
A3/11×17
11
Not available
00
200×200 dpi
01
400×400 dpi
10
600×600 dpi
11
Not available
Default value of maximum width of document
to be transmitted when
the fax capability of the
receiver is set to
[Advanced]
Default value of maximum resolution to be
used when the fax capability of the receiver is
set to [Advanced]
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
104
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Description
1
7
Gateway transmission
(Network function) *
Not
allowed
6
Outgoing port for gateway transmission
(Network function) **
Bit 6-5:
3
Gateway TSI <*>
2
Internet FAX (IP) reception
1
TSI information for SMTP Machine IP
reception <*>
name pri- address
ority
priority
5
HEX:18
Logic
0
Allowed
FK-503
351
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Specify allowed or not allowed for sending E-mail using gateway communications.
SMTP cannot be received when the
gateway transmission is not allowed.
00
G3-1
11
G3-2
Specify an outgoing port
for FAX transfer (FAX
transfer of received Email file) through gateway transmission.
(valid for G3 multi-port
only) [See note.]
Others
Not available
Normally
not add
Normally
add
Direct FAX, IP Relay
Enable
Disable
Specify whether to describe the
machine name (or IP address if none) of
the TSI in Subject or prioritize the IP
address when forwarding documents
received by IP address FAX.
This setting is applied also for the priority order of display of destination name
information of the RX Activity Report for
IP address fax reception and IP Relay
reception.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
The feature with [**] is available only in a system with a multi-port option.
• For G3-1 and G3-2, see ÅgSelect PSTN port automatically (MODE 006 Bit 1)Åh.
105
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
352
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Feature
HEX:D0
Logic
0
Description
1
7
Notification of result
(Network function) *
No
Yes
6
Position for adding Gateway TSI <*>
Outside
of document
Inside of Specify where to add the TSI when fordocuwarding through Gateway transmission
ment
(Direct FAX, IP Relay).
5
Specify whether to add
TSI when forwarding <*>
Not add
Add
4
Position for adding TSI
when forwarding <*>
Outside
of document
Inside of Select where to add the TSI when fordocuwarding received documents.
ment
Specify whether a communication error
message is returned to the sender when
a communication error occurs with code
E6xxxx when E-mail is received.
Specify whether to add TSI when forwarding received documents.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
353
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
1
HEX:88 (For U.S.)
HEX:80 (For Europe)
Description
7
Text insertion into document to send
(Network function) *
No
Yes
Specify whether to insert a preset text
message at the head of a stored document image to be transmitted by E-mail.
6
Header printing on
received document
(Network function) *
No
Yes
Specify whether to print a header on
documents received via E-mail.
4
Insert arbitrary text message *
No
Yes
3
Display arbitrary text mes- No
sage screen
Yes
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
• Predetermined text: Image data (TIFF-F format) has been attached to the E-mail.
106
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
354
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:38 (For U.S.)
HEX:60 (For Europe)
Logic
0
Time zone settings:
Bit 7-2:
Set time zone for the date
field of transmitted E-mail
header
(Network function) *
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Description
1
000000
GMT-12:00
000001
GMT-11:30
001110
GMT-5:00
|
011000
GMT
|
101010
GMT+09:00
|
101111
GMT+11:30
Others
Not available
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
107
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
355
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
Switch 10M and 100M:
Bit7-6:
Select communication
rate of LAN adapter (Network function) *
Description
1
00
01
10
11
Adjustment / Setting
HEX:20
5
Switch full-duplex and
half-duplex:
Select packet transmit/
receive when connecting
to switching hub.
(Network function) *
Full
Duplex
Half
Duplex
4
Automatically obtain IP
address (DHCP) *
No
Yes
Auto-negoti- • Auto-negotiation:
ation
Determine the communication rate by
Set to 100M
identifying 10BASE-T
Set to 10M
or 100BASE-TX.
Not available • Set to 100M: Connection is set to
100BASE-TX.
• Set to 10M: Connection is set to 10BASET.
Valid after the power is
turned off and on.
(Will not communicate
when “Set to 100M” or
“Set to 10M” is chosen
and the communication
rate is not correct for the
communication line.
Check and specify the
correct communication
rate for the line.)
This switch is valid when MODE 355 Bit
7 to 6 is set to “Set to 100M” or “Set to
10M”.
• Full-duplex: Packets can be sent and
received simultaneously.
• Half-duplex: Packets can be sent or
received separately.
Valid after the main power switch is
turned off and on.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
108
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
356
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:F40
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
0000
Not available
0001
30 sec
5
0010
60 sec
4
0011
90 sec
6
SMTP transmission time- Bit 7-4:
out (Network function) <*>
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
0100
120 sec
0101
150 sec
0110
180 sec
0111
210 sec
1000
240 sec
1001
270 sec
1010
300 sec
Others
Not available
Set time waiting for a
response to mail commands from the destination scanner or the
SMTP server in scanner
transmission or E-mail
transmission.
Effective after the main
power switch is turned
off and on.
MODE
357
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:40
Logic
0
SMTP transmission time- Bit 7-4:
out (Network function) <*>
Description
1
0000
Not available
0001
30 sec
5
0010
60 sec
4
0011
90 sec
6
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
0100
120 sec
0101
150 sec
0110
180 sec
0111
210 sec
1000
240 sec
1001
270 sec
1010
300 sec
Others
Not available
Specify time waiting for
command from SMTP
client.
Valid after the mai powerswitch is turned off
and on.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
109
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
358
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:20
Logic
Feature
0
POP3 receive timeout
(Network function) <*>
Description
1
Bit 7-4:
0000
Not available
0001
30 sec
5
0010
60 sec
4
0011
90 sec
0100
120 sec
0101
150 sec
0110
180 sec
0111
210 sec
1000
240 sec
1001
270 sec
1010
300 sec
Others
Not available
Set time waiting for a
response to mail commands from the POP3
server in E-mail transmission.
Effective after the power
is turned off and on.
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
MODE
359
Bit
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Description
1
7
Number of times to retry Normal
E-mail transmission (Network function)
Additional
retry
6
Scanner mode: Coding
method (TIFF) when
[Advanced] is specified.
000
MH
001
MR
010
MMR
011
JBIG
5
4
0
110
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Forced priority transmission (Network function)
Bit 6-4:
OFF
When this switch is set to “Additional
retry”, retry E-mail transmission according to MODE 370, 371 after retrying the
number of times specified by the user.
Others
Not available
ON
Specify whether to forcibly perform priority transmission for awaiting documents.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
360
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
0
E-mail reception (Network function)
6
Coding method for the
Bit 6-4:
receiver Internet fax capability (Network function,
Mail mode) *
4
3
Coding method for PDF *
Prohibited
Bit 3-2:
2
1
Image data file format *
Bit 1-0:
0
Description
1
7
5
HEX:80
Logic
Feature
Permitted
FK-503
MODE
Select either [Prohibited] or [Permitted]
for E-mail reception (SMTP/POP3).
000
MH
001
MR
010
MMR
011
JBIG
Others
Not available
00
MH
01
Not available
(MR)
10
MMR
11
Not available
(JBIG)
00
TIFF
01
PDF
Others
Not available
MODE
361
Bit
0
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
DNS function *
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:78
Logic
0
1
Description
Not
Available
available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
111
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
363
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
HEX:20
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
6
SMTP expansion prohibited (Network function)
Permitted
Prohibited
5
Specify From address for
DSN report transmission
(Network function)
Address
specified
Address Chain mail can be prevented by specifynot spec- ing an address for DSN report on some
ified
systems.
MODE
365
Bit
7
6
Adjustment / Setting
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Select either “Permitted” or “Prohibited”
for SMTP expansion protocol.
• Valid after the power is turned off and
on.
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
FTP timeout (Network
function)
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
HEX:04
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
Description
1
00000001 30 sec
00000010 60 sec
5
00000011 90 sec
4
00000100 120 sec
3
00000101 150 sec
2
00000110 180 sec
1
00000111 210 sec
0
00001000 240 sec
00001001 270 sec
00001010 300 sec
Others
112
Not available
Specify the period until
timeout during no
request by FTP command after FTP login is
established.
Timeout results in FTP
logout forcibly.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
366
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:08
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
7
Display network maintenance screen
(Network function)
Not display
Display
6
Priority address input
IP
screen for preset scan <*> address
input
screen
Domain
name
input
screen
4
Limit the number of characters to be used for Email file name
No
Yes
3
Number of digits of the
year of a file name
Last 2
digits
4 digits
FK-503
MODE
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
367
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
Feature
HEX:20
Logic
0
Bit7-3:
Description
1
00001
20 sec
6
00010
40 sec
5
00011
80 sec
4
00100
160 sec
3
DNS inquiry timeout <*>
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
00101
320 sec
00110
640 sec
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
113
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
368
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0
HEX:C2
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
7
Communication manage- Not
ment report CVS output * output
Output
6
Use a password for both
administrator and network *
No
Yes
1
Communication log (TX)
for scanner transmission
Not print
Print
0
Result of communication
sent from a network fax
Not print Print
• No: Password is used for network
only.
• Yes: Password is used for both network and administrator (machine)
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
369
Bit
2
1
0
114
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
PING timeout
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Bit2-0:
Description
1
000
5 sec
001
10 sec
010
15 sec
011
20 sec
100
25 sec
101
30 sec
Others
Not available
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
5
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 1
3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1
HEX:FF
Logic
Feature
0
Additional number of
times to retry E-mail
transmission (Network
function)
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00000000 0
Specify additional retrial
times after retrying the
number of times specified by the user.
“0” indicates no additional retrial.
Retrial operations will
end after retrying E-mail
transmissions the current number of times
specified by the user.
00000001 1
|
4
11111111 255
3
2
1
0
MODE
371
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:40
Logic
0
Retry interval for “number Bit 7-5:
of times to retry additional E-mail transmission” (Network function)
Description
1
000
10 min
001
15 min
010
20 min
011
25 min
100
30 min
Others
Not available
1
Binary Division *
OFF
ON
0
Page Division *
OFF
ON
Adjustment / Setting
370
Factory setting bit
Bit:
FK-503
MODE
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
115
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
372
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Specify transmission
interval of sizedivided Email file data <*>
3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
1
Description
00000101 5 sec
00001010 10 sec
00001111 15 sec
4
00011110 30 sec
3
00111100 60 sec
2
01011010 90 sec
1
01111000 120 sec
0
HEX:0F
10010110 150 sec
10110100 180 sec
11010010 210 sec
11110000 240 sec
00000000 Not available
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
116
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
0
Description
1
Full-mode function <*>
Not
Available
available
6
Output of MDN/DSN text
No
3
Wait time for MDN
response
Bit3-0:
7
HEX:08
Logic
Feature
Yes
0000
0 min
0001
5 min
1
0010
10 min
0
0011
15 min
0100
20 min
0101
30 min
0110
40 min
0111
50 min
2
FK-503
373
Factory setting bit
Bit:
1000
1 hr
1001
2 hr
1010
3 hr
1011
4 hr
1100
5 hr
1101
6 hr
1110
7 hr
1111
8 hr
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
MODE
374
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
1
HEX:40
Description
7
NOTIFY (SUCCESS)
Not send Send
Used when the mail server processed
normally.
6
NOTIFY (FAILURE)
Not send
Send
Used when the mail server detected an
error.
5
NOTIFY (DELAY)
Not send Send
Used when the mail server cannot process immediately after receiving mail
file.
4
Response to MDN
request when receiving
SMTP data
Respons No
e
response
117
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
379
Bit
3
2
1
0
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
Specify position for cutting Bit3-2:
off data when forwarding
received documents
Specify image editing
when forwarding
Bit1-0:
00
Center
01
Left side
10
Not available
11
Right side
00
Edit to regular size and
forward
Others
Adjustment / Setting
Description
1
01
118
HEX:10
Specify position for cutting off data for the main
scan size from the original size to sending size
when forwarding
received documents.
Specify whether to set
the main scan width of
received data to regular
width or leave the stored
Forward
stored data as data width as is when
forwarding received docis
uments.
Not available
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
380
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
1
FK-503
MODE
HEX:00
Description
7
Enable APOP authentica- Not
enable
tion function <*>
Enable
Specify whether to enable the APOP
function.
6
Enable SMTP authentica- Not
tion function <*>
enable
Enable
Specify whether to enable the SMTP
authentication function. (*1)
5
SMTP authentication:
Allowed
Allow CRAMMD5 authentication function <*>
Not
allowed
Specify whether to enable the CRAMMD5 authentication function for SMTP
authentication. (*2)
4
SMTP authentication:
Allow LOGIN authentication function <*>
Allowed
Not
allowed
Specify whether to enable the LOGIN
authentication function for SMTP
authentication. (*2)
3
SMTP authentication:
Allow PLAIN authentication function <*>
Allowed
Not
allowed
Specify whether to enable the PLAIN
authentication function for SMTP
authentication. (*2)
2
Separate SMTP authenti- Not sepcation ID/password and
arate
POP3 information <*>
Separate
Specify whether to share the SMTP
authentication ID/password with POP3
information.
(*1) The SMTP authentication function is valid under the following conditions.
• MODE 380 Bit 6 is set to “1”.
• When the SMTP authentication user name and SMTP authentication password
share the POP3 user name and POP3 password, MODE 380 Bit 2 is set to “0”.
When the SMTP authentication user name and SMTP authentication password do
not share the POP3 user name and POP3 password, MODE 380 Bit 2 is set to “1”,
and “SMTP AUTH User Name” and “SMTP AUTH Password” are set in Network
Settings.
• MODE 380 Bit 5, 4, or 3 is set to “0”.
(*2) When all mail authentication functions are validated (MODE 380 Bits 5, 4, and 3
all are set to “0”), they are prioritized in the order “DRAM-MD5 authentication (Bit 5)”
Æ “LOGIN authentication (Bit 4)” Æ “PLAIN authentication (Bit 3)” .
119
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
381
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
7
Use IP Relay function
2
Set transmission coding
Bit2-0:
method for IP Relay transmission <*>
1
0
HEX:80
Disable
Description
1
Enable
Select whether to enable the IP Relay
function.
000
MH
001
MR
010
MMR
011
JBIG
Others
Not available
Specify default coding
method for capability of
other party when sending by IP Relay (instructing machine)
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
120
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:40
Logic
0
FK-503
382
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Description
1
7
IP Relay Process result
timeout <*>
Communication
error
Communication
completed
Specify the communication result when
a timeout occurs by IP Relay result waiting (instruction machine).
6
IP Relay Set result timeout <*>
Bit 6-3:
0000
0 min
0001
5 min
4
0010
10 min
3
0011
15 min
0100
20 min
0101
30 min
0110
40 min
0111
50 min
5
1000
1 hr
1001
2 hr
1010
3 hr
1011
4 hr
1100
5 hr
1101
6 hr
1110
7 hr
1111
8 hr
000
Relay
station 1
1
001
Relay
station 2
0
010
Relay
station 3
011
Relay
station 4
100
Relay
station 5
101
Relay
station 6
110
Relay
station 7
111
Relay
station 8
2
Set default relay station
for IP Relay *
Bit 2-0:
Specify the period of a
timeout of IP Relay
result waiting (instruction
machine).
Set the default relay
instruction machine for
IP Relay (instruction
machine).
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
121
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
400
Bit
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
Feature
0
Set priority doc mixed
mode. (Copy) *
5
Description
1
No
Yes
Bit 5-0:
Selects priority doc mixed mode when
Power source is ON and panel reset key
is ON.
000000
apanese
4
000001
English
3
Others
Not available
2
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
402
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
Logic
Bit
Feature
7
Select priority doc mode.
(Copy) *
6
Select priority print mode. Bit 6-5:
(Copy) *
5
4
3
Select automatic function
priority mode (Copy) *
HEX:01
0
1 sided
Bit 4-3:
Description
1
2 sided
00
1 sided
01
2 sided
Others
Not available
00
APS
01
AMS
10
Not available
11
Manual
2
Select priority order of
device *
Copy
Printer
1
Select priority application. (after auto clear and
panel reset) *
Bit 1-0:
00
FAX
01
Copy
0
10
Auto
11
Scanner
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
122
APS: Auto Paper Selection.
AMS: Auto Magnification Selection.
Sets the initial status
screen (Copy, FAX, Auto
or scanner)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
403
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:01
Logic
Feature
0
Select draft print zoom
ratio. (Copy) *
0
Auto-clear by user. (Copy) No
*
Description
1
Recommended
magnification
7
FK-503
MODE
Same
magnification
Set ratios for 2-in-1 page, 4-in-1 page,
Booklet creation, or image repeat.
Yes
Selects whether to reset the touch panel
when pressing ID key.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
404
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select auto-clear time. *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:01
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
Description
1
00000000 No reset
00000001 1 min
For every 1 min
|
4
11110000 240 min
3
11111111 30 sec
2
Others
Not available
1
Select whether to carry
out auto-clear if there is
no operation for a certain time, after copy or
operation.
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
123
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
405
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1
HEX:0F
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Select pre-heating time. * Bit 7-0:
00000001 1 min
6
For every 1 min
|
5
00000101 5 min
4
00001111 15 min
3
11110000 240 min
2
Others
Select whether to carry
out auto-clear if there is
no operation for certain
time, after copy or operation.
|
|
Not available
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
406
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select sleep off time. *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:0F
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
Description
1
00000000 OFF
00000001 1 min
00001111 15 min
5
4
3
2
1
0
|
00011110 30 min
|
00111100 60 min
|
11110000 240 min
Others
Not available
For every 1 min
Select whether to carry
out “auto power-source
off” if there is no operation for certain time, after
copy or operation. Also,
select its time.
“Auto Power source off”
is not carried out if
“Select auto Power
source off (MODE 416
Bit 0)” is set to “No.”
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
124
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
407
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:01
Logic
Feature
0
Select touch panel off
time. *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
FK-503
MODE
00000000 OFF
00000001 1 min
5
For every 1 min
|
4
11110000 240 min
3
Others
Not available
2
1
Select whether to carry
out “auto panel off” if no
operation is executed
for certain time after
operation.
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
408
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Description
1
0000
1 tray
0001
2 tray
5
0010
3 tray
4
0011
4 tray
1010
Bypass
7
6
Select feeder tray. (Paper) Bit 7-4:
(Copy) *
1100
LCT
Others
Not available
Selects the priority
feeder tray used when
APS (auto paper select
mode) or manual mode
is selected.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
125
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
409
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
HEX:08
Logic
Feature
Select priority order of 4in-1 page (Copy) *
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
0
Bit 7-6:
Description
1
00
Pattern 1
01
Pattern 2
Others
Not available
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
1 2
1 3
3
5
Select priority exposure
level. (Copy) *
AE
4
Select priority doc level.
(Copy) *
Bit 4-1:
Manual
Density
0000
Text/Photo
0100
Text
2
1000
Photo
1
1100
Dot Matrix
Others
Not available
3
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
126
4
2
4
“Photo mode” is unavailable if MODE 409 Bit No.
5 is set “AE (Auto).”
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
HEX:54
Logic
Feature
0
Select AE print density
level. (Copy) *
Description
1
Bit7-6:
4
Light original adjustment,
(Copy: ADF only) *
DarkerCopy
3
Select priority manual
density level. (Copy) *
Bit3-0:
00
Darker
01
Normal
10
Specifies level of auto
density.
Not available
11
Lighter
Lighter
Copy
Darker Copy: Scans originals in the density as specified. (The density is the
same as that in BS scanning.)
Lighter Copy:Scans originals in the density lighter than specified.
0000
EXP1
0001
EXP2
1
0010
EXP3
0
0011
EXP4
0100
EXP5
0101
EXP6
0110
EXP7
0111
EXP8
2
FK-503
410
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Selects manual density
level at mode initialization or level when auto
density is switched to
manual density:
EXP1 (Lighter)
|
EXP5 (Normal)
|
EXP9 (Darker)
1000
EXP9
Others
Not available
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
411
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Bit
Feature
7
Select symbol bit. (Copy)
+
-
2
Adjust print density.
(Copy) *
Bit 2-0:
000
1
0
HEX:00
0
Description
1
Selects direction (+/-) of print density
adjustment by MODE 411 Bit 2 to 0.
0
|
011
3
Others
Not available
Selects print density by
adjusting development
bias.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
127
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
412
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
HEX:08
Logic
Feature
Select auto sort mode.
(Copy) *
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
0
Bit 7-6:
Description
1
00
Sort off mode
01
Sort on mode
10
Not available
11
Grouping mode
5
Prohibit shifting. (Copy)
No
Yes
4
Select auto punch mode.
(Copy) *
No
Yes
Settable with other functions of MODE
412 Bit Nos. 7-6.
3
Select sort on/off auto
switch. (Copy) *
No
Yes
Determines whether to switch “sort on
Æ sort off”or “sort off Æ sort on” according to # of documents or the operation.
2
Select priority in staple
mode.
Bit 2-1:
00
No
1
01
Corner staple
10
2-point staple
11
Center staple
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
128
Specifies mode of
paper ejection when
ejector option is
attached.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Bit
Feature
7
Select FAX (G3-1) output
bin. *
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
Bit 7-6:
6
00
01
11
Select PC print output bin. Bit 5-4:
*
4
Description
1
10
5
HEX:04
Logic
0
00
01
10
11
FK-503
413
Factory setting bit
Bit:
First tray
output
• Specify a tray to
where FAX (G3-1)
document is delivered
Second tray
to when the finisher
output
has been attached.
Additional bin • “Additional bin output”
output
is valid only when the
Not available
additional bin is
attached.
First tray
output
• Specify a tray to
where PC print is
printed out when the
Second tray
finisher is attached.
output
• “Additional bin output”
Additional bin
is valid only when the
output
additional bin is
Not available
attached.
2
Select copy output bin. *
Bin 1
Bin 2
Specify a bin to where copied document
is delivered to when the job separator
has been attached.
1
Select FAX (G3-1) output
bin. *
Bin 1
Bin 2
Specify a bin to where faxed (G3-1) document is delivered when the job separator has been attached.
0
Select PC print output bin. Bin 1
*
Bin 2
Specify a bin to where PC print is delivered to when the job separator has been
attached.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
129
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
414
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
Select image compression ratio for reserving
into copy memory.
Bit7-4:
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
7
6
3
2
0101
0.5
0110
0.6
0111
0.7
1000
0.8
Shows image compression ratio per copied
document for reserving it
into copy memory.
Reserve necessary
capacity of memory for
deter-mined compression ratio before starting
scanning.
1001
0.9
1010
1.0
1011
1.1
1100
1.2
1101
1.3
Others
Not available
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 0
Feature
Select sound volume 1.
(Buzzer) *
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
Select sound volume 2.
(Alarm) *
HEX:6C
Logic
0
Bit 7-5:
5
4
Description
1
4
415
HEX:A0
Bit 4-2:
Description
1
000
0 (No sound)
001
1
010
2
011
3
100
4
101
5
Others
Not available
000
0 (No sound)
001
1
010
2
011
3
100
4
101
5
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
130
6 stage adjustment of
key buzzer
6 stage adjustment for
alarm
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
416
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:60
Logic
Feature
0
Select sound volume 3.
(Monitor) *
Bit7-5:
5
FK-503
MODE
Description
1
000
0 (no tone)
001
1
010
2
011
3
100
4
101
5
Others
Not available
6 stage adjustment of
line monitor
4
Direction alignment for
images when the finisher
is attached *
No
Yes
Specify the direction for image output
when the finisher is attached.
0
Disable sleep off. *
Yes
No
Specifies whether MODE 406 can be set
to “No power source off.”
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
417
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
7
Restrict # of papers.
(Copy) *
No
Yes
6
Selects # of papers to be
restricted. (Copy) *
Bit6-0:
0000001
5
HEX:63
Specifies whether to restrict # of copies.
1
|
4
1100011
99
3
Others
Not available
Specifies # of papers
when MODE 417 Bit 7 is
set to “Yes.”
2
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
131
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
418
Bit
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 1
Feature
Document erase width.
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 6-5:
Adjustment / Setting
5
132
HEX:58
Description
1
00
0 mm
01
1 mm
10
2 mm
11
3 mm
4
Stop when the lifetime of
imaging unit ends.
Stop
Do not
stop
Specify operation (stop or not stop)
when the lifetime of imaging unit ends.
3
Display a message when
the status of the imaging
unit is “near life”.
Do not
display
Display
Specify operation (display or not display)
when the status of the imaging unit is
“near life”.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Select a copy output bin. * Bit7-6:
6
00
01
11
Select a FAX (G3-2) output bin. *
Bit5-4:
4
00
01
10
11
3
Select a FAX (network)
output bin. *
Bit3-2:
2
Description
1
10
5
HEX:40
Logic
0
FK-503
419
Factory setting bit
Bit:
First tray output
• Specify a tray to
where printed document is delivered to
Second tray
when the finisher is
output
attached.
Additional bin • “Additional bin output”
output
is valid only when the
Not available
additional bin is
attached.
First tray
output
• Specify a tray to
where FAX (G3-2)
document is delivered
Second tray
to when the finisher
output
has been attached.
Additional bin • “Additional bin output”
output
is valid only when the
Not available
additional bin is
attached.
00
First tray
output
01
Second tray
output
10
Additional bin
output
11
Not available
1
Select FAX (G3-2) output
bin. *
Bin 1
Bin 2
Specify a bin to where FAX (G3-2) document is delivered when the job separator
has been attached.
0
Select FAX (network) out- Bin 1
put bin. *
Bin 2
Specify a bin to where FAX (network)
document is delivered when the job separator has been attached.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
133
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
420
Bit
7
6
5
4
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Auto-clear confirmation
time *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
Description
1
00000000 Function off
00000001 10 sec
00000010 20 sec
|
3
00011110 300 sec
2
Others
Not available
1
0
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
134
10-second steps
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Total counter.
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
Bit 7-6:
6
5
Size counter.
HEX:08
Logic
0
Bit 5-3:
Description
1
00
Mode 1 (std)
01
Mode 2
10
Mode 3
Others
Not available
000
Do not count
001
A3, 11x17
010
A3, B4,
11×17, Legal
011
A3, B4, FLS,
11×17, Legal,
11×14
4
3
2
Copy Kit counter. (Copy)
Bit 2-1:
Specifies a counting
method of total counter.
Specifies sizes of papers
to be counted by size
counter.
100
A6
Others
Not available
00
Mode 1
(Do not count)
1
01
10
11
FK-503
422
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Select whether to set
counting or not for
Mode 2 (Counted the Copy Counter
and permits copy- and select whether
to inhibit the initiation
ing even when
of a new copy cycle
the set value is
or not when the curreached.)
rent value reaches
Mode 3 (Counted the set value.
and inhibits copying when the set
value is reached.)
Not available
135
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
423
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
HEX:4E (For U.S.)
HEX:4C (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
0
1
Description
7
Plug-in counter mode.
(Copy) *
Paper
count
Copy
count
6
Key counter. (Copy) *
Available
(copying
is prohibited.)
Not
Sets whether to use key counter.
available
(copying
is permitted.)
3
Document size detection
option *
Yes
No
1
LCT paper size *
A4
Letter
0
Automatically adjust the
transfer current of image
Yes
No
MODE
424
Adjustment / Setting
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
Bit
Sets plug-in counter threshold value,
and reads the counter.
Specifies whether document size sensors can be used in the inchcorresponding option.
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:10
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
7
Metric and inch mixed
modes. (Copy)
Mixed
Limited
Specifies whether to round off document
sizes for the system specification in auto
paper mode.
4
Restrict print mode.
(Copy)
Yes
No
Specifies whether to disable “!2-Sided
Copy” in priority copy mode.
3
Print small size document. Copy dis- Copy
(Copy) *
abled
enabled
Specifies whether to generate a warning
when a document smaller than that
detectable by document size sensors is
loaded.
2
Restrict function. (Copy)
Specifies whether to disable some of
copy functions (application, doc copy).
No
Yes
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
136
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
425
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
Bit
Feature
6
Select FLS size. (Copy) *
0
Description
1
000
210×330
5
001
203×330
4
010
216×330
011
220×330
3
2
Adjust image quality
mode. (Copy)
Bit 6-4:
Bit 3-0:
0000
1000
0
Others
Specify size of FLS used
with in the machine.
Specifies the density of
image at printing.
When any of Bit 3 to 0 is
1, [*] key is displayed.
|
1
FK-503
MODE
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
426
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
Movement finisher bin
Not avail- Available
able
6
Set mixed AMS sheets
without printing *
No
4
Bit 5-0:
Description
1
7
5
HEX:50 (For U.S.)
HEX:00 (For Europe)
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Yes
010000
Others
Not available
3
2
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
137
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
429
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
7
Set drum dry when
engine power is on
6
Correspond to OHP offset Not
switch
quality
mode
Switch
quality
mode
5
Automatically reset values No
on the basic screen at
completion of copying
using the document
feeder. <*>
Yes
4
Set curl correction
00
Not control
01
All-environment control
10
Control for
HH, LL environments
11
Not available
Not execute
Bit 4-3:
3
Adjustment / Setting
HEX:00 (For U.S.)
HEX:04 (For Europe)
Execute
Set whether to switch automatically to
Photo mode when selecting OHP transparencies.
2
Correspond to fluorescent lamp flickering
Control
Not control
1
Setting of time that fan
spin at full speed.
Bit 1-0:
00
20 sec
01
55 sec
10
10 min
11
Not available
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
138
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit:
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 1
HEX:05
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Wait time (M) at full memory Bit7-0:
of PC print
(Set range: 0, 1 to 30 minutes
(1-minute steps)
00000000 Immediately
delete
00000001 1 min
00000010 2 min
|
PC print job is deleted when
the wait time at full memory
expires. *
00000101 5 min
|
1
00011110 30 min
0
Others
MODE
433 (Display)
434 (for machine)
435 (Communication)
Bit
7
Feature
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Logic
0
000000
Japanese
000001
English
5
Others
Not available
3
2
Bit 7-2:
HEX:04
Description
1
6
4
Language selected *
Not available
(Display-use)
Select the language to
display on the touch
panel.
(Machine -use)
Select the language for
sender, reception, Activity report (TX/RX), etc.
(Network-use)
Select the language to
use for e-mail transmission.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
• The * mark (Screen setting) does not apply to MODE 435 (Network-use).
139
Adjustment / Setting
432
Factory setting bit
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
440
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
PDL set of PC print *
3 2 1 0
0 1 0 0
Logic
0
Bit 7-6:
6
Adjustment / Setting
5
Paper size set of PC print *
HEX:12 (For U.S.)
HEX:04 (For Europe)
Bit 5-1:
Description
1
00
Auto
01
PCL
10
PS
11
Others
00000
A3
4
00001
B4
3
00010
A4
2
00011
B5
1
00100
A5
00101
B6
00110
A6
00111
5 1/2 x 8 1/2
01000
Exec.
01001
Letter
01010
11 x 17
01011
FLS 1
01100
FLS 2
01101
FLS 3
01110
FLS 4
01111
Legal
10000
11 x 14
10001
Envelope B5
10010
Envelope Com10
10011
Envelope C5
10100
Envelope DL
10101
Envelope Monarch
10110
J-POST (Hagaki)
10111
Custom paper
11000
K16
11001
K8
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
140
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
441
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
Feature
Select a paper feeder cassette to use when using PC
printer function *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Bit 7-4:
4
3
2
1
0
HEX: 80
Logic
0
Select a paper orientation to
set when using PC printer
function *
Bit 3-2:
Select a print method to use
when using PC printer function *
Bit 1-0:
FK-503
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Description
1
0000
Tray 1
0001
Tray 2
0010
Tray 3
0011
Tray 4
1000
Auto
1010
Bypass
1100
LCT
Others
Not available
00
Portrait
01
Landscape
Others
Not available
00
1-sided print
01
2-sided print for short-edge binding
10
2-sided print for long-edge binding
11
Not available
MODE
442
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX: 01
Logic
0
Select # (last 8 bits) of copies Bit 7-0:
to print by PC printer *
Description
1
00000000
Not available
00000001
1
|
11100111
999
|
11111111
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
141
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
443
Bit
1
0
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX: 00
Logic
0
Select # (first 2 bits) of copies Bit 1-0:
to print by PC printer *
Description
1
00
1
|
11
999
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
142
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
6
5
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select a font # to be
set when using PC
printer function *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Bit7-1:
FK-503
444
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Description
1
0000000
Courier
0000001
CG Times
0000010
CG Times Bold
4
0000011
CG Times Italic
3
0000100
CG Times Bold Italic
2
0000101
CG Omega
1
0000110
CG Omega Bold
0000111
CG Omega Italic
0001000
CG Omega Bold Italic
0001001
Coronet
0001010
Clarendon Condensed
0001011
Univers Medium
0001100
Univers Bold
0001101
Univers Medium Italic
0001110
Univers Bold Italic
0001111
Univers Condensed Medium
0010000
Univers Condensed Bold
0010001
Univers Condensed Medium
Italic
0010010
Univers Condensed Bold Italic
0010011
Antique Olive
0010100
Antique Olive Bold
0010101
Antique Olive Italic
0010110
Garamond Antiqua
0010111
Garamond Halbfett
0011000
Garamond Kursiv
0011001
Garamond Kursiv Halbfett
0011010
Marigold
0011011
Albertus Medium
0011100
Albertus Extra Bold
0011101
Arial
0011110
Arial Bold
0011111
Arial Italic
0100000
Arial Bold Italic
0100001
Times New Roman
0100010
Times New Roman Bold
0100011
Times New Roman Italic
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
143
11. Soft Switch List
Adjustment / Setting
FK-503
Bit
1
Feature
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Logic
0
Description
1
0100100
Times New Roman Bold Italic
0100101
Helvetica
0100110
Helvetica Bold
0100111
Helvetica Oblique
0101000
Helvetica Bold Oblique
0101001
Helvetica Narrow
0101010
Helvetica Narrow Bold
0101011
Helvetica Narrow Oblique
0101100
Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique
0101101
Palatino Roman
0101110
Palatino Bold
0101111
Palatino Italic
0110000
Palatino Bold Italic
0110001
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
0110010
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
0110011
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book
Oblique
0110100
ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi
Oblique
0110101
ITC Bookman Light
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
144
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7
Feature
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
HEX:74 (For U.S.)
HEX:4C (For Europe)
Logic
0
Bit7-2:
Description
1
000000
Desktop
000001
ISO 4: United Kingdom
5
000010
ISO 6: ASCII
4
000011
ISO 11: Swedish
3
000100
ISO 15: Italian
2
000101
ISO 17: Spanish
6
Symbol Set
(PC print) *
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
FK-503
445
Factory setting bit
Bit:
000110
ISO 21: German
000111
ISO 60: Norwegian V1
ISO 60: Danish/Norw
001000
ISO 69: French
001001
ISO 8859/1 Latin1
001010
ISO 8859/2 Latin2
001011
ISO 8859/9 Latin5
001100
ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
001101
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
001110
Legal
001111
Math-8
010000
MC Text
010001
Microsoft Publishing
010010
PC-775
010011
PC-8, Code Page 437
010100
PC-850 Multilingual
010101
PC-852 Latin 2
010110
PC-858 Multilingual
010111
PC-8 Turkish
011000
PC-8 Danish/Norw
011001
PC-1004
011010
PI Font
011011
PS Math
011100
PS Text
011101
Roman-8
011110
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
011111
Windows Baltic
100000
Windows 3.1 Latin 1
100001
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
145
11. Soft Switch List
FK-503
Bit
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
2
100010
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
100011
PC-866
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
446
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 1 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:3C (For U.S.)
HEX:40 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
0
Number Lines
(PC print) *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00000100 4
00000101 5
00111100 60
Adjustment / Setting
5
|
4
01000000 64
3
10000000 128
2
Others
Not available
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
447
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select the unit of font size to Pitch
use when using PC printer
function *
HEX: 00
Logic
0
1
Point
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
146
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
448
Bit
7
6
5
4
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 1
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:30
Logic
Feature
0
Select font size to use
when using PC printer
function
(Scalable font size)
(Last 8 bits) *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
FK-503
MODE
00000000
00010000 4.00 (16)
|
00110000 12.00 (48)
3
|
2
11111111
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
449
Bit
3
2
1
0
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select a font size to use
when using PC printer
function
(Scalable font size)
(First 8 bits) *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Bit 3-0:
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
Description
1
0000
|
1111
999.75 (3999)
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
147
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
450
Bit
7
6
5
4
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 1 1 0
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0
HEX:E8
Logic
Feature
0
Select font size to use
when using PC printer
function
(Bitmap font size)
(Last 8 bits) *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00000000
00101100 0.44 (44)
|
11101000 10.00 (1000)
3
|
2
10101100 99.00 (9900)
1
|
0
11111111
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
451
Bit
5
4
3
2
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select font size to use
when using PC printer
function
(Bitmap font size)
(First 6 bits) *
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:03
Logic
0
Bit 5-0:
Description
1
000000
000011
10.00 (1000)
|
100110
99.0 (9900)
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
148
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
Bit
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
0
Change between A4 and No
Letter size for PC printing
*
Yes
6
Set paper tray fixed/ prior- Priority
ity of PC print
Fixed
5
CR/LF Mapping
(PC print) * <*>
00
0
Bit 5-4:
Not map
Specify mapping for the
line return control code.
Mode 1
CR->CRLF,
LF=LF, FF=FF
01
Allow printing without a
department instruction of
PC print * <*>
Description
1
7
4
HEX:00
Logic
Feature
FK-503
452
Factory setting bit
Bit:
10
Mode 2
CR=CR,
LF->CRLF,
FF->CRFF
11
Mode 3
CR->CRLF,
LF->CRLF,
FF->CRLF
Not avail- Allowed
able
Allow/not allow PC printing when there is
not a department instruction.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
MODE
453
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Set OFF or ON of PostScript error printing to
apply when using PC
printer function *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
OFF
1
Description
ON
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
149
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
455
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
HEX:2C
Logic
Feature
0
Select timeout timer (last
8 bits) for PC printing *
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00001010 10 sec
00001111 15 sec
5
|
4
00101100 300 sec
3
|
2
Others
Not available
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
MODE
Adjustment / Setting
456
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Bit
Feature
1
Select timeout timer (first
2 bit) for PC printing *
0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 1
HEX:01
Logic
0
Bit1-0:
Description
1
00
0 sec
01
300 sec
|
11
1000 sec
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
150
Most significant bit for
mode 455
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
464
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
HEX:8C
Logic
Bit
Feature
7
Select RAW port number
(last 8 bits). *
6
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 0
0
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
FK-503
MODE
00000000 Not available
|
5
10001100 9100
4
|
3
11111111 65535
2
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting of IT Series Agent
465
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
Bit
Feature
7
Select RAW port number
(first 8 bits). *
6
5
4
3
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
1
00000000 0
|
HEX:23
Description
Most significant bit for
mode 464
00100011 9100
|
11111111 65535
2
1
0
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting of IT Series Agent
151
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
466
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
6
Enable LDAP search *
<*>
No
Yes
Set whether to enable LDAP searching.
5
Select default LDAP
server * <*>
Bit 5-3:
000
LDAP
Server 1
4
001
LDAP
Server 2
3
010
LDAP
Server 3
011
LDAP
Server 4
100
LDAP
Server 5
Others
Not available
Use
Set whether to use SSL/TLS with HTTP.
0
Set to use SSL/TLS with
HTTP * <*>
Not use
Select a default server
for LDAP searching.
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
MODE
467
Bit
7
6
5
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Select frame type for PC
printing *
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Bit7-5:
Description
1
000
AUTO-detect
001
Ethernet-II
010
802.2
011
802.3
100
SNAP
Others
Not available
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting
152
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
470
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
CSV
FK-503
MODE
7
Setting export extension
<*>
TXT
Set the export file extension for the IP
Series Agent export function to CSV or
TXT.
6
Setting simplified format
<*>
OFF
ON
(mode 1) (mode 2)
Set to perform the IP Series Agent
import/export function by full format
(including fax program registration) or
simple format (excluding fax program
registration).
5
Enable/disable IT Series
Agent function <*>
Enable
Disable
Set whether to enable the IP Series
Agent function.
4
PageScope Data AdministratorÇÃégóp
Use
Not use
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
471
Bit
2
1
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Set whether to display the Bit2-1:
user's list screen, and the
default screen * <*>
Description
1
00
01
11
Not display
list screen
Specify whether to display the user's list
screen for machine
Display list
screen, entry authentication, and
screen default select the default screen
when specifying the list
Display list
screen.
screen, list
screen default
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. *: Screen setting <*>: Soft switch setting
153
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
473
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
Feature
0
Set priority Job List
screen <*>
Description
1
Display
Display
by status by print
order
Set whether to prioritize the print order
display.
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
MODE
477
Bit
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
HEX:00
Logic
0
Description
1
Adjustment / Setting
Fax regis- Destinatration/
tion disReport
play
output
restriction
6
5
Set fax registration restric- Bit6-5:
tion and destination display <*>
00
01
10
11
Allow
user
Display
Tel. No./
Address
Fax registration
and report output
buttons move to
Not avail- Not avail- the Admin.Manable
able
agement menu.
Adminis- Display
Destination distrator only Tel. No./ play “Display
Address one-touch
name”: Display
Adminis- Display
trator only one-touch registered onetouch names for
name
destinations
specified for onetouch keys, Job
List, destination
names of result
reports, and
Activity Report
(TX). (Do not display the tel. no./
address of the
destination.)
NOTE
• The features with (*) are settable by users. <*>: Soft switch setting
154
Fax registration /
report output
restriction
“Administrator
only”:
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
512
Bit
7
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
1 0 0 0
0
Detect dial tone (DT)
7
6
5
Description
1
Yes
No
MODE
Bit
HEX:80
Logic
Feature
768
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0
FK-503
MODE
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
3 2 1 0
1 1 0 1
HEX:0D
Logic
Feature
0
Soft timer adjustment
value between DCS and
TCF in V.17 and V.27 tar
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00000000 Not available
00000001 5 msec
|
4
00001101 65 msec
3
|
2
11111111 1275 msec
1
MODE
769
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Adjustment / Setting
0
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Feature
Soft timer adjustment
value between DCS and
TCF in V.29
3 2 1 0
1 0 0 1
HEX:09
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
1
Description
00000000 Not available
00000001 5 msec
|
00001001 45 msec
|
11111111 1275 msec
1
0
155
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
770
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0
HEX:22 (For U.S.)
HEX:C8 (For Europe)
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
Interval between CFR and Bit 7-0:
PIX
00000000 Not available
00000001 5 msec
5
|
4
00100010 170 msec
3
|
11001000 1000 msec
2
11111111 1275 msec
1
0
MODE
771
Adjustment / Setting
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
156
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:23
Logic
0
T1 timer for automatically Bit 7-0:
sending packets
1
00000000 Not available
00000001 1 sec
|
00100011 35 sec
|
11111111 255 sec
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
772
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:23
Logic
Feature
0
Description
1
T1 timer for automatically Bit 7-0:
receiving packets
FK-503
MODE
00000000 Not available
00000001 1 sec
5
|
4
00100011 35 sec
3
|
2
11111111 255 sec
1
0
773
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
Feature
T1 timer for manually
sending packets
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:23
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
1
Description
00000000 Not available
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
00000001 1 sec
|
00100011 35 sec
|
11111111 255 sec
1
0
157
11. Soft Switch List
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MODE
FK-503
774
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:23
Logic
Feature
0
T1 timer for manually
receiving packets
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
00000000 Not available
00000001 1 sec
5
|
4
00100011 35 sec
3
|
2
11111111 255 sec
1
0
MODE
775
Bit
Adjustment / Setting
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
158
Factory setting bit
Bit:
Feature
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:23
Logic
0
T1 timer for automatically Bit 7-0:
sending polling packets
1
00000000 Not available
00000001 1 sec
|
00100011 35 sec
|
11111111 255 sec
Description
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Soft Switch List
776
Bit
7
6
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 1 0
3 2 1 0
0 0 1 1
HEX:23
Logic
Feature
0
T1 timer for manually
sending polling packets
Description
1
Bit 7-0:
FK-503
MODE
00000000 Not available
00000001 1 sec
5
|
4
00100011 35 sec
3
|
2
11111111 255 sec
1
0
777
Factory setting bit
Bit:
7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0
Bit
Feature
7
Interval between PIX and
post command
6
5
4
3
3 2 1 0
0 1 1 1
HEX:07 (For U.S.)
HEX:08 (For Europe)
Logic
0
Bit 7-0:
1
Description
00000000 Not available
Adjustment / Setting
MODE
00000001 45 msec
|
00000111 75 msec
|
00001010 90 msec
2
11111111 1315 msec
1
0
159
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
11. Soft Switch List
Adjustment / Setting
Blank Page
160
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
12. Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
FK-503
12. Troubleshooting
12.1 Diagnosis by Alarm Code
• This section shows diagnoses of system troubles by alarm codes and their remedies.
• The default setting for diagnostic codes is “not to be displayed.” If you experience errors
frequently, setup the soft switch (MODE 020) to display diagnostic codes. Then follow
communication error codes tables for troubleshooting.
• Communication error codes tables shows communication error codes. Each of them has
6-digits on the panel and a report.
Codes 00 to B4 indicate the upper 2 digits. Adding internal 4 digits to them to display 6
digits on the panel and a report.
Communication reports (TX and RX) print out diagnostic codes for up to 50 activities.
Any codes older than those activities cannot be printed.
NOTE
• Before you proceed with a remedy according to the tables, make sure that the
power source cable and the connectors are connected properly.
• Setting up diagnostic code display
MODE 020
Bit3
Meaning
0
Do not display codes.
1
Displays codes.
Troubleshooting
NOTE
• See Section “Soft Switch List” for setting up soft switches.
161
12. Troubleshooting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
12.2 Communication Error Codes
NOTE
• Cause - Re: Remote, Li: Line, Lo: Local
12.2.1
Code
00
01
02
03
Troubleshooting
04
Description
Cause
• Received DIS but no doc- Error in operation
ument in local terminal
• Polling Reception is
Error in operation at
requested
remote end
• Software failure at time of
connection
Re Li Lo
|
• Illegal dialing operation
(Example; dialing * or #
with DP setting)
Reload a document and retry
TX.
Ask to reload a document
and retry TX.
|
• Document pulled out while Error in operation
transmitting.
• Document size was too
small
Remedy
|
Reload a correct document
and retry TX.
Error in setting up
|
Check the soft switch (MODE
006 Bit5 & MODE 011 Bit 5).
Error in registration
|
Check the registered onetouch dialing number.
• Mismatched TX password Sender’s password
and receiver’s are not
matched.
|
Check the group password of
| both sides.
• Mismatched RX password Sender’s password
and receiver’s are not
matched.
|
Check the group password of
| both sides.
05
• Mismatched password
while polling
Incorrect password
was entered for setting up polling.
06
• Remote system has no
relay function
Failure in remote
machine
07
• Remote system has not
confidential communication function
Failure in remote
machine
• Incompatibility (Example;
no document in local system while polling RX)
• TX failure due to mismatch of communication
type and/or transmission
speed
Error in operation on
remote side
10
• Error in F code TX
Failure in remote
machine
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
11
• Error in F code RX
Failure in remote
machine
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
09
162
Errors in operations
Check the status of the
| remote machine and the local
password.
|
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
Check the status of the
remote machine.
|
Ask the remote end to reload
the document again.
Transmission speeds
are set 4800/2400 bps.
Remote machine has
only V.29.
|
Check the soft switch (MODE
049 Bit 4 -0).
Check the maximum trans| mission speed for each onetouch dialing (only for registration in maintenance features).
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Description
Cause
Re Li Lo
Remedy
45
• Memory overflow or nearly Memory overflows or
full
nearly full
Reset the terminal alarm and
| ask the remote end for
resending.
46
• Document jamming
|
47
12.2.3
Code
• “No print paper” or “Side
cover opened” were
detected
Feeding is not working
continuously.
Reload a document.
|
Out of print paper
| Load print paper.
Side cover was
opened while RX
|
Close the side cover.
Communication errors (TX)
Description
Cause
Failure in remote
machine
Re Li Lo
• Protocol failure in V.34
sequence
70
• Busy tone while waiting for Failure in remote
initial identification signal machine
• Timeout or modem failure Line failure
while detecting 2nd dialing
tone
• Cannot dial due to dialing/
ringing conflict
• T1 timeout while waiting
for initial identification signal when FAX signal is not
detected
|
Failure in remote
• T1 timeout while waiting
for initial identification sig- machine
nal after FAX signal is
Line failure
detected
• Detected reverse polarity
while waiting for initial
identification signal
|
• Received DCN in phase B Interruption or failure
while waiting for comin remote machine
mands other than DCN
Remedy
Try another remote machine.
|
|
Line failure
72
Reload a document.
Jamming in a long
document or in the
middle of a page
(Feeding is not completed even if feeding
exceeds 1 m.)
33
71
FK-503
Code
Terminal alarm
Try another line.
Try another remote machine.
Try another line.
|
Try another remote machine.
|
|
Try BACK to BACK communication.
Check the remote system
and retry TX.
163
Troubleshooting
12.2.2
12. Troubleshooting
12. Troubleshooting
Description
74
• Received DIS or DTC 3
times while waiting for
response to TCF
• No response even after
sending TSI/DCS and
TCF 3 times
• Received FTT twice even
TCF has lowest speed
FK-503
Code
76
• Reverse polarity while
waiting for signal other
than initial identification
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cause
Failure in remote
machine
Re Li Lo
Try another remote machine.
|
|
Line failure
Try another line.
| Replace FAX board
Failure in FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
Replace MFBS board
|
Failure in remote
machine
Check the remote system
and retry TX.
|
Line failure
If same error will be experienced several times, set the
soft switch (MODE 082 Bit 3)
0.
|
77
78
79
7A
Troubleshooting
7C
Failure in remote
machine
No RTC detection in
remote machine (line
failure)
• Received DCN while wait- Interruption or failure
ing for response to post
in remote machine
message
• Received PIP for post
Failure in remote
message (For response to machine
EOP or PPS-EOP, communication is normal even
error code is displayed)
• Received RTN for post
message (where RTN
reception is regarded as
communication failure)
• Retry out of resending
error
• PPR frame error
Failure in remote
machine
Try another remote machine.
|
Try another line.
|
Check the status of the
remote machine and retry
TX.
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
|
|
Line failure
Check the line.
Failure in TX level
Check TX level.
|
• Received CRP 3 times for Failure in remote
TCF
machine
• Received CRP 3 times for Line failure
post message
• Received CRP 3 times for
DTC of polling reception
|
7D
• RX command error (without cutting off carrier)
Failure in remote
machine
|
7F
• No remote machine
response after changing
mode (T1 timeout)
Failure in remote
machine
• Received PIN for post
message
Failure in remote
machine
8F
164
• No response to post message (T4 timeout)
• 5 minute timeout in RNR,
RR sequence (T5 timeout)
Remedy
Try another remote machine.
Try another line.
|
|
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
Check the status of the
remote machine.
Check the status of the
remote machine.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Description
Cause
33
• Protocol failure in V.34
sequence
Failure in remote
machine
91
• T1 timeout while waiting
Failure in remote
for initial identification sig- machine
nal
Line failure
92
• Received DCN while wait- Interruption or failure
ing for commands other
in remote machine
than DCN in phase B
Re Li Lo
95
96
|
98
99
9A
|
Try another line.
Check the status of the
remote machine and retry TX.
|
• Detected low speed flag
Failure in remote
followed by 10 sec. time- machine
out while waiting for detec- Line failure
tion of image signal carrier
(HMCD ON)
|
• Carrier disconnected for
15 seconds while receiving G3 image signal
Error in remote
machine
|
Ask for resending.
Failure in remote
machine
|
Try another remote machine.
• T2 timeout while waiting
for post message
• T2 timeout while waiting
for DCN after receiving
last page
• No response from remote
system after changing
mode (T2 timeout)
Error in remote
machine
|
|
Try another line.
Try another line.
|
Ask for resending.
|
Failure in remote
machine
Check the status of the
remote machine.
|
• Cannot decode line corFailure in remote
rectly for 35 seconds while machine
receiving ECM image sig- Line failure
nal
Failure in FAX board
• Received CRP 3 times
while waiting for initial
identification signal
Try another line.
Try another remote machine.
|
Accidental RTC detection (line failure)
• Received DCN while wait- Interruption or failure
ing for command other
in remote machine
than DCN in phase D
• Received PRI-Q as post
message (Communication is regarded as normal even with error
message)
Try another remote system.
Try another remote machine.
|
|
Failure in remote
machine
| Replace MFBS board
Try another remote machine.
|
| Replace FAX board
Failure in FAX board
| Replace MFBS board
Failure in MFBS board
Line failure
Try another line.
| Replace FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
9C
Try another line.
Try another remote machine.
|
Line failure
97
Try another remote machine.
|
Line failure
Remedy
FK-503
Code
Communication errors (RX)
|
Try another line.
165
Troubleshooting
12.2.4
12. Troubleshooting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Code
Description
9D
• RX command error (without cutting off carrier)
Failure in remote
machine
|
Check the status of the
remote machine.
9F
• Interrupted page reception Failure in remote
by EOR-Q or EOR-PRI-Q machine
signal from sender in ECM Line failure
procedure (next page may
be received completely
because ECM procedure
runs continuously)
|
Try another remote machine.
Troubleshooting
FK-503
12. Troubleshooting
166
Cause
Re Li Lo
|
Remedy
Reduce the initial transmission speed and try resending.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B0
B2
Description
• Power source off
• System failure (Examples; image data conversion failure and error in
sequence timing)
Cause
• Modem failure
Power source switch
was turned off
|
Power source failure
| None.
Defective power
source supply unit
|
Replace the power source
supply unit.
Warm restart switch
was pressed
|
None.
Failure in FAX board
| Replace FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
| Replace MFBS board
B6
B7
• Modem failure (modem
failure in V.8 sequence at
RX)
• Modem failure (modem
failure in V.8 sequence at
RX)
• System failure (Examples; image data conversion failure, error in
sequence timing)
None.
Check line noise and reception level.
|
Document was not
loaded for polling
|
reception in V.34 mode
Line failure
B5
Remedy
Re Li Lo
Line failure
B4
FK-503
Code
Malfunction
Check the document loaded
in the remote side.
Check line noise and reception level.
|
Failure in FAX board
| Replace FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
| Replace MFBS board
Line failure
Check line noise and reception level.
|
Failure in FAX board
| Replace FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
| Replace MFBS board
Line failure
Check line noise and reception level.
|
Failure in FAX board
| Replace FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
| Replace MFBS board
Warm restart switch
was pressed
|
Failure in FAX board
| Replace FAX board
Failure in MFBS board
| Replace MFBS board
Line failure
|
None.
Check line noise and reception level.
167
Troubleshooting
12.2.5
12. Troubleshooting
12. Troubleshooting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FK-503
12.3 Diagnosis by Symptoms
• Possible causes of various problems and their remedies are shown below. Carry out
troubleshooting according to this table.
Symptom
Received
image is
stretched with
ADF
Troubleshooting
Received
image is
shrunk too
much.
Received
image is too
light or faded.
168
Item
No.
1
Cause
Printed image is excessively
stretched in the copy mode?
NOTE
• The following causes may be
possible (improper document handling): special
paper such as very thick
paper, non-carbon print
paper, carbon print paper.
Remedy
YES Go to item 2.
NO Failure in remote terminal (improper
document handling, error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).
2
Is an image from the service cen- YES Go to item 3.
ter also stretched?
NO Go to item 4.
3
Any improvement after replacing
MFBS board?
YES Replace MFBS board.
4
Is the contact of feed roller gears
OK?
YES Go to item 5.
5
Any paper dust on feed rollers or
pick-up rollers?
YES Clean up rollers.
1
Printed image is excessively
shrunk in the copy mode?
YES Go to item 2.
NO Replace the PWB-A
NO Replace the feed roller gear unit.
NO Replace the leaf spring.
NO Failure in the remote terminal (improper
document handling, error in the transmission unit of the remote terminal).
2
Is an image from the service cen- YES Go to item 4.
ter also shrunk?
NO Go to item 3.
3
Any improvement after checking
the reading unit?
YES END
4
Any improvement after replacing
MFBS board?
YES Replace MFBS board.
1
Are copied image or a test image YES Go to item 2.
also too light or faded?
NO Failure in the remote side (improper
setting of document contrast, improper
NOTE
document handling, poor line condi• The following causes may be
tion, and error in the transmission unit
possible (improper setting of
document contrast): a docuof the remote terminal).
ment with small blue characters or file lines
2
Any improvement after replacing
the imaging unit?
NO Go to item 4.
NO Replace the PWB-A
YES Replace the imaging unit.
NO For details see Main service manual
“Image quality problem”.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Clock malfunctions
Neither
“Sending” nor
“Receiving”
are displayed.
Cause
Remedy
1
Are characters of copied image YES Failure in the remote side (improper
or a test image also squeezed?
setting of document contrast, and error
Improper setting of document
in the transmission unit of the remote
contrast: Received image of
terminal).
small characters or blue copies
NO Go to item 2.
with “contrast” switch set
“Darker”.
Error in remote machine:
The following causes are possible:
A. Failure in board of scanner
unit
B. Improper adjustment of optical focus
C. Dew on optical lenses
(Proceed to anti-dew.)
2
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the imaging unit.
the imaging unit?
NO For details see Copier service manual
“Image quality problem”.
1
No improper operation?
2
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace RAMS board.
RAMS board?
NO Go to item 3.
3
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Replace the PWB-A.
1
Is an alarm message on screen? YES Correct the failure and reset the alarm.
2
Is the external telephone onhooked?
YES Go to item 3.
3
Are you printing something such
as report?
YES Proceed to communication after completing print jobs.
4
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace Operating panel.
Operating panel?
NO Go to item 5.
5
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the cable between Operating
the cable between Operating
panel and BCRS.
panel and BCRS?
NO Go to item 6.
6
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace FAX board.
FAX board?
NO Go to item 7.
7
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Replace the PWB-A
FK-503
Received
image is
squeezed
Item
No.
YES Refer User’s Guide for operation.
NO Go to item 2.
NO Go to item 2.
NO Set the external telephone off-hook
then press the communication switch.
NO Go to item 4.
169
Troubleshooting
Symptom
12. Troubleshooting
12. Troubleshooting
FK-503
Symptom
Cannot go to
“Sending” nor
“Receiving”
modes
Item
No.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cause
Remedy
1
Is the password checked?
YES Go to item 2
2
Is the password correct?
YES Disable password check and Go to item
3.
3
Try to communicate with the ser- YES Go to item 4.
vice center. Same problem?
NO END
Possible causes:
Possible causes are line trouble, trouble
D. FAX button is not pressed.
or improper operation in the remote terE. Both systems are in the
minal, or the remote FAX is not contransmission (or reception)
nected.
mode.
4
Are the transmission level and
equalizer of the service center
set properly?
YES Go to item 5.
5
Did you check the mode (TX or
RX) of the remote side?
YES Go to item 6.
6
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS - FAX cable.
MFBS - FAX cable?
NO Go to item 7.
7
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace FAX board.
FAX board?
NO Go to item 8.
8
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Go to item 9.
9
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace Operating panel.
Operating panel?
NO Go to item 10.
10
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the cable between Operating
the cable between Operating
panel and BCRS.
panel and BCRS?
NO Replace the PWB-A
1
Did you select the automatic
reception mode?
YES Go to item 2
2
Is the external telephone on
hook?
YES Go to item 3.
3
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS - FAX cable.
MFBS - FAX cable?
NO Go to item 4.
4
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace FAX board.
FAX board?
NO Go to item 5.
5
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Go to item 6.
6
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace Operating panel.
Operating panel?
NO Go to item 7.
7
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the cable between Operating
panel and BCRS.
the cable between Operating
panel and BCRS?
NO Replace the PWB-A
NO Go to item 3.
NO Match the password.
Troubleshooting
Automatic
reception disabled
170
NO Set them properly.
NO Confirm it by phone.
NO Select the automatic reception mode.
NO Set the external telephone on-hook.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cannot send
dial number
from 10 key
pad
Item
No.
Cause
Remedy
FK-503
Symptom
12. Troubleshooting
1
Is the external telephone offhook?
YES Go to item 2
2
Is the line type specified correctly?
YES Go to item 3.
3
Dial by 10 key?
YES Go to item 5.
4
Did you register the phone number?
YES Go to item 5.
5
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the MFBS - FAX cable.
MFBS - FAX cable?
NO Go to item 6.
6
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace FAX board.
FAX board?
NO Go to item 7.
7
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Go to item 8.
8
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace Operating panel.
Operating panel?
NO Go to item 9.
9
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the cable between Operating
the cable between Operating
panel and BCRS.
panel and BCRS?
NO Replace the PWB-A
1
Is the sound volume switch
OFF?
YES Select a sound volume switch other
than OFF.
2
Is S/W DIP SW set line monitoring?
YES Go to item 3.
3
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the speaker.
the speaker?
NO Go to item 4.
4
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace FAX board.
FAX board?
NO Go to item 5.
5
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Go to item 6.
6
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace Operating panel.
Operating panel?
NO Go to item 7.
7
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the cable between Operating
the cable between Operating
panel and BCRS.
panel and BCRS?
NO Replace the PWB-A
NO Set the handset on-hook.
NO Specify the line type (MF, 10, 20 PPS)
correctly.
NO Go to item 4.
NO Go to item 2
NO Set S/W DIP SW.
Troubleshooting
Cannot monitor communication
NO Register the phone number.
171
12. Troubleshooting
Image memory (memory
stored for TX
image) is not
backed up.
Troubleshooting
FK-503
Symptom
172
Item
No.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cause
Remedy
Proceed to the following procedure. Is the image memory
backed up?
F. TX: Disconnect the line
cable and proceed a quick
memory transmission. Turn
OFF the power switch while
waiting for the answer. Turn
ON the power and check if
data is stored in the image
memory.
G. RX: Turn OFF the power
switch while proceeding
memory reception without
printing paper. Turn ON the
power again and check if
data is stored in the image
memory.
YES Normal
2
Is the connector of BCRS board
connected?
YES Go to item 3.
3
Is the battery voltage appropriate? (1.2 V or more)
YES Go to item 6.
4
Is the battery full charged?
(Approx. 24hr)
YES Go to item 5.
5
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace the battery.
the battery?
NO Go to item 6.
6
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace MFBS board.
MFBS board?
NO Go to item 7.
7
Any improvement after replacing YES Replace RAMS board.
RAMS board?
NO Replace the PWB-A
NO Go to item 2
NO Connect the connector.
NO Go to item 4.
NO Charge the battery.
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
DF-605
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
DF-605
CONTENTS
DF-605
General
Maintenance
2.
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 5
2.1
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 5
2.1.1
Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller .............................................. 5
2.1.2
Replacing the Separation Roller ................................................................... 6
2.1.3
Cleaning of the Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller .............. 7
2.1.4
Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rolls ................................................................... 7
2.1.5
Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rollers ................................................................ 8
2.1.6
Cleaning of the Scanning Guide ................................................................... 9
2.1.7
Cleaning of the Reflective Sensor Section.................................................... 9
3.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 10
3.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................. 11
3.2.1
3.3
Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................. 11
Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................................................................... 11
3.3.1
Front Cover/Rear Cover/Original Feed Tray Rear Cover............................. 11
3.3.2
Main Control Board ..................................................................................... 12
3.3.3
Variable Resistor ......................................................................................... 12
3.3.4
Complete Stamp Unit 2............................................................................... 14
3.3.5
Replacing the Replace Stamp 2 ................................................................. 15
4.
Firmware upgrade ................................................................................................. 16
Adjustment/Setting
5.
How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 17
6.
Tech. Rep. Mode ................................................................................................... 18
6.1
Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure ...................................................... 18
6.2
Setting in the Tech. Rep. Choice ........................................................................ 18
6.2.1
6.3
6.3.1
6.4
Sheet-through-ADF ..................................................................................... 18
Setting in the Function ........................................................................................ 18
Org. Width Detect Adjust ............................................................................ 18
I/O Check............................................................................................................ 19
i
Adjustment / Setting
Other ..................................................................................................................... 10
Troubleshooting
3.
General
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Maintenance
1.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.4.1
DF-605
6.5
Setting in the Operation Check........................................................................... 21
6.5.1
Paper Passage ........................................................................................... 21
6.5.2
ADF Sensor Adjust ..................................................................................... 21
6.5.3
Backup Data Initialization ........................................................................... 21
7.
General
Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided) ..................................................................... 19
Mechanical adjustment ......................................................................................... 22
7.1
Leading Edge Skew Adjustment......................................................................... 22
7.2
Adjustment of the Scanning Zoom Ratio in the Main and Sub-Scanning
Directions ........................................................................................................... 23
7.3
Adjustment of the Scanning Start Position in the Main and Sub-Scanning
Directions ........................................................................................................... 24
7.4
Document Size Detection Adjustment ................................................................ 26
Troubleshooting
Maintenance
8.
Jam Display........................................................................................................... 27
8.1
Misfeed display ................................................................................................... 27
Adjustment / Setting
8.1.1
Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 27
8.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 28
8.3.1
Initial check items ....................................................................................... 28
8.3.2
Misfeed at Paper Take-Up section .............................................................. 28
8.3.3
Misfeed at Transport section....................................................................... 29
8.3.4
Misfeed at Turnover section ........................................................................ 29
8.3.5
Misfeed at Paper Exit section ..................................................................... 30
9.
Malfunction code................................................................................................... 31
9.1
Trouble code ....................................................................................................... 31
9.2
Solution .............................................................................................................. 31
Troubleshooting
9.2.1
10.
ii
Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 27
8.2
C8301: ADF Cooling Fan Motor Failure...................................................... 31
Set error detection ................................................................................................ 32
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
General
Product specifications
DF-605
1.
A. Type
Name
Reverse Automatic Document Feeder
Paper Feed from top of stack
Turnover
Switch back system
Paper Exit
Straight exit system
Installation
Screw cramp to the main unit
Document Alignment
Center
Document Loading
Left image side up
General
Paper Feed
Type
B. Functions
Modes
1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode
C. Paper type
Standard Mode
Plain Paper
Type of Document
Mixed Original Detection
Mode
Plain Paper
FAX Mode
Plain Paper
1-Sided Mode
35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
1-Sided Mode
35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lb)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)
Detectable Document
Size*1
Metric area
B6R to A3
Inch area
5.5 × 8.5R / 5.5 × 8.5 to 11 × 17
Capacity
80 sheets (80 g/m2) or load height of 11 mm or less.
*1: For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection
Enabled Size Combination Table.
1
1. Product specifications
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
DF-605
D. Paper feed prohibited originals
• If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
General
Type of Original
Possible Trouble
Original that is stapled or clipped.
Feed failure, damage to the original, or drive
failure due to clip clogging
Book original
Feed failure, damage to the original, or drive
failure
Original weighing less than 35g/m2 or
129g/m2 or more
Feed failure
Torn original
Feed failure, damaged sheet
Highly curled original (15 mm or more)
Original misfeed due to dog-ear or skew
OHP transparencies
Feed failure
Label Sheet
Feed failure
Offset master
Feed failure
Sheets clipped or notched
Damaged sheet
Sheets patched
Patched part folded or torn sheet, Sheets
misfed
E. Paper feed not guaranteed originals
• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of Original
Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 - 15 mm)
Possible Trouble
Dog-eared, exit failure
Heat Sensitive Paper
Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure
Coated Paper (Ink Jet Paper)
Take-up failure, transport failure
Translucent paper
Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit
Take-up failure, transport failure
Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited
Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
to vertical feeding
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes
2
Transport failure
Sheets two-folded or Z-folded
Transport failure, image deformation
Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead)
Take-up failure
Sheets folded
Image deformation, multi-page feed, take-up
failure
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
Mixed Original Size
297 mm
257 mm
210 mm
297 mm
257 mm
210 mm
182 mm 148 mm
A3
A4
B4
B5
A4R
A5
B5R
A5R
A3
OK
OK
-
-
-
-
-
-
A4
OK
OK
-
-
-
-
-
-
B4
OK
OK
OK
OK
-
-
-
-
B5
OK
OK
OK
OK
-
-
-
-
A4R
OK*
OK*
OK
OK
OK
OK
-
-
A5
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
OK
-
-
182 mm
B5R
NG
NG
OK*
OK*
OK
OK
OK
-
148 mm
A5R
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
OK
123 mm
B6R
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
General
Max. Original
Size
For Inch
Max. Original Size
Mixed Original Size
11
8.5
5.5
OK
NG
11
8.5
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 11R
5.5
11 x 17
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5
11 x 17
OK
OK
-
-
-
-
8.5 x 11
OK
OK
-
-
-
-
8.5 x 5.5R
-
8.5 x 14
OK*
OK*
OK
OK
OK
8.5 x 11R
OK*
OK*
OK
OK
OK
-
8.5 x 5.5
NG
NG
OK
OK
OK
-
8.5 x 5.5R
NG
NG
NG
NG
NG
OK
Mixed Original Feed available
(Tilted with in 1.5% or less)
NO. Mixed Original Feed
-
Can not Set Original
*
Tilted with in 2% or less is 80%
G. Machine specifications
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
Power Requirements
DC 5 V (generated within the Automatic Document Feeder)
DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main unit)
Max. Power Consumption
48 W or less
Dimensions
582 (W) x 558 (D) x 145 (H) mm
23 inch (W) x 20.5 inch (D) x 5.75 inch (H)
Weight
10 kg (22 lb) or less
DF-605
F. Mixed original feed chart
For Metric
H. Operating
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
DF-605
1. Product specifications
Blank Page
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
Maintenance
Periodical check
2.1
DF-605
2.
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
2.1.1
Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
4344F2C500DA
2. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the cover [3].
[3]
[2]
4344F2C501DA
3. Remove two C-clips [4], and remove
the Pick-up Roller Assy [5].
[5]
[4]
4344F2C502DA
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
[10]
[7]
[10] [9]
Remove two levers [6].
Remove five C-rings [7].
Remove the arm [8].
Remove the belt [9].
Remove two Pick-up Rollers [10].
[6]
[7]
[8]
4344F2C503DA
5
Maintenance
[1]
2. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Remove the C-ring [11], and remove
the gear [12] and the bushing [13].
10. Remove two pins [14].
11. Remove the Feed Roller [15].
NOTE
• Use care not to lose the pin.
[11]
DF-605
[14]
[12]
[13]
[15]
4344F2C504DA
2.1.2
Replacing the Separation Roller
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
Maintenance
[1]
4344F2C500DA
2. Hold the [2] sections in the figure,
and remove the cover [3].
[2]
[3]
[2]
4344F2C505DA
[4]
3. Remove the Separation Roller Assy
[4].
NOTE
• Use care not to lose the spring at
the bottom side of the Separation
Roller Assy.
4344F2C506DA
4. While opening up the holder [5],
remove the shaft [6].
NOTE
• Opening the holder too much can
break the holder.
[5]
[6]
4344F2C507DA
6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
5. Remove the Separation Roller [7]
from the shaft.
DF-605
[7]
4344F2C508DA
2.1.3
Cleaning of the Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
Maintenance
[1]
4344F2C500DA
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [2],
Feed Roller [3] and Separation
Roller [4].
[3]
[4]
[2]
2.1.4
4344F2C509DA
Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rolls
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roll [2].
[2]
4344F2C510DA
3. Lift up the Original Feed Tray [3].
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roll [4].
[3]
[4]
4344F2C511DA
7
DF-605
2. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. Open the Duplexing Document
Feeder.
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roll [5].
[5]
[5]
[5]
4344F2C512DA
2.1.5
Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rollers
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller [2].
[2]
Maintenance
[1]
4344F2C519DA
[3]
[4]
3. Lift up the Original Feed Tray [3].
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller [4].
4344F2C520DA
5. Remove the Front Cover and Rear
Cover.
☞ 11
6. Disconnect eight connectors [5] on
the board.
[5]
[5]
[5]
4344F2C521DA
7. Remove the lever [6].
[6]
4344F2C530DA
8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8. Remove seven screws [7], and
remove the Paper Feed Unit [8].
[7]
DF-605
[7]
2. Periodical check
[8]
4344F2C531DA
9. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller [9].
[9]
Maintenance
[9]
4344F2C532DA
2.1.6
Cleaning of the Scanning Guide
1. Open the Duplexing Document
Feeder.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Scanning Guide [1]
clean of dirt.
[1]
4344F2C533DA
2.1.7
Cleaning of the Reflective Sensor Section
[1]
1. Clean the sensor [1] using a brush or
other similar tools.
4344F2C518DA
9
3. Other
DF-605
3.
3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
10
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
3.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
No.
Section
1
Part name
Ref.Page
Front Cover
☞ 11
Rear Cover
☞ 11
4
Original Feed Tray Rear Cover
☞ 11
5
Main Control Board
☞ 12
Variable Resistor
☞ 12
Complete Stamp Unit 2
☞ 14
Replace Stamp 2
☞ 15
Exterior parts
2
Board and etc.
6
7
Others
8
3.3
DF-605
3.2
3. Other
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
3.3.1
Front Cover/Rear Cover/Original Feed Tray Rear Cover
Maintenance
[3]
[9]
[4]
[5]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[1]
4344F2C513DA
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Remove two screws [1], and remove the Front Cover [2].
Remove two screws [3].
Lift up the Original Feed Tray, and remove the Rear Cover [4].
Remove the screw [5] and the washer [6], and remove the stopper [7].
Lift up the Original Feed Tray.
Remove four screws [8], and remove the Original Feed Tray Rear Cover [9].
11
3. Other
3.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Main Control Board
1.
2.
☞
3.
DF-605
[1]
[1]
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
Remove the Rear Cover.
11
Disconnect all the connectors on the
board.
4. Remove three screws [1], and then
remove the Main Control Board [2].
[2]
4344F2C514DA
NOTE
• Be sure to perform the following operation when the Main Control Board is
replaced.
Maintenance
5.
☞
6.
☞
7.
Initialize the backup data.
21
Perform document width detection adjustment.
18
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again and check whether size detection operates normally.
8. Upgrade the firmware.
☞ 16
3.3.3
Variable Resistor
[1]
[2]
[3]
[2]
4344F2C522DA
[4]
A. Removal Procedure
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
2. Remove the Original Feed Tray Rear
Cover.
☞ 11
3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4. Remove two screws [2] and the
mounting bracket [3].
5. Remove the gear [4].
4344F2C523DA
[5]
[6]
[7]
4344F2C524DA
12
6. Remove the nut [5] and the washer
[6], and remove the Variable Resistor
[7].
3. Other
[1]
4344F2C525DA
B. Reinstallation Procedure
1. Close the Side Edge Stop [1] of the
Original Feed Tray.
NOTE
• Be sure to perform document width
detection adjustment after replacing the Variable Resistor (PBA-VR).
☞ 26
DF-605
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Use the nut [2] and the washer [3] to
install the Variable Resistor [4].
NOTE
• Align the protrusion of the Variable
Resistor and the cutout of the
mounting bracket.
[2]
[3]
[4]
3. Turn the Variable Resistor [5] counterclockwise until it stops.
[5]
4344F2C527DA
4. Reinstall the gear [6].
NOTE
• Note the mounting position of the
gear and the Variable Resistor.
[6]
4344F2C528DA
[8]
[7]
[8]
[9]
5. Connect the connector [7].
6. Use two screws [8] to install the Variable Resistor [9].
NOTE
• Install the gear and rack gear by
aligning the arrows.
4344F2C529DA
7. Install the Original Feed Tray Rear Cover and turn ON the Main Power Switch.
13
Maintenance
4344F2C526DA
3. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
DF-605
NOTE
• Be sure to perform the following operation when the Variable Resistor is replaced.
8.
☞
9.
☞
10.
Initialize the backup data.
21
Perform document width detection adjustment.
18
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch and turn it ON again and check whether size detection operates normally.
3.3.4
Complete Stamp Unit 2
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
2. Open the Processing Guide [2].
[2]
[1]
Maintenance
4344F2C534DA
3. Remove the screw [3] and the cover
[4].
[3]
[4]
4344F2C535DA
4. Remove the screw [5] and disconnect the connector [6], and remove
the Complete Stamp Unit 2 [7].
[5]
[6]
[7]
4344F2C536DA
14
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
3.3.5
3. Other
Replacing the Replace Stamp 2
DF-605
1. Open the Upper Door [1].
2. Open the Processing Guide [2].
[2]
[1]
4344F2C534DA
[3]
[5]
4344F2C537DA
3. Remove the stamp.
4. Reinstall the new Replace Stamp 2
[3].
NOTE
• Align the protrusion of the stamp to
the crevice of the holder.
5. Close the Processing Guide.
6. Close the Upper Door.
Maintenance
[4]
15
4. Firmware upgrade
DF-605
4.
1.
2.
3.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Firmware upgrade
Prepare the firmware upgrade EP-ROM.
Turn OFF the Main Power Switch.
Remove the Rear Cover.
11
4. Insert the prepared EP-ROM [2] to
the IC socket section [1] of the Main
Control Board.
NOTE
• Ensure that the EP-ROM is installed
in the correct direction.
5. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
[2]
Maintenance
[1]
4344F2C515DA
[3]
4344F2C516DA
6. Check the firmware update status at
the Print Lamp Display Section [3] of
the Duplexing Document Feeder.
Updating: Green and red light up alternately.
Successful completion: Blinks in green.
Failure: Blinks in red.
• If failure occurs, redo the procedure
from step 4.
7. After the firmware has been
upgraded successfully, turn OFF the
Main Power Switch and remove the
EP-ROM [4] that was attached at
step 4.
[4]
4344F2C517DA
4040F2C750DA
16
8. Turn ON the Main Power Switch.
9. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
10. Touch the [ROM Version] and check
the ADF ROM version.
11. Correct the version indication on the
ROM label on the Main Control
Board using a pen or other similar
means.
12. Reinstall the Rear Cover.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. How to use the adjustment section
5.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
DF-605
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
17
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
6. Tech. Rep. Mode
DF-605
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Tech. Rep. Mode
Tech. Rep. Mode function setting procedure
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
6.2
Setting in the Tech. Rep. Choice
6.2.1
Sheet-through-ADF
A. Registration Loop
Functions
• To adjust the length of the loop to be formed in paper before the Registration Rollers.
Use
• For factory adjustment only
B. Zoom
Functions
• To set the CD and FD scan zoom ratios in the sheet-through ADF.
Use
• When setting up the ADF
Setting/
Procedure
☞ 23
Adjustment / Setting
C. Feed (CD)
Functions
• To adjust the CD image scan start position in the sheet-through ADF.
Use
• When setting up the ADF
Setting/
Procedure
☞ 24
D. Feed (FD)
Functions
• To adjust the FD image scan start position in the sheet-through ADF.
Use
• When setting up the ADF
Setting/
Procedure
☞ 24
6.3
Setting in the Function
6.3.1
Org. Width Detect Adjust
Functions
• To detect the size of the original loaded in the ADF
Use
• When the Variable Resistor is replaced with a new one
• When the backup data is initialized
Setting/
Procedure
☞ 18
18
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O Check
6.4.1
Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided)
Functions
• To check sensors on the paper path.
Use
• When a document misfeed occurs.
DF-605
6.4
6. Tech. Rep. Mode
A. Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Procedure
Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode.
Touch the [I/O Check].
Touch the [Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided)].
Operate the sensor to check by using paper or the like, and check the screen display.
(Paper detected: 1, No paper detected: 0)
Adjustment / Setting
C. I/O check screen
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4344F3E519DA
19
6. Tech. Rep. Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
DF-605
D. I/O check list
Symbol
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
1
0
Paper not
present
Empty
Empty Sensor
PC9-ADF
Registration
Registration Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC8-ADF
Before Scanning
Original Detection Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC10-ADF
Exit and Turn Over
Exit/Turnover Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Orig. Length 1
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 1
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Orig. Length 2
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked
Orig. Length 3
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 3
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Orig. Length 4
FD Paper Size Detection Sensor 4
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Behind Separator
Separator Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Org. Width Detect 0
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Org. Width Detect 1 Mix Document Size Detection Board
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Org. Width Detect 2
Paper
present
Paper not
present
OPEN
CLOSE
PC3-ADF
PC4-ADF
PC6-ADF
PWB-SIZE
Sheet-through-ADF (2-sided)
PC5-ADF
PC2-ADF
Adjustment / Setting
Part/Signal name
Paper
present
PC1-ADF
20
Panel display
PC7-ADF
Side Cover
Upper Door Open/Close Sensor
PBA-VR
Orig. Width Vol.
Variable Resistor
Analog value
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Setting in the Operation Check
6.5.1
Paper Passage
Functions
• To check for paper passage through the ADF in each of the ADF modes.
Use
• Used for checking the document path for any abnormal condition when a document
misfeed occurs.
Setting/
Procedure
<Procedure>
1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode.
2. Touch the [Operation Check].
3. Touch the [ADF].
4. Touch the [Paper Passage].
5. Select the Paper Passage Mode to be tested from [1-Sided No Detect] and
[Double-Sided].
6. Set the Original in the Take-up Tray.
7. The Start key color changes from orange to green.
8. Press the Start key. The operation starts.
DF-605
6.5
6. Tech. Rep. Mode
NOTE
• After starting the operation by pressing the Start key, if the Start key is pressed
during the operation, the operation will be suspended. Then, if the Start key is
pressed again during the suspension, the operation will be resumed.
• If the Stop key is pressed during the test operation, the test will be forced to end.
• If there is no Original set in the Take-up Tray, the Start key will not work.
• All Originals set in the Take-up Tray are passed through. Upon the completion of
all Originals passed through, the Paper Through Test ends.
ADF Sensor Adjust
Functions
• To make an automatic adjustment of the sensor.
Use
• When a document misfeed occurs.
• When the sensor is replaced.
Setting/
Procedure
<Procedure>
1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode.
2. Touch the [Operation Check].
3. Touch the [ADF].
4. Touch the [ADF Sensor Adjust].
5. Press the Start key to let the ADF start making an automatic adjustment of the sensor.
6.5.3
Backup Data Initialization
Functions
• To initialize the values set through ADF Sensor Adjust and Org. Width Detect Adjust.
Use
• When the Main Control Board is replaced.
• When the Variable Resistor is replaced.
Setting/
Procedure
<Procedure>
1. Set the mode to the Tech. Rep. Mode.
2. Touch the [Operation Check].
3. Touch the [ADF].
4. Touch the [Backup Data Initialization].
5. [Touch [Yes] and [Enter] to start the initialization sequence.
21
Adjustment / Setting
6.5.2
7. Mechanical adjustment
DF-605
7.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Mechanical adjustment
7.1
Leading Edge Skew Adjustment
[1]
1. Load the test chart [1] in the Reverse
Automatic Document Feeder and
make one 1-sided copy five consecutive times.
4344F3C501DA
2. Fold each of the sample copies as
illustrated and check for any deviation.
Specifications: 0 ± 3.0 mm
3. If the deviation does not fall within
the specified range, perform the following adjustment procedure.
Adjustment / Setting
4. Loosen the decorative screw [2] and
the nut [3] in the back to the right.
[2]
[3]
4344F3C502DA
5. If there is a deviation as shown on
the figure, turn the screw counterclockwise to adjust it.
4344F3C503DA
22
7. Mechanical adjustment
6. If there is a deviation as shown on
the figure, turn the screw clockwise
to adjust it.
7. After the adjustment procedure has
been completed, tighten the decorative screw and the nut which has
been loosened in step 4.
DF-605
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4344F3C504DA
Adjustment of the Scanning Zoom Ratio in the Main and SubScanning Directions
[1]
1. Load the test chart [1] in the Reverse
Automatic Document Feeder and
make a full-size copy.
4344F3C501DA
2. Check that the lengths of the reference lines reproduced on the copy, A
(CD) and B (FD), meet the following
specifications.
Specification:
A (CD): 250 ± 2.5 mm (± 1.0 %)
B (FD): 400 ± 6.0 mm (± 1.5 %)
A
B
4344F3C505DA
3. If the length of the line reproduced
on the copy falls outside the specified range, select Tech. Rep. Mode
→ [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Sheetthrough-ADF] → [Zoom].
4344F3E520DA
23
Adjustment / Setting
7.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
DF-605
7. Mechanical adjustment
4344F3E521DA
7.3
4. Touch the [Copy] of CD or FD.
5. Press the Clear key.
6. Enter the value from the 10-Key Pad.
• If the line is longer than the specifications, adjust toward the reduction side.
• If the line is shorter than the specifications, adjust toward the enlargement
side.
Adjustment Range:
CD: ×1.010 to ×0.990
FD: ×1.020 to ×0.980
7. Touch the [END].
8. Produce another test print and check
for width A.
Adjustment of the Scanning Start Position in the Main and
Sub-Scanning Directions
NOTE
• Make this adjustment after adjusting the scanning zoom ratio in the main and subscanning directions.
Adjustment / Setting
[1]
1. Load the test chart [1] in the Reverse
Automatic Document Feeder and
make a full-size copy.
2. Make a full-size copy using the 2side original/2-side copy mode.
(Face down the test chart)
4344F3C501DA
3. Check that the margins reproduced
on the copy meet the following specifications.
• In full size copy mode
Specification:
Width A: 20 ± 3.0 mm
Width B: 20 ± 2.0 mm
A
B
4344F3C509DA
• In 2-side original mode
Specification:
Width A: 20 ± 3.5 mm
4. If the length of the line reproduced
on the copy falls outside the specified range, select Tech. Rep. Mode
→ [Tech. Rep. Choice] → [Sheetthrough-ADF] → [Feed (CD)] or
[Feed (FD)].
4344F3E521DA
24
FD direction
+ direction
CD direction
- direction
- direction
+ direction
Copy
4344F3C510DA
4344F3E522DA
4344F3E523DA
5. By referring to the left figure, select
[Feed (CD)] or [Feed (FD)] to adjust
the deviation.
• If the deviation is in the - direction with
respect to the reference line:
Adjust in the + direction.
• If the deviation is in the + direction with
respect to the reference line:
Adjust in the - direction.
DF-605
7. Mechanical adjustment
In the case of Feed (CD)
6. Press the Clear key.
7. Enter the numeric value from the 10Key Pad.
(1 mm = 24 dot)
Adjustment Range:
Max +72
Min -72
Press the ✽ key to change the sign to
select either + or -.
In the case of Feed (FD)
8. Select [Front (F)] or [Back (B)].
9. Press the Clear key.
10. Enter the numeric value from the 10Key Pad.
(0.1 mm increments)
Adjustment Range:
Max +4.0 mm (F), +4.0 mm (B)
Min -4.0 mm (F), -4.0 mm (B)
11. Touch the [END].
12. Make another copy and check the
error.
25
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7. Mechanical adjustment
DF-605
7.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Document Size Detection Adjustment
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Variable Resistor has been replaced.
• When the backup data has been initialized.
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
2. Touch the [Function].
3. Touch the [Org. Width Detect Adjust].
4344F3E524DA
4. Align the original edge plane of the
Side Edge Stop [1] of the Original
Feed Tray to the outside ▼ mark.
[1]
4344F3C514DA
Adjustment / Setting
5. Touch the [Maximum Size].
6. Press the Start key.
4344F3E525DA
7. Align the original edge plane of the
Side Edge Stop [2] of the Original
Feed Tray to the inside ▼ mark.
[2]
4344F3C516DA
8. Touch the [Minimum Size].
9. Press the Start key.
10. Check whether size detection operates normally.
4344F3E526DA
26
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
Jam Display
8.1
DF-605
8.
Misfeed display
• When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
[1]
4344F4E503DA
Panel
display
[1]
8.1.1
Misfeed location
Misfeed access location
Paper Take-Up section
Paper Take-Up section Cover
Transport section
Paper Take-Up section Cover
Turnover section
Paper Exit section Cover
Paper Exit section
Paper Exit section Cover
Action
☞
☞
☞
☞
28
29
29
30
Misfeed display resetting procedure
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
[1]
Sensor layout
[2]
Troubleshooting
8.2
[3]
[4]
4344F4C500DA
[1] Original Detection Sensor
PC8-ADF
[3] Separator Sensor
PC6-ADF
[2] Registration Sensor
PC9-ADF
[4] Exit/Turnover Sensor
PC10-ADF
27
8. Jam Display
DF-605
8.3
8.3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Solution
Initial check items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Instruct the user on the correct paper storage
procedures.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
the paper path deformed or worn?
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the corSet as necessary.
rect position to accommodate the paper?
Are the actuators operating correctly?
8.3.2
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
Misfeed at Paper Take-Up section
A. Detection timing
Type
Description
Detection of misfeed at
Paper Take-Up section
Detection of paper left in
Paper Take-Up section
The Separator Sensor (PC6-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-ADF) is energized.
The Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-ADF) is energized.
The Separator Sensor (PC6-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF) is
blocked by the paper.
The Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF) is
blocked by the paper.
Troubleshooting
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Paper Feed Motor (M1-ADF)
Separator Sensor (PC6-ADF)
Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF)
Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF)
Main Control Board (PBA-CONT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
28
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC6-ADF I/O check
PBA-CONT CN5CONT-11
DF-605 G-5
3
PC9-ADF I/O check
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-3
DF-605 G-3
4
PC8-ADF I/O check
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-6
DF-605 G-3
5
M1-ADF operation check
PBA-CONT CN7CONT-3 to 6
DF-605 C-6
6
Change PBA-CONT
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.3.3
8. Jam Display
Misfeed at Transport section
Type
Description
Detection of misfeed at
Transport section
The Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF) is
blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
Transport section
The Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF) is not unblocked even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF) is
unblocked by the paper.
DF-605
A. Detection timing
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Paper Feed Motor (M1-ADF)
Transport Motor (M2-ADF)
Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF)
Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF)
Main Control Board (PBA-CONT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Initial check items
2
PC9-ADF I/O check
3
PC8-ADF I/O check
4
M1-ADF operation check
5
M2-ADF operation check
PBA-CONT CN8CONT-3 to 6
DF-605 C-6
6
Change PBA-CONT
-
-
8.3.4
-
-
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-3
DF-605 G-3
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-6
DF-605 G-3
PBA-CONT CN7CONT-3 to 6
DF-605 C-6
Misfeed at Turnover section
A. Detection timing
Description
The Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF) is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Transport Motor (M2-ADF) is energized.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Transport Motor (M2-ADF)
Registration Sensor (PC9-ADF)
Main Control Board (PBA-CONT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
1
Initial check items
2
PC9-ADF I/O check
3
M2-ADF operation check
4
Change PBA-CONT
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
-
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-3
DF-605 G-3
PBA-CONT CN8CONT-3 to 6
DF-605 C-6
-
-
29
Troubleshooting
Type
Detection of misfeed at
Turnover section
8. Jam Display
8.3.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Misfeed at Paper Exit section
DF-605
A. Detection timing
Type
Description
Detection of misfeed at
Paper Exit section
The Exit/Turnover Sensor (PC10-ADF) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF)
is blocked by the paper.
Detection of paper left in
Paper Exit section
The Exit/Turnover Sensor (PC10-ADF) is not unblocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF)
is unblocked by the paper.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Transport Motor (M2-ADF)
Original Detection Sensor (PC8-ADF)
Exit/Turnover Sensor (PC10-ADF)
Main Control Board (PBA-CONT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
30
Action
1
Initial check items
2
PC8-ADF I/O check
3
PC10-ADF I/O check
4
M2-ADF operation check
5
Change PBA-CONT
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
-
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-6
DF-605 G-3
PBA-CONT CN6CONT-9
DF-605 G-4
PBA-CONT CN8CONT-3 to 6
DF-605 C-6
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Malfunction code
9.1
Trouble code
• The copier’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch
Panel.
DF-605
9.
9. Malfunction code
4040F4E510DA
9.2
Solution
9.2.1
C8301: ADF Cooling Fan Motor Failure
A. Detection timing
Trouble Code
C8301
Description
• The Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time
while ADF Cooling Fan Motor is rotating.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Cooling Fan Motor (M3-ADF)
Main Control Board (PBA-CONT)
Action
1
Check the M3-ADF connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
2
M3-ADF operation check
3
Change PBA-CONT
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
-
PBA-CONT CN9CONT-2
DF-605 C-6
-
-
31
Troubleshooting
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
10. Set error detection
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
DF-605
10. Set error detection
• When the ADF or cover set error for some reason is detected, the Panel of the main unit
will have the following display.
[1]
[2]
4344F4E504DA
<Panel display and detection timing for each>
Troubleshooting
Panel
display
32
Description of error
Detection start
Detection timing
[1]
Upper Door closure
When the document is
loaded into the ADF
Upper Door Open/Close Sensor
(unblocked)
[2]
ADF closure
When the document is
loaded into the ADF
Copier Size Reset Switch (ON)
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
PC-102/PC-202
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-102/PC-202
CONTENTS
PC-102/PC-202
General
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 3
2.1.1
Replacing the Separation Roller Assy........................................................... 3
2.1.2
Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.............................................................. 4
2.1.3
Replacing the Pick-up Roller......................................................................... 6
3.
Other ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 8
3.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................... 9
3.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 9
3.2.2
Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 9
3.3
Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................................................................... 10
3.3.1
Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover........... 10
3.3.2
Rear Cover.................................................................................................. 10
3.4
Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 11
3.4.1
Separation Roller ........................................................................................ 11
3.4.2
Paper Take-up Roller................................................................................... 11
3.4.3
Pick-up Roller.............................................................................................. 12
3.4.4
Vertical Transport Roller.............................................................................. 12
Adjustment/Setting
4.
How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 13
5.
I/O check ............................................................................................................... 14
5.1
Check procedure ................................................................................................ 14
5.2
I/O check list ....................................................................................................... 14
5.2.1
I/O check screen ......................................................................................... 14
5.2.2
Sensor check list ......................................................................................... 15
6.
Mechanical adjustment ......................................................................................... 16
6.1
Registration (CD) ................................................................................................ 16
6.2
Registration (FD) ................................................................................................ 18
i
Adjustment / Setting
2.
Maintenance
Maintenance
General
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Troubleshooting
1.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-102/PC-202
Troubleshooting
7.
Jam Display........................................................................................................... 21
7.1
Misfeed display ................................................................................................... 21
7.1.1
Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 22
7.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 23
General
7.2
7.3.1
Initial check items ....................................................................................... 23
7.3.2
Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed
(PC-102/PC-202) ........................................................................................ 24
7.3.3
Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed
(PC-202) ..................................................................................................... 25
8.
Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 26
Maintenance
8.1
Trouble code display ........................................................................................... 26
8.2
Trouble code list.................................................................................................. 26
8.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 27
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
8.3.1
ii
Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 21
C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure
C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure ....................................................................... 27
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
1.
PC-102/PC-202
General
Product specifications
A. Type
Name
2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet
Type
Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device
Desk type
Document Alignment
Center
General
Installation
B. Paper type
Type
Size
Capacity
Plain paper
56 to 90 g/m2 (15 to 24 lb)
A5R to A3, 5.5 × 8.5R to 11 × 17
3rd Tray
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
4th Tray
500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
C. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V ± 5 %
Max. Power Consumption
15 W or less
Dimensions
570 mm (W) × 548 mm (D) × 263 mm (H)
Weight
PC-102: 22.0 kg (48.5 lb)
PC-202: 25.9 kg (57 lb)
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
PC-102/PC-202
1. Product specifications
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
2.
2.1
2.1.1
PC-102/PC-202
Maintenance
Periodical check
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
[2]
1. Remove the Right Door.
☞ 10
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove
the Jam Access Cover [2].
[1]
[1]
[4]
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove
the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4].
[3]
[3]
4348fs2612c0
[7]
[5]
[6]
[5]
4. Remove two C-rings [5] and the
shaft [6], and remove the Paper Separation Roller Fixing Bracket Assy
[7].
NOTE
• Be careful not to lose spring at this
time.
4061F2C500DA
[10]
[9]
[8]
5. Remove the C-ring [8], the Guide [9],
and remove the Separation Roller
Assy [10].
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
4061F2C501DA
3
Maintenance
4348fs2611c0
2. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-102/PC-202
NOTE
• Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns
to the metal bracket of the machine.
• Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when
installed.
4348fs2623c0
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
Maintenance
2.1.2
Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller
[1]
4348F2C502DA
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover.
(Remove the Right Lower Cover for
4th row.)
☞ 10
2. Remove the Tray3. (Remove the
Tray4 from 4th row.)
3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 3 of “Replacing the
Separation Roller Assy” on p. 3.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the harness from two wire
saddles.
5. Remove four screws [2] and remove
the Paper Take-up Unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2603c0
[4]
[4]
[5]
4348fs2604c0
4
6. Remove two screws [4] and remove
the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper
Separation Roller Mounting Bracket
Assy.
2. Periodical check
7. Remove two screws [6] and remove
the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[7]
[6]
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4348fs2605c0
8. Remove the C-ring [8] and remove
the bushing [9].
[8]
[9]
[10]
9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left, and
remove the C-ring [11] and the gear
[12].
[12]
[11]
4348fs2607c0
10. Remove the C-ring [13], the bushing
[14], and remove the shaft Assy [15].
[15]
[14]
[13]
4348fs2608c0
5
Maintenance
4348fs2606c0
2. Periodical check
11. Remove two E-rings [16] and the
bushing [17], and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [18].
[18]
[16]
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[16]
[17]
4348fs2609c0
12. Remove the C-ring [19] and remove
the Paper Take-up Roller [20].
13. Repeat steps 1 to 12 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
[19]
[20]
4348fs2610c0
Maintenance
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
2.1.3
Replacing the Pick-up Roller
[1]
4348F2C502DA
5. Remove four screws [2] and remove
the Paper Take-up Unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2603c0
6
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover.
(Remove the Right Lower Cover for
4th row.)
☞ 10
2. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the
Tray4 from 4th row.)
3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 3 of “Replacing the
Separation Roller Assy” on p. 3.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and
remove the harness from two wire
saddles.
2. Periodical check
[4]
[5]
6. Remove two screws [4] and remove
the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with
frame.
[4]
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4348fs2617c0
[7]
7. Remove two screws [6] and remove
the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[6]
4348fs2605c0
8. Remove two C-rings [8], two bushings [9], and remove the Pick-up
Roller Assy [10].
[8]
Maintenance
[8]
[9]
[9]
[10]
4348fs2618c0
9. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove
the Pick-up Roller [12].
10. Repeat steps 1 to 9 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
[11]
[12]
4348fs2619c0
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
7
3. Other
PC-102/PC-202
3.
3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
No
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
Section
Part name
Ref. page
Right Door
☞ 10
Rear Right Cover
☞ 10
Lower Right Cover
☞ 10
4
Front Right Cover
☞ 10
5
Rear Cover
☞ 10
1
2
3
3.2.2
No
Exterior parts
Cleaning parts list
Section
1
2
Paper feed section
3
4
PC-102/PC-202
3.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
Transport section
Part name
Ref. page
Separation Roller
☞ 11
Paper Take-up Roller
☞ 11
Pick-up Roller
☞ 12
Vertical Transport Roller
☞ 12
Maintenance
3.2
3. Other
9
3. Other
PC-102/PC-202
3.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
3.3.1
Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
Maintenance
[6]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
[4]
4348fs2621c0
Open the Right Door [1].
Remove the Right Door [1].
Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].
Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].
3.3.2
Rear Cover
[1]
[1]
[2]
1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
10
4348fs2622c0
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cleaning procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
3.4.1
Separation Roller
[2]
1. Remove the Right Door.
☞ 10
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove
the Jam Access Cover [2].
PC-102/PC-202
3.4
3. Other
[1]
[1]
4348fs2611c0
[4]
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove
the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [4].
Maintenance
[3]
[3]
4348fs2612c0
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller
[5] clean of dirt.
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
[5]
4348fs2613c0
3.4.2
Paper Take-up Roller
[1]
4348fs2601c0
1. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the
Tray4 from 4th row.)
2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 3 of the cleaning procedure for “Separation Roller” on p.
11.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-up
Roller [1] clean of dirt.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
11
3. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-102/PC-202
3.4.3
Pick-up Roller
[1]
4348fs2602c0
3.4.4
Vertical Transport Roller
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport
Roller [1] clean of dirt.
Maintenance
[1]
[1]
4348fs2620c0
12
1. Remove the Tray3.(Remove the
Tray4 from 4th row.)
2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 3 of the cleaning procedure for “Separation Roller” on p.
11.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1]
clean of dirt.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 similarly for the
4th Drawer.
4. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting
4.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
13
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
PC-102/PC-202
5. I/O check
5.
5.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O check
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the main unit service manual.
2. Touch the [I/O Check].
3. Touch the [Printer].
4. Touch the [Tray 3] or [Tray 4].
5.2
5.2.1
I/O check list
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4061F3C516DA
14
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
A. Printer (PC-102/PC-202)
Symbol
Panel display
Part/Signal name
PC112-PF
Tray Set
Tray3 Set Sensor
PC113-PF
Paper Near Empty Tray3 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
1
0
Set
Out of
position
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Raised
Position
Not raised
PC115-PF
Paper Empty
PC114-PF
Upper Side Detect Tray3 Lift Sensor
PC118-PF
CD Size 1
Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 1
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
PC119-PF
CD Size 2
Tray3 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Tray 3
Tray3 Paper Empty Sensor
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
FD Size 1
FD Size 2
PWB-I3 PF
FD Size 3
Tray3 FD Paper Size Detection
Board
FD Size 4
PC111-PF
Take-up Lower
Door Sensor
When
opened
When
closed
PC116-PF
Pickup
Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC121-PF
Tray Set
Tray4 Set Sensor
Set
Out of
position
PC122-PF
Paper Near Empty Tray4 Paper Near-Empty Sensor
Unblocked
Paper
present
Raised
Position
Not raised
PC124-PF
Paper Empty
PC123-PF
Upper Side Detect Tray4 Lift Sensor
PC127-PF
CD Size 1
Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 1
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
CD Size 2
Tray4 CD Paper Size Sensor 2
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Maximum
value
Not at maximum value
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC128-PF
Tray 4
Tray4 Paper Empty Sensor
Blocked
Paper not
present
FD Size 1
FD Size 2
PWB-I4 PF
FD Size 3
Tray4 FD Paper Size Detection
Board
FD Size 4
PC125-PF
Pickup
Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor
15
PC-102/PC-202
Sensor check list
Adjustment / Setting
5.2.2
5. I/O check
PC-102/PC-202
6. Mechanical adjustment
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Mechanical adjustment
Registration (CD)
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the PH Unit has been replaced.
• When the image on the copy is offset in the CD direction.
• When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Press the Stop key followed by the
Start key to display the Adjust Mode.
3. Touch the [Printer].
4061F3C517DA
Adjustment / Setting
4. Touch the [Registration (CD)].
4061F3C518DA
5. Touch the [Test Print].
4061F3C519DA
6. Touch the [Tray 3] or [Tray 4].
7. Press the Start key.
4061F3C520DA
16
6. Mechanical adjustment
8. Measure the width of printed reference line A.
Specification: 10 mm ± 2.0 mm
9. If width A falls within the specified
range, finish the adjustment procedure. If outside the specified range,
perform the adjustment below.
A
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4061F3C505DA
10. Touch [END] to display the Registration (CD) screen.
11. Touch the [Tray 3] or [Tray 4].
4061F3C519DA
NOTE
• If width A falls outside the specified range, redo the adjustment from step 13.
14. Slide out the Tray [1] and unload
paper from it.
15. Loosen three screws [2] at the center
of the Paper Lifting Plate.
[2]
[1]
4348fs3601c0
[4]
[3]
17.
18.
19.
20.
4348fs3602c0
16. Watching the graduations [3] provided in the drawer, move the Edge
Guide [4] in the rear.
• If width A is greater than the specified
value, move the Edge Guide toward
the front.
• If width A is smaller than the specified
value, move the Edge Guide toward
the rear.
Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range.
Tighten the adjustment screw.
Repeat steps 1 to 19 similarly for the tray 4.
17
Adjustment / Setting
12. Press the Clear key and use the 10-Key Pad to set the value.
• If width A is wider than the specified range, enter a negative value.
• If width A is narrower than the specified range, enter a positive value.
Adjustment range: + 4.0 max. and -4.0 min.
Use the * key to switch between + and -.
13. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch, wait for 10 sec., then turn the switch ON.
6. Mechanical adjustment
PC-102/PC-202
6.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Registration (FD)
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the PH Unit has been replaced.
• When the image on the copy is offset in the FD direction.
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Press the Stop key followed by the
Start key to display the Adjust Mode.
3. Touch the [Printer].
4061F3C517DA
4. Touch the [Registration (FD)].
Adjustment / Setting
4061F3C518DA
5. Touch the [Test Print].
4061F3C521DA
6. Touch the [Tray 3] or [Tray 4].
7. Press the Start key.
4061F3C520DA
18
6. Mechanical adjustment
8. Measure the width of printed reference line B.
Specification: 11.3 mm ± 1.5 mm
9. If width B falls within the specified
range, finish the adjustment procedure. If outside the specified range,
perform the adjustment below.
B
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4061F3C507DA
10. Touch [END] to display the Registration (FD) screen.
4061F3C521DA
Adjustment / Setting
11. Press the Clear key and use the 10-Key Pad to set the value.
• If width B is wider than the specified range, enter a negative value.
• If width B is narrower than the specified range, enter a positive value.
Adjustment range: + 19.0 (+6.08 mm) max. and -19.0 (-6.08 mm) min.
Use the * key to switch between + and -.
12. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
13. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range.
19
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-102/PC-202
6. Mechanical adjustment
Adjustment / Setting
Blank Page
20
7. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
7.
7.1
Jam Display
Misfeed display
• When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
PC-102/PC-202
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
4061F4E503DA
No.
[1]
7.1.1
Misfeed location
Misfeed access location
Tray 3 Paper Take-Up Section
Tray 3 Paper Vertical Transport Section
Right Door
Tray 4 Paper Take-Up Section
Tray 4 Paper Vertical Transport Section
Right Door
Action
☞ 24
☞ 25
Misfeed display resetting procedure
Troubleshooting
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
21
7. Jam Display
Sensor layout
PC-102/PC-202
7.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
Troubleshooting
4061F4C500DA
22
[1]
Vertical Conveyance Sensor
PC2
[4] Tray4 Vertical Conveyance
Sensor
PC126-PF
[2]
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance
Sensor
PC117-PF
[5] Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC125-PF
[3]
Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor
PC116-PF
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.3.1
Solution
PC-102/PC-202
7.3
7. Jam Display
Initial check items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path,
or is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed,
or worn?
Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the
Set as necessary.
correct position to accommodate the paper?
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
Troubleshooting
Are the actuators operating correctly?
23
7. Jam Display
PC-102/PC-202
7.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-102/
PC-202)
A. Detection timing
Type
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF) is energized.
Tray3 Paper Take-Up section/ The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) is not blocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the Tray3 Vertical Conveyance SenVertical transport section
sor (PC117-PF) has been blocked by a paper.
misfeed detection
The Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC117-PF has been
blocked by a paper.
Tray3 detection of paper
remaining
The Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) is blocked when the
Main Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed,
or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
The Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
Tray3 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC116-PF)
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2)
Tray3 Paper Feed Motor (M122-PF)
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
24
Action
Control signal
Location (Electrical
components)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC116-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-8 (ON)
PC-202 C-4
3
PC117-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 (ON)
PC-202 C-4
4
PC2 sensor check
5
6
PWB-A PJ22A-9 (ON)
D-7
M122-PF operation check
PWB-C2 PF PJ5C2 PF-1 to 4
PC-202 C-4
PWB-C2 PF replacement
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/Vertical Transport section misfeed (PC-202)
A. Detection timing
Type
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF) even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF) is energized.
PC-102/PC-202
7.3.3
7. Jam Display
Tray4 Paper Take-Up section/ The Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF) is not blocked even
after the lapse of a given period of time after the Tray4 Vertical ConveyVertical transport section
ance Sensor (PC126-PF) has been blocked by a paper.
misfeed detection
The Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF) is not unblocked
even after the lapse of a given period of time after PC126-PF has been
blocked by a paper.
Tray4 detection of paper
remaining
The Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF) is blocked when the
Main Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed,
or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.
The Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
Tray4 Paper Take-Up Sensor (PC125-PF)
Tray4 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC126-PF)
Tray3 Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC117-PF)
Tray4 Paper Feed Motor (M123-PF)
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control signal
Location (Electrical
components)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC125-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-8 (ON)
PC-202 G-6
3
PC126-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ11C2 PF-2 (ON)
PC-202 G-6
4
PC117-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-11 (ON)
PC-202 C-4
5
M123-PF operation check
PWB-C2 PF PJ5C2 PF-1 to 4
PC-202 G-6
6
PWB-C2 PF replacement
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
25
PC-102/PC-202
8. Trouble code
8.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Trouble code
8.1
Trouble code display
• The main unit’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.
4040F4E510DA
8.2
Trouble code list
Code
Item
C0206
Tray3 Lift-Up Failure
C0208
Tray4 Lift-Up Failure
Description
• The Lift-Up Sensor is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the paper lift-up
operation for the drawer began.
Troubleshooting
• Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch.
26
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.3.1
Solution
PC-102/PC-202
8.3
8. Trouble code
C0206: Tray3 Lift-Up Failure
C0208: Tray4 Lift-Up Failure
Relevant electrical parts
Tray3 Lift Motor (M-124-PF)
Tray4 Lift Motor (M-125-PF)
Tray3 Lift Sensor (PC114-PF)
Tray4 Lift Sensor (PC123-PF)
Main Control Board (PWB-C2 PF)
Main unit Control Board (PWB-MC)
Main unit DC Power Supply (PU1)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
1
Location (Electrical
components)
Check the motor and sensor connectors
for proper connection, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check the connector of each motor for
proper drive coupling, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
3
Check the PU1 connector for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
PC114-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ6C2 PF-3 (ON)
PC-202 C-3
5
PC123-PF sensor check
PWB-C2 PF PJ10C2 PF-3 (ON)
PC-202 G-5
6
M124-PF operation check
PWB-C2 PF PJ4C2 PF-4 to 5
PC-202 C-5
7
M125-PF operation check
PWB-C2 PF PJ8C2 PF-12 to 13
PC-202 G-3
8
PWB-C2 PF replacement
-
-
9
PWB-MC replacement
-
-
10
PU1 replacement
-
-
Troubleshooting
Control signal
27
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-102/PC-202
8. Trouble code
Troubleshooting
Blank Page
28
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
PC-402
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-402
CONTENTS
PC-402
General
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 3
2.1.1
Replacing the Separation Roller Assy........................................................... 3
2.1.2
Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller.............................................................. 4
2.1.3
Replacing the Pick-up Roller......................................................................... 6
3.
Other ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 8
3.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................... 9
3.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 9
3.2.2
Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 9
3.3
Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................................................................... 10
3.3.1
Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover........... 10
3.3.2
Rear Cover.................................................................................................. 10
3.3.3
Drawer......................................................................................................... 11
3.3.4
Wire............................................................................................................. 11
3.4
Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 14
3.4.1
Separation Roller ........................................................................................ 14
3.4.2
Paper Take-up Roller................................................................................... 14
3.4.3
Pick-up Roller.............................................................................................. 14
3.4.4
Vertical Transport Roller.............................................................................. 15
Adjustment/Setting
4.
How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 17
5.
I/O check ............................................................................................................... 18
5.1
Check procedure ................................................................................................ 18
5.2
I/O check list ....................................................................................................... 18
5.2.1
I/O check screen ......................................................................................... 18
5.2.2
I/O check list................................................................................................ 19
6.
6.1
Mechanical adjustment ......................................................................................... 20
Registration (CD) ................................................................................................ 20
i
Adjustment / Setting
2.
Maintenance
Maintenance
General
Product specification ............................................................................................... 1
Troubleshooting
1.
PC-402
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.2
Registration (FD) ................................................................................................ 22
6.3
Shifter Movement Timing Belt Adjustment ......................................................... 24
Troubleshooting
7.
Jam Display........................................................................................................... 25
7.1
Misfeed display ................................................................................................... 25
General
7.1.1
Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 26
7.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 27
7.3.1
Initial check items ....................................................................................... 27
7.3.2
LCT Paper Take-Up section/LCT Vertical Transport Section ...................... 28
8.
Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 29
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
8.1
ii
Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 25
7.2
Trouble code display ........................................................................................... 29
8.2
Trouble code list.................................................................................................. 29
8.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 32
8.3.1
C0001: LCT communication error............................................................... 32
8.3.2
C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure ............................................................ 32
8.3.3
C0210: LCT Lift Failure............................................................................... 33
8.3.4
C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure.............................................................. 33
8.3.5
C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure................................................... 34
8.3.6
C0214: LCT Shift Failure ............................................................................ 34
8.3.7
C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure .................................................................. 35
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specification
General
Product specification
PC-402
1.
A. Type
Large Capacity Cabinet
Type
Front loading type LCC
Installation
Desk type
Document Alignment
Center
General
Name
B. Paper type
Type
Plain paper
56 to 90 g/m2 (15 to 24 lb)
Size
A4, 8.5 × 11
Capacity
2500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)
C. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
Max. Power
Consumption
DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5 V ± 5 %
45 W or less
Dimensions
570 mm (W) × 548 mm (D) × 263 mm (H)
Weight
26.0 kg (57 lb)
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
PC-402
1. Product specification
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
Maintenance
Periodical check
2.1
PC-402
2.
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
2.1.1
Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
1. Remove the Right Door.
☞ 10
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove
the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[3]
[3]
3. Remove two C-rings [3] and the
shaft [4], and remove the Paper Separation Roller Fixing Bracket Assy
[5].
NOTE
• Be careful not to lose spring at this
time.
[4]
4061F2C507DA
4. Remove the C-ring [6], the Guide [7],
and remove the Separation Roller
Assy [8].
[8]
[7]
[6]
4061F2C508DA
NOTE
• Install the Separation Roller Assy while pressing the holder down so that it aligns
to the metal bracket of the machine.
• Make sure that the Separation Roller Assy is not tilted to the right or left when
installed.
4348fs2623c0
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
3
Maintenance
4348fs2509c0
2. Periodical check
2.1.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Replacing the Paper Take-up Roller
1. Remove the Rear Cover and the
Rear Right Cover.
☞ 10
2. Remove the Tray3.
3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 2 of “Replacing the
Separation Roller” on p. 3.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from
the Main Control Board.
PC-402
[1]
4348F2C501DA
5. Remove four screws [2] and remove
the Paper Take-up Unit [3].
Maintenance
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2502c0
[5]
[4]
[4]
6. Remove two screws [4] and remove
the Mounting Frame [5] for the Paper
Separation Roller Mounting Bracket
Assy.
4348fs2503c0
7. Remove two screws [6] and remove
the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
[7]
[6]
[6]
4348fs2504c0
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
PC-402
8. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove
the bushing [9].
[8]
[9]
[8]
[10]
9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left, and
remove the C-ring [11] and the gear
[12].
10. Remove the shaft Assy [10].
[12]
[11]
4348fs2506c0
[15]
[13]
11. Remove two E-rings [13] and the
bushing [14], and remove the Pickup Roller Fixing Bracket Assy [15].
[13]
[14]
4348fs2507c0
5
Maintenance
4348fs2505c0
2. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
12. Remove the C-ring [16] and remove
the Paper Take-up Roller [17].
PC-402
[16]
[17]
4348fs2508c0
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
2.1.3
Replacing the Pick-up Roller
1. Remove the Rear Cover and the
Rear Right Cover.
☞ 10
2. Remove the Tray3.
3. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 2 of “Replacing the
Separation Roller” on p. 3.
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from
the Main Control Board.
Maintenance
[1]
4348F2C501DA
5. Remove four screws [2] and the
Paper Take-up Unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
[2]
4348fs2502c0
[4]
[4]
[5]
4348fs2516c0
6
6. Remove two screws [4] and remove
the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [5] together with
frame.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
7. Remove two screws [6] and remove
the Paper Take-up Cover [7].
PC-402
[7]
[6]
[6]
4348fs2515c0
8. Remove two C-rings [8], two bushings [9], and the Pick-up Roller Assy
[10].
[8]
[8]
[9]
[9]
[10]
[11]
9. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove
the Pick-up Roller [12].
[12]
4348fs2518c0
NOTE
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Paper Take-up Roller and Pick-up Roller at the
same time.
7
Maintenance
4348fs2517c0
3. Other
3.
PC-402
3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
No
Section
Part name
Ref. page
Right Door
☞ 10
Rear Right Cover
☞ 10
Lower Right Cover
☞ 10
4
Front Right Cover
☞ 10
5
Rear Cover
☞ 10
6
Drawer
☞ 11
Wire
☞ 11
1
2
3
7
3.2.2
No
Exterior parts
Unit
Cleaning parts list
Section
1
2
Paper feed section
3
4
PC-402
3.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
Transport section
Part name
Ref. page
Separation Roller
☞ 14
Paper Take-up Roller
☞ 14
Pick-up Roller
☞ 14
Vertical Transport Roller
☞ 15
Maintenance
3.2
3. Other
9
3. Other
PC-402
3.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
3.3.1
Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
[7]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
Maintenance
[4]
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
4348fs2520c0
Open the Right Door [1].
Remove the Right Door [1].
Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].
Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].
3.3.2
Rear Cover
[1]
[2]
1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
10
[1]
4348fs2521c0
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Drawer
[3]
[2]
[3]
1. Press the Drawer Eject Button [1]
and slide out the drawer [2].
2. Remove the paper.
3. Remove four screws [3] and slide out
the drawer [2].
PC-402
3.3.3
3. Other
[1]
4348fs2522c0
4. Remove two screws [4], the connector [5], and remove the Connector
Board [6].
5. Remove the Drawer.
NOTE
• When removing the Connector
Board, use care not to drop the
drawer from the guide rail.
[4]
[4]
[6]
[5]
CAUTION
• To prevent injuries, press the guide
rail [7] inside the machine.
[7]
[7]
4348fs2524c0
3.3.4
Wire
[3]
[1]
[2]
1. Remove the Drawer.
☞ 11
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove
the Front Cover Assy [2].
3. Unplug the connector [3].
[1]
4348fs2525c0
[4]
[4]
4. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner
Cover Assy [5].
NOTE
• Do not peel off pulley protective
mylar sheet.
[5]
4348fs2526c0
11
Maintenance
4348fs2523c0
3. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove
the Driver Cover [7].
PC-402
[7]
[6]
4348fs2527c0
6. Remove three screws [8] and
remove the Driver Mounting Plate
Assy [9].
[9]
[8]
Maintenance
4348fs2528c0
[10]
[11]
NOTE
• When assembling, be sure to
engage rib of gear 1 [10] with convex section of gear 2 [11].
4348fs2529c0
7. Remove three screws [12] and
remove the Reinforcement Bracket
Assy [13].
[13]
[12]
[12]
4348fs2530c0
[15]
[16]
[15]
8. Remove two C-clips [14].
9. Remove four Pulley Covers [15].
10. Unhook four pulleys [16].
[16]
[15]
[14]
[16]
[15]
[14]
12
4348fs2531c0
3. Other
[18]
[19]
[18]
[18]
[18]
[17]
11. Remove the Ground Plate [17].
12. Remove four Cable Holding Jigs [18]
and remove the Main Drawer [19].
NOTE
• Use care not to bend the wires.
PC-402
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4348fs2532c0
[20]
[21]
13. Remove four screws [20] and
remove the Rear Trailing Edge Assy
[21].
[20]
[22]
[23]
14. Remove four screws [22] and
remove the Front Trailing Edge Assy
[23].
[22]
4348fs2534c0
[24]
15. Remove three C-rings [24], the bushing [25], and two gears [26].
16. Remove the Take-up Drum Assy
[27].
[27]
[25]
[26]
[24]
[24]
[26]
4348fs2535c0
[28]
[29]
[28]
[29]
[30]
17. Remove two C-rings [28]and the
Take-up Drum [29].
NOTE
• Take care not to lose fixing pins.
• When reinstalling the Take-up
Drum, check that the direction of
the wire coming from both Take-up
Drums are the same.
• Install so that cut parts [30] at both
ends of shaft face up.
4348fs2536c0
13
Maintenance
4348fs2533c0
3. Other
PC-402
3.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Cleaning procedure
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
3.4.1
Separation Roller
1. Remove the Right Door.
☞ 10
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove
the Paper Separation Roller Mounting Bracket Assy [2].
[2]
[1]
[1]
4348fs2509c0
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Separation Roller
[3] clean of dirt.
Maintenance
[3]
4348fs2510c0
3.4.2
Paper Take-up Roller
[1]
4348fs2501c0
3.4.3
Pick-up Roller
[1]
4348fs2513c0
14
1. Remove the Tray3.
2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 2 of the cleaning procedure for “Separation Roller” on p.
14.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Paper Take-Up
Roller [1] clean of dirt.
1. Remove the Tray3.
2. Remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Bracket Assy.
☞ See steps 1 to 2 of the cleaning procedure for “Separation Roller” on p.
14.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1]
clean of dirt.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the Vertical Transport
Roller [1] clean of dirt.
[1]
PC-402
Vertical Transport Roller
4348fs2519c0
Maintenance
3.4.4
3. Other
15
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance
PC-402
3. Other
Blank Page
16
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. How to use the adjustment section
4.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
PC-402
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
17
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
5. I/O check
PC-402
5.
5.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O check
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the main unit service manual.
2. Touch the [I/O Check].
3. Touch the [Printer].
4. Touch the [LCT].
5.2
5.2.1
I/O check list
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4061F3E522DA
18
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5.2.2
5. I/O check
I/O check list
Panel display
Part/Signal name
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
1
0
Paper not
present
PC2-LCT
Vertical Transport
Vertical Conveyance Sensor
Paper
present
PC1-LCT
Feed
Paper Feed Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC9-LCT
Shift Tray Paper
Empty
Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC3-LCT
Main Tray Paper
Empty
Upper Paper Empty Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Paper Empty
Paper Empty Board
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-LCT
Lower Overrun
Lower Limit Sensor
malfunction
operational
UN1-LCT
Manual Button
Down
Paper Descent Key
ON
OFF
PC6-LCT LCT
Tray Open
Tray Set Sensor
PWB-E
LCT
Open
Close
PC4-LCT
Raised (lift-Up)
Tray Upper Limit Sensor
At raised
position
Not at
raised
position
PC13-LCT
Lowered (Lift up)
Tray Lower Position Sensor
At lower
limit
Not at lower
limit
PC12-LCT
Home (Shift)
Shifter Home Position Sensor
At home
Not at home
PC11-LCT
Shift Tray Stop
Position
Shifter Return Position Sensor
At stop
position
Not at stop
position
PC10-LCT
Elev. Mtr Pulse
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC8-LCT
Shift Mtr Pulse
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC14-LCT
Dividing Position
Shift Gate Home Position Sensor
At home
Not at home
PC5-LCT
Right Door Open
Right Lower Door Sensor
Open
Close
19
Adjustment / Setting
Symbol
PC-402
A. Printer (PC-402)
6. Mechanical adjustment
PC-402
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Mechanical adjustment
Registration (CD)
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the PH Unit has been replaced.
• When the image on the copy is offset in the CD direction.
• When a faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image.
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the main unit service manual.
2. Press the Stop key followed by the
Start key to display the Adjust Mode.
3. Touch the [Printer].
4061F3E523DA
Adjustment / Setting
4. Touch the [Registration (CD)].
4061F3E524DA
5. Touch the [Test Print].
4061F3E525DA
6. Touch the [Tray 3].
7. Press the Start key.
4061F3E526DA
20
6. Mechanical adjustment
A
4061F3C513DA
8. Measure the width of printed reference line A.
Specification: 10 mm ± 2.0 mm
9. If the measured width A falls outside
the specified range, enter the correction value.
10. Produce another test print and check
to see if width A falls within the specified range.
• If adjustment cannot be completed
only by inputting numeric value,
perform adjustment according to
the following procedure.
PC-402
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11. Press the Drawer Release button [1]
and then slide out the drawer [2]
from the Paper Feed Cabinet.
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
12. Open the Right Door.
13. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and
turn screw D [4] to make the adjustment.
NOTE
• Do not damage the passage surface
of the Right Door.
4348fs3511c0
• If width A is greater than the specified
value: Turn screw D counterclockwise.
4348fs3512c0
• If width A is smaller than the specified
value: Turn screw D clockwise.
4348fs3513c0
14. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
15. Tighten the adjustment screw.
21
Adjustment / Setting
4348fs3510c0
6. Mechanical adjustment
PC-402
6.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Registration (FD)
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the PH Unit has been replaced.
• When the image on the copy is offset in the FD direction.
1. Display Tech. Rep. Mode.
☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the main unit service manual.
2. Press the Stop key followed by the
Start key to display the Adjust Mode.
3. Touch the [Printer].
4061F3E523DA
4. Touch the [Registration (FD)].
Adjustment / Setting
4061F3E524DA
5. Touch the [Test Print].
4061F3E527DA
6. Touch the [Tray 3].
7. Press the Start key.
4061F3E526DA
22
6. Mechanical adjustment
B
4061F3C515DA
8. Measure the width of printed reference line B.
Specification: 11.3 mm ± 1.5 mm
9. If width B falls within the specified
range, finish the adjustment procedure.
If outside the specified range, perform the adjustment below.
PC-402
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
10. Touch [END] to display the Registration (FD) screen.
4061F3E527DA
11. Press the Clear key and use the 10-Key Pad to set the value.
• If width B is wider than the specified range, enter a negative value.
• If width B is narrower than the specified range, enter a positive value.
Adjustment range: + 19.0 (+6.08 mm) max. and -19.0 (-6.08 mm) min.
Use the * key to switch between + and -.
Adjustment / Setting
12. Perform another test print and check the reference deviation.
13. Repeat the adjustment until the reference line falls within the specified range.
23
6. Mechanical adjustment
PC-402
6.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Shifter Movement Timing Belt Adjustment
1. Slide out the Drawer and remove it.
2. Lift the Main Drawer [1], and remove
two screws [2] fixing the Shift Tray.
NOTE
• When reinstalling, use caution
because the wire of the Main
Drawer comes off easily.
[1]
[2]
[2]
4348fs3501c0
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove
the Shifter [4].
[4]
[3]
[3]
4348fs3502c0
4. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5]
as shown on the left and release the
lock.
5. Remove the Shift Tray [5].
[5]
Adjustment / Setting
[6]
4348fs3503c0
6. Loosen the screw [7] fixing the Tension Pulley Assy as shown to the left
and move it in the direction of the
arrow.
7. After moving the Shifter, tighten the
fixing screw [7].
[7]
4348fs3504c0
24
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
7.1
Jam Display
PC-402
7.
Misfeed display
• When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
[1]
4061F4C503DA
No.
[1]
7.1.1
Misfeed location
LCT Paper Take-Up section
LCT Vertical Transport Section
Misfeed access location
Right Door
Action
☞ 28
Misfeed display resetting procedure
Troubleshooting
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
25
7. Jam Display
Sensor layout
PC-402
7.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[2]
[3]
Troubleshooting
4061F4C502DA
26
[1]
Vertical Conveyance Sensor
PC2
[2]
Vertical Conveyance Sensor
PC2-LCT
[3]
Paper Feed Sensor
PC1-LCT
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.3.1
Solution
Initial check items
PC-402
7.3
7. Jam Display
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path,
or is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
Are the Paper Separator Fingers dirty, deformed,
or worn?
Clean or replace the defective Paper Separator Finger.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the
Set as necessary.
correct position to accommodate the paper?
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
Troubleshooting
Are the actuators operating correctly?
27
7. Jam Display
7.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
LCT Paper Take-Up section/LCT Vertical Transport Section
PC-402
A. Detection timing
Type
Description
The leading edge of the paper does not block the Paper Feed Sensor
(PC1-LCT) or the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT)
is energized.
LCT Paper Take-Up section/
Vertical transport section
misfeed detection
The Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2) is not blocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after the LCT Vertical Transport Sensor
(PC2-LCT) has been blocked by a paper.
The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is not unblocked even after the
lapse of a given period of time after PC1-LCT has been blocked by a
paper.
The LCT Vertical Transport Sensor (PC2-LCT) is blocked when the Main
Power Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a
misfeed or malfunction is reset.
LCT detection of paper
remaining
The Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT) is blocked when the Main Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed
or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
Paper Feed Sensor (PC1-LCT)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2-LCT)
Vertical Conveyance Sensor (PC2)
Paper Feed Motor (M1-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
28
Action
Control signal
Location (Electrical
components)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC1-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-2 (ON)
PC-402 C-8
3
PC2-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-5 (ON)
PC-402 C-7
4
PC2 sensor check
5
M1-LCT operation check
6
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
PWB-A PJ22A-9 (ON)
D-7
PWB-C1 LCT PJ6C1 LCT-1 to 4
PC-402 C-8
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.1
Trouble code
Trouble code display
• The main unit's CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code on the Touch Panel.
PC-402
8.
8. Trouble code
4040F4E510DA
8.2
Code
Trouble code list
Item
Description
C0209 LCT Elevator Motor Failure
• The Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) cannot
detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of
time has elapsed while the Elevator Motor (M5-LCT) is
turning backward/forward (raise/lower).
Troubleshooting
C0001 LCT communication error
• Due to a software malfunction, etc., the time on the
watchdog timer has run out and a reset is performed.
29
8. Trouble code
Code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Item
C0210 LCT Lift Failure
C0212 LCT Lock Release Failure
• The drawer cannot be determined to be out of position
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT) is energized after the
lowering operation is finished.
C0213 LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure
• The Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT)
cannot be set to L even after the set period of time has
elapsed after the operation of the Shift Gate Motor
(M3-LCT) began with the Shift Gate Home Position
Sensor (PC14-LCT) set to L.
PC-402
Troubleshooting
30
Description
• The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operation began.
• The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked
even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator
Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper lift-up
operation began.
• The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not
unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the
paper lift-up operation began.
• The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
paper lift-up operating.
• The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the paper lift-down operation began.
• The Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT) is not
blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the paper
lift-down operation began.
• The Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT) is not
unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT) after the
paper lift-down operation began.
• The Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT) is blocked while
the paper lift-down operating.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Item
Description
C0214 LCT Shift Failure
• The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the shift operation began (shift to the right).
• The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not
blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift
operation began (shift to the right).
• The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not
unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the shift
operation began (shift to the right).
• The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the return operation began (shift to the left).
• The Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT) is not
blocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return
operation began (shift to the left).
• The Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT) is not
unblocked even after the set pulse is detected by the
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) after the return
operation began (shift to the left).
C0215 LCT Shift Motor Failure
• The Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT) cannot
detect both edges of H/L even after the set period of
time has ward/forward (raise/lower).
PC-402
Code
8. Trouble code
Troubleshooting
• Open and close the Front Door or turn OFF and ON the Main Power Switch.
31
8. Trouble code
PC-402
8.3
8.3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Solution
C0001: LCT communication error
Relevant electrical parts
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control signal
Location
(Electrical components)
1
Turn the main unit off, then on again.
-
-
2
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
8.3.2
C0209: LCT Elevator Motor Failure
Relevant electrical parts
Elevator Motor (M5-LCT)
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT)
Interface Board (PWB-H LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
Troubleshooting
WIRING DIAGRAM
32
Control signal
Location
(Electrical components)
Check the motor and sensor connectors
for proper connection, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check the connector of motor for proper
drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
PC10-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5 (ON)
PC-402 G-5
4
M5-LCT operation check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-6 to 7
PC-402 G-6
Step
Action
1
5
PWB-H LCT replacement
-
-
6
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.3.3
8. Trouble code
C0210: LCT Lift Failure
PC-402
Relevant electrical parts
Tray Upper Limit Sensor (PC4-LCT)
Tray Lower Position Sensor (PC13-LCT)
Elevator Motor Pulse Sensor (PC10-LCT)
Lower Limit Sensor (PC7-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical components)
-
-
Step
Action
1
Check the sensor connectors for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
2
PC4-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ5C1 LCT-12 (ON)
PC-402 C-7
3
PC13-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-9 (ON)
PC-402 G-3
4
PC10-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-5 (ON)
PC-402 G-5
5
PC7-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-2 (ON)
PC-402 G-6
6
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
8.3.4
C0212: LCT Lock Release Failure
Relevant electrical parts
Tray Lock Solenoid (SL1-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control signal
Location
(Electrical components)
-
-
Check the SL1-LCT connector for
proper connection, and correct as necessary.
2
SL1-LCT operation check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ7C1 LCT-4 (ON)
PC-402 C-8
3
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
Troubleshooting
1
33
8. Trouble code
PC-402
8.3.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C0213: LCT Shift Gate Operation Failure
Relevant electrical parts
Shift Gate Home Position Sensor (PC14-LCT)
Shift Gate Motor (M3-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Control signal
Location
(Electrical components)
Check the motor and sensor connectors
for proper connection, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check the connector of motor for proper
drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
PC14-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-1 (ON)
PC-402 G-6
4
M3-LCT operation check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-2 to 3
PC-402 G-6
5
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
Step
Action
1
8.3.6
C0214: LCT Shift Failure
Relevant electrical parts
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT)
Shifter Return Position Sensor (PC11-LCT)
Shifter Home Position Sensor (PC12-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
Troubleshooting
WIRING DIAGRAM
34
Control signal
Location
(Electrical components)
-
-
Step
Action
1
Check the sensor connectors for proper
connection, and correct as necessary.
2
PC8-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-3 (ON)
PC-402 G-5
3
PC11-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-7 (ON)
PC-402 G-4
4
PC12-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-8 (ON)
PC-402 G-4
5
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.3.7
8. Trouble code
C0215: LCT Shift Motor Failure
PC-402
Relevant electrical parts
Shift Motor (M4-LCT)
Shift Motor Pulse Sensor (PC8-LCT)
Main Control Board (PWB-C1 LCT)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Location
(Electrical components)
Check the motor and sensor connectors
for proper connection, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check the connector of motor for proper
drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
PC8-LCT sensor check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<A> LCT-3 (ON)
PC-402 G-5
4
M4-LCT operation check
PWB-C1 LCT PJ2H<B> LCT-4 to 5
PC-402 G-6
5
PWB-C1 LCT replacement
-
-
Action
1
Troubleshooting
Control signal
Step
35
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PC-402
8. Trouble code
Troubleshooting
Blank Page
36
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
JS-502
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
JS-502
CONTENTS
JS-502
General
Maintenance
Other ....................................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 3
2.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................... 4
2.2.1
2.3
Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 4
Disassembly/Assembly procedure........................................................................ 4
2.3.1
Upper Cover.................................................................................................. 4
Adjustment/Setting
3.
How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 5
4.
Sensor Check.......................................................................................................... 6
4.1
Check procedure .................................................................................................. 6
4.2
I/O check list ......................................................................................................... 6
4.2.1
I/O check screen ........................................................................................... 6
4.2.2
I/O check list.................................................................................................. 6
i
Maintenance
2.
General
System configuration............................................................................................... 1
Adjustment / Setting
1.
Maintenance
General
JS-502
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Adjustment / Setting
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. System configuration
General
System configuration
JS-502
1.
Name
Job Separator
Type
Expansion drawer
Installation
Installed in the copier
Document Alignment
Center
General
A. Type
B. Paper type
Exit Tray
Size
Type
Plain Paper (56 to 90 g/m2 ,15 to 24 lb)
Tray 1
A6R to A3R
(5.5 to 11 x 17 inch)
width: 90 mm to 297 mm
(3.5 to 11.75 inch)
length: 139.7 mm to 432 mm
(5.5 to 17 inch)
capacity
250 sheets
OHP transparencies
Thick paper
(91 to 210g/m2, 24.25 to 55.75 lb)
Special Envelope
20 sheets
Label
Letterhead
Governmentstandard postcards
Tray 2
A5 to A3R
(5.5 to 8.5 inch)
Max.: 297 mm x 432 mm
(11.75 to 17 inch)
Min.: 139.7 mm x 139.7 mm
(5.5 to 5.5 inch)
Plain Paper (56 to 90 g/m2 ,15 to 24 lb)
100 sheets
C. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
DC 5 V ± 5 % (supplied from the main unit)
Max. Power Consumption 0.2 W or less
Dimensions
450 mm (W) x 443 mm (D) x 75 mm (H)
17.75 inch (W) x 17.5 inch (D) x 3 inch (H)
Weight
Approx. 1.7 kg (3.75 lb)
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
JS-502
1. System configuration
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Other
Maintenance
2.1
Other
JS-502
2.
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
3
2. Other
2.2
JS-502
2.2.1
No.
1
2.3
2.3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
Section
Exterior parts
Part name
Ref.Page
☞ 4
Upper Cover
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
Upper Cover
[1]
Maintenance
[2]
4347F2C500DA
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Upper Cover [2].
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
3. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting
How to use the adjustment section
JS-502
3.
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
5
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
4. Sensor Check
4.
Sensor Check
4.1
JS-502
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Touch [I/O Check].
3. Touch [Job Tray].
4.2
I/O check list
4.2.1
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4347F3E501DA
4.2.2
I/O check list
A. Job Tray
Panel display
PC1-JOB
Upper Tray Full
-
6
Job Tray
Symbol
Part/Signal name
Paper Full Detection Sensor
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
1
0
Blocked
Unblocked
Turn Over Unit
Turn Over Unit Set signal
Set
Not set
Job Tray
Job Tray Set signal
Set
Not set
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
FS-508/PU-501
/OT-601
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
CONTENTS
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
General
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
1.1
FS-508 .................................................................................................................. 1
1.2
PU-501 ................................................................................................................. 3
1.3
OT-601 .................................................................................................................. 4
General
1.
Maintenance
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 5
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 5
Cleaning of the Roller and Roll ..................................................................... 5
Firmware upgrade ................................................................................................... 7
3.1
Preparations for Firmware rewriting...................................................................... 7
3.1.1
Service environment ..................................................................................... 7
3.1.2
Writing into the Compact flash ...................................................................... 7
3.1.3
Checking ROM version ................................................................................. 7
3.2
Firmware rewriting ................................................................................................ 7
3.2.1
4.
Finisher ......................................................................................................... 7
Other ..................................................................................................................... 10
4.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 10
4.2
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)............................................. 11
4.2.1
4.3
Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................. 11
Maintenance
2.1.1
3.
Adjustment / Setting
2.1
Disassembly/Assembly procedure...................................................................... 12
4.3.1
Horizontal Transport Upper Front Cover/Horizontal Transport
Front Right Cover/Horizontal Transport Lower Front Cover ........................ 12
4.3.2
Horizontal Transport Upper Cover............................................................... 12
4.3.3
Front Door ................................................................................................... 13
4.3.4
Horizontal Transport Left Front Cover ......................................................... 13
4.3.5
Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Rear Cover/Connector Cover ............... 13
4.3.6
2nd Drawer.................................................................................................. 14
4.3.7
Output Tray (OT-601)................................................................................... 14
4.3.8
1st Drawer................................................................................................... 14
4.3.9
Sorted Copy Tray ........................................................................................ 15
4.3.10
Horizontal Transport Unit ............................................................................ 15
4.3.11
Stapler Unit ................................................................................................. 16
i
Troubleshooting
2.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4.3.12
Punch Unit (PU-501)................................................................................... 17
4.3.13
Storage Paddle Drive Clutch....................................................................... 18
4.3.14
Exit Paddle Drive Clutch ............................................................................. 19
General
Adjustment/Setting
5.
How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 23
6.
I/O Check .............................................................................................................. 24
6.1
Check procedure ................................................................................................ 24
6.2
I/O check list ....................................................................................................... 24
6.2.1
I/O check screen......................................................................................... 24
6.2.2
I/O check list ............................................................................................... 25
7.
Test Mode ............................................................................................................. 26
7.1
Entering Function Mode ..................................................................................... 26
7.2
Function Modes .................................................................................................. 27
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
8.
Mechanical adjustment ......................................................................................... 29
8.1
Staple Position Adjustment................................................................................. 29
8.2
Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear....................... 30
8.3
Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment (PU-501) ...................................................... 31
8.4
Punch Hold Position Adjustment (PU-501)......................................................... 32
8.5
Punch Loop Length Adjustment (PU-501).......................................................... 33
Troubleshooting
9.
Jam Display........................................................................................................... 35
9.1
Misfeed Display .................................................................................................. 35
9.1.1
Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure......................................................... 35
Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 36
9.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 37
Troubleshooting
9.2
10.
9.3.1
Initial Check Items ...................................................................................... 37
9.3.2
Transport Section Misfeed .......................................................................... 38
9.3.3
Finisher Staple Misfeed .............................................................................. 39
9.3.4
Finisher Punch Misfeed (PU-501)............................................................... 39
9.3.5
Finisher Bundle Exit Misfeed ...................................................................... 40
Malfunction code................................................................................................... 41
10.1 Trouble code ....................................................................................................... 41
10.2 Solution .............................................................................................................. 42
ii
10.2.1
C1183: Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent Drive Failure................................. 42
10.2.2
C1190: Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure ......................................................... 43
10.2.3
C1191: Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure ......................................................... 43
10.2.4
C11A0: Paper Holding Drive Failure ........................................................... 44
10.2.5
C11A1: Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure .......................................... 44
10.2.6
C11A3: Shutter Drive Failure ...................................................................... 45
10.2.7
C11B0: Staple Drive Failure........................................................................ 45
10.2.8
C11B2: Staple Drive Failure........................................................................ 46
10.2.9
C11C0: Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure....................................................... 46
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
10.2.10 CC155: Finishing Option Flash ROM Failure .............................................. 47
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
iii
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Blank Page
iv
1. Product specifications
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
1.
Product specifications
1.1
FS-508
A. Type
Multi staple finisher built into the copier
Installation
Installed in the copier
Document Alignment
Center
Consumables
Staples
General
Name
B. Functions
Modes
Non sort, sort, group, sort stable, and punch (when PU-501 is mounted)
C. Paper type
(1) Non sort
Type
Size
Weight
Max. Capacity
Exit
Tray1
56 to 90g/m2
15 to 24 lb
Plain paper
Thick paper
OHP transparencies
Translucent
paper
Exit
Tray2
A6R to A3
91 to 210g/m2
5.5 to 11 x17
24.25 to 55.75 lb
Max. 297 mm x 431.8
mm
11.75 x 17 inch
Min. 100 mm x 139.7 mm
4 x 5.5 inch
Governmentstandard
postcards
200 sheets
1000
A4R, 8.5 x 11R
or less
sheets
B4, 8.5 x 14R
or greater
500
sheets
20 sheets
-
Envelope
-
Label
-
Letterhead
-
(2) Sort/Group
Type
Size
Weight
Max. Capacity
Exit
Tray1
Plain paper
A6R to A3
5.5 to 11 x17
Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm 56 to 90g/m2
11.75 x 17 inch
15 to 24 lb Exit
Min. 182 mm x 139.7 mm
Tray2
7.25 x 5.5 inch
200 sheets
1000
A4R, 8.5 x 11R
or less
sheets
B4, 8.5 x 14R
or greater
500
sheets
1
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
1. Product specifications
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
(3) Sort Staple
Type
Size
Weight
Max. Capacity
Exit
Tray1
Plain paper
A6R to A3
5.5 to 11 x17
Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm 56 to 90g/m2
11.75 x 17 inch
15 to 24 lb Exit
Min. 182 mm x 139.7 mm
Tray2
7.25 x 5.5 inch
200 sheets
1000
A4R, 8.5 x 11R
or less
sheets
B4, 8.5 x 14R
or greater
500
sheets
General
(4) Punch
Type
Size
B5R/B5 to A3
8.5 to 11 x 17
Plain paper
Weight
Exit Tray
60 to 90 g/m2
15 to 24 lb
Exit Tray1
Exit Tray2
OT-601
MT-501
D. Stapling
Staple Filling Mode
Dedicated Staple Cartridge (5000 staples)
Staple Detection
Available (Nearly Empty: 20 remaining staples)
Front: Diagonal 45° 1 point *1 A4, A3R, B5, B4R
Rear: Diagonal 45° 1 point *1 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
Front: Parallel 1 point
Stapling Position
Rear: Parallel 1 point
Side: Parallel 2 point
Manual Staple
A4R, B5R, A5
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 114R, 5.5 x 8.5
A4, A4R, A3R, B5, B5R, B4R, A5
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 14R, 11 x 17, 5.5 x
8.5
None
*1: Diagonal 30° for B5 and B4R
E. Hole Punch
No. of Holes
Metric: 4holes, Inch: 2holes / 3holes
Punch dust full detection
Available
F. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)
DC 5.1 V (generated by Finisher)
Max. Power Consumption
63 W
Dimensions
319 mm (W) x 558 mm (D) x 573 mm (H)
12.5 inch (W) x 22 inch (D) x 22.5 inch (H)
Weight
21.4 kg (47.25 lb)
G. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
2
1.2
1. Product specifications
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
PU-501
Name
Punch Unit PU-501
Installation
Built into the Finisher
Paper Size
B5R/B5 to A3
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14R, 11 x 17
Paper Type
Plain Paper (60 to 163 g/m2 , 16 to 43.5 lb)
Punch Hole
Metric: 4hole, Inch: 2,3hole
Number of Stored Punch Wastes
Metric (4hole): For 1,500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2)
Inch (2,3hole): For 1,000 sheets of paper (75 g/m2)
Document Alignment
Center
General
A. Type
B. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
Supplied by the Finisher
Dimensions
114 mm (W) x 461 mm (D) x 136 mm (H)
4.5 inch (W) x 18.25 inch (D) x 5.25 inch (H)
Weight
Approx. 1.9 kg (4.25 lbs) or less
C. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
3
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
1. Product specifications
1.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
OT-601
A. Type
Name
Output Tray OT-601
Installation
Fixed to the Finisher
Mode
Non sort, sort, group, and sort stable
Number of Bins
1 bin
Document Alignment
Center
General
B. Paper Type
Mode
Size
Type
Plain Paper
(56 to 90 g/m2,15 to 24 lb)
Capacity
200 sheets
(up to a height of 24 mm)
OHP transparencies
Non sort
A6R to A3
5.5 to 11 x17
Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm
11.75 x 17 inch
Min. 100 mm x 139.7 mm
4 x 5.5 inch
Thick paper
(91 to 210g/m2,
24.25 to 55.75 lb)
Envelope
Special Label
20 sheets
(up to a height of 24 mm
Letterhead
Translucent
paper
Governmentstandard
postcards
sort / group
sort stable
A6R to A3
5.5 to 11 x17
Max. 297 mm x 431.8 mm
11.75 x 17 inch
Min. 182 mm x 139.7 mm
7.25 x 5.5 inch
200 sheets
(up to a height of 24 mm)
Plain Paper
(56 to 90 g/m2 ,15 to 24 lb) 200 sheets or 20 copies (up
to a height of 24 mm)
C. Machine specifications
Dimensions
282 mm (W) x 368 mm (D) x 57 mm (H)
11 inch (W) x 14.5 inch (D) x 2.25 inch (H)
Weight
0.7 kg (1.5 lb)
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
How product names appear in the document
• FS-508: Finisher
• PU-501: Punch Unit
• OT-601: Output Tray
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
4
2. Periodical check
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance
2.
Periodical check
2.1
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
2.1.1
Remove the Sorted Copy Tray.
15
Remove the Horizontal Transport Unit.
15
Remove the Horizontal Transport Top Cover.
12
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller and roll [1].
[1]
[1]
Maintenance
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
Cleaning of the Roller and Roll
[1]
4349F2C500DA
5. Lower Processing Guide FN1 [2].
6. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roll [3].
[3]
[2]
4349F2C501DA
7. Remove Punch Waste Storage Box
FN3.1 [4].
(only when PU-501 is installed)
[4]
4349F2C502DA
5
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
2. Periodical check
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8. Lower Processing Guide FN-3 [5].
9. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roll [6].
[6]
[5]
4349F2C503DA
10. Lower Processing Guide FN-4 [7].
11. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roll [8].
[8]
[7]
Maintenance
4349F2C504DA
[10]
12. While turning Processing Knob FN-5
[9], wipe the roll [10] using a soft
cloth dampened with alcohol.
[9]
4349F2C505DA
[11]
[11]
4349F2C506DA
6
13. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller [11].
3.
3. Firmware upgrade
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Firmware upgrade
3.1
Preparations for Firmware rewriting
3.1.1
Service environment
• Drive which enables writing/reading of Compact flash
• Compact flash (with 32 MB or more)
3.1.2
Writing into the Compact flash
• Copy the firmware files using the computer.
NOTE
• Copy only those files to be upgraded to the compact flash.
• If wrong firmware is copied, no screen display is given and thus no firmware can
be downloaded.
3.1.3
Checking ROM version
3.2
Maintenance
• Before attempting to upgrade the firmware, check the current ROM version.
☞ See the Adjustment/Setting of the main unit service manual.
Firmware rewriting
3.2.1
Finisher
NOTE
• NEVER remove or insert the Compact Flash card with the machine power turned
ON.
• Make sure that the MSC firmware has not been copied to the compact flash card.
• The engine firmware and Finisher firmware can be upgraded at the same time.
☞ See the Maintenance of the main unit service manual.
• If the files copied to the compact flash card are those of either the engine or Finisher, or wrong, no screen display is given and thus no firmware can be downloaded.
1. Turn OFF the main power switch.
2. Remove the Compact flash Cover
[1].
[1]
4040F2C596DA
3. Insert the compact flash card [2], to
which the finisher upgrading files
have been copied, into the slot.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
7
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
3. Firmware upgrade
4349F2E541DA
4. Open the Right Door.
NOTE
• Be sure to open the Right Door
before turning ON the main power
switch.
5. Turn ON the main power switch.
6. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the
Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the
Adjustment/Setting of the main unit
service manual.
7. Touch [Function].
Maintenance
8. Touch [FW Download].
4349F2E542DA
9. Select [Finisher] and touch [Enter].
NOTE
• Touch [Engine] also if the Engine
firmware is to be upgraded at the
same time.
4349F2E543DA
10. Select [Yes] and touch [Enter].
4349F2E544DA
11. The firmware upgrading sequence
will start.
4349F2E545DA
8
NOTE
• The firmware upgrading sequence
will last for 5 to 6 min. During this
period, NEVER turn off the machine
power.
• If the Engine firmware is also
upgraded, the entire sequence will
take about 10 to 11 min.
3. Firmware upgrade
12. When the upgrading sequence is
completed, turn OFF the main power
switch.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4349F2E546DA
13. Remove the compact flash card [2]
from the slot. After some while thereafter, turn ON the main power switch.
[2]
4040F2C597DA
Maintenance
14. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
15. Touch [ROM Version].
16. Make sure if the version of Firmware is updated.
9
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
4.
4.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
10
4.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly/Cleaning list (Other parts)
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
No.
Section
Part name
Ref.Page
1
Horizontal Transport Upper Front Cover
☞ 12
2
Horizontal Transport Upper Cover
☞ 12
3
Horizontal Transport Front Right Cover
☞ 12
4
Front Door
☞ 13
5
Horizontal Transport Lower Front Cover
☞ 12
6
Horizontal Transport Left Front Cover
☞ 13
Paper Exit Front Cover
☞ 13
8
2nd Drawer
☞ 14
9
Output Tray OT-601 (Option)
☞ 14
10
1st Drawer
☞ 14
11
Connector Cover
☞ 13
12
Paper Exit Rear Cover
☞ 13
13
Sorted Copy Tray
☞ 15
14
Horizontal Transport Unit
☞ 15
Stapler Unit
☞ 16
16
Punch Unit PU-501 (Option)
☞ 17
17
Storage Paddle Drive Clutch
☞ 18
Exit Paddle Drive Clutch
☞ 19
7
15
18
Exterior parts
Unit
Others
Maintenance
4.2
4. Other
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
11
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
4.3
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
4.3.1
Horizontal Transport Upper Front Cover/Horizontal Transport Front Right
Cover/Horizontal Transport Lower Front Cover
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Unhook the tab, and remove the Horizontal Transport Upper Front Cover
[1].
[1]
4349F2C533DA
3. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the Horizontal Transport Front Right
Cover [3].
Maintenance
[2]
[3]
4349F2C534DA
4. Remove two screws [4], and remove
the Horizontal Transport Lower Front
Cover [5].
[5]
NOTE
• At reinstallation, first fit the tab [6]
into position.
[6]
[4]
4.3.2
4349F2C517DA
Horizontal Transport Upper Cover
1. Remove four screws [1], and remove
the Horizontal Transport Upper
Cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4349F2C516DA
12
4.3.3
4. Other
Front Door
[1]
[2]
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove
the stopper.
3. Remove two screws [2], and remove
the dummy cover.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4349F2C535DA
4. Close the Front Door.
5. Remove the clip [3], and remove the
Front Door [4].
[4]
[3]
4.3.4
Horizontal Transport Left Front Cover
1. Remove three screws [1], and
remove the Horizontal Transport Left
Front Cover [2].
[2]
[1]
4349F2C508DA
4.3.5
Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Rear Cover/Connector Cover
[6]
[7]
[2]
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
4349F2C537DA
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Paper Exit Front Cover [2].
2. Loosen the screw [3], remove two screws [4], and remove the Paper Exit Rear Cover
[5].
3. Remove the screw [6], and remove the Connector Cover [7].
13
Maintenance
4349F2C536DA
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
4.3.6
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2nd Drawer
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the 2nd Drawer [2].
[2]
[1]
4.3.7
4349F2C538DA
Output Tray (OT-601)
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the Exit Tray [2].
Maintenance
[2]
[1]
4.3.8
4349F2C539DA
1st Drawer
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the 1st Drawer [2].
[2]
[1]
14
4349F2C540DA
4.3.9
4. Other
Sorted Copy Tray
NOTE
• When removing the Sorted Copy Tray, set the Sorted Copy Tray to its home position.
• If the Exit Tray (OT-601) is installed, remove it in advance.
[2]
[1]
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Remove the screw [1], and remove
the Front Door Stopper [2].
3. Remove the Horizontal Transport
Left Front Cover.
☞ 13
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4349F2C507DA
[3]
4. Disconnect three connectors [3].
5. Remove two screws [4], and remove
the ground wire.
[4]
Maintenance
[3]
4349F2C509DA
6. Remove six screws [5], and lift the
Sorted Copy Tray [6] upward and off
the copier.
[6]
[5]
[5]
4349F2C510DA
4.3.10
Horizontal Transport Unit
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
[2]
[1]
Remove the Sorted Copy Tray.
15
Remove the Front Right Door.
13
While holding down the lock release
button [1], remove the Horizontal
Transport Unit [2].
4349F2C511DA
15
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
4.3.11
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Stapler Unit
[3]
[1]
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Turn the dial [1], and move the stapler forward.
3. Remove the Staple Cartridge.
4. Remove the screw [2], and remove
the cover [3].
[2]
4349F2C512DA
5. Disconnect two connectors [4].
[4]
Maintenance
4349F2C513DA
[6]
6. Remove two screws [5], and remove
the Stapler Unit Assy [6].
[5]
4349F2C514DA
7. Remove two screws [7] and remove
the Stapler Unit [8].
[8]
[7]
4349F2C515DA
16
4.3.12
4. Other
Punch Unit (PU-501)
[1]
[2]
4512F2C500DA
1. Remove the Sorted Copy Tray.
☞ 15
2. Remove the Horizontal Transport
Unit.
☞ 15
3. Remove the Horizontal Transport
Upper Cover.
☞ 12
4. Remove two screws [1], and remove
the Reinforcement Bracket [2].
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. Disconnect two connectors [3].
4349F2C520DA
[6]
[7]
6. Remove two screws [6], and remove
the Punch Kit [7].
[6]
4349F2C521DA
[8]
[8]
7. Remove eight screws [8], and the
Punch Unit [9].
[8]
[9]
[8]
4349F2C524DA
17
Maintenance
[3]
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
4.3.13
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Storage Paddle Drive Clutch
A.
1.
☞
2.
[1]
☞
3.
4349F2C522DA
☞
4.
Removal Procedure
Remove the Sorted Copy Tray.
15
Remove the Horizontal Transport
Unit.
15
Remove the Horizontal Transport
Upper Cover.
12
Remove the C-ring [1].
5. Loosen two hexagonal socket head
screws [2], and remove the Storage
Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [3].
[3]
Maintenance
[2]
4349F2C523DA
B. Reinstallation Procedure
1. Check that the 2-mm hole [2] of the storage paddle drive shaft [1] and the cutout of the
frame [3] are aligned and install the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [4].
2. Refer to the figure below and check the paddle position [5].
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[7]
[6]
4349F2C525DA
3. Hook the Solenoid Flapper [7] to the tab [6] of the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
[4].
4. Attach the C-ring and reinstall the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy.
5. Adjust the spacing between the C-ring and the Storage Paddle Drive Clutch Assy to 0.2
mm and tighten two hexagonal socket head screws.
18
Exit Paddle Drive Clutch
A.
1.
☞
2.
[1]
[2]
4349F2C526DA
[4]
[3]
☞
3.
☞
4.
5.
Removal Procedure
Remove the Sorted Copy Tray.
15
Remove the Horizontal Transport
Unit.
15
Remove the Horizontal Transport
Upper Cover.
12
Remove the C-ring [1].
Remove the gear [2].
6. Loosen two hexagonal socket head
screws [3], and remove the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [4].
Maintenance
4.3.14
4. Other
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4349F2C527DA
B. Reinstallation Procedure
1. Reinstall the Exit Paddle Drive
Clutch Assy [1].
[1]
4349F2C528DA
19
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Precaution for Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Reinstallation
Exit paddle
Exit Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
Exit paddle
107 mm ± 3 mm
90°
Maintenance
Solenoid flapper
4349F2C529DA
2. Install the gear [2].
[2]
4349F2C530DA
[3]
[4]
4349F2C531DA
20
3. Hook the Solenoid Flapper [4] to the
tab [3] of the Exit Paddle Drive
Clutch Assy.
NOTE
• Install the Exit Paddle Drive Clutch
Assy with the side having a wider
spacing between the tabs facing
upward.
4. Attach the C-ring and press the Exit
Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [6] to the
bushing [5].
5. Adjust the spacing between the
bushing [5] and the Exit Paddle Drive
Clutch Assy [6] to 0.2 mm and
tighten two hexagonal socket head
screws.
[6]
0.2 mm
4349F2C532DA
Maintenance
[5]
4. Other
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
21
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Maintenance
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
4. Other
Blank Page
22
5. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting
5.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
23
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
6. I/O Check
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O Check
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Touch [I/O Check].
3. Touch [Finisher].
6.2
6.2.1
I/O check list
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4349F3E519DA
24
I/O check list
A. Finisher (FS-508/PU-501)
Symbol
Panel display
PC5-FN
Paper Passage
(Middle)
PC4-FN
PC3-FN
Part/Signal name
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
1
0
Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Paper Passage
(Feed in)
Entrance Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Elevate Tray Upper/
Lowered
Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor
Raised
Position
Not raised
S2-FN
Shutter Status
Shutter Detection Switch
Closed
Open
S1-FN
Front Door Set
Front Cover Detection Switch
Closed
Open
PC2-PK
Punch Pulse
Punch Motor Pulse Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC14-FN
Lower (Elev.)
Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Surface (Elev.)
Top Face Detection Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Optional Tray
(Elevate)
Short Connector
Set
Not set
PC15-FN
-
Elevate Tray Position Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC6-FN
Align Home 1
Alignment Home Position Sensor 1
At home
Not at home
Align Home 2
Alignment Home Position Sensor 2
At home
Not at home
Home (Shutter)
Shutter Home Position Sensor
At home
Not at home
PC11-FN
Paddle Home (Exit)
Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor
At home
Not at home
PC12-FN
Exit R Home
Exit Roller Home Position Sensor
At home
Not at home
PC8-FN
Empty (Finisher)
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
PC7-FN
PC16-FN
PC10-FN
Finisher
PC3-FN
Staple Home (CD)
Staple Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Self Priming
Self-Priming Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Staple Empty
Staple Empty Detection Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Staple Home
Staple Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
PC3-PK
Punch Pos. 1
Punch Positioning Sensor 1
Unblocked
Blocked
PC4-PK
Punch Pos. 2
Punch Positioning Sensor 2
Unblocked
Blocked
PC1-PK
Punch Scraps Full
Detect
Punch Trash Full
Blocked
Unblocked
PC22-SK
Home
(Paper Hold R)
Crease Roller Home Position Sensor
Blocked
Unblocked
Middle Guide
Transport Jam Detection Switch
Closed
Open
S4-FN
25
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
6.2.2
6. I/O Check
Adjustment / Setting
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
7. Test Mode
7.
7.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Test Mode
Entering Function Mode
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Touch [Function].
4349F2E541DA
3. Touch [FC].
4349F2E542DA
Adjustment / Setting
4. Touch the button for the desired
function.
4349F3E520DA
26
7.2
7. Test Mode
Function Modes
1: Staple unit CD movement mode
• Returns the Staple Unit to the predetermined position after it moves to the 2-point stapling position for A4.
→ Moves from the predetermined position to the inner 2-point stapling position for A4.
→ Moves from the starting position and stops after the predetermined time.
→ Moves to the front of A4.
→ Moves from the starting position and stops after the predetermined time.
→ Moves to the predetermined position.
→ The operation is finished.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
3: Elevator Tray ascent operation mode
• The Elevator Tray is raised to mailbin 1. (Mailbin 1 → Additional Mailbin → Mailbin 2)
→ The Exit opens.
→ The Shutter closes.
→ The Paper Output Tray is raised to mailbin 1.
→ The Shutter opens.
→ The Exit closes.
→ The operation is finished.
4: Elevator Tray descent operation mode
• The Elevator Tray is lowered from mailbin 1. (Mailbin 2 → Additional Mailbin → Mailbin 1)
→ The Exit opens.
→ The Shutter closes.
→ The Paper Output Tray is lowered from mailbin 1.
→ The Shutter opens.
→ The Exit closes.
→ The operation is finished.
5: Punch Unit movement mode (appears only when the Punch Kit PU-501 is installed)
• The punch is driven once at a standard hole.
→ The operation is finished.
7: Exit open/close mode
• Opens and closes the Exit.
→ The Exit opens.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ The Exit closes.
→ The operation is finished.
27
Adjustment / Setting
2: Aligning movement mode
• Aligning Plates 1 and 2 return to the predetermined position after moving to the aligning
position for A4R.
→ Moves from the predetermined position to the second predetermined position for A4R.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ Moves to the aligning position for A4R.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ Moves to the predetermined position.
→ The operation is finished.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
7. Test Mode
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8: Creasing Unit movement mode (appears only when the Saddle Kit SD-502 is
installed)
☞ For details, see SD-502 Service Manual.
9: Saddle Unit exit open/close mode (appears only when the Saddle Kit SD-502 is
installed)
☞ For details, see SD-502 Service Manual.
10: Transport drive mode
• Transport drive is performed for the predetermined time. (Performs the same transport
drive as the pre-drive with the high speed of the connected copier.)
→ Drives the Entrance Motor (M3-FN).
→ Drives the Transport Motor (M2-FN).
→ Drives the Exit Motor (M1-FN).
→ The operation is finished.
• If the Mail Bin Kit MT-501 is installed, the Mailbins are also driven.
• If the Saddle Kit SD-502 is also installed, the Saddle Transport Motor (M8-SK) is also
driven.
Adjustment / Setting
11: Shutter drive mode
• Opens and closes the Shutter.
→ The Exit opens.
→ The Shutter closes.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ The Shutter opens.
→ The Exit closes.
→ The operation is finished.
12: Mailbin Solenoid movement mode (appears only when the Mail Bin Kit MT-501 is
installed)
☞ For details, see MT-501 Service Manual.
13: Storage Paddle operation mode
• Performs the single rotate operation for the Storage Paddle.
→ The operation is finished.
14: Exit Paddle movement mode
• Performs the single rotate operation for the Storage Paddle.
→ The operation is finished.
28
8.1
Mechanical adjustment
Staple Position Adjustment
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Stapler has been replaced.
• When staple position is misaligned.
1-Point Tilted Staple
B
1. Set the staple mode and make a
copy.
2. Check the staple position of the
paper.
• 1-Point Tilted Staple
(Paper Width: 216 to 297 mm)
279 to 297 mm: 45° tilt,
B5, B4R: 30° tilt
A
C
D
Measurement
position
1-point parallel staple
A
Specification
Adjustment
range
A, C
4.4 mm
—
B, D
12.1 mm
+1 mm to -2mm
• 1-Point Parallel Staple
(Paper Width: 182 to 216 mm)
B
2-Point Staple
Measurement
position
Specification
Adjustment
range
A
4.5 mm
—
B
6 mm
+1 mm to -2mm
• 2-Point Staple
C
D
E
F
4349F3C506DA
Measurement
position
Specification
Adjustment
range
C, F
6 mm
+1 mm to -2mm
D
Y
—
E
X
—
Y = (paper width-X-11) / 2
X = A3R, A4: 137
B4R, B5: 114
A4R: 190
B5R: 162
Substitute above into the equation.
3. If the staple position is misaligned,
adjust with the following procedure.
29
Adjustment / Setting
8.
8. Mechanical adjustment
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
8. Mechanical adjustment
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[3]
[1]
4. Open the Front Door.
5. Turn the dial [1], and move the stapler forward.
6. Loosen the screw [2], and remove
the cover [3].
[2]
4349F3C505DA
[5]
[4]
7. Loosen two adjustment screws [2]
and move the Stapler Unit [3] in the
direction of the arrow to make the
adjustment.
8. Make another copy and check the
staple position.
4349F3C504DA
8.2
Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive
Gear
Adjustment / Setting
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When any of gear 1, 2, or 3 has been replaced.
• When gears 1, 2, and 3 has been disassembled.
[2]
[1]
[1]
4349F3C507DA
30
1. Set three gears.
NOTE
• Set the gears so that the marks on
Gears 1 and 3 [1] are aligned with
the rib of Gear 2 [2] as shown on
the right.
8.3
8. Mechanical adjustment
Punch Hole Deviance Adjustment (PU-501)
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Punch Kit has been replaced.
• When the Punch Kit has been removed.
[2]
[1]
4349F3C509DA
4. Remove the Horizontal Transport
Lower Front Cover.
☞ 12
5. Loosen the adjustment screw [1],
and move the Punch Unit [2] forward
or backward to make the adjustment.
6. Make another copy and check the
punch hole position.
Adjustment / Setting
4349F3C508DA
1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch
mode and make a 1-sided copy from
a 1-sided original.
2. Fold the output paper in half and
check whether the punch hole positions are aligned.
Specification: 0±2 mm
3. If the punch hole position is misaligned, adjust with the following procedure.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
31
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
8. Mechanical adjustment
8.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Punch Hold Position Adjustment (PU-501)
1. Set the copier into the Hole Punch
mode and make a 1-sided copy from
a 1-sided original.
2. Check width A on the output paper.
A
4349F3C511DA
3. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the
Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the
Adjustment/Setting of the main unit
service manual.
4. Touch [Tech. Rep. Choice].
4349F3E521DA
Adjustment / Setting
5. Touch [Finisher].
6. Touch [Punch Stop Position].
4349F3E522DA
7. Press the Clear key and use the 10Key Pad to set the value.
• To make width A wider, enter a positive value.
• To make width A narrower, enter a
negative value.
4349F3E523DA
32
Adjustment range: +10 max. and -10
min.
1 increment: 0.5 mm
Use the ✽ key to switch between + and -.
Punch Loop Length Adjustment (PU-501)
NOTE
This adjustment must be made in any of the following cases:
• When a slant occurs in the punch hole position.
• When misfeed frequently occurs in punch hole mode.
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the
Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the
Adjustment/Setting of the main unit
service manual.
2. Touch [Tech. Rep. Choice].
4349F3E521DA
3. Touch [Finisher].
4. Touch [Punch Loop Adjustment].
4349F3E522DA
5. Press the Clear key and use the 10Key Pad to set the value.
• To make loop length larger, enter a
positive value.
• To make loop length smaller, enter a
positive value.
4349F3E524DA
Adjustment range: +4 max. and -4 min.
1 increment: 1 mm
Use the ✽ key to switch between + and -.
33
Adjustment / Setting
8.5
8. Mechanical adjustment
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
8. Mechanical adjustment
Adjustment / Setting
Blank Page
34
9. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
9.
Jam Display
9.1
Misfeed Display
• When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper location are displayed on the Touch Panel of the machine.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
4349F4E502DA
Display
[1]
9.1.1
Misfeed Location
Misfeed processing location
Action
Transport Section Misfeed
Front Door
☞ 38
Finisher Staple Misfeed
Front Door
☞ 39
Finisher Punch Misfeed
Front Door
☞ 39
Finisher Bundle Exit Misfeed
Front Door
☞ 40
Misfeed Display Resetting Procedure
Troubleshooting
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
35
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
9. Jam Display
9.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Sensor layout
[1]
[2]
[3]
Troubleshooting
4349F4C501DA
36
[1]
Transport Sensor
PC5-FN
[2]
Entrance Sensor
PC4-FN
[3]
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor
PC8-FN
9.3
9.3.1
9. Jam Display
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Solution
Initial Check Items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items
Check Item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Change paper.
Is paper curled, wavy, or damp.
Change paper.
Instruct user in correct paper storage.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is
Clean or change the paper path.
the paper path deformed or worn?
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or change the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct
Set as necessary.
position to accommodate paper?
Troubleshooting
Are actuators found operational as checked for correct
Correct or change the defective actuator.
operation?
37
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
9. Jam Display
9.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Transport Section Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the copier’s Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) is blocked by
Finisher Transport Section the paper.
misfeed detection
The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the copier’s Paper Exit Sensor (PC4) is unblocked
by the paper.
The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is blocked by the
paper.
Finisher Paper Exit
Section misfeed detection The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is unblocked by
the paper.
The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to
ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
Detection of paper
remaining in the Transport
The Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is blocked when the Power Switch is set to
Section
ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is
reset.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Paper Exit Sensor (PC4)
Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
Transport Sensor (PC5-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
Mechanical Control Board (PWB-A)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
38
Action
1
Initial check items
2
PC4 I/O check
3
4
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
-
PWB-A PJ18A-11 (ON)
M-12
PC4-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-4 (ON)
FS-508 G-4
PC5-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-9 (ON)
FS-508 B-5
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
6
Change PWB-A
-
-
9.3.3
9. Jam Display
Finisher Staple Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
Finisher Staple misfeed
detection
The Staple Home Position Sensor in the Staple Unit is not blocked even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor rotates forward, and then the Staple Motor rotates backward, and the Staple Home
Position Sensor in the Staple Unit is blocked within the set period of time.
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Staple Unit
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
1
Initial check items
-
2
Drive Coupling Section check
-
-
3
I/O Check
-
-
4
Change Staple Unit
-
-
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
9.3.4
Finisher Punch Misfeed (PU-501)
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
Finisher Punch misfeed
detection
Punch Positioning Sensors 1 and 2 are not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Punch Motor is energized.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
1
Initial check items
-
2
Drive Coupling Section check
-
-
3
I/O Check
-
-
4
Change Punch Unit
-
-
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
39
Troubleshooting
Punch Unit
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
9. Jam Display
9.3.5
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Finisher Bundle Exit Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN) is not unblocked even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Motor (M1-FN) is energized.
Finisher Bundle Exit
misfeed detection
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN)
Exit Motor (M1-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
40
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC8-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-8 (ON)
FS-508 G-8
3
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
10. Malfunction code
10. Malfunction code
10.1 Trouble code
• The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch
Panel.
C1183
C1190
C1191
C11A0
C11A1
Description
Detection Timing
Elevator Motor Ascent/
Descent Drive Failure
• The Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Main Power Switch is set to ON.
• The Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3-FN) and Top
Face Detection Sensor (PC15-FN) are not blocked even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor
(M11-FN) is energized.
• The Elevator Tray does not stop at the position for the specified tray after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized
(beginning of descent operation) and the Elevator Tray Lower
Limit Sensor (PC14-FN) is blocked.
• The Top Face Detection Sensor (PC15-FN) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized (beginning of ascent operation) when paper is being fed out.
• The Lock signal is detected after the set period of time has
elapsed after the Elevator Motor (M11-FN) is energized.
Aligning Plate 1 Drive
Failure
• The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Main Power Switch is set to ON.
• The Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN) is energized.
Aligning Plate 2 Drive
Failure
• The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Main Power Switch is set to ON.
• The Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN) is energized.
Paper Holding Drive
Failure
• The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) is activated (beginning of paddle retraction operation).
• The Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN) is activated (beginning of
paddle paper-holding operation).
Exit Roller Pressure/
Retraction Failure
• The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of
pressure operation).
• The Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning
of retraction operation).
41
Troubleshooting
Code
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
10. Malfunction code
Code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Description
Detection Timing
C11A3
Shutter Drive Failure
• The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning
of shutter-opening operation).
• The Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit
Open/Close Motor (M6-FN) is energized (beginning of shutter-closing operation).
C11B0
Staple Unit CD Drive
Failure
The Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Stapling
Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN) is energized (beginning of return
operation to predetermined position).
C11B2
Staple Drive Failure
The Home Position Sensor is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor is energized
(beginning of staple operation).
C11C0
Punch Cam Motor Unit
Failure
The Punch Motor Pulse Sensor cannot detect both edges of H/L
even after the set period of time has elapsed while the Punch
Drive Motor is energized.
CC155
Finishing Option Flash
ROM Failure
• Data of flash ROM of the finishing options is determined to be
faulty when the power is turned ON.
10.2 Solution
10.2.1
C1183: Elevator Motor Ascent/Descent Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Elevator Motor (M11-FN)
Elevator Tray Home Position Sensor (PC3-FN)
Elevator Tray Lower Limit Sensor (PC14-FN)
Top Face Detection Sensor (PC15-FN)
Elevator Board (PWB-B FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
42
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M11-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M11-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
If OT-601 is connected, check the
connector for proper connection,
and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
Check the installation position of the
OT-601 tray, and correct as necessary.
-
-
5
M11-FN operation check
PWB-A FN PJ7A FN-1 to 2
FS-508 G-7
6
PC3-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ12A FN-2 (ON)
FS-508 G-4
7
PC14-FN I/O check
PWB-B FN PJ2B FN-3 (ON)
FS-508 H-6
8
PC15-FN I/O check
PWB-B FN PJ2B FN-6 (ON)
FS-508 H-6
9
Change PWB-B FN
-
-
10
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
10. Malfunction code
10.2.2
C1190: Aligning Plate 1 Drive Failure
10.2.3
C1191: Aligning Plate 2 Drive Failure
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Relevant Electrical Parts
Alignment Motor 1 (M4-FN)
Alignment Motor 2 (M5-FN)
Alignment Home Position Sensor 1 (PC6-FN)
Alignment Home Position Sensor 2 (PC7-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
• C1190
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M4-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M4-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M4-FN operation check
PWB-A FN PJ14A FN-1 to 4
FS-508 G-7
4
PC6-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-3 (ON)
FS-508 G-8
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
• C1191
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M5-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M5-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M5-FN operation check
PWB-A FN PJ14A FN-5 to 8
FS-508 G-8
4
PC7-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-6 (ON)
FS-508 G-8
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
43
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
10. Malfunction code
10.2.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C11A0: Paper Holding Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Exit Paddle Solenoid (SL2-FN)
Exit Paddle Home Position Sensor (PC11-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
1
Check the SL2-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
2
PC11-FN I/O check
3
SL2-FN operation check
4
Change PWB-A FN
10.2.5
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
-
PWB-A FN PJ17A FN-7 (ON)
FS-508 B-7
PWB-A FN PJ18A FN-6 (REM)
FS-508 B-7
-
-
C11A1: Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN)
Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC12-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
44
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M6-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M6-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M6-FN operation check
PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-1 to 2
FS-508 B-6
4
PC12-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-7 (ON)
FS-508 B-5
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
10.2.6
10. Malfunction code
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C11A3: Shutter Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Exit Open/Close Motor (M6-FN)
Shutter Home Position Sensor (PC16-FN)
Elevator Board (PWB-B FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M6-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M6-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M6-FN operation check
PWB-A FN PJ20A FN-1 to 2
FS-508 B-6
4
PC16-FN I/O check
PWB-B FN PJ2B FN-9 (ON)
FS-508 H-6
5
Change PWB-B FN
-
-
6
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
10.2.7
C11B0: Staple Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Stapling Unit Moving Motor (M7-FN)
Staple Home Position Sensor (PC10-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
1
Location
(Electrical Component)
Check for interference with the Shutter and Exit Roller, and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check the M7-FN connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
3
Check M7-FN for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
4
M7-FN operation check
PWB-A FN PJ15A FN-1 to 4
FS-508 G-9
5
PC10-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ17A FN-3 (ON)
FS-508 B-7
6
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
Troubleshooting
Control Signal
45
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
10. Malfunction code
10.2.8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C11B2: Staple Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Staple Unit
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
1
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
Check the Staple unit connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check the Staple Unit for proper
drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Staple Unit operation check
-
-
4
Change Staple Unit
-
-
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
10.2.9
C11C0: Punch Cam Motor Unit Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Punch Unit
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
46
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the Punch Unit connectors
for proper connection, and correct
as necessary.
-
-
2
Check the Punch Unit for proper
drive coupling, and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
Punch Unit I/O check
-
-
4
Change Punch Unit
-
-
5
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
10.2.10
10. Malfunction code
CC155: Finishing Option Flash ROM Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Main Control Board (PWB-A FN)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Disconnect and then connect the
power cord. Turn OFF the Main
Power Switch, wait for 10 sec. or
more, and turn ON the Main Power
Switch.
-
-
2
Rewrite firmware using the Compact
Flash card.
-
-
3
Change PWB-A FN
-
-
Troubleshooting
Control Signal
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
47
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
FS-508/PU-501/OT-601
10. Malfunction code
Troubleshooting
Blank Page
48
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
MT-501
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
MT-501
CONTENTS
MT-501
General
Product specification ............................................................................................... 1
Maintenance
2.
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 3
2.1.1
Cleaning of the Roller and Roll ..................................................................... 3
Other ....................................................................................................................... 4
3.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 4
3.2
Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .............................................................. 5
3.3
Disassembly/Assembly procedure........................................................................ 5
3.3.1
Rear Cover/Right Door.................................................................................. 5
3.3.2
Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray ................................................ 6
Maintenance
3.
General
1.
4.
How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 7
5.
I/O check ................................................................................................................. 8
5.1
Check procedure .................................................................................................. 8
5.2
I/O check list ......................................................................................................... 8
5.2.1
I/O check screen ........................................................................................... 8
5.2.2
I/O check list.................................................................................................. 9
Test Mode Operations ........................................................................................... 10
6.1
Entering Function Mode ..................................................................................... 10
6.2
Function Modes .................................................................................................. 10
Troubleshooting
7.
Jam Display ........................................................................................................... 11
7.1
Misfeed display ................................................................................................... 11
7.1.1
Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 11
7.2
Sensor layout ...................................................................................................... 12
7.3
Solution............................................................................................................... 13
7.3.1
Initial check items........................................................................................ 13
7.3.2
Transport Section Misfeed .......................................................................... 14
i
Troubleshooting
6.
Adjustment / Setting
Adjustment/Setting
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
Maintenance
General
MT-501
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Blank Page
ii
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specification
General
Product specification
MT-501
1.
Name
Mail Bin Kit
Installation
Install at the top section of the Finisher Elevator Tray.
Number of Bins
4 bins
Number of Sheets Stored per Bin
125 sheets (80 g/m2)
Storable Paper
Plain paper (56 to 90 g/m2), recycled paper (60 to 90 g/m2)
Storable Paper Size
A5, B5R, and A4R (5-1/2, 8.5 × 11)
General
A. Type
B. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the Finisher)
DC 5 V (generated inside the Mail Bin)
Dimensions
624 mm (W) × 503 mm (D) × 390 mm (H)
Weight
8 kg
C. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
MT-501
1. Product specification
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
Maintenance
Periodical check
2.1
MT-501
2.
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
2.1.1
Cleaning of the Roller and Roll
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller and roll.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[2]
Maintenance
4510F2C500DA
3
3. Other
3.
MT-501
3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
NOTE
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts)
No.
Section
Part name
Ref. page
Rear Cover
☞ 5
Front Cover
☞ 6
Upper Cover
☞ 6
4
Right Door
☞ 5
5
Paper Output Tray
☞ 6
1
2
3
3.3
3.3.1
Exterior parts
MT-501
3.2
3. Other
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
Rear Cover/Right Door
Maintenance
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
[1]
4510F2C504DA
1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
2. Remove the screw [3], the stopper [4], and remove the Right Door [5].
5
3. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray
MT-501
3.3.2
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
Maintenance
4510F2C505DA
1.
2.
☞
3.
4.
6
Remove the screw [1] and remove the Front Cover [2].
Remove the Rear Cover.
5
Remove the Upper Cover [3].
Remove the Paper Output Trays [4].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. How to use the adjustment section
Adjustment/Setting
How to use the adjustment section
MT-501
4.
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
7
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
5. I/O check
5.
MT-501
5.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O check
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the main unit service manual.
2. Touch the [I/O Check] key.
3. Touch the [Finisher] key.
4. Touch [Fwd] three times.
5.2
5.2.1
I/O check list
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4510F3C506DA
8
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Panel display
1
0
Lower Transport Sensor
Paper not
present
Paper Passage 2
(Mail Bins)
Upper Transport Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
Mail Bin Door
Cover Open/Close Sensor
Open
Close
1st Mail Bin Empty
Paper Detection Sensor 1
Paper not
present
Paper
present
1st Mail bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 1
PC10-MK
PC9-MK
PC11-MK
PC5-MK
PC2-MK
PC6-MK
Finisher
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
Paper
present
Paper Passage 1
(Mail Bins)
PC1-MK
Part/Signal name
2nd Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 2
2nd Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 2
PC3-MK
3rd Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 3
PC7-MK
3rd Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 3
PC4-MK
4th Mail Bin Empty Paper Detection Sensor 4
PC8-MK
4th Mail Bin Full
Paper Full Detection Sensor 4
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
Paper not
present
Paper
present
Blocked
Unblocked
MT-501
Symbol
I/O check list
Adjustment / Setting
5.2.2
5. I/O check
9
6. Test Mode Operations
MT-501
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Test Mode Operations
Entering Function Mode
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Service Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting of
the main unit service manual.
2. Touch [Function].
4510F3C504DA
3. Touch [FC].
4510F3C505DA
Adjustment / Setting
4. Touch [12].
4349F3J503DA
6.2
Function Modes
12: Mailbin solenoid drive mode
• Bin Entrance Switching Solenoids 1, 2 and 3 switch, in order, at the predetermined times.
→ Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid 1 (SL1-MK) activates for the predetermined time.
→ Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid 2 (SL2-MK) activates for the predetermined time.
→ Bin Entrance Switching Solenoid 3 (SL3-MK) activates for the predetermined time.
→ All Bin Entrance Switching Solenoids deactivate.
→ The operation is finished.
10
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
Jam Display
7.1
MT-501
7.
Misfeed display
• When misfeed occurs, message, misfeed location “Blinking” and paper location “Lighting” are displayed on the Touch Panel of the main unit.
[1]
4510F4E503DA
No.
[1]
7.1.1
Misfeed location
Vertical Transport Section
Misfeed access location
Right Door
Action
☞ 14
Misfeed display resetting procedure
Troubleshooting
• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.
11
7. Jam Display
Sensor layout
MT-501
7.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[1]
[2]
[3]
Troubleshooting
4510F4C501DA
12
[1]
Upper Transport Sensor
PC9-MK
[2]
Lower Transport Sensor
PC10-MK
[3]
Transport Sensor
PC5-FN
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
7.3.1
Solution
Initial check items
MT-501
7.3
7. Jam Display
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.
Check item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Replace paper.
Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp?
Replace paper.
Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path,
or is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at the
Set as necessary.
correct position to accommodate the paper?
Correct or replace the defective actuator.
Troubleshooting
Are the actuators operating correctly?
13
7. Jam Display
7.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Transport Section Misfeed
MT-501
A. Detection timing
Type
Description
Transport Section misfeed
detection
The Lower Transport Sensor (PC10-MK) is not blocked even after the
set period of time has elapsed after the Transport Sensor (PC5-FN) is
unblocked by the paper.
The Upper Transport Sensor (PC9-MK) is not blocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Lower Transport Sensor (PC10MK) is blocked by the paper.
The Lower Transport Sensor (PC10-MK) is blocked when the Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed
Detection of paper remaining or malfunction is reset.
in the Transport Section
The Upper Transport Sensor (PC9-MK) is blocked when the Power
Switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed
or malfunction is reset.
B. Action
Relevant electrical parts
Transport Sensor (PC5-FN)
Lower Transport Sensor (PC10-MK)
Upper Transport Sensor (PC9-MK)
Main Control Board (PWB-A MK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
14
Action
1
Initial checks
2
PC5-FN sensor check
Control signal
Location (Electrical
components)
-
-
PWB-MK CN102A MK-5 (ON)
C-5
3
PC10-MK sensor check
PWB-MK CN102A MK-8 (ON)
C-5
4
PC9-MK sensor check
PWB-MK CN101A MK-8 (ON)
C-4
5
PWB-A MK replacement
-
-
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
SD-502
2005.08
Ver. 1.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 to the left of the revised section.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a section revised, show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page.
A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
2005/08
1.0
—
Date
Service manual Ver.
Revision mark
Issue of the first edition
Descriptions of revision
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
SD-502
CONTENTS
SD-502
General
Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1
Maintenance
2.
Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts) ................................................. 3
2.1.1
3.
Cleaning of the Rollers and Rolls.................................................................. 3
Service tool ............................................................................................................. 3
3.1
CE Tool list............................................................................................................ 3
4.1
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 4
4.2
Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts) .............................................................. 5
4.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly parts list................................................................... 5
Disassembly/Assembly procedure........................................................................ 5
4.3.1
Paper Output Tray/Front Cover ..................................................................... 5
4.3.2
Rear Cover.................................................................................................... 6
4.3.3
Upper Cover.................................................................................................. 6
4.3.4
Saddle Unit ................................................................................................... 7
4.3.5
Crease Unit ................................................................................................... 8
4.3.6
Stapler Unit ................................................................................................... 9
4.3.7
In & Out Guide Drive Motor......................................................................... 13
4.3.8
Crease Roller .............................................................................................. 15
Adjustment/Setting
5.
How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 19
6.
I/O Check .............................................................................................................. 20
6.1
Check procedure ................................................................................................ 20
6.2
I/O check list ....................................................................................................... 20
6.2.1
I/O check screen ......................................................................................... 20
6.2.2
I/O check list................................................................................................ 21
7.
7.1
7.2
Test mode.............................................................................................................. 22
Entering Function Mode ..................................................................................... 22
Function Modes .................................................................................................. 22
Mechanical adjustment ......................................................................................... 23
i
Adjustment / Setting
4.3
Maintenance
Other ....................................................................................................................... 4
Troubleshooting
4.
8.
General
1.
SD-502
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.1
Fold Angle Adjustment ....................................................................................... 23
8.2
Fold Position Adjustment .................................................................................... 24
8.3
Center Staple Angle Adjustment ........................................................................ 25
8.4
Center Staple Position Adjustment..................................................................... 26
Troubleshooting
9.
Jam Display........................................................................................................... 27
General
9.1
Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 27
9.3
Solution .............................................................................................................. 28
10.
Maintenance
Misfeed Display .................................................................................................. 27
9.2
9.3.1
Initial Check Items ...................................................................................... 28
9.3.2
Creasing Section Misfeed ........................................................................... 28
9.3.3
Staple Unit Misfeed..................................................................................... 29
9.3.4
Paper Bundle Exit Misfeed.......................................................................... 30
Malfunction code................................................................................................... 31
10.1 Trouble code ....................................................................................................... 31
Troubleshooting
Adjustment / Setting
10.2 Solution .............................................................................................................. 32
ii
10.2.1
C11A2: Saddle Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure.............................. 32
10.2.2
C11A4: Saddle Exit Motor Failure............................................................... 32
10.2.3
C11A5: Saddle In & Out Guide Motor Failure............................................. 33
10.2.4
C11A6: Saddle Layable Guide Drive Failure .............................................. 33
10.2.5
C11B5: Side Staple 1 Drive Failure ............................................................ 34
10.2.6
C11B6: Side Staple 2 Drive Failure ............................................................ 34
10.2.7
C11D0: Crease Motor Drive Failure............................................................ 34
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
1. Product specifications
General
Product specifications
SD-502
1.
Name
Saddle Sticher SD-502
Type
Built into the Finisher
Installation
Screwed to the Finisher
Document Alignment
Center
Stapling Function
Center parallel two points
No. of sheets to be stapled together: 2 to 15
General
A. Type
B. Paper type
Type
Plain Paper
Size
B5R to A3
Capacity
200 sheets or 20 copies
56 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
15 to 24 lb
C. Machine specifications
Power Requirements
DC 24 V (supplied from the Finisher))
DC 5 V
Max. Power Consumption
9.5 W or less
Dimensions
445 mm (W) x 203 mm (D) x 478 mm (H)
17.5 inch (W) x 8 inch (D) x 18.75 inch (H)
Weight
9.3 kg (20.5 lb)
D. Operating environment
• Conforms to the operating environment of the main unit.
E. Consumables
• Staples 2000 (MS-2C) x 2
NOTE
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
General
SD-502
1. Product specifications
Blank Page
2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
2. Periodical check
Maintenance
2.1
Periodical check
SD-502
2.
Maintenance procedure (Periodical check parts)
NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the
isopropyl alcohol.
Cleaning of the Rollers and Rolls
[1]
[2]
[2]
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller [1] and roll
[2].
Maintenance
2.1.1
4511F2C502DA
2. Remove the Crease Unit.
☞ 8
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with
alcohol, wipe the roller [3] and roll
[4].
[4]
[3]
4511F2C506DA
3.
Service tool
3.1
CE Tool list
Tool name
Stapler Unit Positioning Jig
Shape
Personnel
Parts No.
1
4511-7901-01
Remarks
3
4. Other
4.
SD-502
4.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Other
Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
A. Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming
loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not
be removed or loosened.
B. Red-painted screws
• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also
be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
C. Variable Resistors on Board
Maintenance
NOTE
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions
are given in Adjustment/Setting.
D. Removal of PWBs
Caution
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “SAFETY
AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and
screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components
on the board, be sure to ground your body.
4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4.2.1
Disassembly/Assembly list (Other parts)
Disassembly/Assembly parts list
No.
Section
Part name
Ref.Page
Paper Output Tray
☞ 5
Front Cover
☞ 5
Upper Cover
☞ 6
4
Rear Cover
☞ 6
5
Saddle Unit
☞ 7
Crease Unit
☞ 8
7
Stapler Unit
☞ 9
8
In & Out Guide Drive Motor
☞ 13
Crease Roller
☞ 15
1
3
6
9
4.3
4.3.1
Exterior parts
Unit
Others
Disassembly/Assembly procedure
Paper Output Tray/Front Cover
Maintenance
2
SD-502
4.2
4. Other
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511F2C500DA
1. Align the cutout and remove the Paper Output Tray [1].
2. Remove two screws [2], and remove the Front Cover [3].
5
4. Other
Rear Cover
SD-502
4.3.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[2]
[1]
Maintenance
4511F2C501DA
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Rear Cover [2].
4.3.3
1.
☞
2.
☞
Upper Cover
Remove the Front Cover.
5
Remove the Rear Cover.
6
[1]
[1]
[2]
4511F2C514DA
6
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove
the Upper Cover [2].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4.3.4
4. Other
Saddle Unit
SD-502
1. Remove the screw [1], and remove
the Connector Cover [2].
[1]
[2]
4511F2C503DA
2. Remove the screw [3], and remove
the ground wire [4].
3. Unplug two connectors [5].
[4]
[3]
[5]
Maintenance
4511F2C504DA
4. Remove the screw [6], and remove
the Lower Front Cover [7].
[7]
[6]
4511F2C505DA
5. Pull the lock release lever [8], and
open the Saddle Unit.
6. Remove the screw [9].
[9]
[8]
4511F2C507DA
7. Remove two screws [10], and
remove the Saddle Unit [11].
[11]
[10]
[10]
4511F2C508DA
7
4. Other
4.3.5
SD-502
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Crease Unit
Remove the Saddle Unit.
7
Remove the Elevator Tray.
For details, see FS-508 Service Manual.
Remove the Horizontal Transport Unit.
For details, see FS-508 Service Manual.
4. Remove four screws [1], and remove
the Horizontal Transport Upper
Cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
4349F2C516DA
5. Remove two screws [3], and remove
the Reinforcement Bracket [4].
Maintenance
[3]
[4]
4511F2C509DA
6. Remove two screws [5], and remove
the Horizontal Transport Lower Front
Cover [6].
[5]
[6]
4511F2C510DA
[7]
4511F2C511DA
8
7. Unplug the connector [7].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Other
[8]
8. Remove two screws [8], and remove
the Crease Unit [9].
SD-502
[9]
[8]
4511F2C512DA
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
5.
☞
Stapler Unit
Remove the Saddle Unit.
7
Remove the Paper Output Tray.
5
Remove the Front Cover.
5
Remove the Rear Cover.
6
Remove the Upper Cover.
6
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove
the ground wire [2].
7. Remove two screws [3], and remove
the holder [4].
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511F2C513DA
[6]
[7]
[5]
8. Release the lock release lever [5],
and slide the Saddle Unit Mounting
Plate [6].
9. Remove the shoulder screw [7] and
the washer [8], and remove the Saddle Unit Mounting Plate [6].
[8]
4511F2C515DA
10. Remove the harness clamp [6] from
the Metal Bracket.
[6]
4511F2C516DA
9
Maintenance
4.3.6
4. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[11]
SD-502
[7]
[7]
11. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle.
12. Unplug four connectors [7].
13. Remove the C-ring [8], and remove
the bearing [9].
14. Remove five screws [10], and
remove the Drive Unit [11].
[10] [9]
[8]
[10]
4511F2C517DA
15. Remove the wire saddle [12], and
unplug the connector [13].
[13]
Maintenance
[12]
4511F2C518DA
16. Remove two screws [14] and two
shoulder screws [15].
[15]
[14]
4511F2C519DA
17. Remove the Empty [16].
[16]
4511F2C520DA
18. Unplug all the connectors on the
Main Control Board.
19. Remove the PWB support, and then
remove the Main Control Board [17].
[17]
4511F2C521DA
10
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Other
SD-502
20. Remove the screw [18], and remove
the lock release lever [19].
[19]
[18]
4511F2C522DA
[20]
21. Remove eight screws [20], and
remove the Lower Cover [21].
[20]
[21]
[20]
[20]
22. Remove the wire saddle and unplug
the connector.
23. Remove three screws [22], and
remove the Clincher 1 [23].
[22]
[23]
4511F2C524DA
24. Remove the Staple Cartridge 1 [24].
[24]
4511F2C525DA
[26]
[25]
25. Remove four screws [25], and
remove the Stapler 1 [26].
NOTE
• To replace Clincher 2 and Stapler 2,
repeat steps 22 to 25.
4511F2C526DA
11
Maintenance
4511F2C523DA
SD-502
4. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Precaution for Clincher Reinstallation
• When the Clincher is installed, the position of the Stapler and the Clincher will be
misaligned. Be sure to perform the following adjustment.
1. Use three screws [1] to temporary fix
the Clincher [2].
[1]
[2]
4511F2C550DA
2. Loosen the screw [3] of the stopper.
3. Loosen three screws [4] of the
Clincher.
Maintenance
[4]
[3]
4511F2C551DA
4. Aligning the protrusions of the jig [6]
with the recesses in the Stapler [5],
fit the jig to the Stapler.
NOTE
• Make sure that the protrusions of
the jig properly rest in the recesses.
[6]
[5]
4511F2C552DA
[7]
5. Turn the gear [7] of the Clincher and
then slide the Clincher Assy so that
the protrusion of the Clincher [9] fits
into the recess in the jig [8].
[9]
[8]
4511F2C553DA
12
4. Other
[10]
[10]
6. Tighten six screws [10].
NOTE
• Turn the gear again and check to
see that the protrusion of the
Clincher smoothly fits into the
recess in the jig.
7. Turn the gear and remove the jig.
SD-502
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4511F2C554DA
1.
☞
2.
☞
3.
☞
4.
☞
5.
☞
In & Out Guide Drive Motor
Remove the Saddle Unit.
7
Remove the Paper Output Tray.
5
Remove the Front Cover.
5
Remove the Rear Cover.
6
Remove the Upper Cover.
6
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove
the ground wire [2].
7. Remove two screws [3], and remove
the holder [4].
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511F2C513DA
[6]
[7]
[5]
8. Release the lock release lever [5],
and slide the Saddle Unit Mounting
Plate [6].
9. Remove the shoulder screw [7] and
the washer [8], and remove the Saddle Unit Mounting Plate [6].
[8]
4511F2C515DA
10. Remove the screw [9], and remove
the lock release lever [10].
[10]
[9]
4511F2C527DA
13
Maintenance
4.3.7
4. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
[11]
11. Remove eight screws [11], and
remove the Lower Cover [12].
[11]
SD-502
[12]
[11]
[11]
4511F2C528DA
12. Remove the wire saddle [13], and
unplug two connectors [14].
[13]
[14]
4511F2C529DA
Maintenance
13. Remove the screw [15], and remove
the In & Out Guide Drive Motor Assy
[16].
[16]
[15]
4511F2C530DA
14. Remove two C-rings [17].
15. Remove two bushings [18], and
remove the Clutch Gear Assy [19].
[18]
[17]
[19]
4511F2C531DA
[20]
[20]
[21]
4511F2C532DA
14
16. Remove two screws [20], and
remove the In & Out Guide Drive
Motor [21].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Other
SD-502
Precaution for In & Out Guide Drive Motor Reinstallation
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
1. Press the two In & Out Guides [1] in and check that they touch the stopper [2] simultaneously.
2. Check that pins [4] can be inserted through the positioning holes [3] (3 holes) of the In
& Out Guide Sensor Assy.
3. Use two screws to secure the In & Out Guide Drive Motor.
4.3.8
Crease Roller
1. Remove the Crease Unit.
☞ 8
[1]
2. Remove four screws [1], and remove
the Upper Plate [2].
[2]
[1]
4511F2C534DA
[4]
3. Remove two screws [3], and remove
the guide plate [4].
[3]
4511F2C535DA
15
Maintenance
4511F2C533DA
4. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Remove two screws [5], and remove
the Chopper Assy [6].
SD-502
[6]
[5]
4511F2C536DA
• Install the Chopper Assy in the
direction shown in the left figure.
Rear
Front
4511F2C537DA
Maintenance
5. Remove three C-rings [7], and
remove three gears [8].
[7]
[8]
4511F2C538DA
• Install the gear so that the mark [9]
is aligned to the position shown in
the left figure.
[9]
4511F2C539DA
[10]
[11]
[12]
4511F2C540DA
16
6. Remove three C-rings [10], and
remove two bearings [11].
7. Remove the bushing [12].
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
4. Other
SD-502
8. Remove two screws [13], and
remove the Rear Holder [14].
[14]
[13]
4511F2C541DA
9. Remove the gear [15] of Crease
Roller 1, and remove the Lower
Guide Plate [16].
[16]
[15]
[19]
[18]
[17]
• When installing the gear [17] to the
Lower Guide Plate [18], insert the
gear [17] at an angle and use care
not to break the tabs [19].
• Install the Lower Guide Plate as
shown on the left.
• Install the gear of Crease Roller 1
so that it is above one gear tooth.
4511F2C543DA
10. Remove the screw [20].
11. Remove two C-rings [21], and
remove the Crease Roller A [22],
B [23], and C [24].
[20]
[21]
[22]
[24]
[23]
4511F2C544DA
17
Maintenance
4511F2C542DA
4. Other
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
12. Remove the gear [25] of Crease
Roller 2, and remove the Lower
Guide Plate [26].
SD-502
[26]
[25]
4511F2C545DA
[29]
[28]
Maintenance
[27]
NOTE
• When installing the gear [27] to the
Lower Guide Plate [28], insert the
gear [27] at an angle and use care
not to break the tabs [29].
• Install the Lower Guide Plate as
shown on the left.
4511F2C547DA
13. Remove the screw [30].
14. Remove two C-rings [31], and
remove the Crease Roller A [32],
B [33], and C [34].
[30]
[31]
[32]
[34]
[33]
4511F2C548DA
<Rear>
[35]
<Front>
[36]
4511F2C549DA
18
Precaution for Roller 1 and 2 Reinstallation
• Install the rear gear [35] of Crease
Roller 2 so that it is above one gear
tooth.
• Align the mark [36] of the front gear.
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
5. How to use the adjustment section
5.
How to use the adjustment section
• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine.
• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.
SD-502
Adjustment/Setting
Advance Checks
Before attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be
made. Check to see if:
CAUTION
• To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures.
• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use
utmost care not to be caught in the Scanner Cables or gears of the Exposure Unit.
• Special care should be used when handling the Fusing Unit which can be
extremely hot.
• The Developing Unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring
instruments away from it.
• Take care not to damage the PC Drum with a tool or similar device.
• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.
19
Adjustment / Setting
• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.
• The power supply is properly grounded.
• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current
intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).
• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,
direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.
• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.
• The density is properly selected.
• The Original Glass, slit glass, or related part is dirty.
• Correct paper is being used for printing.
• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC Drum, etc.) are properly
replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.
• Toner is not running out.
6. I/O Check
SD-502
6.
6.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
I/O Check
Check procedure
• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on
the board can be checked on the panel with the main unit in the standby state (including
a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).
<Procedure>
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Touch [I/O Check].
3. Touch [Finisher].
4. Touch [Fwd] two times.
6.2
6.2.1
I/O check list
I/O check screen
Adjustment / Setting
• This is only typical screen which may be different from what are shown on each individual main unit.
4511F3E512DA
20
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
6.2.2
6. I/O Check
I/O check list
Panel display
Part/Signal name
Operation characteristics/
Panel display
1
0
Paper not
present
Exit (Saddle)
Saddle Exit Sensor
PC21-SK
Saddle Empty
Saddle Tray Empty Sensor
Paper
present
Paper not
present
S4-SK
Saddle Reset
Saddle Interlock Switch
Open
Closed
-
Staple Home 1
(Saddle)
Staple Home Position Sensor 1
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Self Priming 1
(Saddle)
Self-Priming Sensor 1
Blocked
Unblocked
Staple Empty 1
(Saddle)
Staple Empty Detection Sensor 1
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Staple Home 2
(Saddle)
Staple Home Position Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Self Priming 2
(Saddle)
Self-Priming Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Staple Empty 2
(Saddle)
Staple Empty Detection Sensor 2
Blocked
Unblocked
-
Finisher
PC20-SK
Paper
present
PC23-SK
Home (Saddle In &
In & Out Guide Home Sensor
Out Guide)
Blocked
Unblocked
PC26-SK
Layable Guide
Home (Saddle)
Blocked
Unblocked
Layable Guide Home Sensor
21
Adjustment / Setting
Symbol
SD-502
A. Finisher (SD-502)
7. Test mode
SD-502
7.
7.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Test mode
Entering Function Mode
1. Display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen.
☞ For details of how to display the Tech. Rep. Mode screen, see the Adjustment/Setting
of the main unit service manual.
2. Touch [Function].
4349F2E541DA
3. Touch [FC].
4349F2E542DA
Adjustment / Setting
4. Touch [8] or [9].
4349F3E520DA
7.2
Function Modes
8: Creasing Unit movement mode
• Performs the creasing drive once.
→ Raises the Layable guide.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ Lowers the Layable guide.
→ The operation is finished.
9: Saddle Unit exit open/close mode
• Opens the Saddle Exit after the Saddle Exit is opened and closed.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ The Saddle Exit closes.
→ The Saddle In & Out Guide advances.
→ Stops after the predetermined time.
→ The Saddle In & Out Guide retracts.
→ The operation is finished.
22
8. Mechanical adjustment
8.
Mechanical adjustment
8.1
Fold Angle Adjustment
SD-502
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Crease Unit has been replaced.
• When a slant occurs in the crease.
1. Enter the Crease mode and make a copy. (A3 Size)
Center
[1]
Exit direction
4511F3C501DA
[2]
4511F3C502DA
2. Fold the output paper along the
crease [1].
3. Fold the output paper and half and
measure the width A of the paper.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
4. If the fold position is slanted as
shown on the left, make the following
adjustment.
5. Open the Front Door, loosen the
adjustment screw [2], and move the
Crease Unit to the left to make the
adjustment.
Graduated in 1-mm divisions
• If the fold position is slanted opposite
to the figure of step 4, move the
Crease Unit to the right to make the
adjustment.
6. Make another copy and check the fold position.
23
Adjustment / Setting
A
8. Mechanical adjustment
SD-502
8.2
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Fold Position Adjustment
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Crease Unit has been replaced.
• When a deviation occurs in the crease.
• When fold angle adjustment has been made.
1. Enter the Booklet + Crease mode and make a copy. (A3 Size)
2. Press the Utility/Counter key, and
touch [User’s Choice].
3. Touch the [5/6] tab.
4. Touch [Crease/Center Staple].
4511F3E513DA
5. Select [A3] and touch [Enter].
6. Touch [Crease].
7. Check the copy of step 1 and make
the following adjustment.
Adjustment / Setting
4511F3E514DA
A
Exit direction
4511F3C505DA
B
Exit direction
4511F3C506DA
12. Touch [Enter].
13. Make another copy, and check the deviation.
24
If the fold is offset as shown on the
left.
8. Fold the copy along the crease and
measure width A.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
9. Touch [▲] and set the appropriate
numeric value.
Adjustment range: 0 to +10
(1 increment 0.5 mm)
If the fold is offset as shown on the
left.
10. Fold the copy along the crease and
measure width B.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
11. Touch [▼] and set the appropriate
numeric value.
Adjustment range: 0 to -10
(1 increment 0.5 mm)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
8.3
8. Mechanical adjustment
Center Staple Angle Adjustment
1. Set to Booklet + 2-point Staple and
Crease mode and make a copy.
Measure the width A of the paper.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
2. If the staple position is slanted as
shown on the left, make the following
adjustment.
A
Exit direction
SD-502
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When Staple Unit 1 or 2 has been replaced.
• When a slant occurs in the position of the center staple.
4511F3C507DA
[2]
[1]
4511F3C508DA
3. Release the lock release lever [1] of
the Saddle Unit.
4. Loosen the adjustment screw [2] and
move the lock lever to the left to
make the adjustment.
• If the staple position is slanted opposite to the figure of step 2, move the
lock lever to the right to make the
adjustment.
Adjustment / Setting
5. Make another copy and check the staple position.
25
8. Mechanical adjustment
SD-502
8.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Center Staple Position Adjustment
NOTE
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When Staple Unit 1 or 2 has been replaced.
• When center staple position is misaligned.
• When center staple angle adjustment has been made.
1. Make a copy in the Center Staple mode. (A3 Size)
2. Press the Utility/Counter key, and
touch [User’s Choice].
3. Touch the [5/6] tab.
4. Touch [Crease/Center Staple].
4511F3E513DA
5. Select [A3] and touch [Enter].
6. Touch [Center Staple].
7. Check the copy of step 1 and make
the following adjustment.
Adjustment / Setting
4511F3E515DA
A
Exit direction
4511F3C510DA
B
Exit direction
4511F3C511DA
12. Touch [Enter].
13. Make another copy, and check the deviation.
26
If the staple position is offset as
shown on the left
8. Fold the copy in half at the center
and measure width A.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
9. Touch [▲] and set the appropriate
numeric value.
Adjustment range: 0 to +10
(1 increment 0.5 mm)
If the staple position is offset as
shown on the left
10. Fold the copy in half at the center
and measure width B.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
11. Touch [▼] and set the appropriate
numeric value.
Adjustment range: 0 to -10
(1 increment 0.5 mm)
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9. Jam Display
Troubleshooting
Jam Display
9.1
SD-502
9.
Misfeed Display
• When a paper misfeed occurs, the misfeed message, misfeed location, and paper location are displayed on the Touch Panel of the machine.
[1]
4511F4E502DA
Display
[1]
9.2
Misfeed Location
Misfeed processing location
Creasing Section Misfeed
Front Door
Staple Unit Misfeed
Front Door
Paper Bundle Exit Misfeed
Front Door
Action
☞ 28
☞ 29
☞ 30
Sensor layout
Troubleshooting
[2]
[1]
4511F4C501DA
[1]
Saddle Exit Sensor
PC20-SK
[2]
Transport Sensor
PC5-FN
27
9. Jam Display
SD-502
9.3
9.3.1
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Solution
Initial Check Items
• When a paper misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items
Check Item
Action
Does paper meet product specifications?
Change paper.
Is paper curled, wavy, or damp.
Change paper.
Instruct user in correct paper storage.
Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or
is the paper path deformed or worn?
Clean or change the paper path.
Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn?
Clean or change the defective roll/roller.
Are the Edge Guide and Trailing Edge Stop at correct position to accommodate paper?
Set as necessary.
Are actuators found operational as checked for corCorrect or change the defective actuator.
rect operation?
9.3.2
Creasing Section Misfeed
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not blocked even after the set period of
time has elapsed after the Entrance Motor (M3-FN) is energized (beginning
of backward rotation operation).
Creasing Section
misfeed detection
The Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN) is not unblocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Entrance Motor (M3-FN) is energized (beginning of forward rotation operation).
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Troubleshooting
Entrance Motor (M3-FN)
Entrance Sensor (PC4-FN)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
28
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC4-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ25A FN-4 (ON)
FS-508 B-6
3
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
9.3.3
9. Jam Display
Staple Unit Misfeed
Type
Description
The Staple Home Position Sensor in the Staple Unit is not blocked even
after the set period of time has elapsed after the Staple Motor rotates forward, and then the Staple Motor rotates backward, and the Staple Home
Position Sensor in the Staple Unit is blocked within the set period of time.
Staple Unit misfeed
detection
SD-502
A. Detection Timing
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Staple Unit 1
Staple Unit 2
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
-
1
Initial check items
-
2
Drive Coupling Section check
-
-
3
I/O Check
-
-
4
Change Staple Unit 1
-
-
5
Change Staple Unit 2
-
-
6
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
29
9. Jam Display
9.3.4
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
Paper Bundle Exit Misfeed
SD-502
A. Detection Timing
Type
Description
The Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN) is not unblocked even after
the set period of time has elapsed after the Exit Motor (M1-FN) is energized.
Paper Bundle misfeed
detection
The Saddle Exit Sensor (PC20-SK) is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after the Exit Motor (M1-FN) is energized.
The Saddle Exit Sensor (PC20-SK) is not unblocked even after the set
period of time has elapsed after the Saddle Exit Sensor (PC20-SK) is
blocked.
B. Action
Relevant Electrical Parts
Exit Motor (M1-FN)
Saddle Exit Motor (M8-SK)
Storage Tray Detecting Sensor (PC8-FN)
Saddle Exit Sensor (PC20-SK)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
30
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Initial check items
-
-
2
PC8-FN I/O check
PWB-A FN PJ13A FN-8 (ON)
FS-508 G-8
3
PC20-SK I/O check
PWB-C SK PJ19C SK-8 (ON)
SD-502 B-4
4
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
10. Malfunction code
10.1 Trouble code
• The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction,
gives the corresponding malfunction code and maintenance call mark on the Touch
Panel.
Item
Description
C11A2
Saddle Exit Roller
Pressure/Retraction
Failure
• The Saddle Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC18-SK) is
not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Saddle Exit Open/Close Motor (M9-SK) is energized
(beginning of pressure operation).
• The Saddle Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC18-SK) is
not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed
after the Saddle Exit Open/Close Motor (M9-SK) is energized
(beginning of retraction operation).
C11A4
Saddle Exit Motor Failure
The Lock signal is detected after the set period of time has
elapsed after the Saddle Exit Motor (M8-SK) is energized.
Saddle In & Out Guide
Motor Failure
• The In & Out Guide Home Sensor (PC23-SK) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the In & Out Guide Motor (M13-SK) is energized (beginning of
advancing operation).
• The In & Out Guide Home Sensor (PC23-SK) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the In & Out Guide Motor (M13-SK) is energized (beginning of
retracting operation).
C11A6
Saddle Layable Guide
Drive Failure
• The Layable Guide Home Sensor (PC26-SK) is not blocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Layable
Guide Motor (M14-SK) is energized (beginning of return operation to predetermined position).
• The Layable Guide Home Sensor (PC26-SK) is not unblocked
even after the set period of time has elapsed after the Layable
Guide Motor (M14-SK) is energized (beginning of return operation to predetermined position).
C11B5
Side Staple 1 Drive
Failure
Home Position Sensor 1 is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after Saddle Staple Motor 1 is energized
(beginning of staple operation).
C11B6
Side Staple 2 Drive
Failure
Home Position Sensor 2 is not blocked even after the set period
of time has elapsed after Saddle Staple Motor 2 is energized
(beginning of staple operation).
Crease Motor Drive
Failure
• The Crease Roller Home Position Sensor (PC22-SK) is not
unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after
the Crease Motor (M10-SK) is energized (beginning of backward rotation operation).
• The Crease Roller Home Position Sensor (PC22-SK) is not
blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the
Crease Motor (M10-SK) is energized (beginning of forward
rotation operation).
C11A5
C11D0
31
Troubleshooting
Code
SD-502
10. Malfunction code
10. Malfunction code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
SD-502
10.2 Solution
10.2.1
C11A2: Saddle Exit Roller Pressure/Retraction Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Saddle Exit Open/Close Motor (M9-SK)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
Saddle Exit Roller Home Position Sensor (PC18-SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M9-SK connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M9-SK for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M9-SK operation check
PWB-C SK PJ4C SK-6 to 7
SD-502 H-6
4
PC18-SK I/O check
PWB-C SK PJ9C SK-6 (ON)
SD-502 B-3
5
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
10.2.2
C11A4: Saddle Exit Motor Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Saddle Exit Motor (M8-SK)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
32
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M8-SK connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M8-SK for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M8-SK operation check
PWB-C SK PJ4C SK-6 to 7
SD-502 H-6
4
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C11A5: Saddle In & Out Guide Motor Failure
SD-502
10.2.3
10. Malfunction code
Relevant Electrical Parts
In & Out Guide Motor (M13-SK)
In & Out Guide Home Sensor (PC23-SK)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M13-SK connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M13-SK for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M13-SK operation check
PWB-C SK PJ4C SK-4 to 5
SD-502 H-6
4
PC23-SK I/O check
PWB-C SK PJ10C SK-3 (ON)
SD-502 B-4
5
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
10.2.4
C11A6: Saddle Layable Guide Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Layable Guide Motor (M14-SK)
Layable Guide Home Sensor (PC26-SK)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M14-SK connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M14-SK for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M14-SK operation check
PWB-C SK PJ4C SK-8 to 9
SD-502 H-6
4
PC26-SK I/O check
PWB-C SK PJ10C SK-6 (ON)
SD-502 B-4
5
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
Troubleshooting
Step
33
10. Malfunction code
Field Service Ver. 1.0 Aug. 2005
C11B5: Side Staple 1 Drive Failure
10.2.6
C11B6: Side Staple 2 Drive Failure
SD-502
10.2.5
Relevant Electrical Parts
Staple Unit 1
Staple Unit 2
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Step
Action
1
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
Check the Staple Unit 1 and 2 connectors for proper connection and
correct as necessary.
-
-
2
Check Staple Units 1 and 2 for
proper drive coupling, and correct
as necessary.
-
-
3
Staple Units 1 and 2 operation
check
-
-
4
Change Staple Units 1 and 2
-
-
5
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
10.2.7
C11D0: Crease Motor Drive Failure
Relevant Electrical Parts
Crease Motor (M10-SK)
Crease Roller Home Position Sensor (PC22-SK)
Main Control Board (PWB-C SK)
WIRING DIAGRAM
Troubleshooting
Step
34
Action
Control Signal
Location
(Electrical Component)
1
Check the M10-SK connector for
proper connection and correct as
necessary.
-
-
2
Check M10-SK for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.
-
-
3
M10-SK operation check
PWB-C SK PJ3C SK-1 to 2
SD-502 D-7
4
PC22-SK I/O check
PWB-C SK PJ2C SK-3 (ON)
SD-502 D-7
5
Change PWB-C SK
-
-
SERVICE MANUAL
FIELD SERVICE
FIELD SERVICE
The
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to
avoid disclosure of confidential information.
Printed in Japan
DD4040PE1-1050
2005.08 Ver.1.0
© 2005 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
is available only for North America.
2005.08
Ver. 1.0